Moving a refrigerator is never an easy task. It's a heavy, bulky appliance that requires careful planning and execution to make it to your new location unscathed.
Unfortunately, without proper preparation and technique, it's too easy to injure yourself or damage the fridge.
In this article, we'll provide tips and tricks for moving your fridge safely and effectively without causing any harm to both you and the appliance.
Whether moving across town or rearranging your kitchen, these guidelines will help you plan and navigate the process easily and confidently.
So, let's start moving a refrigerator without hurting you and the refrigerator.
Disconnecting and draining water lines is important when moving a refrigerator, especially if it has a built-in ice dispenser or ice maker.
Failure to properly disconnect and drain these cooling lines can result in leaks or damage to the fridge's cooling system and water dispenser.
Before disconnecting any water lines, turn off the water supply to your fridge. This will prevent any water from continuing to flow into the lines while you work.
Once the water supply is turned off, you can disconnect the water lines. Be sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions carefully or hire professional movers to do it for you.
After the water lines are disconnected, you must drain any remaining water from the lines. This can be done by allowing the lines to drain naturally into a bucket or container.
Once the cooling mechanism is drained, you should secure them to the back of the fridge to prevent them from getting damaged during the move. Packing tape should be suitable for this.
You should also properly strap the power cord to the back of the fridge. You wouldn't want someone tripping on a loose power cord while moving the refrigerator.
If you disconnect and drain the water line, moisture or condensation may still be inside these heavy appliances.
If items are inside the fridge, they may shift or spill during the entire move, resulting in a mess that can be difficult to clean up.
This is also a safety measure as it can be dangerous when the doors open and food spills out in bulk.
Additionally, depending on how long the move takes, food left inside the refrigerator can spoil or become unsafe to eat and may even affect the overall quality and taste of the food.
Keep your food and other items in the refrigerator in suitable containers. Getting a great mini freezer will do wonders in this situation!
Refrigerators are large appliances that are difficult to move, especially when fully stocked with food and beverages.
Emptying the fridge will reduce weight and make moving a refrigerator through a tight space easier.
3. Let the Refrigerator Defrost Completely
When moving your fridge, it is important to let it defrost. This is because a fridge contains refrigerant, a gas circulated through the fridge's cooling system.
When the kitchen appliance is in use, this gas constantly circulates and absorbs heat around the refrigerator's interior, having complete control over keeping the contents cool.
However, when the fridge is turned off, the refrigerant stops circulating, and the cold air begins to warm up.
This can cause condensation on the fridge's interior surfaces, including the evaporator coils, the walls, the fridge doors, and the shelves. If your ice packs melt, you can get thebest ice pack for coolers here!
If the fridge is moved while it is still frosty or wet, this moisture can freeze and cause damage to the interior components of the fridge, such as the evaporator coils or the compressor.
The quickest approach to defrost any freezer is to use hot water or a hair dryer to melt the ice and then blot the residual water with towels.
4. Clean the Refrigerator
Cleaning your fridge before moving is important to ensure it is transported safely and remains in good condition.
Over time, spills and food residues can accumulate in your fridge. If not cleaned out before moving, they can smell and attract pests during transportation.
If your fridge has been turned off for a while, mold, and mildew can accumulate. This can happen in areas where moisture has accumulated, such as the fridge door.
Use cleaning supplies like baking soda to clean the interior of this kitchen appliance. A cleaning mixture of baking soda and water should be enough.
Make sure the heavy fridge is completely dry before moving. Moisture can make mold and mildew growth within the fridge interior, making cleaning useless.
Removing any loose parts when moving your refrigerator is important because they can become damaged or cause damage during the move.
Loose parts such as shelves, drawers, and bins can shift and slide inside the refrigerator during transportation, potentially causing scratches, dents, or other damage.
Additionally, if these loose parts are not secured properly, they can fall out and break while moving a refrigerator.
Furthermore, if the loose parts are not removed, they can also affect the stability of the refrigerator during transportation.
The shifting weight of loose items within the kitchen appliance can make the fridge tilted, which can be dangerous for the people moving it and the moving vehicle.
Moving a fridge can be challenging, but having the right equipment can make it much easier and safer. Here are some essential items you'll need when moving a refrigerator:
Moving Dolly: A moving dolly or an appliance dolly is a handy tool that can be used to move a refrigerator in an upright position. Just slide the dolly underneath the fridge.
Furniture Straps: Furniture straps, also known as ratchet straps or moving straps, are used to secure your fridge while moving it. You can also use bungee cords.
Moving Blankets: Moving blankets or furniture blankets can be used to protect your fridge during transport. Make sure it is pressed tightly to the refrigerator.
Other Lighter Materials: You can also use other materials to protect it, like packing paper or bubble wrap. Make sure to wrap the fridge front to back.
Gloves: Wearing gloves will help protect your hands and improve your grip on the fridge and other moving equipment.
Cleaning Supplies: Once you've moved your fridge to its new location, you must clean it before plugging it back in. So, make sure you have some cleaning supplies handy.
You can help ensure your fridge is moved safely and securely by assembling these items.
Trying to move a refrigerator can be dangerous if not done properly. Planning the trip and ensuring the fridge is properly secured can help prevent accidents and injuries.
Moving a fridge can damage the bulky appliance if not done properly. Planning the trip, measuring the fridge, and using bubble wrap can help prevent scratches and dents.
Planning the route can also help you avoid traffic congestion, narrow roads, steep hills, or other obstacles that could slow the process.
Moving Downstairs
When you move a refrigerator downstairs, planning your trip can help make the process smoother and safer. Here are some tips:
Measure the dimensions: Before moving it, measure its dimensions to make sure the entire length of the fridge will fit through any doorways, hallways, or stairwells.
Plan the route: Plan your route to ensure no obstacles or hazards that could make it difficult to move the fridge downstairs.
Clear the path: Clear the path of any obstacles or items that could interfere. This includes removing furniture, rugs, or other items that could make it difficult.
Use proper equipment: An appliance dolly would be useful if you have an elevator. If there are stairs, you may want to enlist furniture straps instead.
Enlist help: Moving a fridge Downstairs can be difficult and potentially dangerous, so enlisting help from others is important. Consider hiring professional movers.
By planning your trip and taking these steps, you can help ensure that your fridge is moved safely and securely downstairs without causing any damage or injuries.
Locking the refrigerator doors is crucial when trying to move a refrigerator.
Without proper locking, the doors can swing open during transport, causing damage to the appliance or surrounding area.
First, check the owner's manual for specific instructions on how to secure the doors. Most fridges have built-in locks or other mechanisms that can be used to secure the doors.
If your fridge does not have built-in locks, use locking straps or ropes to secure the doors. These straps can be looped around the handles and tightened to keep the doors in place.
Ensure the straps are tight enough to keep the doors closed but not so tight that they cause damage to the seals. A strapped fridge is easier to move than an unstrapped one.
Trying to move a refrigerator can be a heavy task, and taking steps to prevent floor damage during the process is important.
First, prepare the area around the appliance by clearing away any obstacles or debris that could cause tripping hazards or damage to your floors.
Cover the floors with cardboard, blankets, or other protective materials to create a buffer between the fridge and the surface of your floors.
Next, use an appliance dolly or hand truck to move the fridge instead of dragging it across the floor. Make sure the wheels of the appliance dolly or hand truck are clean and free from debris.
If you need to pivot the fridge slightly during the move, place furniture sliders under it. Furniture sliders reduce the risk of damaging your floors.
10. Slide the Appliance Dolly Underneath the Refrigerator
Using an appliance dolly can make moving a refrigerator easier and safer.
First, position the appliance dolly next to the refrigerator to parallel the two. The bottom of the refrigerator is touching the top of the dolly.
Now, tilt the refrigerator slightly and lift it off the ground. At the same time, slide the moving dolly underneath the fridge, ensuring the fridge rests on top of the dolly.
Once the fridge is securely on the dolly, use moving straps to secure it in place. Ensure the straps are tight enough to keep the fridge from shifting during transport.
When using a loaded moving dolly, make sure to keep the refrigerator balanced on the rubber wheels of the refrigerator dolly. The main idea is to avoid tilting the fridge forward.
11. Bring It to the Moving Truck
Ensure you have a clear path from the refrigerator to the pickup truck. Remove any obstacles or furniture that could get in the way or cause damage during the move.
Carefully maneuver the fridge on the dolly towards the truck. Hiring movers from your local moving company can help as they are professionals at moving appliances to the rental truck
When you reach the truck, position the dolly so that it is parallel to the truck's loading ramp. Tilt the fridge back and push it up the ramp, using your legs to lift it and your arms to guide it.
Once the refrigerator is on the moving truck, use straps or rope to secure it. Keep the fridge straight so it cannot shift or slide during transport.
Finally, cover the refrigerator with a protective blanket or tarp to prevent damage during transport. Secure the cover with tape or straps to keep it in place.
12. Be Patient
Moving a fridge can be a time-consuming and physically demanding task. It's important to be patient and take time to ensure the move goes smoothly and safely.
Give yourself plenty of time to prepare for the move. Make a plan, gather the necessary tools and supplies, and enlist the help of friends or professional movers if necessary.
Next, take breaks when you need them. Moving a refrigerator can be tiring, and caring for yourself is important to avoid injury or exhaustion.
If you encounter any obstacles or challenges during the move, take a deep breath and stay calm. Consider your options, and don't hesitate to ask for help or take a different approach.
Finally, be patient with yourself and others involved in the move. Moving a fridge can be stressful, but staying patient and positive can help make the process smoother.
However, if you believe it is time to change refrigerators, you can check out thebest refrigerators to get!
How To Move A Refrigerator Related FAQs
Do you have more questions on how to move your refrigerator? Here are our most frequently asked questions!
Do Modern Fridges Need to Settle Before Turning on Again?
Let a recently moved refrigerator stay upright for 2-4 hours before plugging it on to allow the compressor oil to return to its proper place.
If you know the unit was moved on its side, give it 24 hours and then cross your fingers.
Does the Fridge Need to Be in an Upright Position When Moving?
Yes, it is important to keep the refrigerator in an upright position when in the moving truck. This is because the fridge contains delicate components, which can be easily damaged.
Additionally, moving the kitchen appliance upright makes it easier to load and unload, reduces the risk of injury, and prevents damage to floors and walls.
How Long Will the Defrosting Process Take?
The defrosting process for a fridge can vary depending on the size and model and the level of frost buildup inside.
In general, defrosting a refrigerator can take anywhere from several hours to a full day. Turning off the fridge and unplugging it before defrosting is important to prevent damage.
To speed up defrosting, you can place towels or a tray under the refrigerator to collect water, use a hair dryer on low heat to melt the ice or place bowls of hot water inside the refrigerator.
Once the defrosting process is complete, wipe down the interior with a clean, damp cloth and allow the fridge to dry completely before moving it.
In conclusion, trying to move a refrigerator can be challenging, but it can be done safely and efficiently with proper planning, the right tools, and patience.
It is important to follow the steps to ensure that the fridge is protected during the move, including locking the doors, protecting the floors, and using a dolly to move the fridge.
It is also essential to keep the fridge upright to prevent damage to its internal components.
Following these tips, you can transport your refrigerator to its new location without any issues and ensure it remains in good working condition.
Many homeowners are looking for ways to save money and preserve energy now that the season is changing and people are preparing for the cold winter.
Sadly, many homeowners fail to think about how to increase the effectiveness of their refrigerators or even their spare freezers.
The good news is that there are several ways to boost your refrigerator's efficiency, which are simple and affordable.
Let's look at twelve ways each homeowner can raise the refrigerator's energy efficiency.
12 Steps on How to Increase Your Refrigerator's Efficiency
Your food won't deteriorate at 37 degrees Fahrenheit in the fridge and 0 degrees Fahrenheit in the freezer without costing you extra money.
Place a thermometer in a glass of water and examine the reading the next day to determine the refrigerator's air temperature.
Place a thermometer between two frozen goods in your freezer to check the temperature, and then recheck it eight hours later.
A small increase in the temperature settings of your appliance, as you would with your air conditioner, can result in significant reductions in your utility bill.
Regularly defrosting your manual or partially automatic fridge is especially important if you don't have air conditioning and live in a warm, humid region.
Did you know a refrigerator uses between 14 and 20 percent more power when an automatic ice maker is present? That's insane!
If your existing refrigerator has this function, you might want to disable it and switch back to using ice cube trays. Visit this page to see the best mini freezers.
3. Deactivate the Anti-sweat Heater
In addition to cooling your food, refrigerators provide an anti-sweat feature that heats the space surrounding the door seal to prevent moisture.
A valve that allows you to switch between an energy-saver mode and a mode that reduces outside moisture is frequently seen in refrigerators made after 1993.
What's the difference? When your refrigerator is set to the outer moisture-reducing mode, a heater will turn on to keep condensation from forming on the outside of the appliance.
When it is set to the energy-saving mode, it won't—saving you between 5 and 10 percent of electricity. How to choose a refrigerator is explained here.
Note
New refrigerators may offer automated moisture control, which reduces external condensation without needing a heater. A newer refrigerator is more energy-efficient than an older model.
Cereal boxes and other clutter should not be placed on your refrigerator because they may block heat from escaping and make the compressor work harder.
Your refrigerator's gasket must be changed or replaced if you can easily remove it to prevent the chill from escaping.
Even though your appliance's efficiency and smooth operation depend on its vital plastic coating, it can occasionally be missed.
As the doors are repeatedly opened and shut over time, gaskets frequently deteriorate and lose some suction.
While a fridge can run effectively for many years, a gasket is more likely to deteriorate or tear after just a few years of operation.
Place a dollar bill between the fridge door and the door seal to test the seal. Do this several times along the door edge.
It's time to change your seals, which keep the temperature stay cool and reduce energy use if the dollar bill moves easily.
6. Clean the Condenser Coils
For the compressor to operate at its best, keep the refrigerator coils clean several times a year. Make it a monthly duty if you have fuzzy pets in your home.
It becomes challenging to continue running as efficiently as they were intended if it's on the back or bottom of your appliance starts to grow dirty.
If you don't clean the coils, dirt, and dust can build up, which forces the fridge to work harder and can cause damage to the unit.
The increased energy consumption caused by them operating twice as hard as they should cause issues for your appliance.
Invest in a cheap bristle brush to remove accumulated debris over the years to ensure your well-cleansed coils. Vacuum or carefully brush the coils.
You might need to clean the coils more often if you have pets or an extra dusty house.
7. Relocate Your Refrigerator Far From Any Heat Sources
Do not put your refrigerator next to a heat vent, an oven, or direct sunlight. Additionally, please keep it away from windows.
The extra heat will make it run more frequently, raising your electric bill and shortening the lifespan of your refrigerator.
The compressor works harder to maintain your meal at the perfect temperature when it is close to heat sources.
This not only makes your fridge work harder, but it also quickly consumes electricity and could shorten the fridge's lifespan.
8. Keep Your Fridge Organized
For all the foods you usually purchase, try to designate different locations so everyone in your household knows where to look for things.
Think about making a freezer inventory sheet that you can put on the door to minimize the time the freezer door open.
Reduce the number of items on your refrigerator's top shelf, particularly large bread products, food boxes, or serving dishes.
Your most frequently used things should be stored in this prominent refrigerator space. The quicker the door closes, the simpler they are to grasp.
Open beverage and food items in the refrigerator cause the interior moisture levels to rise, causing the compressor to perform more difficulty.
You may avoid food contamination by teaching your family to cover everything before it goes in.
10. Keep the Fridge Stocked
Maintaining the room temperature in a full refrigerator requires less effort. Just make sure that your refrigerator isn't too crowded and that it restricts the air flow within.
11. Make Room for Good Air Circulation
Refrigerators need room to have good air circulation. Place the back of your refrigerator at least two inches from the wall to allow heat to escape from the condenser coils.
Your refrigerator will need to run more frequently due to trapped heat.
12. Maintain the Doors Locked to Prevent Cold Air From Escaping
It doesn't matter what kind of refrigerator you have; this is the easiest and least expensive approach to reducing energy usage.
Standing in front of an open refrigerator will cost you a lot of money.
Your appliance needs more energy to reach its desired temperature when the cold air leaves, increasing the power cost. If possible, decide before opening the freezer or refrigerator doors.
Making choices before opening your fridge will help you reduce how frequently you do so each day, which will help you with energy savings in your house.
Why Is It Important to Have Good Refrigerator Efficiency?
Because they use power-intensive home appliances, families remain one of modern society's biggest sources of dangerous greenhouse gases.
Because of this, it may be ideal to utilize modern innovation to lower carbon footprint emissions by adopting energy-efficient instruments.
Being a homeowner, you need more energy-efficient appliances to improve your lifestyle, save energy and money, and protect the environment.
As a result, using other efficient appliances will reduce your power costs while preserving the environment from dangerous gases like carbon dioxide.
These tools could benefit you, your nation, and the entire world.
Tip
If you're shopping for a new fridge or other appliances, reading the EnergyGuide label will help you compare the energy efficiency of each model.
Increasing Refrigerator Efficiency FAQs
The most frequent inquiries about how to make your old refrigerator more effective are listed below:
Are Refrigerators More Efficient When Full?
It’s great that you want to maintain your fridge running smoothly, but it doesn’t matter how much food you keep inside. Even a fully stocked refrigerator uses power.
What Makes a Refrigerator Have Good Energy Efficiency?
High-performance components comprised in an Energy Star fridge include:
High-efficiency compressors that use less energy and produce less heat
Enhanced insulation that keeps food cool
Temperature and defrost systems that make the refrigerator run more smoothly
Because practically every household has at least one fridge that operates continuously, a fridge is often the top power consumer in many families.
Even though you may have to keep your refrigerator and freezer running constantly, you can still reduce the power it uses.
Also, it is undoubtedly one of the best things you can do to combat climate change, given the rising average number of houses that emit pollution and other hazardous chemicals.
It might be an easy method to protect Mother Earth for future generations.
To paint on Yupo papers, you need paints, brushes, water, and masking tape. Before you begin painting, it is crucial that you clean your paper and then prime it (optional). There are various techniques that you can use to apply watercolor on Yupo paper, such as pouring and dripping, blending and brushwork, and stenciling and stamping.
If you have ever tried painting methods such as acrylic painting, you must know that the traditional watercolor paper doesn’t do justice to them. Yupo paper is considered to be a great alternative for such techniques of creating art.
The polypropylene fibers of this paper create a smooth and non-porous surface. This finish is ideal for watercolor painting because it allows the paint to sit on top of the paper instead of getting absorbed in it. As a result, you can create more vibrant art pieces using Yupo papers.
In this blog post, we will be taking a look at how you can apply watercolor on Yupo paper easily. We will also discuss the various techniques and materials involved in this process. Let us begin!
It does not take rocket science to guess the first and the most important material required for Yupo painting - Yupo papers! The non-absorbent surface allows the painter to create a variety of effects using different colors. Moreover, the tree-free paper is available in a range of thicknesses and sizes, and you can choose one according to your preferences.
2. Watercolor Paint
Although you can paint on Yupo papers with a variety of mediums like acrylic paint and alcohol-based ink, it works best with watercolor paint. You should ensure that the set of watercolor paints that you choose to go for are of high quality so that they work well with Yupo papers.
3. Brushes
You will require a variety of decent-quality brushes to blend the watercolor on Yupo paper. There are several round, flat, and thin brushes easily available on the market. Hence, you can buy one according to your landscape painting requirements.
4. Palette
Artists need a good-quality watercolor palette to mix their watercolors. Ideally, you should choose plastic or ceramic palettes that have a decent number of wells. Further, it is best if you go for the light-colored options because they help you stay closer to creating precise shades of colors.
5. Water
Every watercolor artist is aware of the importance of water while making a watercolor painting - and this case is no exception. Ensure that you have a jar of clean water by your side to clean your brushes and avoid any form of muddiness.
Additionally, water helps artists dilute the intensity of pigmentation on their brush. Hence, if you want to create a lighter hue on your Yupo paper, you should have a mug of water by your side to dip your brush in!
6. Masking Tape
It is best to use masking tape around your Yupo paper and secure it to your board. This will help you keep your painting surface still in a comfortable position while you create beautiful art on it.
How To Prepare For Yupo Paper Painting?
Yupo paper is synthetic, and hence, you need to prepare it before you begin working on it. Here are two steps that you need to follow to prepare your Yupo paper:
Preparing The Yupo Paper For Painting
1. Cleaning The Surface
You must use a clean surface for painting. The Yupo paper should not have any dust or dirt accumulation on its surface, which is why it is advised to clean it before using it. Use a soft dry brush or a lint-free cloth to gently clean the paper.
2. Priming The Surface
The next step in preparing your Yupo paper is priming its surface. However, the method of priming that you choose to go for depends on what kind of paint you will be painting with. Some of the most common types are listed as follows along with how you can prime your Yupo paper accordingly:
A. Watercolors
Take equal parts of water and rubbing alcohol and mix them. Transfer the mixture solution to a spray bottle and spray a layer of the mix over the surface of your Yupo paper. Ensure that the paper is not saturated in the solution, or else it might warp. Let it dry before you begin painting.
B. Acrylics
If you want to paint with acrylics, you should prime the Yupo paper using acrylic medium and water. Mix one part acrylic medium with three parts water. Dip a brush in this solution and give the paper a quick wash. And let it dry.
C. Oils
Before using oil pastel or paints, it is best to prime the sheet’s surface with an oil-based primer first. It will create a stable surface, which is much easier to paint on. Simply apply the primer on the paper using a brush (or a roller). Let it dry completely, and then begin oil painting!
Tips For Priming The Yupo Paper
While priming the surface of Yupo paper is not a difficult task, there are a few tips that you should keep in mind. Doing so will help you prevent any wear and tear to your paper, and help you bring out the best priming results. Some of them are listed as follows:
Use a fine mist while spraying the primer solution over your Yupo paper instead of a heavy mist.
Test the primer on a small scrap of Yupo paper first to avoid any unwanted effects.
Whenever you use a brush to apply the primer on Yupo paper, ensure that you use a light touch because it can get damaged very easily.
While you should consider sticking to white primers for better visibility of colors, you can choose other color options depending on the hue you wish to provide your painting with.
If you want to create abstract designs on Yupo paper, it is best to use the pouring and dripping technique. To do either (or both) of these techniques, you first need to collect the necessary art supplies like paints, palettes, brushes, pouring cups, and so on.
To prepare your paints for pouring, aim for a consistency that is somewhere between medium and thin . Next, pour this mix on your Yupo paper. Tilt the paper at different angles to allow the wet paint to blend organically. You can also use a brush to create the desired effect using the poured paint. This technique is usually used to create effects like the waterfall effect.
Many artists like combining pouring with dripping. To do the latter, all you need to do is drip a little bit of paint on the paper. Let it mix with other colors by tilting the paper, or use a brush to create desired effects.
2. Brushwork And Blending
You can never go wrong while using traditional painting techniques, and brushwork and blending fall into the same category! Since Yupo paper does not absorb the paint applied on its surface, you will have ample time to blend and work with colors.
To carry out this technique, take your choice of paint. Add a small amount of water in it to bring it to a thinner consistency. Next, use a brush to apply this color on your Yupo paper.
You can then easily blend the different shades in layers and create a variety of effects using different types of brushes or your finger. There are several tutorials on YouTube that you can refer to for this step.
3. Stenciling And Stamping
Sometimes, all your painting requires is a little depth. Stenciling and stamping are popular techniques to achieve this goal. Both of them are used to create designs and patterns in artworks.
For stenciling, place the stencil on your Yupo paper. Next, using brushes or sponges, apply paint on the open spaces of the stencil. Once you are done adding the colors, lift the stencil carefully, and voila! Your designed image is created.
Stamping is another easy process that you can use to create repeated patterns. Dip your choice of stamp into the paint and press it onto the Yupo paper.
Tip
Repeating the stamping process multiple times can help you create different patterns and designs.
More Tips And Tricks For Working With Yupo Paper
1. Using A Mister Or Spray Bottle To Wet The Surface
While the non-porous property of Yupo paper is beneficial in many ways, there is a major downside to it - difficulty in controlling water and paint flow. Hence, it is a good idea to wet certain sections of the paper for better results.
Using a mister or spray bottle to spray water on Yupo paper can allow you to create a large variety of effects, such as color runs. Such bottles also let you control the amount of water applied to the paper. As a result, the paper does not get saturated and warped.
2. Allowing Each Layer To Dry Completely Before Adding Another
If you are using a lot of water and paint while painting on your Yupo paper, it is best to allow each layer to dry completely before adding another. This is also a recommended process for other forms of painting, such as using watercolors on wood.
Since synthetic papers take longer to dry out as compared to traditional watercolor paper, adding layers onto a wet surface can lead to possible wear and tear.
Further, adding another layer of paint or water before the previous one has dried out can also lead to muddiness and unwanted effects. If you can’t wait long enough to let the paper completely dry out naturally, you can use a hair dryer, clothes dryer, or heat gun to speed up the process. However, you should be careful while doing so because excessive amounts of heat exposure may damage the paper.
3. Experimenting With Different Media, Such As Acrylics Or Alcohol Ink Art
Yupo paper is compatible with different media, such as watercolors, acrylics, and alcohol-based inks.
For instance, using acrylics on Yupo paper is a great idea. You can either dilute them with water for a watercolor effect or use them straight out of the tube for a bolder punch. Similarly, alcohol inks can be used to add different kinds of textures to your painting.
It is best if you can use a combination of different media (mixed media) to discover what suits best with your style. Experimenting with them on Yupo papers can help you unleash and broaden the horizons of your creativity.
4. Use A Palette To Mix Colors
If you like complete control over the intensity and consistency of your paints, it might not be a good idea to mix colors directly on your Yupo paper. It is always advised to use plastic color palettes to mix your colors before you begin painting. This way, you can ensure that the consistency of paints and intensity of pigment are exactly as you need them to be.
FAQs Related To Painting On Yupo Paper
What is Yupo paper and why is it different from other papers used for painting?
Traditional art papers are known to be absorbent due to their high porosity levels. This means that when we apply paint on their surface, the fibers of such papers soak the paint in. As a result, the paint dries out quickly, leaving less room for creating unique designs and textures.
On the other hand, Yupo paper is a synthetic paper made up of 100% polypropylene. It is also water-proof and stain-resistant, so you can explore your creativity and experiment as much as possible.
What kind of paints are suitable for use on Yupo paper?
It is best to stick with non-water-based media. Acrylic inks and paints, alcohol-based inks, and oil paints are a few of the many options that you can choose to go for when creating paintings on Yupo papers.
Do I need to prepare the Yupo paper before starting to paint on it?
Yes, you should prepare the Yupo paper before you begin painting it. The first step of this preparation should be cleaning the paper to remove any debris or dirt accumulation from its surface.
You may prime the paper for better results. To do so, apply a suitable fluid primer on the Yupo paper depending on the kind of paint that you will be using to paint. You can also lightly sand the paper so that your paint can stick better. These steps of preparation are optional, but the first step – cleaning – is a necessary step of preparation.
Can I use watercolor techniques on Yupo paper?
Using watercolor painting techniques on Yupo paper can be quite challenging. However, there are certain watercolor techniques that you can try out on Yupo papers.
For instance, you can layer using different paints to create a variety of layers in your artwork. You may also try out the method of lifting, which requires you to lift paint off the surface using a damp brush.
How do I control the flow of the paint on Yupo paper?
The best way to control the flow of the paint on Yupo paper is by using a spray bottle. Fill your spray bottle with a decent amount of water. Use it to spray the water on the desired section of your painting where you want to control the flow of paint.
There are various ways through which this process can help you control the flow of paint on your paper. For instance, once you spray water on the Yupo paper, you can tilt your painting in different angles or directions to let the paint flow naturally. Similarly, you may also use the techniques of manipulating the surface or use gravity to facilitate the flow.
Can I lift or remove paint from Yupo paper once it has dried?
Yes, you can easily lift or remove paint from these papers even after it has dried out.
To do so, take a cloth or paper towel and dampen it. Next, use it to scrub off the paint from the paper gently. You can also dab the paint off of the surface.
It is important to note that excessive moisture or pressure can potentially damage the surface of your Yupo paper. Hence, it is crucial to use a light touch.
What kind of brush should I use for painting on Yupo paper?
While painting on smooth surfaces, it is best to go for flexible brushes. After all, you need to have good control over your strokes to create your desired effects and textures.
A soft synthetic brush is a great option to go for while painting on Yupo paper. You may also go for a natural hair brush since it is easier to paint with it on a smooth surface.
Can I use other materials like ink, markers, or pencils on Yupo paper?
Yes, you can use other materials like India ink, markers, or pencils. However, different tools will have different effects on the paper depending on various factors.
For instance, ink can be used to create vibrant and bold components of your painting. It is translucent and smooth and blends amazingly. The effect of markers will depend on the type of marker used and the texture of your Yupo paper.
How do I protect or frame my finished Yupo paper painting?
The best way to protect your finished Yupo paper painting is to keep it away from sunlight. The UV rays of the sun turn the white Yupo paper into yellow, which can damage the overall quality of your painting. Similarly, you should store your painting away from moisture after waterproofing it.
You can frame your Yupo paper painting just like a traditional watercolor paper artwork. This will ensure that contaminants like dust and dirt do not accumulate on your painting. Hence, your artwork will stay protected and last for a long time.
Can Yupo paper be used for other art techniques besides painting?
Yes, these papers can be used for other art techniques besides painting. For instance, they can be used for printmaking to create monotype prints.
Artists like using Yupo papers for collage-making too. They stick a variety of tissues, photos, or clippings throughout the paper. This is because it is durable enough to stand the adhesive that is applied to it.
Since you can use graphite, charcoal, or watercolor pencil on it, Yupo paper is also used for drawing.
Yupo paper is a unique innovation in the field of art. It is a 100% polypropylene synthetic paper that is completely non-absorbent and non-porous. The various advantages of using this paper include a smooth surface to paint on, paints not drying out quickly, and versatility.
You can easily apply watercolor on Yupo paper by preparing it first. Clean any dust or dirt that may have collected on your paper. You can also prime its surface for better results. Then, you can use techniques such as pouring and dripping, blending, stenciling, brushing, and stamping to create paintings.
The Yupo papers allow artists to have as much fun as they want. The versatility and functionality of this paper can let you do anything from drawing to painting and creating collages.
So, let your creativity drive you to experiment with the various painting techniques on Yupo papers!
Dallas is home to some of the best furniture stores in the country, and once you check them out, you will surely be left spellbound.
Tourists from all around the country flock to this design district to buy sturdy and stylish furniture. And for natives who are trying to feather their nest, you would have to visit the right furniture store.
Some people have a knack for creative decor, while there are others that like a more classy look for their home. In whichever category you fall, there are enough options for you to explore. In fact, there are way too many, and that might lead to confusion.
To make the job easier for you, we decided to design this guide with the top 10 of our favorite furniture stores in Dallas. After much research, we were able to compile this list, and you can rest assured that it is quite exhaustive.
Without much delay, let's check them out!
Best Furniture Stores In Dallas
1. Weir's Furniture
The founders of Weir's furniture believe that styles come and go. However, quality furniture can stand the test of time. This store has been providing the best home furnishings in Dallas for the last 3 decades.
It is one of those furniture stores that will help you get new furniture, whether you are creating a new home office or redecorating the dining room.
This store is dedicated to presenting its customers with the latest outdoor and patio furniture. Whichever kind of accessories that you are looking for, rest assured that you will find it in one of their 4 stores that are spread across Dallas.
Furthermore, their helpful staff makes shopping furniture from their store worth every dollar. When it comes to living room furniture, this is one shop that we can completely rely on. Not to mention, they have their stores in both Dallas and Fort Worth.
2. Canales Furniture
Tucked in a cozy Texas lane is Canales Furniture that has managed to remain a customer favorite for living room furniture. Not only is it good for dining room decor, but you will also find some of the best outdoor furniture in this shop.
This store also has some of the best patio furniture in town. On top of that, it is a great place to purchase home accessories, meaning you will find quality appliances or contemporary lighting at the most affordable rates.
So, if you are looking to decorate the rooms in a modern fashion, this place can be your best bet.
3. DFW Home Furnishings
Located in Farmers Branch, this store opened in 2019 and has gained much popularity in a short time span. It is because of the excellent service and beautiful furniture that it provides to the clients.
We were quite impressed with the kind of modern sofas that they have in their collection. Apart from that, they house lighting, chandeliers and appliances of the top brands in the city.
During their sale season, they also offer the best discounts on inventory, rugs, and recliners. If one is in luck, they can even find lamps and chairs of their favorite brand at a heavily discounted price at their showroom.
Instead of telling you more, we suggest that you visit their store to know more about their furniture stock and service. Their address is not too difficult to locate, and in case you have any trouble, you can find the details from their website.
4. BT Furnishings For Quality Furniture
If you are looking for the best furniture stores in Dallas that have been in business for more than a decade, you need to give this shop a try. They give you the option to shop from their website, and you also have the choice of shopping directly from their store.
When you visit their showroom, you will see that they provide exceptional furnishings at the most affordable rates. Plus, they are quite popular among their customers for the exceptional service that they provide.
But their focus is not just to sell and forget about their customers. They strive to bring interest-free credit plans that will ensure that you can style the home in any way you want to.
In case you are anywhere near Fort Worth or Dallas, there's no way you should miss out on visiting their store.
5. Living Modern Furnishings & Design
In case you are looking for customized living room furniture, you cannot afford to miss out on this shop. They are one of those furniture stores in Dallas that are popular for providing customized home furnishings.
Even if you are planning to redo the home office, this store can come to your aid. They are good at adding a contemporary flair to your home decor. Next time you have a family gathering, rest assured that there will be interesting conversations about the furniture in your house.
The major reason why it made it to our list is that the owner of this company allows you to pick any of their furniture and customize it any way you want to. That's a great deal, and you are bound to leave the shop happy!
6. Room & Board For Quality Furniture
When we think of a company that makes furniture that is high on utility and beauty but less in price, Room and Board is the name that pops into our head. Be it bedroom furniture or high-end storage appliances; this store has it all. And the biggest deal that this company offers is free designing services.
You can visit their website to see if your kids like their animal rugs. Even the other members of your family might like their exquisite bed collection and the different types of floor designs that they offer. They have great dining accessories under their wing as well.
Not to mention that this company provides excellent customer service and a no-hassle return policy. We would suggest that you drop by their store location to know more about the kind of furniture that they sell.
7. Welch's Furniture
If you are checking out furniture stores in the Fort Worth area, there's no way you can miss out on Welch's Furniture. People visit this store regularly for the great outdoor furniture collection that they have and also the excellent service that they provide.
There's no arguing that the prime location of the company works to their benefit! But that does not discount the fact that they have super helpful staff. They are one of the most popular stores located at Trinity Mills, and over the decades, they have made sure that they don't have one-time customers.
And the prices of their furniture won't drive a hole in your pockets. But all the appliances and dining accessories that they house look pretty high-end. When you use them to decorate your dining room or use them as outdoor furniture, no one will be able to tell that they are budget buys.
Now, that's a win-win!
8. Zoe's Furniture
Only taking care of interior furnishing is not enough when you are decorating your house. It is also very essential that you have the right kind of outdoor furniture. And for that, Zoe's furniture is one of the best furniture stores in Dallas to check out! They have another outlet in Texas too, and you can visit that location as well.
The accessories, chairs, lamps that they offer are all within affordable prices and will surely add some life to your home decor. In case you are planning to repurpose any of your old furniture, visit their location to talk to the owner of this store to see how they can help. What makes them stand out among their contemporaries is how fun and quirky their furniture is.
9. Designer Furniture 4 Less For Best Living Room Furniture
Be it about decorating your dining room or living room, Designer Furniture 4 Less can help you turn your home into a modern dreamland. Especially when it comes to redoing your bedroom, we would suggest that you visit this store.
They are one of the most popular furniture stores in the state and have something for everyone. We love them for how versatile they are in terms of design. And they have an in-house consultancy team who can help you find what would work best for your house. So, if you are in Dallas, make sure you find their address and drop by their store.
10. Zuri Furniture
Situated in three different locations all across Dallas, Zuri Furniture is the embodiment of contemporary comfort. All their furniture is designed in a way that their clients do not have to compromise on style for the sake of comfortable use. It is only fair that one can experience both!
The multiple locations of the store is a major advantage as you can visit the one nearest to you. You can easily find their address on the internet or give them a call in case you have any difficulty finding their location.
Final Words
With that, we have reached the end of this comprehensive guide.
We hope that after reading it, you will have a good time picking out the best furniture showroom in Dallas. You can always take your kids and friends to these shops where they can help pick out what is best for decorating the house.
Be it cosmopolitan décor or a classy mid-century feel; you will surely find a shop that will suit your needs. Even if you want to introduce the most unusual of furniture, there is a shop to cater to your demands.
In case you have any other suggestions, we would love to hear about them in the comments section below. And for more exciting reads, keep a watch on this space.
Freezer frost causes an ice buildup, which happens when there is accumulated frozen moisture inside.
The evaporator coils inside and could freeze! The freezer door closes completely, and pulling it open is hard.
All the frost buildup can lead to all sorts of defects you don't want to face. This can happen even to the best chest freezer!
What Causes Freezer Frost?
There are a lot of reasons why you could have major frost buildup. Knowing what these are can help prevent them from happening.
High Humidity
Humidity is the number one cause of frost buildup. Allowing warm air to enter the freezer can produce humidity, and ice crystals form inside.
If your freezer door doesn't have an airtight seal, it's probably one of the reasons why warm air gets in.
That being said, don't put hot foods inside or place a freezer beside warm appliances.
The Wrong Temperature
Always know the appropriate temperature to set your freezer. More importantly, don't keep tinkering with the controls!
The proper freezer temperature should always be at 0 degrees Fahrenheit. This is the optimal temperature to keep food stored safely.
Keeping the Freezer Door Open
Leaving freezer doors open causes frost in your freezer. Make sure to keep it completely shut to prevent warm air from going in.
It will also help if you don't overpack your freezer so you won't have difficulty closing the doors.
A Mostly-Empty Freezer
Don't leave your freezer running if there's nothing in there. It will just result in frost buildup that can damage your freezer!
The more cold air inside, the more build-up there will be. You can turn off your freezer when not in use or store a few items to prevent ice buildup.
How to Remove Freezer Frost
Removing freezer frost is simple; you can start by switching off your freezer and getting it to room temperature.
You can turn on the defrost heater or defrost cycle to speed things up. Try removing as many things in the freezer, and have a rag and mop in hand.
Once all the ice has melted, you can start cleaning to have frost-free freezers!
How to Prevent Ice Buildup in Your Freezer
A few prevention tips help avoid frost buildup even with the best upright freezers in hand. We've listed some basic tips here for you to get started!
Get the Right Refrigerator/Freezer
What kind of refrigerator do you need, and what features are you looking for?
Finding the right type of freezer makes sure you get to maximize its use and avoid frost buildup.You want it to be a manageable size for you.
Regularly Check the Parts of the Freezer
It's always a good idea to check up on your freezer. One of the first few things you must watch out for is the defrost thermostat and defrost timers.
You also want to ensure that the door seal remains airtight to prevent frost from forming. Finally, make sure that the evaporator coils are still highly functional.
Tip
Watch out for malfunctioning defrost timers and a worn or damaged gasket.
Keep the Door Closed
Keep the freezer door closed when not in use. It will keep cool air out and leave the insides of your freezer warm. You might end up spoiling your food and impact food quality!
Another part of keeping the door closed is ensuring the door seal remains functional. Check it from time to time for your freezer's efficiency.
Store Food Carefully
One of the fastest ways to cool hot food is by sticking it inside the freezer. But did you know that by letting food cool in the freezer, you get more ice buildup and frosting?
Try preventing this practice to avoid all the moisture from forming. Only place cooled food inside and not hot food.
Keep the Freezer Well-Stocked
No one wants an empty freezer! If you've got a ton of freezer storage space, stock it with your essentials.
Don't leave too much space for cold air to move around inside. Just make sure to follow food safety practices whenever you're stocking up.
Frost in Freezer Related FAQs
Before we go, allow us to answer one of the common FAQs we get. We’re sure this will help you in the future!
What Happens if You Don't Remove Freezer Frost?
A lot of things can happen if you don’t remove freezer frost. We’ve listed some of them here to know what you’re up against:
Reduced freezer storage space
Emits nasty odor
Freezer burn taste on frozen food
Freezer’s evaporator coils inside
Preventing this from happening is a lot better than having to spend a ton of money to fix the problem.
Keep the interior walls of your freezer free of ice! A frost-free freezer lets you maximize your freezer to its full potential and store more storage containers.
You can also check out the best mini freezers if you only require a little storage.
We hope you enjoyed this article. Let us know in the comments how you got rid of your nasty freezer frost at home. We'd love to hear it.
This product is currently discontinued and no longer available in the market.
Portable AC’s can be a blessing in disguise, especially for people with housing restrictions and limitations regarding installations.
Gone are the days when getting a new air conditioning unit meant a time-consuming installation process and unnecessary expenditure. With the demand for portable air conditioners on the rise, you can cool any room in half the time and effort. And, in a sea of air conditioners, the Shinco YPL3-10C has stood out for many.
Now, we aren’t saying that this product is devoid of faults (technology may be advancing but not at that rate!). But, it does have many promising features, and after using this AC for a while, we strongly vouch for it.
But don’t just rely on that one sentence. Read on below for some specifics on why this product stands out from the rest.
Shinco YPL3-10C Review
Why Buy This Product?
Shinco is a popular brand when it comes to air conditioners and other home appliances. A great thing about the company is that it offers a one-year warranty, a 30-day money-back guarantee, and lifetime tech support on all products. But that’s not the only reason why it’s becoming a household name. This portable AC has a ton of other eye-catching features like...
Design
Starting with the way this product looks, it is very simple and has a seamless make. We understand aesthetics are important, and it's crucial to have a unit that does its job while looking good. This is why you will appreciate that this unit has a neutral color and can easily blend into any interior style.
When it comes to products like these, they need to be easy to handle. Fortunately, this one only weighs about 54 lbs and is much lighter than others in the market. Plus, the dimensions are 17 x 31.3 x 13 inches, making it ideal for rooms sized between 300-350 sq. ft.
It also has handles on the sides and wheels on the bottom to effortlessly transport it from one room to another. We tried rolling it on wood as well as carpet, and this unit did not disappoint.
Power
One of the most important things to expect from a portable air conditioner is its cooling power. For this purpose, it is crucial to pick one that is appropriate to the size of your room(s) so that the cooling is effective.
With the dimensions offered and a cooling capacity of 10K BTU, it can fully cool a 300 sq. ft room and partially cool a 350 sq. ft one. It is a powerful product that does not need a lot of time to cool any space, thanks to the dual-fan speeds. Moreover, the cooling is even because the air blows in four different directions.
Cost
Another essential aspect to look at when buying anything is the price. No matter how good the product may be, no one likes to spend their entire life’s savings on it.
This is why the Shinco YPL3-10C is so popular. Despite being powerful and having many exciting features, it’s budget-friendly and less expensive than most of its competitors.
User Friendliness
Having a cost-effective, powerful air conditioning unit with an ergonomic design is every homeowner’s dream. And, that is where Shinco stands out again as it does not just work efficiently but is also very easy to operate.
This unit comes with a remote control that makes it extremely user friendly and allows you to operate the unit from any point in the room. The days of standing right in front of the AC unit and aggressively pushing the buttons are long gone.
Moving on to another user-friendly feature: installation. All you need to do is spare 10 minutes of the day, connect the exhaust pipe to the unit and place the other end out of a window. In a nutshell, this AC unit has features that are mainly aimed at making it easy to use, and it does not fall short.
Self-Evaporating
One of the biggest reasons people avoid portable AC’s is because of the condensate. Many units in the market require manual emptying, which can become tedious to do daily. This is where the Shinco YPL3-10C is different.
The brand has ensured that this unit is effortless to use by making it a no-drip air conditioner. What this means is that the condensate evaporates by itself without accumulating. The unit has no water tank, and all the condensate is recycled for cooling. However, there is a tray provided on the off chance that the water does drip.
The self evaporating feature can be pretty beneficial for people living in areas with less humidity.
Safety
One prominent concern people have with portable air conditioners is safety-related. Since it is not a window-mounted AC, it can be easily accessed by kids and pets. But what makes it safe is the exhaust pipe through which hot air can be directed outside the house via windows. This prevents the heat from getting trapped in the room and keeps the unit cool to touch.
The Shinco YPL3-10C has an exhaust pipe specifically made for this unit, making the installation less tedious and safe. Plus, it has a 6-foot power cord that allows enough flexibility in terms of the unit’s placement. We advise referring to the instruction manual to ensure that the installation has been done correctly.
Extra Features
As we mentioned, the unit comes with a remote control. In addition to that, the surface of the unit has an easy-to-understand interface. All the buttons are labelled clearly, and there is a small display screen. With the availability of this feature, coupled with the remote, operating this unit is an absolute breeze.
This portable AC also has a 24 hour on/off timer, which makes it energy efficient. With this, you can set a schedule for the AC and get it to turn off automatically once it reaches the desired temperature. This way, it will help save energy and not generate a high electricity bill.
Another feature that is not available in many ACs within this price range and is appreciated by a lot of customers (and us!) is the adjustable vents. These are quite beneficial since you can easily direct the air to blow out in any direction you like. Moreover, it is particularly helpful if you do not want a full blast of air on the face.
This unit also has a built-in dehumidifier that can remove 62.4 pints of moisture, and washable filters. We suggest washing the filters on regular intervals to improve the efficiency of the AC. To sum it up, it has all the essential and additional features which make it a great buy.
What Could’ve Been Better?
As we mentioned earlier, every electronic device has faults and this one is not an exception.. However, we don’t think they overpower the benefits of the product. The first minor issue we noticed was the noise the unit made. It has a decibel level of about 55, which is considered a bit much for an AC this size.
It isn’t just us; there are a few customers who have complained about the same. One user even said that during the initial time of usage, the AC noise drowned the sound of their ringing phones. However, it isn’t something that you cannot get used to overtime, so don’t be discouraged.
Another issue we found was that the exhaust pipe tends to pop out of the window at times. There is no particular reason as to why that happens, but it’s easy to fix. Adding some tape to secure the pipe to the window will help.
Pros
Affordable unit
Lightweight and portable
Easy to assemble
Simple digital interface on the unit
Attractive design
Cons
A bit loud initially
Exhaust fan needs to be secured tightly
Shinco YPL3-10C Buyers Guide
We think, by now, it is clear that the Shinco YPL3-10C has the potential to cater to your needs. It cools any space effectively without costing a fortune. That being said, you may want to explore a bit more, and that’s fine. Finding the perfect portable AC can be a tedious task, considering the options available.
To make it easier, we have put together a buyers guide that discusses the essential features to look out for in any portable AC.
Price
Although cheaper than a window AC, a portable air conditioner can cost a considerable amount depending on several factors. The power of the unit plays a significant role in fixing the price. If you are looking to cool a large space, you will need a bigger unit which will cost more (and that is obvious).
Additionally, brand names matter too. If you want a unit that guarantees quality and service, turning to bigger and popular brands is the way to go. The only issue that there is a chance you will have to pay more. However, it will be worth it since there won’t be a need to spend money on such a unit for a long time.
Finally, additional features like a digital interface, remote, dual-functionality are all considered when fixing a price for any AC. This boxes it within the $100-$800 price range with an occasional hike to about $1000 for commercial units. Ultimately, the idea is to buy something that performs according to your expectations within an appropriate price range.
Energy
Everyone that’s looking to buy new electronics needs them to be energy efficient. Not only is this good for the environment, but it helps keep the electricity bill low. Most units displayed, online or in a showroom, have information of how much energy they utilize written on the unit itself. It is always advisable to keep an eye out for that.
Secondly, features like auto-on/off, energy-saving mode, timers, sleep mode and programmable thermostats are of great help. These automatically switch the unit off once the room reaches the temperature you set it at.
Installation
This is an essential factor since this is where portable ACs differ from window ACs. Most people buy the former because it is easy to install and can be done in under 20 minutes. The only thing requiring effort is fixing the exhaust hose to the window.
To further enable this, the unit must come with clear instructions and illustrations. Most units come with a kit and all the hardware necessary. And although installation of these units are very beginner-friendly and can be done by anyone, having an extra hand to help is always appreciated.
Room Size and BTU
For effective cooling, having a good idea of the living space is essential. It is vital to know how big or small the room is because, on the one hand, you wouldn’t want to pay more than required. On the other hand, you don’t want to buy a unit that does not cool effectively.
Keep an eye out for information on the ideal room size for any unit (manufacturers mention that at times). If it is not mentioned, we advise doing a bit of research after measuring the room. Also, remember that certain obstructions like excessive doors or thick walls can hinder the cooling process.
Ventilation
Most portable ACs come with a window kit that will allow you to set up the unit accurately. It is reasonably straightforward and can be done in any room. If the unit is kept far from the window, check how long the exhaust hose is and whether it can be extended.
There are two kinds of hoses used for ventilation. The single hose unit is the kind where only one hose takes in and exhausts the air. On the other hand, a dual-hose unit is one where there is one hose each for intake and exhaust. They both work efficiently, but the dual-hose one is more popular.
Noise
Certain electronics like washing machines and air conditioners make noise, no matter how quiet they claim to be. A noiseless machine is a myth, so it is futile to look for something that will make no noise. However, the volume is the thing to be wary of.
Noise from an electronic product can range from low white noise to “my house feels like a construction site” type noise. The key is to ensure it’s the former, not the latter. The best way to determine that is by going through reviews (like this one!). Moreover, if the units USP is that it makes less noise, it will be heavily advertised.
Additional Features
Now that we are done with some of the basics, let’s move on to the fun stuff. Having a unit that is easy to install and functions efficiently is what everyone needs, but it helps to have few extra features to make it fun. In this regard, design is the topmost priority.
A portable AC is one of the few products in the house that can be utilized in every room. This is why having a unit with a seamless make, and neutral color is preferred. This way, it does not cause any visual obstructions when kept in the room.
Moreover, since it has to be moved around, it should be easy to transport. Having wheels in the bottom and handles are appreciated since they make it effortless to move the unit.
Shinco YPL3-10C FAQ
How Is A Portable AC Beneficial?
Summer heat can be really exhausting, and for some, it can cause illness. For those people, having a portable AC in the house can reduce the chances of falling sick. Moreover, it is a smarter option when compared to a window or ductless AC since it takes less time to install and consumes less energy.
Is A Portable AC Safe To Use?
Yes! As long as the installation is done correctly. One pressing concern with these units is the release of heat from them. To make it safe for residential use, it comes with an exhaust hose which ensures the heat does not get trapped in the room.
This is why there is an emphasis on proper installation. The exhaust hose is fixed to the window to let the heat go out, and till it remains secure, there is nothing to worry about.
How Long Should The Exhaust Hose Be?
Ideally, it should be about 3-4 ft. However, it depends on the model and brand. In case you need a longer one, they are easily available to purchase. It is generally advisable to buy from the same company and not try and make your own (which is very possible).
Another thing to keep in mind is that a long hose will make it difficult for the AC to cool the room. As a general rule of thumb, a hose shorter than 10ft will allow the unit to function correctly.
Can The ACs’ Efficiency Be Improved?
Of course, it can! With time, the efficiency of any electronic device tends to deteriorate. But there are certain things that you can do to ensure it works properly. The first thing will be to install it with care and ensure that it remains secure. Keep an eye out for gaps and loose screws, as those make it worse.
You can also use the AC with the fan on since the combination of the two will cool the room faster. Additionally, keep it in a cool place under shade and make sure it is not exposed to harsh sunlight.
Shinco YPL3-10C Verdict
To sum it up, the Shinco YPL3-10C is an excellent buy. It is ideal for anyone looking for a compact unit that has a lot of power. And since the design is simple and neutral, it will blend into the room and won’t be a visual obstruction.
For the price range that it is in, it’s quite a steal. Yes, it does have its flaws but nothing a little extra care cannot fix. We think it can be a great addition to homes that often feel like a furnace during the summer months. We urge you to try the Shinco YPL3-10C out yourselves and let us know how the experience was.
Freon is a popular brand of chemical refrigerant, so both terms are often used synonymously nowadays. To determine if your AC is low on Freon, you must check the refrigerant line, the evaporator coil, supply vents, and more.
There’s nothing more annoying than an air conditioner producing warm air on a hot summer afternoon.
But things get even worse when you still end up with higher energy bills at the end of the month. Of course, no one wants to pay more for an AC that’s not working properly.
Now for most malfunctioning AC units, the culprit could be a refrigerant leak or a frozen evaporator coil. So, to help you determine the root cause of the issue, I’ve curated this informative guide explaining the signs of an AC that’s low on Freon (refrigerant).
Signs Of Low Refrigerant In An Air Conditioner
1. Supply Vents Blowing Warm Air
The job of the refrigerant is to eliminate heat from the surroundings and transfer it outside. If the AC unit is low on refrigerant/Freon, it will obviously not absorb as much heat, thereby producing warm air from the vents.
Tip
Keep in mind that low refrigerant may not be the only cause of the lack of cool air in your air conditioning unit. So, before hiring a professional, I recommend checking your AC filter. If the air filter is clogged, it may not absorb the heat effectively.
But if you have already replaced the filter and are still experiencing issues with the air temperature, it’s best to contact a professional to check for low refrigerant levels.
2. Hissing Or Bubbling Noise
Air conditioners emitting any type of hissing or bubbling sound may indicate refrigerant leaks. Basically, the hissing sound is produced by the refrigerant (Freon) leaks escaping as gas, while the bubbling sound occurs if it leaks in liquid form.
Unlike the previous point, an AC does not produce odd sounds often. So, if you hear something out of the ordinary, it most likely means that your air conditioner needs more Freon refrigerant.
3. Ice Or Frost On Your AC
In the case of low refrigerant levels, you may spot ice or frost in and around the AC system. This is because when the AC does not have enough refrigerant levels, it can cause the temperature of the entire unit to go below normal levels. As a result, you will notice ice building up on the evaporator coil and refrigerant lines.
However, you must watch out for other issues that may lead to similar ice buildup. For instance, if the AC unit has a clogged air filter or closed vents, it will obviously experience low airflow. Consequently, the evaporator coil of the air conditioner may freeze.
Hence, I suggest checking your air filter and ensuring none of the vents are closed before calling in a professional to check the air conditioner.
4. High Electric Bills
Ever noticed your electricity bills increasing despite making no temperature change to your central air cooling system? Again, it could be caused by a refrigerant leak. To help you understand this, I’ll explain the role of the refrigerant in simple terms.
So, think of it as the “blood” of your air conditioner. The AC system sends warm air blowing over the evaporator coil containing chemical refrigerant, which absorbs heat from the surrounding air and dumps it outside. If the AC is low on Freon (refrigerant), then it obviously has to work harder to get rid of the heat and cool your home. And in the end, you will end up paying a higher monthly electric bill.
But of course, like most points discussed above, high energy bills can be caused by the following as well…
1. If The AC System Is Too Big Or Small For Your Home
If you’veinstalled a new air conditioner and suddenly get a higher electricity bill, it could be that your AC is too big or small for your home. If the AC unit is too big, it may shut off repeatedly throughout the day, and if it's too small, it will have to work harder to cool the area. In both cases, the appliance is bound to use more energy, resulting in higher bills.
2. If The AC Unit Is Too Old
If your AC is always giving up on you, especially during extremely hot weather, it may be because it’s too old. For reference, a decade-old AC is more likely to become less efficient and use more energy.
3. If The Air Conditioner Has A Dirty Air Filter
As I already mentioned before, an AC system that is not working optimally and showcasing the signs discussed above could have a dirty filter. This results in restricted airflow, making your AC work harder and longer.
But if none of these factors are true and your AC fails to cool your home, contact a professional to check the refrigerant line immediately.
Use Of Freon In AC FAQs
Why is Freon being phased out?
Freon and other CFC and HFC refrigerants have been found to contribute to the depletion of the ozone layer and to global warming. As a result, many countries have agreed to phase out the use of refrigerants and replace them with more environmentally friendly alternatives.
Can I still use my air conditioning unit if it uses Freon?
Yes, you can continue to use your air conditioning unit if it uses Freon. But you may need to have it serviced and recharged with a substitute refrigerant if it develops a leak or needs to be recharged.
Can I replace the Freon in my air conditioning unit with a substitute refrigerant myself?
It is not recommended for non-professionals to attempt to replace the Freon in the air conditioning unit with a substitute refrigerant themselves. Refrigerant handling requires specialized training and equipment, and incorrect handling can be dangerous and lead to equipment damage. So, it is best to hire a licensed HVAC technician to perform this task.
Final Words
That said, refrigerant leaks can occur due to a variety of reasons, and unfortunately, most of them are out of your control. For instance, insects like ants and bees can enter the AC system and produce formaldehyde that turns into formic acid. This naturally occurring acid is corrosive and can damage copper tubing, causing Freon leaks.
Additionally, the rubber seals of the valve and assembly joints can wear out over time. So, clearly, there is no way to “stop” a refrigerant leak, and one can only prevent it with regular maintenance.
Hence, I always recommend that homeowners invest in timely repairs and maintenance of their heating, ventilation, and air conditioning systems. Because let’s be real - even the best air conditioners won’t last you a lifetime. So, prevention is always better than cure.
A portable air conditioner is a standalone cooling system that is designed to cool single rooms and can be moved around easily. For the portable device to function optimally, it has to be vented based on the layout of your home.
Have you been planning to purchase a portable air conditioner but don't know how to vent it? Or perhaps you already own one and need a better alternative for venting it. Whatever the case may be, I've got you covered.
This article discusses the importance of venting a portable air conditioner and how it can be done safely and effectively.
Importance Of Venting A Portable AC
Before I begin with how you can vent portable air conditioners, let's look at why it is important to do so. Does not venting an air conditioner have any negative effects?
To answer briefly, yes, not venting your air conditioners can have negative consequences, the main being a dysfunctional air conditioning unit. To further understand this situation, let's look at how portable air conditioners function.
The main purpose of a portable air conditioning unit is to effectively cool a room or living space. However, the device needs to extract heat from the air to do that efficiently. This heat is then transferred outside so that your room stays cool for a long period.
When there are no vents for the air conditioning unit in another room or outside, it can result in the hot air being trapped inside the room. This will cause your air conditioner to cool the room much more slowly and result in your room being considerably warmer.
Furthermore, venting an air conditioner helps remove the excess moisture present in the air and keeps the overall humidity level regulated. The lower the humidity inside a room, the cooler the room gets. When there is no venting for the air conditioning, it causes the moisture levels to build up, thus minimizing the cooling effect of the AC system.
Venting allows your device to function at its maximum capacity, keeping the temperature in the room cool and comfortable at all times.
Types Of Portable Air Conditioner Vents
Portable air conditioning vents can be found in many different types. Some common ones are:
1. Sliding Windows And Sliding Door Vents
Most traditional windows and brackets are designed to be mounted horizontally at the bottom of the window. However, if you have sliding windows or sliding doors, these window brackets can be mounted vertically. Though it may require you to make minor modifications to accommodate the window brackets and ensure a snug fit, it is a simple process to install them on a sliding window.
In the case of sliding windows, you must ensure that the window bracket is long enough to fit the window opening. Air conditioners comprising double window brackets are usually the best for sliding windows.
Double window bracket units come with a standard window bracket and a second filler bracket. Once the bracket is fully set up, you can seal any opening with either Plexiglass, wood, insulation, or other filler materials.
For portable air conditioners with a single-window bracket, you will notice a significant amount of space between the window unit. This can also be filled up similarly using plywood or Plexiglass.
Furthermore, installing a portable air conditioner vent onto a sliding window is beneficial for people who need a temporary venting system. You can install it during the summer and take it off once you don't use the AC anymore in winter.
2. Casement Window Vents
Casement windows and crank windows usually open similar to doors. Due to this, a standard window kit or bracket will not work for them, but there are ways around this.
To install a portable air conditioner onto the casement windows, you must first detach the whole window from the window frame. Once the window is removed, replace it with either plastic or wood.
After replacing the casement windows with a more solid surface, you can vent a portable air conditioner as you would with sliding windows. Finally, connect the window kit to any empty space near the window.
Though it is more time-consuming, it allows you to properly vent your air conditioner regardless of what type of window you own.
Ideal Location For Venting An Air Conditioner
Finding the right location to install portable air conditioner vents is crucial for every home. Vent placement seems like a straightforward approach, but there are certain factors that most homeowners don't consider.
Placing the portable unit vents near or within the ceiling panel is an ideal option if you're looking for energy efficiency. When the vents are placed near the ceiling, air circulation increases and air moves faster through the rooms.
This allows the room to be cooled almost instantly, so you won't have to use your air conditioner for prolonged periods. Additionally, the dust and debris fall to the ground, which minimizes the chance of these vents being clogged.
If you're concerned about your carbon footprint or your AC power consumption, a ceiling vent is a way to go. When portable air conditioners vents are located near the floor, the furniture inside the room can end up blocking the vents. This leads to the hot air getting trapped inside the room and thus causing the room to cool slowly and stay on the warmer side.
Moreover, it decreases the air conditioning system's efficiency and pushes it to work twice as hard to cool the room. Placing air conditioner vents near the floor can also lead to the accumulation of dust and debris, which ultimately forms a clog. This lowers the airflow within the room and may even lead to mold and mildew growth, resulting in a major health hazard.
How To Install A Vent Kit
Using a window kit for your portable air conditioning unit is an effective solution for setting up a portable unit.
The installation instructions can vary based on the type of vent kit used and the surface on which the venting will be done. Generally, it is best to refer to the instruction manual on the vent kit itself since each kit has its own set of requirements.
However, we'll go over some steps to give you a general idea of what needs to be done while installing a venting kit.
To vent your portable air conditioning unit through a sliding window, you'll have to ensure that the window is the right height for the exhaust hose to fit. Thus, you must measure the window and the vent kit.
Next, install the window kit to the open space in the window, keeping in mind that they must form a tight seal. This prevents air leaks and stops the hot air outside from making its way into your cool room. Plus, not sealing the vent properly can lead to insects and other small bugs crawling through the space between the vent kit and the window.
Finally, attach the AC exhaust hose to the window kit and connect the vent kit to the window.
Alternative Venting Options
Venting a portable air conditioner is not always easy or possible, especially when vented through a regular window to cool rooms located far inside your house. In such cases, you'll have to find other venting alternatives.
1. Venting Through The Door
If your room needs cooling and comprises a door leading to another free space, this can be a foolproof solution for venting your portable air conditioner.
However, this might not work if the door leads to another living space. The room that would be vented to would have higher temperatures, so a room used minimally is a better choice.
This might not be a problem when you vent directly outside, but these increased temperatures can lead to several issues in another room within the house. Since the portable air conditioner venting will push heat into the room, ensure that the room is empty. At the very least, ensure that there are no items in the room that can be destroyed by the sudden spike in temperature.
If there are no alternatives but to vent the portable air conditioner to another living space, find ways to dissipate the heat. It can either be a window or an exhaust which can help push out the excess heat and keep the room temperature moderately regulated.
Moreover, you will have to minimize the air transfer because of the unconditioned and conditioned areas. Making use of a door or window sealant would help prevent air leaks and stops unwanted heat from getting into the room that is being cooled. The seal also covers the large opening when you vent a portable AC through a door.
2. Venting Through The Drop Ceiling
Yet another effective portable air conditioner venting technique is through an access panel or ceiling tile. To vent your portable air conditioning system through the access panel, you will first have to make a hole in the panel. This will create a space for the exhaust hose to be installed properly. You can also make use of a venting kit to cut the access panel till there is enough space for the exhaust hose.
When venting a portable air conditioner to the attic or ceiling, perform the entire ceiling venting process carefully. Being mindful of the humidity levels and temperature in the ceiling is also necessary. When there is excess warm air and humidity in the attic, it can cause the entire house to heat up.
An ideal way to combat this issue is by installing an exhaust hose or fan. This will exhaust hot air from the attic and keep the moisture or humidity levels under control.
3. Venting Through The Dryer Vent
Though it is possible, attaching a portable AC unit exhaust vent hose to a dry vent isn't necessarily the ideal solution. This is mainly because a dryer vent has a smaller diameter when compared to an air conditioner vent hose.
Attaching a larger vent hose to an air conditioner makes the air conditioner work much more than it usually would to get rid of excess heat from a room. This can become worse due to a flap inside the dryer vent.
On average, portable air conditioners are not extremely powerful. This limits their ability to blow air strong enough to open the flap of the dryer vent. In case you do end up venting your portable air conditioner through a dryer vent, ensure that it comprises a screen instead of a flap.
Though this method does work to a certain degree, there are still better alternatives to efficiently vent your portable air conditioner.
4. Venting Through The Wall
Portable air conditioner venting through the wall can be used as a last resort when you run out of other alternatives. A wall vent can be used to transfer the hot air outside or to another room, such as a garage or storage room.
To vent a portable AC unit through the wall, you can carve a hole that is accurately sized with the help of a jigsaw. Before you proceed with cutting the hole, ensure that the area you're about to cut does not contain any electrical wiring or plumbing.
Once the hole is cut, seal the edges with the help of silicone caulk. However, this method is unfavorable for various reasons. The main reason is that the walls will get damaged when cutting the hole.
This is not only labor intensive but also has the potential to go wrong. Secondly, when you vent warm, moist air through the walls, they can develop severe water damage, which in turn ruins the appearance of the entire surface.
Is It Possible To A Vent Portable AC Through A Screen?
To vent a portable AC unit through a screen isn't necessarily the most efficient option. No matter how well you install the vents, venting through a screen can reduce the efficiency of your air conditioning unit. However, in certain scenarios, this method can work exceptionally well.
Generally, you would have to detach the screen to vent a portable air conditioning unit through the window. But in some situations, detaching the screen is not possible.
Before venting a portable AC unit through the screen, ensure it is clean because if it is dirty, it can cause the airflow to drop and decrease your air conditioning unit's efficiency. You would also need to take into account the screen type that you'll be using. If the screen is thin, it can improve the airflow rate, whereas thicker screens do the opposite and reduce it.
To know if the screen is of the right thickness, test it by looking through it. In case you can see clearly through the screen, it would be sufficient to vent a portable air conditioner.
Is It Possible To Vent A Portable Air Conditioner Through A Return Vent?
For venting portable air conditioners, using a cold air return vent is usually not the best option. Venting your portable air conditioning system through a portable AC vent makes the machines work twice as hard.
As the portable air conditioner pushes heat further into the return vent, it travels back to your home's central air conditioning system. Additionally, your central air conditioning unit will be required to work equally hard to eliminate the room's excess heat.
Basically, all air conditioners in your home would be working more than they normally would just to eliminate heat from within the room that they're supposed to cool.
However, if this option is your last resort, it can be beneficial to a certain extent. Given that your home's central air conditioning system can cool the room and remove heat, this method would cause no further problems.
Before you decide on a venting option, it would be best to consult an HVAC specialist so that they can provide you with the right advice.
Whatever the case may be, venting your portable air conditioner through the return vent should only be done if there are no other options available. It should also be considered a temporary fix until you figure out a more permanent solution of venting your portable air conditioner.
How To Maintain Your Venting System
Like most things, the venting system of your air conditioner tends to become dirty over time. However, it should not be neglected and has to be cleaned regularly to keep the vents safe from mold growth and preventing vent clogs.
Cleaning the vents of your air conditioner is fairly easy. The quickest way it can be done is by using a handheld vacuum over the vent to suck all the dirt and debris.
On the off chance you do not own a handheld vacuum, you can use a small cleaning brush. This gives you much more control and precision than the vacuum and allows you to clean each nook and cranny of the air vent.
When you clean a ceiling vent, the dust and debris from the air vent can get into your eyes and nose, so use proper protective gear and cover them appropriately.
The air vents of most portable air conditioners can be cleaned as frequently as you see fit. Most homeowners tend to clean the air vents in their homes every four to six months. However, if you have allergies, cleaning them every month would be best.
A clean air vent can prevent dust and other particles from making their way into your home and causing lung problems or other respiratory issues. Keeping the vents clean also reduces the chance of potential damages that may call for expensive repairs and services.
Tip
Apart from cleaning the air vents, you must check them for any air leaks. Air leaks can cause the hot air to flow back into the house, making the air conditioner much less effective. If you find any air leaks, seal them immediately with high-quality sealants.
Conclusion
As you may know, venting your portable air conditioner is more of a necessity than an option. Since a portable air conditioner works with or without windows, they are extremely versatile and this feature also broadens the venting options for these devices.
If the above-mentioned tips don't seem to work, use your creativity to find more practical ways to vent a portable AC unit. Or contact a professional technician to help you with the installation.
With that, I'll be signing off. I hope these tips make your life a whole lot "cooler."
Window air conditioners will need to be recharged as they age and leak. However, the process must be performed by a professional HVAC technician, as handling the refrigerant requires special equipment and certification. Plus, refrigerants are flammable and toxic if not handled with care.
Window air conditioners are the most popular heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems for individual rooms and small spaces.
Window air conditioner units work by drawing in warm air, passing it over evaporator coils that contain a refrigerant, and then expelling the cool air back into the room. However, over time, the refrigerant in a window air conditioner unit can get too low for the AC to run effectively.
That said, you might be wondering if you can recharge a window air conditioner yourself to restore its cooling power and perhaps save a few bucks. While refrigerant recharge is possible, it is not a do-it-yourself task. Hence, I always recommend hiring a professional HVAC technician to recharge window AC units.
That said, regular maintenance is important for window units to enjoy optimal cooling performance. So, make sure you clean or replace any dirty air filter, clean the condenser coils, and inspect the unit for any signs of damage.
To get started, here are some signs that your window AC requires a refrigerant recharge…
Signs That A Window Air Conditioner Needs To Be Recharged
1. Reduced Cooling Capacity
As your window air conditioner ages, it will start to be less effective in lowering the temperature of the room. To check the cooling capacity of the window AC, place your hand in front of the unit and feel the amount of cold air blowing. If you feel low air pressure or warm air, it’s high time you get the refrigerant recharged.
2. Your Electric Bill Is Higher Than The Usual
Another sign could be a high electricity bill, which can be due to leaking refrigerant. As it leaks, it will consume more powerand cost more money to run it. If your electric bill is unusually high, it may be an indication that you need to recharge your refrigerant. When that happens, check for any leaks and fix them immediately.
3. Ice Buildup On Evaporator Coil
A build-up of ice on the refrigerant line or evaporator coils can be another sign that you need to recharge your window air conditioner. Such a build-up of ice indicates that the refrigerant in your window AC units is leaking and freezing outside the refrigerant line or evaporator coil. When that happens, you will have to fix the leak and recharge the refrigerant of your window AC unit.
4. A Bubbling And Hissing Sound From The Refrigerant Line
Lastly, place your ear in front of the AC and check if there is a bubbling or hissing sound coming from the refrigerant. If you hear any bubbling and hissing sound, it indicates a leak. As such, you must fix the leak and recharge the window AC unit immediately.
All of these signs listed above can happen one at a time or even together at once. So, carefully observe them and recharge your window air conditioner even if you notice only one of the signs.
How To Recharge A Window Air Conditioner
Once you observe signs that your window AC unit may need to be recharged, you should know how to do that. If you are unsure of it, follow these easy steps on how to recharge a window air conditioner:
Step 1 - Turn Off The Unit
To prevent any unwanted accidents, turn off the unit and unplug AC power plugs and sockets.
Step 2 - Locate The Refrigerant Lines And Service Valves
Once you have removed the air conditioner from its place, dismantle the window AC unit using a screwdriver and locate the service valve. You will also find the refrigerant lines behind the unit, near the condenser coils.
Step 3 - Check For Leaks
After you locate the service valve, check for any leaks. Some easy ways to check for leaks;
Apply some soap over the refrigerant and start the unit; if you see any bubbles forming, it means there is a leak.
Use a leak detector, as it will give a visual or audio signal in case of a refrigerant leak.
Fill some fluorescent dye in the unit, turn it on, and then use an ultraviolet lamp or leak detection flashlight.
Nitrogen can also be used, but it will require the help of an expert as all the valves need to be closed off.
Step 4 - Attach The Refrigerant Hose To The Service Valve
Using the manual guide, locate the compressor. After finding it, attach the service valve to your kit. Also, attach the tap (valve) to the other free line.
Step 5 - Check The Pressure Gauge
Next, use a two-pressure valve gauge to check the pressure of the refrigerant. Check the window air conditioner unit's manual for the correct pressure gauge. Set the pressure according to the manual guide instruction. If you need help with how to do it, you can call a professional to check the pressure gauge, as it can get complicated.
Step 6 - Add Refrigerant
Now that you have checked the pressure gauge, you can add the refrigerant. You can do this by turning on the window AC unit and keeping it at the maximum setting. Connect the tap and service valve of the air conditioner to the freon tank, slowly add the refrigerant and recharge it.
Step 7 - Monitor The Pressure Gauge
Check the window AC unit's user manual for the required amount of refrigerant and monitor the pressure gauge accordingly. Once the gauge indicates reaching the required amount, decrease the unit power. Any extra refrigerant beyond what is required is a waste of resources.
Step 8 - Disconnect The Refrigerant Hose And Close The Service Valve
Plug out the air conditioner and disconnect the refrigerant hose by removing the tap and service valves connected to the freon tank. By doing this, you close the tap and service valves, and stop the flow of extra refrigerant into the air conditioning unit. Anything beyond the instructed level is a waste of refrigerant and money.
Step 9 - Turn On The Unit And Check For Leaks
You can turn on the unit again and check for leaks. If there are no leaks, your window AC will start cooling the room properly. However, if there is a leak, it will still cause a problem, indicating that the fix was improperly done and ineffective. As such, it will be best to hire experts, as the problem may be beyond your expertise.
When To Call A Professional
Knowing when to call a professional is important so that you do not damage the device even more with a DIY project. So, it is in situations like those listed below that you should get immediate professional help.
1. When There Is A Refrigerant Leak
It may be time to call a professional if your window AC unit is still not cooling after you have recharged it because of leaks in the unit. Fixing a leak can get complicated if you do not have the right tools and skills. Therefore, instead of troubling yourself with the work, hire a professional expert on window AC units.
2. When The Unit Is Still Not Cooling After Recharging.
You may have tried to recharge the refrigerant yourself; however, the cooling system may not work despite doing that. This could be due to several reasons. For example, it could be the depletion of Freon that needs replacing. If that happens, you should call a professional to diagnose it, as the problem could be due to other issues.
3. When The Unit Is Making Strange Noises
If you hear a strange noise coming from the Window AC unit, the problem might not just be about leaks and leaking refrigerant. For instance, it could be the case that there is a broken part inside the window air conditioner, and it will have to be replaced. In such a case, it will be more beneficial to call and get professional help, as diagnosing an air conditioner requires expertise.
Tips For Maintaining Your Window Air Conditioner
Once you recharge your window AC unit, maintaining it from time to time will be crucial so that it does not break again. Here are some simple tips on how to maintain your window air conditioner.
1. Regularly Clean Or Replace the Air Filter
Keeping a timely schedule for cleaning the air conditioner is important. To clean the unit, fill a spray bottle with water and add some hydrogen peroxide. After that, spray the mixture in front and at the back of the unit. The hydrogen peroxide mixture works as a cleaning agent for the unit. You must turn the unit off before you do that.
A window AC has a removable air filter that collects dust and other particles. You can remove the air filter inside the unit and clean it with water. Once it's dry, place it back and turn on the window AC.
Tip
If the air filter is too dirty and cannot be cleaned, replace the air filter with a new filter.
2. Keep The Unit Away From Direct Sunlight
Another way to maintain your window air conditioner is to keep the unit away from direct sunlight. As direct sunlight will heat the unit both outside and inside, the cooling will be less effective. Therefore, see if you can place your window AC in a place where it would not be exposed to too much sunlight and heat.
3. Clean The Coils and Fins
It would be best to clean the coils and fins regularly, as they can become less effective with the accumulation of dirt. As the coils and fins in the unit can get bent, you will have to straighten them if that happens, as it can lead to premature breaking. Take a knife or fin comb and wear proper gloves to comb through the bent areas. Slowly and carefully straighten all the bent areas as best as you can.
4. Keep The Room Well-Ventilated
Lastly, you have to keep the room well-ventilated when you use a window air conditioner so that the cooling effect can be optimized with a better flow of air in the room.
In order to ventilate the room, keep the windows open and close the doors that lead into other rooms. This will result in more effective cooling as there will be better airflow around the room.
FAQs About Your Window AC Unit
What is Chlorodifluoromethane?
Chlorodifluoromethane (CFC-22 or R-22) is a colorless, odorless gas belonging to the family of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). It was used as a refrigerant in air conditioning and refrigeration systems due to its ability to absorb and release heat efficiently.
However, it was later discovered that CFCs were harmful to the environment. For instance, releasing this gas into the air can deplete the ozone layer, thereby exposing the environment to UV radiation.
Hence, nowadays, alternative refrigerants like hydrofluorocarbons (HFCs like 1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane) and hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) are used in newer window AC units. These refrigerants are not fluorophores, but they do contain fluorine atoms, which give them their unique properties.
What does the United States Environmental Protection Agency state about Window Air Conditioners?
The United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulates the use of AC units to reduce the environmental impact caused by their functioning. One of the key regulations is the Energy Star program, stating that an Energy Star-certified window AC consumes about 9% less energy than standard models.
One of its guidelines also mentions the safe disposal of HVAC equipment, as they contain refrigerants and other chemicals that can harm the environment. As such, EPA recommends proper recycling and disposal at designated facilities instead of dumping your old ACs in landfills.
How does refrigerant work?
Refrigerants work by changing phases from a liquid to a gas and back to liquid again in a continuous cycle, absorbing and releasing heat in the process.
Final Words
That said, I tried my best to show an easy way to recharge your window air conditioner. You can follow these easy steps mentioned above for a step-by-step guide on how to recharge your window AC unit.
Along with that, you must regularly maintain your window unit in order to avoid the need to recharge. Without a proper schedule for maintenance, your window air conditioner unit will break sooner than you expect and cause problems. So, clean and follow a maintenance routine as regularly as possible.
Lastly, some of the problems with your window AC unit will require professional help as it will require special tools and expertise. Based on the severity of the problem, you should hire an expert on window AC so that they can fix the problem.
To clean AC coils, turn off the power and remove the cover of the condenser or evaporator unit. Then, wearing gloves, remove large debris by hand before spraying the coil cleaner. Leave the cleaner for ten minutes before rinsing it with water.
Air conditioner coil cleaning is part of the regular maintenance that should be undertaken at least once a year.
Dirty AC coils can affect the functioning of the system, reducing its efficiency and leading to higher power bills. Fortunately, cleaning dirty coils is one of those maintenance activities that can be performed without professional help.
And this guide will help you understand how to easily clean air conditioning coils. So, let's get started!
What Are The Main Components Of An HVAC System?
Having proper information regarding the various components of your air conditioner and their respective functions is vital when cleaning the coils. Air conditioners have several components, but three of these are the most important. These include the evaporator, condenser, and line set.
1. The Evaporator
The evaporator is situated indoors over the air handler or furnace and controls the amount of refrigerant that passes through its coil. This coil has a larger diameter at the end, which results in reduced pressure and causes the temperature and boiling point of the refrigerant to go down significantly.
Usually, the temperature of the coil is much higher than the boiling point of the refrigerant. Because of this, the refrigerant turns into a gas that can absorb heat very well. It absorbs the heat from the hot air in your home before entering the condenser.
Once this happens, the humidity in the air gets deposited on the coil, and when condensation takes place, it goes into the drain pan at the bottom. Finally, the pipe attached to the pan discharges it as wastewater into the soil.
2. The Condenser
The condenser is the unit responsible for powering the entire cooling operation. Once the refrigerant absorbs heat from the hot air in your home, it goes back to the condenser. While doing so, it goes through the different coils surrounding the compressor.
These coils are cooled by the AC fan pulling air across them, and when that happens, the refrigerant cools down and reverts to a liquid state. At the same time, the compressor increases the pressure on the refrigerant, leading to a rise in its boiling point. The liquid refrigerant is passed into the copper line and reaches the coil, from where the process can begin again.
3. The Line Set
The line set comprises a couple of copper tubes that transport the refrigerant between the evaporator and the condenser. One insulated tube is larger and is known as the suction side or low side and carries the refrigerant from the evaporator to the condenser.
Then there is the other tube, which is smaller and is known as the liquid line or high side and carries the refrigerant from the condenser to the evaporator.
Why Should You Clean Your AC Coils?
Debris, dust, dirt, and other pollutants can accumulate on the surfaces of your air conditioning coils due to factors like airflow, moisture, and tightly installed components. As more and more of these substances accumulate on the coils over time, it can reduce the heat removal capacity of your air conditioner.
In certain situations, the air conditioner coils can get so dirty that they can completely block airflow, resulting in higher energy bills due to reduced energy efficiency. Additionally, an air conditioner’s coils that have become dirty will cause the air conditioning system to work harder, reducing its operational lifespan.
It can also lead to component damage, which will require costly repairs. Here are some problems that can occur if you do not keep the air conditioning coils clean.
1. Higher Operating Temperatures
Accumulation of debris and dirt can put your air conditioning system under strain, causing various parts like compressors and fans to work harder. These will then operate at higher temperatures to make the house cooler.
2. Reduction In Comfort Levels
Besides reducing the indoor temperature of your home and cooling it down, an AC unit removes humidity to make the space more comfortable. But if the coils are dirty, the efficiency of the air conditioner can be significantly reduced, and higher humidity levels can make it quite uncomfortable to stay in the room.
3. Lower Cooling Efficiency
When dirt and dust build-up on the surfaces of the AC coils, they have to work much harder, and the heat transfer will be less efficient. This reduces the overall performance of the air conditioning system. And a malfunctioning AC unit can even harm the environment.
For instance, if the coolant is leaking, it can enter the atmosphere resulting in air pollution and posing a health hazard.
4. Higher Cooling Costs
With the reduced cooling capacity of the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning system, you can expect higher operational costs. Thus, you will need to spend more on maintaining better indoor air quality.
5. Faster Wearing Down Of The Air Conditioner
If you have a blocked evaporator, the compressor has to run at higher temperatures, which can put the entire air conditioning system under stress. I would like to point out here that the compressor is among the most expensive items to replace in an air conditioner. So, keeping it clean can help ensure that it continues operating optimally without needing frequent repairs.
6. System Replacements Or Repairs
When various parts and components come under stress, the utility of your air conditioner is reduced, and the unit can suffer from breakdowns. In such situations, you will need to hire professionals, replace damaged parts, and may even need to replace the air conditioning system.
How Frequently Should You Clean Your AC Coils?
Air conditioner coils should be cleaned when they become dirty, but this can vary depending on various factors. These factors include how often the AC unit is used, whether there is a filter, the frequency with which filters are changed, the number of people in the household, etc.
I strongly recommend getting an HVAC professional to conduct an inspection at least once each year before the arrival of summer. The professional can perform maintenance activities, such as cleaning the air conditioner coils, changing the AC filters, and conducting proper tests to ensure the system runs fine.
Cleaning Air Conditioner Coils
Materials And Tools Required
The first thing to ensure when undertaking an AC coil cleaning project is that you have the right tools for the purpose. Fortunately, many of the items required for such a project are present in most households. The rest can be easily obtained from any nearby hardware store. Here is a list of the tools and materials required:
Gloves
Drill or screwdriver
Nylon scrub brush
Shop vacuum
Flashlight
Garden hose or pressure washer with sprayer attachment
AC coil cleaner
Fin comb
Safety Precautions
When using a coil cleaner to clean air conditioner coils, it is important to follow certain precautions since it is a chemical substance that poses a health hazard. Make sure to use a face shield, safety glasses, and chemical-resistant clothing and gloves. Also, having proper ventilation is crucial when working with a coil cleaning solution.
If proper ventilation cannot be ensured, make sure to use an organic vapor cartridge or NIOSH mechanical filter in a respirator. Also, remember that air conditioners operate at 240 volts, so you must turn off the power before cleaning.
Accessing The Air Conditioning Coils
As I mentioned above, in air conditioning systems, the condenser coils are located outside, while the evaporator coil is situated inside. The evaporator coil is mounted in a separate cabinet on top of the furnace. Alternatively, it may be placed within an air handler unit or the coil of the fan.
While air conditioner units can vary in their construction, they usually have an access panel that can be removed using a screwdriver or a nut driver. The condenser coils present in the outdoor unit go around the various components within the indoor unit and act as side walls for the condenser unit.
There may also be a coil guard protecting the condenser coils, or they may be completely exposed. In some units, the coil is covered by an outer protective panel made of louvered metal and may not be easily visible.
Once the coils are accessible, you can determine the best way to clean them, depending on the recommendations of the manufacturing company.
Coil Cleaning Methods For Different Components
Cleaning The Condenser Coils
1. Turning Off The Power
Before doing anything else, turn off the power to the AC unit by disabling the circuit breaker, which will be located close to the unit in a small metal box. Depending on the type of circuit breaker, you may need to pull out the fuses or push a lever down to turn off the entire system.
2. Removing The Top And Side Covers Of The Condenser Unit
Use a screwdriver or cordless drill to remove the bolts securing the top cover, then do the same for the side cover. Keep the screws aside carefully, so they don't get misplaced.
3. Removing The Condenser Fan Assembly (Optional Step)
Whether you need to remove the condenser fan from the AC unit will depend on the model of the condenser unit. Removing the fan assembly will make accessing the air conditioner condenser coils easier, but it will require a great deal of expertise.
In some instances, it is possible to detach the wiring harness of the condenser fan from that of the unit easily without effort. But if the process seems too complicated, simply use a step stool to place the fan assembly on while cleaning the condenser coils.
4. Cleaning Up And Inspecting The Unit
Since the condenser unit is located outside, there may be leaves, sticks, hair, and other debris inside it, which will need to be removed. Make sure to wear gloves when doing so to ensure safety. Once the debris has been removed, check for problems like loose or damaged wires, broken pipes, or corrosion.
If such problems are present, you should call a technician to get them resolved.
5. Using A Vacuum To Clean Up The Dust
After all the debris that can be removed by hand has been removed, it is time to use a shop vacuum to get rid of the dust that remains. Use the extension attachment to clean up all the corners and hard-to-reach areas properly.
6. Fixing The Fins
The heat exchanger of the unit has fins that can easily get bent or crushed. If that has happened with your unit, use a fin comb that has fine metal tines to straighten the fins. While this is not mandatory, fixing the fins can improve the efficiency of the unit.
7. Cleaning The Protective Grill
Debris, such as twigs and leaves, can get trapped in the protective grill located on the exterior of the AC unit. You will need to remove such debris by hand and then shine a light through the grill to determine whether it is clean or not.
8. Using The Coil Cleaner On The Condenser Coils
After removing the dust from the condenser coils, use the garden hose or pressure washer to gently wash them down. Spray the cleaner within the unit, making sure to reach all four corners and even through the fins. Then, adjust the angle of the sprayer so that it releases a wide spray without too much pressure.
Once you’re done spraying, let the spray and water sit for about ten minutes.
9. Using Water To Clean The Spray
After five to ten minutes have passed, start spraying water using the hose from the inside out, working from top to bottom. Use the sprayer attachment and keep the spray wide to prevent any damage to the fins. Move to the other side after completing one side, and finally, wash the entire cabinet from the outside.
While doing this, avoid directing the spray inside the unit, as that can force the dirt and debris back inside the air conditioner.
10. Reassembling The AC unit
While the condenser coil is now clean, there are a few steps you can take to ensure that it remains clean for an extended period. One way is to prune shedding plants or deciduous trees growing close to the unit. Or you can install a mesh leaf guard over the unit to prevent debris from entering through the top.
Before reassembling the unit, let it dry out completely. Once it is dry, you can reinstall the fan and the side and top covers. Replace the screws and tighten them before turning the machine back on.
Now, let's look at how to clean the air conditioner evaporator coils located indoors.
Cleaning The Evaporator Coils
Cleaning the evaporator coil is similar to cleaning the condenser coils, but there is one major difference. Since this coil is located indoors, you cannot use a garden hose to wash it clean.
1. Turning Off The Power To The Unit And Locating The Evaporator Coils
Turn the power off at the distribution board where the circuit breaker is located before you do anything else. To locate the evaporator coil, remove the access panel on the indoor AC unit by removing the screws that hold it in place.
2. Inspecting The AC Coils
The evaporator coils are within the air handler and appear as flattened tubes. You will notice that the evaporator coil assembly is shaped like the alphabet A. And the inner area of this assembly is where the maximum amount of dirt will have accumulated.
Tip
It can be easy to get confused about where the different components go, especially when undertaking such a project for the first time. I highly recommend photographing the inside of the assembly before removing anything. This will make it easy to return the components after the cleaning process.
3. Cleaning The Coils Using A Nylon Brush
To begin cleaning, use a nylon bristle brush to remove large pieces of dirt and debris deposited on the coils. When brushing the aluminum fins, work from the top to the bottom while moving the brush along the length of the fins.
In this case, you need not focus on getting the coils completely clean and should just try to remove large chunks of dirt from the assembly. Once these pieces fall out, they can be vacuumed easily, but vacuuming the fragile fins can easily damage them.
4. Fixing The Fins
Similar to how you straightened the condenser coil fins, use a fin comb to fix them here as well. Just be careful when doing so, as the delicate fins are highly prone to damage.
5. Spraying The Foam Cleaner On The Coils
When spraying the foam coil cleaner within the evaporator coil assembly, use a large amount of the cleaner before leaving it for about ten minutes. If instructions are provided on the can of the cleaning agent, stick to them when cleaning the indoor evaporator coils.
After ten minutes have passed, use the nylon brush to remove the dirt particles and other debris left on the coils of the evaporative cooler.
6. Rinsing The Coils With Water
Once the larger dirt pieces have been dislodged, use a spray bottle to spray water onto the coils and rinse them properly. Avoid using a large amount of water, and use the shop vacuum on wet mode to remove excess water. You can do this multiple times until the coils are completely clean.
7. Putting The Coil Assembly Back Together
You need to let the coils dry properly before reassembling everything back, for which the access panel needs to be left open. Using a soft towel to dry the coils can help speed up the process a bit, but do not use a blow dryer, as that can damage the AC coils.
Once the assembly is dry, replace the cover and secure the screws back into place. Then, turn on the power at the breaker box and check how the system is running.
Alternative Solutions If Cleaning The AC Coils Doesn't Work
In certain cases, your air conditioning unit may not function properly even after cleaning the coils. In such cases, other solutions may be needed, such as replacing the coils.
However, replacing the coils of the AC unit will depend on the air conditioner model and can be quite costly. A better solution might be to replace the unit itself. The reason is that the cost of coil replacement, in addition to the cost of repairs and regular maintenance, will be more than the cost of a new AC.
And a new unit will be more efficient, helping you save money while providing better cooling with less energy use.
Alternatively, the AC coils may not be the problem, and there may be other reasons why the AC unit is not functioning properly. Such issues can include frozen coils, clogged condensers, dirty air filters, damaged compressors, etc.
If both the coils and other components are in good condition, other factors may affect the efficiency of the air conditioner unit. Houses that are not professionally sealed have air leaks because of which heat can enter inside, preventing them from being cooled properly.
Similarly, the roof or attic may not have been insulated for many years, allowing hot air to enter the house. Keep in mind that depending on when it was installed and the type of installation, insulation will deteriorate with time. So, you may need to get the insulation upgraded.
Final Thoughts
Knowing how to clean air conditioner coils can be handy if you want to improve the cooling ability of your AC quickly. But observing proper precautions is crucial when doing so, such as turning off the power before touching any electronic component and wearing protective gear when handling coil cleaners.
If you're unsure about the process, I recommend hiring an HVAC professional who, in addition to knowing how to clean air conditioner coils, possesses specialized tools for the job. In some cases, hiring such a technician may even be unavoidable, for instance, if the coil fins are so damaged that they cannot be fixed using a fin comb.
And such professionals can inspect the unit for other issues, so they can be dealt with timely, helping avoid costly repairs later on.
Leaks from refrigerators can be caused by several things, including a frozen water supply line, an unleveled refrigerator, a clogged drain, or specifically damaged parts that require replacement.
Even the Best Refrigeratorsand the Best Mini Freezersmay experience water leaks if not properly maintained or unchecked.
Let's find out why our fridge is leaking water and try easy-fix solutions.
More than just the annoying water puddling, a leaking fridge can lead to major kitchen accidents or more expensive repairs and plumbing if the underlying cause is not fixed.
Try these simple fixes for your leaky fridge first
1. Leaky or Frozen Water Supply Line
The water supply line is typically located on the kitchen floor, sink, cabinet, basement, or crawl space near the fridge.
Check the supply line's connection points and the shut-off valve that connects to the fridge.
Once you see this flexible plastic hose or braided metal between the refrigerator and the wall, check if the water supply line that sends water to the ice maker and water filter is frozen, wet, or dripping.
If it is, then you've found the cause of your leak.
How to Fix
Find the defrost drain hose or water line. Most are behind the refrigerator's rear panel, near the evaporator coils.
If frozen, try flushing the drain inside the freezer with warm water, using a turkey baster, a small funnel, a pipe cleaner, or a bottle brush.
If the water line itself is faulty, disconnect and change them. You can even leave the water supply connection turned off and continue using your fridge (just without using the water and ice dispensers).
2. Improper Tilting
This is possible because of improper installation or the recently moved fridge.
When internal valve connections and nuts are loose—or the fridge isn’t properly level from side to side, the drain pan will eventually spill water over one side.
If your fridge needs adjusting, here are easy steps you can follow accordingly.
How to Fix
Remove or carefully pull the grille or kick plate from the bottom front of the refrigerator.
Identify the two front legs. The front of the refrigerator should be 1/4 higher than the back legs.
Use a crescent wrench to adjust or perfectly level your fridge legs until you get the angle right. Clockwise to increase and versa.
3. Clogged Defrost Drain
This defrost drain is typically at the bottom and back of your freezer, which often gets clogged due to having a stuffed freezer or from the accumulated bits of food and other debris.
If this drain hole gets blocked, the coils and water dispensermay not work right, and that can lead to condensation building up.
This also prevents water from draining into the pan during the normal defrost cycle.
How to Fix
Create a clear path by rearranging your freezer and ensuring the defrost drain isn't blocked.
To clear this clog, use a turkey baster or flush warm water through the blocked defrost drain. Use anything else that will allow you to squeeze water with some force into the drain pipe.
If symptoms persist, check further down the components of the defrost circuit.
4. Drain Pan Damage
This is also one of the most common causes of a fridge leaking water.
The fridge drain pan can also leak if it has a crack or is otherwise damaged
Note
The drain pan is at the bottom of your fridge, just above the floor.
It's normal for the drain pan to have some water in it when you slide it out, but it is unusual for this pan to develop any drain hole or crack, as this can be one cause of leaking water.
How to Fix
Remove the grille at the bottom front of the fridge to slide the drain pan out. You may also access it from the back wall.
Inspect it carefully (including the drain line) for any damage, leaks, or cracks.
A damaged drain pan can be fixed using a good quality water-resistant sealant. Replace them if necessary.
5. Inlet Tube or Valve Issues
The inlet valve at the back of your fridge supplies water to the ice maker.
To see if the inlet valve is the issue, turn off the water at the saddle valve and disconnect the supply tube. Hold the tube over a bucket and have someone turn on the saddle valve.
The inlet valve is probably causing the refrigerator leaks if the water flows from the pipe (fluid conveyance).
How to Fix
Using a screwdriver, unscrew the cover panel and screws that keep the valve in place.
Unplug the wiring and unfasten the adjustment screws that connect the water supply lines of the fridge.
Tighten the compression nuts on the valve to resolve the leak. However, in many cases, the valve must be replaced altogether.
6. Worn Out Door Seals
A door gasket on old refrigerators normally wears down over time.
The soft plastic seals (some made of natural rubber) running along the edges of your freezer or fridge door may lose their sealing qualities, which can cause moisture and water to escape from the fridge.
This can also happen when too much food and other gunk builds up on the seals.
When they can't seal off the fridge or freezer properly, humid air can enter, and ice starts melting. All that water can be yet another source of a fridge leak.
How to Fix
Remove all items and thoroughly defrost the freezer to see if something is blocking the seals.
Please give them a quick vacuum and a wipe with soapy water to remove possible dirt.
If steps 1 and 2 don't work, a new seal will be needed—which you will need to source from your refrigerator's manufacturer.
7. Defective Ice Maker
Lastly, a common problem for refrigerators is a defective ice maker. Sometimes, a part or component of the freezer itself breaks down.
You’ll most likely have to seek professional refrigerator maintenance in these cases. But before doing that, a few quick fixes can be done to solve the problem.
How to Fix
Take a look at your refrigerator's freezer compartment. If you notice ice buildup, pour a cup of hot water down its chute to clear the blockage.
The problem may have stemmed from the inlet valve that goes to the ice maker, a fill cup misalignment, or an expired water supply line—have these checked.
Recheck items 1-6 in this article, as those defects might be the root of this defective freezer. If the problem persists, seek help from a professional.
What Should I Do if My Refrigerator Is Still Leaking?
Recheck all parts or redo some quick fixes.
When there is still much water escaping from your refrigerator, even after you have looked into the possible cause, this problem might be caused by incorrectly replacing some parts or other issues.
Immediately stop using your fridge, shut it off, and either bring it to your local home appliance centers or schedule a home service if it is too heavy or built-in.
Avoid more expensive and serious damage repairs in the future by knowing when to call a professional appliance repair specialist for your refrigerator.
Take note of your fridge warranty coverage in the owner's manual, as it can help protect you by providing discounted repair and replacement services.
Refrigerator Leaking Water FAQs
Along with a quick fix for a leaking refrigerator, there are several questions that individuals who have had the same refrigerator issue frequently ask.
If you also have experienced dripping water out of your fridge, then read further.
When Do I Need a Professional to Fix My Fridge?
It might be time to hire a pro if you’ve tried all your DIY (Do It Yourself) repair options and the water line leaks.
A skilled appliance repair service saves you time and successfully resolves the leaking water damage.
It must be done immediately to prevent a small puddle problem from becoming a massive disaster.
Always visit a professional right away if you notice that your refrigerator is leaking coolant or freon rather than water dripping. This substance is harmful and must be disposed of.
Where Can I Find Refrigerator Parts?
You can frequently find the availability of refrigerator parts on the website or customer service of your refrigerator brand or in an online marketplace like Amazon.
You only need to explore the page and browse for the right parts to order online.
Keeping them working properly is essential, so use only model-specific parts, typically available from the local hardware store or the manufacturer.
As the keeper of food at home, our refrigerator is one of the most important pieces of equipment in the kitchen for keeping food safe.
To guarantee appropriate installation and repair, consult a professional if you need clarification on the required parts.
Does a Home Warranty Cover Refrigerator Leaks?
Your most-used appliances, particularly the fridge that keeps your perishable food items at a safe temperature, can be repaired and replaced with a home warranty.
A home warranty coverage can lessen the inconvenience of a leaking refrigerator and your other major appliance covered if it is past the manufacturer’s warranty (specified in the fridge owner’s manual).
It helps connect you with a local service provider and lowers your out-of-pocket cost for a repaired or new refrigerator.
Adding good fridge maintenance to your to-do list is part of good hygiene and helps prolong the life of your new fridge—this and good troubleshooting help resolve more than leaking water.
A freezer is one of the most reliable appliances you can find at home. It can store all your goodies and keep them cool for future use.
Is your freezer not freezing anymore? Are your mini freezers starting to fail? Then you've come to the right place!
Today, we will discuss why freezers stop freezing and how to fix them. If this sounds like something you're interested in, keep reading, and let's get started!
What Are the Reasons Why Your Freezer Is Not Freezing?
There are various reasons why even the best chest freezer could stop working correctly. We've listed some common reasons below that you must be aware of.
Don't worry because you don't have to replace your freezer and spend a ton of money.
1. Loose Door Seals
A part of refrigerators' daily wear and tear is the door gasket getting loose. When this happens, the door seal is less effective than before.
Cool air escapes from the freezer door, pulling warm air in. This affects all your produce insides, causing it to melt in worse cases.
2. No Air Circulation
Having too many items inside your freezer causes overloading. When this happens, there's airflow blockage and hardly any space left for air to circulate in.
The evaporator fan motor tends to work double time and break down from all the exhaustion.
3. Dirty Condenser Coils
Check your condenser coils and clean them at least every six months. Dirty coils tend to overwork the condenser fan motor, reducing its cooling capacity.
Make sure there's no build-up of dust and cobwebs around the coils.
4. Faulty Start Relay
A faulty start relay causes a freezer to keep turning on and off. When this happens, your freezer can't maintain a stable internal temperature.
Have the start relay replaced once you notice the problem becoming more persistent.
5. Freezer Is Overpacked
Too many things inside the freezer prevent cold air from circulating. More importantly, it tends to block the fan inside.
This could either mean a stubborn ice build-up or a warm freezer.
6. Compressor Coils Are Dirty
Dirty compressor coils result in a poor cooling system and a skyrocketing electricity bill. The compressors could be working double time to keep the freezer functioning.
7. The Thermostat Is Broken
A broken thermostat won't be able to accurately read your freezer's temperature. A thermostat might reflect a reading completely different from the actual temperature.
The contents of your freezer can either be too cold and have freezer burns, or too warm such that the contents will melt.
8. Internal Parts Are Malfunctioning
If you notice any persistent humming sound from your freezer, there might be problems with its internal parts.
This may cause your refrigerator to malfunction and freezer issues to surface. Whatever the reason, always have a professional inspect the job.
9. Door Isn't Properly Sealed
A simple dollar bill test can check your door's seal. If you can pull your dollar bill from the seal, then it means the doors are already loose.
How to Fix a Freezer That Isn't Cold Enough?
You can do a few simple fixes for the common freezer problems. We've shared some of them here to help you get started.
Step 1: Check the Setting Controls
Ensure that your freezer is operating at its optimal temperature. You can do this by checking what's indicated in the temperature control thermostat.
Try changing your refrigerator to the lowest setting to get your freezers to start circulating cold air. You can also turn it to the highest setting to melt any ice buildup.
Step 2: Clear Out the Freezer Shelves
You can boost cold air circulation by clearing out your freezer shelves. You might have an excess amount of containers inside, which causes overpacking.
Clean any dirt build-up, and get rid of any unused items.
Step 3: Clean the Condenser Coils
Check the condenser coils and make sure it's free from dust. Condenser coils are usually at the bottom of the back of a fridge.
You can use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of any dirt build-up. Make sure to set a freezer maintenance schedule to lessen any problems.
Step 4: Eliminate Excess Frost Buildup
If you notice any built-up ice on your freezer parts and interior walls, it's time to start chipping them away.
Modern freezers and modern refrigerators today have defrosting capabilities that can help prevent ice build-up.
Additional Tips to Keep Your Freezer Cold and Working Properly
No one wants a broken freezer. They're one of the most important kitchen appliances you must have at home for storing and freezing food.
Here are a few tips to keep your frozen unit working fine all the time.
Review the Owner’s Manual for Maintenance Instructions
Always check the model-specific maintenance recommendations in the owner's manual. This is one of the most important things a freezer owner should do.
Doing this prevents freezer problems outside the usual normal wear and tear. Based on the recommendations, you'll know how to use and maintain your refrigerator better.
Keep Fridge and Freezer Components Clean
Set a freezer maintenance schedule by cleaning both the inside and outside. Make sure the insides are clean and free of unnecessary things.
You should regularly clean the outsides with the help of a vacuum that has a crevice attachment. Some components you need to watch out for include the following:
Freezer's evaporator fan and fan blades
Freezer door switch and gasket
Control board and back panel
Condenser and evaporator fan motor
Freezer compressor
Periodically Check the Freezer’s Thermostat
Make sure the thermostat reflects an accurate reading at all times. Sometimes, the thermostat can reflect a different reading from the actual temperature.
Sometimes, your freezer can feel a lot warmer than what's indicated. When this is the case, you can use a separate device to arrive at a proper reading.
Ensure Airways Are Open
Don't block the fans and airways in your refrigerator and freezer to ensure proper air circulation.
You can do this by rearranging the contents of your freezer or doing a general cleanup. You can also remove dust or ice accumulated on the vents.
Eliminate Leaky Door Seals
A proper freezer door seal keeps all the cold air inside. It ensures all the food inside remains frozen and cold as intended.
More importantly, it ensures the freezer stays at its optimal freezer temperature. Luckily, a simple gasket replacement can easily fix problematic door seals.
Freezer Not Freezing Related FAQs
Before we leave with our parting words, we’ve answered some of the FAQs we get about problematic freezers.
Keep reading because you might learn a thing or two about why your freezer is not freezing anymore.
How Long Do Freezers Last?
On average, freezers can last you for as long as 11 years.
The same goes with a combination refrigerator freezer and the best upright freezers, as long as you follow the manufacturer’s recommendation.
Your freezer can reach up to 20 years if you maintain it properly. This means having the freezer unit quickly diagnosed and easily fixed when a problem arises.
What Are Other Signs the Freezer Isn’t Working?
There are other telltale signs that your freezer isn’t functioning properly, such as the following:
Excessive frost build-up in the freezer
Freezer is no longer freezing, causing all the ice to melt and leak
Overheating compressor
Persistent loud motor sounds from the evaporator fan
Freezer burn on the containers and food
Make sure to watch out for these signs so you can start working on the DIY fixes. More importantly, you know when to schedule a service call when the problem becomes more severe and persistent.
Can I Fix a Freezer on My Own?
If your freezer stopped working, there are a few DIY fixes you can do. However, we recommend calling a professional when the problem becomes too much for you.
Internal parts, such as the compressor or evaporator fan, must be replaced. Cases like these require a professional to get the job done.
No need to replace your old freezer just yet, especially if it's still worth saving. Often, a freezer not freezing can be because of various reasons a DIY solution can fix.
If there's too much frost in your freezer and it's affecting how it functions, try the different solutions we've named here.
We hope you enjoyed this article. Let us know in the comments how you were able to fix your freezer problems. We'd love to hear about it!
Are you looking for a refrigerator with a water and ice dispenser built in? Not sure if it's better or worse than just ordinary tap water?
We have a complete guide on integrated ice and water dispensers in refrigerators and why you should consider them for your next purchase or skip them.
We'll also discuss how they work and whether they're worth the extra purchase price that you'll have to shell out when buying them.
What are the Pros and Cons of a Refrigerator Water Dispenser?
You might be wondering what the advantages and disadvantages of buying a refrigerator with a built-in ice and water dispenser feature are. Here are your main considerations.
Advantages of Ice and Water Dispensers
Buying a refrigerator with a water and ice dispenser offers great advantages that you should consider. Most are related to offering convenience and better integration into your daily life.
Convenience
The single most significant advantage to having ice and water dispensers in your refrigerator compartment is how convenient and quick they are to integrate into your lifestyle.
Imagine you're hosting a party, and people need fresh ice or crushed ice for their drinks. If they're parched, they'll probably need some water too.
Without a dispenser, you'll need to fill pitchers beforehand to keep their thirst quenched.
An integrated ice maker and water dispenser will allow for easy access and make it convenient for you to keep refilling.
No need to grab ice from the freezer every time someone needs it. You won't have to scramble to place a new batch of water to freeze, hoping it gets cold on time.
Even if you're home alone and prefer to drink plenty of cold water, you only need to get ice and water from the automatic ice maker and the door-mounted water dispenser.
Improved Taste and Smell
Since most water dispensers tend to be equipped with refrigerator filters, filtered water tastes and smells better than ordinary tap water.
Who doesn't prefer a clean, cold glass of water that you can easily place ice in using the in-door ice maker? You wouldn't want to go back to a lukewarm, bad-tasting, unfiltered glass from the tap after your first sip.
It also has the added benefit of being safer because the filters can remove dangerous contaminants like lead and mercury.
Appealing
If you plan to sell your home or apartment unit in the future, having a newer refrigerator that has attractive features like a refrigerator water dispenser will help raise the property value.
Prospective buyers will love to see a new refrigerator in their future home to help their own family stay hydrated, which can positively affect their buying decision.
Disadvantages of Ice and Water Dispensers
However, there are external water dispenser cons that you should also keep in mind before going out and outright buying a refrigerator with a built-in water dispenser and ice maker.
Only Available in Expensive Models
Buying water and ice dispensers in your refrigerator can cost up to $200 more than refrigerators without any internal water dispenser.
This means that most refrigerators with water and ice dispensers have a higher initial appliance cost that you'll have to pay upfront.
Pricey Operation Cost
Aside from the initial cost, you'll also have to deal with the higher annual operating cost. You'll have to spend on replacement filters, extra electricity, and increased water supply concerns.
This includes the electricity bill and the $50-$100 cost for replacement filters.
The annual operating expenses can vary depending on the type of refrigerator and what dispenser model they have.
Routine and Filtering Mechanisms Maintenance Required
Aside from changing out filters, you'll have the added hassle of needing more routine maintenance for the external dispenser or internal dispenser.
This includes swapping out the filters and even turning off the refrigerator to thaw the water line when it gets frozen.
Typical Mechanical Issues
Many models of refrigerators with water dispensers also tend to have more issues than standard refrigerators.
You will most likely have to invest in an appliance repair service contract or service plan so that you don't have to pay every time you make a service call.
Fun Fact
Many refrigerator models with dispensers have lock-out buttons and are put through a torture test to make them childproof.
Reduced Fridge Capacity
The housings in many refrigerators that store the water dispenser and the mechanisms needed for it are usually stored on the top shelf.
This reduces the overall storage space or storage capacity that you have to store other items you'll need.
How Refrigerator Water Dispensers Work
After reading about the advantages and disadvantages of a water and ice dispenser in your refrigerator, you might want to learn how they work to complete your education.
Connecting the Refrigerator and Plumbing Lines
On the user's end, all you can see is the external water dispenser poking out. Inside, it is connected to a cold water pipe located somewhere near the refrigerator.
This pipe is usually a copper or plastic supply tube connected to an external water supply.
Internal vs. External Water and Ice Dispensers
While they both connect the same way to an external water supply, external and internal water dispensers look different from the outside. Here are the main differences.
An internal water dispenser can only be accessed by opening the refrigerator door. This has the advantage of looking more minimalistic outside but letting cold air out.
External dispensers have a slot on the refrigerator door to release chilled water and ice. This doesn't look as seamless but is easier to use overall. You won't need to open the refrigerator door.
Storage Capacity
One extra disadvantage that external water dispensers have over internal dispensers is that they take up more freezer space than internal dispensers.
This is a common disadvantage, especially on a side-by-side refrigerator, which is the most common model that has a drinking water dispenser.
Consider
If you want more freezer space, try getting a standalone mini freezer.
What Types of Refrigerators Use a Water and Ice Dispenser?
Here are the different types of refrigerators that dispense ice and drinking water:
Side-by-side refrigerator
French Door refrigerator
Single Door refrigerator (less common)
The reason for the side-by-side and French Door refrigerators being the fridges of choice when installing drinking water and ice dispensers is because of their two-door design.
They're also sleek and can come in standard or counter-depth refrigerator sizes to blend in more seamlessly with your kitchen.
It allows for the dispenser to be attached to the freezer door side, which is where the dispensing mechanism is.
Refrigerator Water Dispenser FAQs
After learning more about how refrigerator ice and water dispensers work and their pros and cons, you might still have questions about them.
We’ve answered the most commonly asked ones below.
Is Fridge Water Better than Sink Water?
In terms of taste, smell, and safety, refrigerator water is better than water from your kitchen sink. This is because of the filter that they use. However, it isn’t as safe as bottled water.
This is because the water in water bottles goes through multi-stage filtration systems instead of the simple single-stage filters on fridges.
How Do I Fill My Fridge Water and Ice Dispenser?
Each refrigerator has a different way of filling the water dispenser and ice maker. Look at the instruction manual that comes with the refrigerator to verify the instructions.
Many models will have a water tank that can be found on the refrigerator side, where you will refill the water. Some also use the water from this tank to use for the ice maker.
Many water tanks cannot take hot water, drinks that use hot water like coffee or hot tea, and anything except room temp water. Adding this might damage your refrigerator.
Therefore, you should get either an electric kettle or a gas stove kettle to make drinks that require hot water.
Does a Fridge with Water and Ice Dispensers Require Plumbing?
Again, this depends on the make and model of the refrigerator that you’re getting. The dispensers that only put out water don’t need any plumbing.
For ice makers, some models use the same tank as the water dispenser and don’t need plumbing.
However, other models use a separate water line that needs plumbing. Check your instruction manual to see which connection type your specific refrigerator uses.
Conclusion: Is a Fridge Water Dispenser Worth the Money?
Many of the best refrigerators have integrated water and ice dispensers. While they can be pricey in both upfront cost and maintenance, they add convenience to your lifestyle.
We recommend getting a dispenser if you can afford it. The convenience of just getting cold and clean water and customized ice on demand is definitely worth the money.
One of, if not the most important kitchen appliance is a refrigerator. It keeps our food and drinks chilled and fresh at all times, even if it's just mini freezers.
We've relied on them for so long one can't imagine a life without this kitchen appliance.
Is your refrigerator not cooling properly? Today, we'll explain why they might not be cooling and how to fix them.
Reasons Why Your Refrigerator Is Not Working + Solutions
You don't always have to buy a new fridge when your current one doesn't cool properly. There are a few simple solutions for it to start cooling and have fresh food again!
1. Temperature Control Is Improperly Set
The number one rule to owning a fridge is knowing what temperature it should be in. It might be running too high or too low, which can cause many problems.
How to Fix
Check the owner's manual for the proper temperature setting of your fridge and freezer compartment.
Adjust the temperature controls based on the desired temperature setting. Check if each compartment has separate controls.
Wait several hours or up to a full day until both the freezer and fridge produce cold air.
2. Condenser Coils Are Dirty
If your fridge stops cooling properly, it's probably because of dirty condenser coils and a defective condenser fan. The dust and dirt are usually very visible.
How to Fix
Check the condenser coils for any accumulated dust or cobwebs.
Pull the refrigerator out from its position and clean the dirty condenser coils using a vacuum cleaner.
Wait and check until the fridge regains its proper cooling temperature. In the meantime, you can put baking soda in the refrigerator to keep it odor free.
3. Door Gaskets Are Not Clean
The door gaskets on your fridge can wear down, especially if dirt and food are stuck in between.
When this happens, the door seal of your fridge stops working properly, and cool air escapes. This drastically affects your refrigerator's temperature.
How to Fix
Prepare a mixture of warm soapy water in a separate container. Grab a sponge or any non-abrasive cleaner.
Wipe your refrigerator's door gasket until they're clean. Go through each section properly.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all dirt is removed and the refrigerator has a tight seal when closed.
4. Food Items Are Blocking the Air Vents
Rearranging the contents of your refrigerators can help maintain the cold temperature inside.
Your fridge might not be cooling because containers block the air vents.
How to Fix
Check where the air vents are in your refrigerator.
Remove any huge containers blocking the air vents and move them elsewhere. Also, check for any large ice particles you should chip away.
Alternatively, you can do a general refrigerator cleaning for more space.
5. Refrigerator Is Understocked
Your refrigerators work twice as hard to keep your appliance cold if it's severely understocked and nearly empty.
To achieve its optimal performance, stock your fridge three-fourths of the way.
How to Fix
Stock up your refrigerator with your favorite food and beverages.
Add water pitchers if you don't have enough items to put inside.
In all cases, be careful not to overstuff your refrigerator to ensure air can circulate properly.
6. Door Gaskets Are Faulty and Need Replacement
Sometimes, your refrigerator's door gasket can still end up faulty even after cleaning them. It means they already need to be replaced.
A good test is to put a dollar bill between the door and see if the bill slips easily.
How to Fix
Look for a door gasket that's for your refrigerator model. Clean the new gasket by soaking it in hot water.
Carefully remove the old door gasket from your refrigerator. Scrub clean the door so no dirt will stick to the new gasket.
Install the new gasket, making sure to follow any installation instructions.
7: Refrigerator Is Out of Level
Your refrigerator should always be level. It can keep your food cold, increases the average lifespan of your appliance, and keeps it shut properly.
It ensures that that door switch functions properly to keep your fridge cooling all day.
How to Fix
Check each side of your appliance using a laser level.
Adjust the level accordingly until your door shuts properly.
8. Clearances Are Not Maintained
Make sure your refrigerator has enough clearance on all sides. This ensures your refrigerator receives enough air circulation, even from the back.
More importantly, it ensures that both evaporator fans and your condenser fan aren’t overworked.
Recommendation
A clearance of 3/8 inch on the sides and 1 inch on the back of your refrigerator is recommended.
How to Fix
Check the recommended clearance for your refrigerator on the owner's manual.
Adjust your refrigerator based on the clearance, and be careful when moving your equipment.
9. Location Is Affecting the Cooling Capacity
The cooling capacity of your refrigerator is affected by where you position your fridge. If you place your fridge outdoors, it takes twice the effort to cool the insides.
The same idea applies when you position your fridge beside hot appliances like your stove.
How to Fix
Consider changing the location of your refrigerator. Place it under a cool and shaded area if it's positioned outdoors.
Ensure enough air vents and fans for cool air circulation if it's around other appliances indoors.
Use a heat-insulating material to protect your fridge from external heat.
10. Electric Supply Is Faulty
One of the reasons why most refrigerators aren't cooling properly is that they do not receive enough power from the power source.
It could also mean that the plug is too loose on your refrigerators.
How to Fix
Check the owner's manual for the recommended power source of your refrigerator.
Make sure the plug isn't too loose on the outlet.
Alternatively, the refrigerator shouldn't be too far from the power source, or it can suddenly lose power.
A few DIY fixes can help if your refrigerator is not cooling properly. We've listed some of the general tricks you might want to be interested in trying.
1. Unblock the Vents and Fans
Rearrange the contents of your fridge and prevent anything from blocking the fans and vents. This helps the fan blow cold air properly inside your fridge and freezer.
2. Stock Your Refrigerator Properly
A well-stocked fridge is a happy and cooling fridge. It reaches cool temperatures without taking too much effort. Make sure to keep just the right amount of items inside.
Consider turning off your refrigerator if there's nothing to store.
3. Check Level and Clearance With a Level Checker and Ruler
Use a laser level or a bubble to ensure the fridge is level on all sides. It ensures your freezer door remains shut tight when not in use.
This quick fix prevents perishable food items from spoiling fast and ensures cool air continues to travel inside.
4. Check the Electrical Supply With an Outlet Tester
Ensure your refrigerator receives the right power supply based on the recommended wattage.
5. Refer to Your Owner’s Manual
Always refer to the owner's manual to double-check the proper settings for your refrigerator's optimal performance.
This includes noting the right temperature setting, defrosting recommendations, and cleaning instructions.
6. Inspect the Temperature Settings
Ensure the freezer and refrigerator are set to the right temperature settings to cool properly.
Check the thermostat if your refrigerator is at 40 degrees Fahrenheit or below and 0 degrees Fahrenheit or below for freezers.
7. Clean the Condenser Coils
Clean your dirty condenser coils at least every six months.
It will also help to check up on your compressor, evaporator coils, and evaporator fan motor and ensure they're not covered in frost or dirt.
Refrigerator Not Cooling FAQs
Before we leave with our parting words, we’ve answered some of the common FAQs we receive about problematic refrigerators.
If your refrigerator is not cooling, you might find some helpful answers here.
Should I Unplug My Refrigerator if It’s Not Cooling?
You can unplug your refrigerator if you notice a block of ice buildup. You can thaw the ice to ensure it doesn’t block the fan and vents.
Alternatively, you can check the defrost thermostat to see if it’s still functioning properly.
Why Is My Refrigerator Not Cooling but the Freezer Is?
If your refrigerator compartment is not cooling, there’s probably a problem with the compressor, condenser coil, and evaporator fan.
When this happens, you may need to replace some components for proper air circulation.
When Should I Turn Down the Temperature in My Refrigerator?
When the summer season is about to start, we recommend cranking your refrigerator thermostat and setting it low. The lower it is, the cooler your fridge and freezer become.
Your fridge works double time during summer because it’s fighting against the external heat. A thermostat within the refrigerator helps you keep a stable temperature.
When Should You Request Professional Service?
If none of the DIY fixes in this list helps, we recommend calling a professional to fix your appliance. There may be other pressing issues a little elbow grease can’t fix.
Only a professional can get to the root cause of the problem, like needing to replace components on the fan motor or the compressor.
Doing this ensures you enjoy the best refrigerators out there for a long time.
For most of us, the refrigerator's light is essential, especially when grabbing a fast midnight snack. But what should you do if the door opens, but the light doesn't come on?
If your refrigerators are still operational, but the light is broken, you have a problem. If the light on your fridge won't turn on, you should look at a few different things.
This article will provide you with the options and the necessary knowledge to fix the issue on your refrigerators. So, let's get started!
Why Do You Have a Malfunctioning Refrigerator Light?
Your refrigerator's light may not be functioning for a variety of reasons, including the ones listed below:
Faulty electricity supply: The interior light of your appliances may not function simply because it is unplugged or the power supply is not getting to it.
A stuck or faulty switch: The first thing to do if your refrigerators have a similar push button switch and the fridge light is not working is to see whether the button or the small lever is broken.
Blown fuse: It's also possible that the problem stems from the lamp itself. A broken filament inside the lamp, visible with the unaided eye, is a warning that it is failing.
The lightbulb socket has no power: The lamp must be screwed into a socket to operate. You should check the voltage in the socket if the fridge light isn't working.
A tripped GFCI outlet: If your refrigerators are plugged into such an outlet, try pressing the "reset" button.
Circuit board fault: The refrigerator's main circuit breaker panel contains the circuit board. Most refrigerator models will have on/off switches on the control panel, which may be defective. The best refrigerators on the market as of 2023 are listed here.
How to Fix a Refrigerator Light: 8 Easy Steps
We can help you figure out what's wrong and fix it step-by-step if you want to repair your refrigerator light. The eight easy steps are listed below:
If the lamps on your refrigerators won't turn on, it may be because the lightbulb has burned out or reached the end of its useful life.
This little plunger switch, which is mounted in the plastic liner of the interior, depresses when the refrigerator door is closed and springs out when the door is opened.
The lightbulb is off when the refrigerator door is closed, and when it is opened, the spring-loaded plunger establishes an electrical connection, turning on the lamp.
Here is a ranking of the best mini freezers available.
You'll need to remove the lid to do this. It can require investigation because not every fridge has the same cover construction.
Pulling away from the lid and depressing a couple of latches, you might be able to open it. Or perhaps a screwdriver is required.
To get through, use your mechanical sense and knowledge of plastic covers. When you can physically reach the lightbulb, tighten it clockwise.
If the lamp turns on when you twist, the issue is resolved; kudos. If not, carry on with the investigation. You can follow these simple instructions toremove refrigerator odors.
Check any wire you can access while the lamp cover is still off.
Some sloppy wiring connections may come loose from the electrical contact that turns on the lamp when the refrigerator is shaken.
See what happens if you move the wiring that you can access. Try to pull or press the wires toward the back of the light socket if you see a flicker.
To re-establish a connection, do this. We hope your lamp turns on; if not, continue with the next step.
5. Inspect the Lightbulb
When you're sure it's not the wiring of your appliances, gently spin the lightbulb counterclockwise until it comes loose to remove it. Peek inside the glass container carefully.
When a filament is visibly broken, a burnt-out bulb must be replaced. Give a gentle shake to the bulb; you may hear a rattling noise.
The bulb has to be replaced if you hear a faint scraping or tinkling sound resembling a tiny Christmas bell.
Unplug the fridge before having a close inspection. Examining the connection more thoroughly comes next. Examine both the socket and the bulb base at the same time.
They may have rusted or grown filthy from dust and aerated food from refrigerators. Surprisingly often, dirty sockets are found inside plastic protective covers.
If you notice some dirt, wipe it with a paper towel or a warm damp cloth with a glass cleaner. Inspect the control plate for damage or wear.
Try screwing the bulb back in after drying the socket terminals and base. As you reconnect the connection, there's a potential that your lights will flicker back on.
If so, you successfully got rid of the gunk that either impeded a tight screw-in or prevented the two metal pieces from conducting contact.
You should try replacing the lightbulb next if the bulb is burnt out or cleaning the base with a damp cloth doesn't work. Typically 120V and between 25 and 40 watts refrigerator bulbs.
You can use the current bulb as a reference because many have the size, style, and wattage printed on them.
Take your light bulb to the local hardware store if you can't locate any useful markings (or the hardware section of a department store.)
You should be able to find the appropriate alternate bulb in the appropriate wattage with the aid of the store assistant. Don't forget to indicate that it is for your refrigerators.
Put the alternate bulb in the socket when you have one. If it doesn't turn on immediately, there is still one more simple thing to perform.
If everything else fails, you can finally replace your switch. Starting with the make and model of your appliances, order an alternate switch.
Prepare to replace the switch once you have the replacement in your possession. To begin, disconnect your refrigerator, just in case.
Use a putty knife or a flat screwdriver to pry the old door switch. Change the replacement switch's wire connection, then push the new switch into the socket.
Press the door switch and plug your refrigerator back in. Your refrigerator's lamp should turn on immediately with a new bulb and door switch.
It's time to call a qualified appliance repair electrician if it still doesn't function. That's it!
Can My Fridge Still Work Without the Light?
Installing refrigerator or freezer lightbulbs makes organizing and identifying your food items easier. So, even if the freezer lamp fails, your refrigerator will continue functioning normally.
However, a lamp that is not working even when the lamp is fine can mean that the power to the entire refrigerator is out.
A faulty freezer or refrigerator light can be inconvenient if you get up early or enjoy the occasional midnight snack.
It's best to check your house appliances (dishwashers, dryers, etc.) and ensure they're in good shape when you discover anything unusual.
Even though it might not appear serious, waiting to address the situation could result in bigger problems or destroyed appliances.
Therefore, if your freezer or refrigerator light isn't working, consider the causes above before contacting an electrician.
You will avoid long-term harm and potential future appliance failure. We hope this guide was helpful to you.
If you're looking for one of the best refrigerators, we're sure you've spotted a counter-depth fridge somewhere along the way.
Many people are considering a counter-depth refrigerator because of its impressive looks and features. This alone might be enough to convince you to get one now.
But before making that big purchase, you need to know the pros and cons of a counter-depth refrigerator. This helps you decide if it's really the best fridge for you.
We've noticed a lot of benefits to using counter-depth refrigerators. Because of this, trading them even for the best mini freezers is a hard task.
Before buying a counter-depth fridge, we've listed some of our favorite features about them, which we know you'll also love.
1. A Streamlined Look
Counter-depth fridges give your existing space a clean and seamless look. They hardly stand out, plus their dimensions are typically flush with your kitchen counter.
This is a clear winner for people who want a uniform-looking kitchen design. The last thing you'll have to worry about is trying to fit it in your kitchen without doing a major redecoration.
2. Offers the Most Capacity
One of the first things we look for in a fridge is its storage capacity. In general, the bigger it is, the better.
The beauty of counter-depth refrigerators is that they look very unassuming on the outside. You wouldn't expect it to have a ton of storage inside!
This is perfect for big families who need a lot of space to store their treats and leftovers.
3. Seamless and Space-saving Design
Most counter-depth refrigerators come in a uniform design that suits any house's interior space. This helps improve traffic flow in your kitchen and prevent it from looking cramped.
Based on our observations, we noticed that counter-depth refrigerators are also perfect even for small apartments. It doesn't take up too much space, which might not be what you normally expect.
4. Wider Than Standard-Depth Version
We've all been in this tricky situation where we had to dig several inches deep in our fridge to access what we needed. Let's admit this is a hassle, especially if you're pressed for time.
With counter-depth refrigerators, this will be the last of your problems. The fridge is several inches wider rather than deep in-depth so that you can have better access to your refrigerator's contents.
5. Easier to See Fridge Contents
Finally, to tie everything together, a counter-depth refrigerator lets you see the contents of your fridge without taking everything apart. You can see where everything is at first glance.
This scores big plus points for us, especially since we always rush to grab a snack before running late for work.
Now that we've discussed the pros, it's equally important for you to know the cons of counter-depth refrigerators.
Knowing the cons ensures you know what you're up against when choosing a counter-depth fridge over the standard depth fridge.
1. Not as Deep as Standard Versions
Some people prefer a deeper fridge to a wider one —and we understand where this preference comes from. A deeper fridge gives the appearance of more storage capacity.
There is some truth behind this, but the size difference isn't drastic. At the end of the day, the choice rests upon the style and storage capacity you prefer.
2. More Expensive Than Other Refrigerators
Unfortunately, most counter-depth fridges come with a pretty steep price tag. This can be very off-putting for some, especially those working with a budget.
People have to pay this trade-off when they want a streamlined look in the kitchen and an aesthetically-pleasing space to cook in.
3. Less Freezer Space
One of the reasons why we would trade a counter-depth fridge for a standard one is probably because of its freezer space. Unfortunately, standard fridges offer more inches of space which we need in our house.
Usually, the freezer compartment of a counter-depth fridge is found on the bottom. The space is adequate, but it feels limiting if you have many goods to store.
4. Shallower Depth Can be Limiting
Shallow-depth fridges limit the size of items we can put inside.
Based on our experience, fitting cartons of canned drinks and eggs is easy. But for whole fruits like watermelon, that's where the problem starts.
In some cases, fitting cake boxes can also be challenging. Standard refrigerators offer more clearance than counter-depth ones.
5. May Not Fit Into Existing Fridge Space
In general, most counter-depth fridges can fit any space. However, there will be certain instances when your apartment may need to be fitted for this type of fridge.
It may align with the cabinet depth, but the fridge might be too wide. We always recommend checking the counter depth refrigerator dimensions to see if it fits your kitchen.
What Are Different Types of Counter-Depth Refrigerators?
There are different types of counter-depth refrigerators to choose from. Knowing what these are can help you find the best refrigerator.
French Door Counter-Depth Refrigerator
French door-style refrigerators are a classic. This type of refrigerator commonly has two french doors on the upper half of the refrigerator and freezer drawers at the bottom.
The door configurations usually open outwards, giving you instant access to the contents of your fridge. This type of appliance is generally perfect for homes with limited floor space.
This appliance doesn't differ from the standard fridge, apart from its wide size. They function the same way, and this appliance can last you many good years.
Side-By-Side Counter-Depth Refrigerator
Side-by-side refrigerators have full-length doors. They don't require complicated installation procedures, and you can plug them straight to use them.
One door is the freezer, and the other half for the refrigerator. These refrigerators have an even amount of storage on both sides, which could be a good thing or not for some people.
Refrigerators of this type typically come in a narrow build than your standard fridges. It maximizes height over width, perfect for cramped apartments.
Top-Freezer Counter-Depth Refrigerator
As its name suggests, the freezer for these models is at the top. We usually find the freezer space to be a bit lacking, and we can only fit a few frozen goods at a time.
The refrigerator space is pretty decent, depending on the model you choose. Some models are short, which doesn't provide too much space.
Thankfully, more models are coming out with an equal distribution between the top and lower drawers. Knowing how to maximize the space is important.
Bottom-Freezer Counter-Depth Refrigerator
Bottom freezers are the opposite of top freezers. It usually has a single door for the main refrigerator and a bottom drawer for frozen goods.
The single-door refrigerator is convenient because accessing your goods is much easier. The struggle is usually with fitting all the frozen goods in the compartment below.
Most bottom freezers are usually deep in depth, which still lets you store many things. However, it can be challenging to dig through the contents of your refrigerator at times.
What Is a Counter-Depth Refrigerator?
Counter-depth refrigerators have been a favorite appliance at home for a few years. It doesn't require any difficult maintenance procedure and doesn't stick out on the edge of your counters.
Counter-depth refrigerators have the same depth as your kitchen cabinets. This creates a seamless and streamlined look in the kitchen, which many people love.
Some counter-depth fridges fit spaces like a glove as if custom-made — and this is exactly one of the reasons why we prefer this over a standard-depth fridge.
Its edge-to-edge appearance helps create a clean look which I know you want to stick with at home.
Although there may be instances where there are several inches past the counter depth design (which isn't usually a deal breaker), it still gives it that built-in fridge look we're after.
What Is the Difference Between Counter-Depth and Standard Depth?
Dimensions are the only difference between a counter-depth and a standard-depth fridge.
Counter-depth fridges are generally wider and shallower than the standard fridge, making it look like they're built into your kitchen.
This type of refrigerator is usually aligned with the cabinet depth, which is perfect if you want to create a uniform appearance.
On the other hand, a standard-depth refrigerator tends to be bigger and bulkier than most appliances. It's ideal for homes that have a large existing space.
Notwithstanding this, small apartments can also use a standard-depth refrigerator, especially if they want more storage.
Counter-Depth Refrigerator FAQs
Before we leave with our parting words, we’ll answer some of the FAQs we always get about counter-depth refrigerators. Keep reading because you might find the information useful.
Who Should Consider a Counter-Depth Refrigerator?
There could be a few reasons why you’d want a counter-depth refrigerator, and we’ve listed some of them here:
If you want to give your kitchen a seamless and high-end look;
If you want your refrigerator to line properly with your cabinetry; and
If you’re looking for a new appliance to match and look built-in during your home renovation.
How Much Do Counter-Depth Refrigerators Cost?
We can’t put a specific price tag on counter-depth fridges. But one thing’s for sure, they’re more costly than a standard depth fridge.
This is the trade-off you need to be willing to pay if you want a refrigerator with advanced and modern features.
There are many different models, each featuring neat features that can change how you use your fridge.
Do You Lose Space With a Counter-Depth Refrigerator?
You do not lose space with counter-depth fridges. If at all, you’ve saved space with these types of appliances. They’re usually smaller than the normal refrigerator, perfect for small apartments.
Although you’ll only save several inches of space, it still is worth something. The space you save can be used as a pull-out cabinet for snacks or condiments!
Are All Counter Depth Refrigerators the Same Size?
Not all counter-depth refrigerators have the same size. Some refrigerator appliances may be wider than others, and some align perfectly with your cabinets.
Despite the varying sizes, finding the right style for your home won’t be a problem. There are many models out there to choose from, so you can find the perfect fit for your needs.
Counter-depth fridges are one of the best kitchen appliances you can get today. It can look seamless in any room, making it look like you've got a streamlined look at home.
In the long run, this translates to better traffic flow and makes your fridge look like it was built in!
Feel free to check out our take on the best electric kettles in the market. Who knows, you might just be convinced to take home another new kitchen appliance.
Putting up skirting on a mobile home is a great way to create a warm environment while adding functionality and protection to your home.
Decorating a mobile home does not have to stop at just putting up artwork inside. Adding skirting creates a high-quality finished look that also protects the home.
But deciding on a skirting finish can be a tough choice, with so many skirting options available. However, the right skirting layer can completely change the look of any mobile home for the better.
And our in-depth guide has everything you need to know when it comes to choosing the best skirting option for you. Everything from the benefits of skirting to the different materials available will be covered.
So, without further ado, let’s get started!
Mobile Home Skirting
Types Of Skirting Panels
Skirting panels are available in different materials, which offer various benefits to the mobile home itself as well as add aesthetics to the base.
Depending on the material type, the price for each skirting material can vary. On one end of the spectrum are sturdy, more expensive materials like masonry. And lying on the other end of the spectrum, we have cheaper materials that are not as sturdy.
Vinyl skirting panels are one of the most used types by mobile home owners. The benefits that vinyl brings in both aesthetics and durability make it a popular choice.
Installing mobile home vinyl skirting is incredibly easy and affordable. That said, the price can increase if you choose to double layer it to create insulated skirting for the home.
Another benefit of using vinyl siding and skirting is its environmentally-friendly composition, as it is made of chlorine from common salt and natural gas ethylene. Compared to other skirting options, it doesn’t affect the environment as much as wood and brick.
However, it’s not the thickest of skirting options on the market. There is an insulated version that is thicker and can regulate the temperature better. However, these insulated models are usually more expensive than the standard ones.
Furthermore, low-quality variants of vinyl skirting do not age well. They tend to break down quickly and lose their sheen. Weed eaters may also damage the vinyl siding, slowly breaking down the material over time.
Vinyl skirting is easy to install and work with from a contractor’s perspective. Usually, these skirting panels come in 12 feet sizes, but they can be cut to fit various terrain. In fact, it is possible to cut them as small as one-foot.
Furthermore, the installation is relatively straightforward. Each ground track is secured to the foundation with long rods that are joined together. Meanwhile, the top back is placed along the bottom of the home and the top front secures the outside length of the panel.
For a natural look, using a “rock” design as skirting is a popular choice. These are not actual rocks but rather made up of plastic that resembles a rock pattern. As such, these panels can be easily installed and are available in a number of neutral colors.
Lightweight for quick and easy installation saves time and...
Effortless urethane material offers minimal upkeep and...
Sandstone and granite are the two commonly used rock types that are replicated in these faux rock skirting panels. But there are other rock types that can be purchased to create different aesthetics and add some curb appeal to your mobile home.
Moreover, installing these skirting panels is not very labor intensive either. They can be directly installed on the manufactured housing or in the same way that you would with the vinyl skirting. Whether you install them the DIY way or with the help of professionals, the labor costs can be kept minimal, thanks to the simple installation.
What’s more, the panels are not too expensive while still giving you a natural look. Overall, it makes for an affordable and popular skirting that is second only to vinyl in terms of popularity of the material.
Similar to the simulated “rock” skirting, faux stone is designed to look like real stone. And much like the former, it’s made of polyurethane. By having a plastic construction, the resulting skirting becomes a durable vapor barrier.
Lightweight for quick and easy installation saves time and...
Effortless urethane material offers minimal upkeep and...
However, choosing to install faux stone skirting can be pretty expensive. But the good news is that this type of skirting is actually seen as an investment that raises the value of your mobile house. This is opposed to simple vinyl skirting panels, which can lower the value of the home.
Brick skirting is a high-quality option that can increase the durability of the foundation. But using real brick skirting is not always feasible, as it can become quite costly to install. That is why faux brick skirting is a popular alternative to actual brick.
Vintage Faux Brick Wallpaper.Flat print with slightly...
Each Roll is 20.8 Inches Wide by 33 Feet Long, Covering 57...
Moreover, a faux brick panel allows for the “brick” to be more lightweight than actual brick, as it’s generally made from polyurethane. Another benefit of this material is the increased resistance it offers to shifts in temperature and various weather conditions.
Additionally, an actual brick skirting entails a much more complex installation than a faux one. But depending on what you are aiming to accomplish with the skirting, either option can be viable. Whether it is for durability or aesthetics, a faux or brick skirting will definitely benefit the curb appeal of your mobile home.
5. Concrete Skirting
Concrete skirting is one of the most durable skirting options if you’re looking for a permanent and solid connection to the ground. Once you install the concrete skirting, it won’t be going anywhere as it is made of cinder blocks. The permanence of concrete skirting extends so far as being similar to a poured foundation.
One caveat to using concrete is it utilizes cinder blocks to create the skirting. What this implies is that it involves a large amount of labor and time to install it. Furthermore, the blocks need professional work in order to secure them into the ground.
Since you’ll need the help of masons and contractors, it can raise the cost of installation considerably. Although the blocks themselves are solid, they can not be considered as a bonafide permanent foundation by industry standards.
Long story short, cinder block skirting has the benefit of providing a solid foundation to mobile homes. Their strength and durability are unparalleled when compared to other skirting products. However, the cost of materials and labor fees can run quite high.
6. Metal Skirting
Among the many skirting variants available, metal is a cheap and easy to install option that is used widely. This skirting needs a two by two or two by four frame to support it. And dirt can be filled in behind the frame to provide extra support.
Not only is the metal durable, but they are also available in a variety of designs and patterns. If you choose to go the custom route, you will be happy to know these metal skirtings are paintable. Furthermore, the metal panels won’t be damaged with weed eaters or other similar equipment.
Patterns are also stamped onto the metal to create patterns, which in turn, enhances the curb appeal of the home. So, no longer are you limited to flat metal; it is the goal of the skirting company to give the customers almost any design they want.
A few popular types of metal skirting options are available in tin or steel. These materials make for a skirting that’s easy to install without compromising durability.
7. Foam Skirting
If you are looking for a skirting option that’s high on energy efficiency, then foam skirting is a solid option. It provides insulation and regulates the temperature underneath the mobile house.
Manufactured homes are usually at a loss when it comes to energy efficiency. Although a ground track can be effective to some extent in regulating temperature, it is not as good as insulation foam.
Keep in mind that while using foam as a trim piece can save money in heating and cooling, it is not the best-looking skirting option. Depending on what you want, it is possible to manipulate and shape the siding to resemble brick, cinder block, and pebbles.
Additionally, foam skirting is quite expensive, even though the panels are smaller as compared to others. Each of these panels is only two feet in length at a time, whereas others are four to five feet. These smaller sized panels are packed full of foam and are incredibly energy efficient.
However, installing foam skirting is pretty simple; it follows a process similar to brick and stone materials. As such, the labor costs can be kept to a minimum.
8. Wood Skirting
Where wood skirting shines is the versatility it offers in customization. Typically, these wood products are custom made, so they can be tailored to match exactly what you need. As there are many variants of wood and finishes, the price to install this type of skirting varies.
Furthermore, not only does the wood type vary, but the design of skirting can also be changed. Wooden skirting options are available in either the standard thick panels or as a lattice design.
Using wood as a skirting material for mobile homes does not rank high in popularity among customers. There is no need to hire an outside company or contractor to prepare or install the wood. It is even possible to cut out the middle man entirely and complete the installation yourself.
However, there are drawbacks to using this material for skirting. The most common concern is with the durability of the wood as it is regularly exposed to the elements. Wood has a tendency to shrink and swell with changing temperature, which in turn compromises its structural integrity over time.
9. Other Skirting Materials
Besides these materials, there are a few other creative options available that are easy to install and also durable. For example, old barn tin and railroad ties are two materials that are cost-efficient and sturdy.
Utilizing different materials is a viable route to go if none of the traditional is to your liking. However, you should always consider the pros and cons of materials before deciding.
Calculating Costs
In order to have a clear idea of where money is being spent, drawing up a budget plan is a good idea. For mobile home skirting, this involves a number of calculations of the dimensions of the base and how high the panels should be.
First, a measure of the length and width of the house is added together. This measurement is then considered with the average height from the ground in mind to obtain the total square footage. The square foot measurement is simply how much paneling or material is needed to make up the skirting.
Whether the materials being used are sold on the basis of panels or in square feet, a better estimate is gathered. Beyond material costs, labor costs to install the skirting track must also be considered.
Regional differences in labor depend on the type of material being used and how much skirting is needed. Environmental factors such as slopes and ditches can also have an impact on how much material or expertise is required in order to complete the job.
If you are using a unique material that is not already suitable for installation, consider the various factors carefully. In particular, pay attention to material cost, energy efficiency, and curb appeal.
Besides adding or replacing skirting to your mobile home, there are a few other methods to make your home look nicer. Although skirting is excellent in adding an extra dimension of protection, it is not always the best to look at, especially for a residential building.
As such, here are a few other options you can try to improve your mobile home’s look.
1. Doors And Windows
One of the simplest things you can do to spruce up the outside of your mobile home is to install new doors and windows. These are usually what the eye is drawn to first subconsciously—as such, having a nice set of windows and doors can really change the look and feel of the mobile home.
2. Installing Trim
Another quick and easy fix to touching up a mobile home is changing out the pre-installed trim with a higher-quality one. Usually, mobile homes have a basic trim kit around the edges that make them blend into the sea of various other mobile homes. Having a unique trim can set your home apart without spending a large budget.
Additionally, there are trim kits that can be bought and installed easily without the need for contractors. You can install the new trim yourself along with some crown molding if you so choose. These small additions add lots of character and personality to your mobile home, a great way to express yourself.
3. Upgrading The Roof
Admittedly, mobile homes are not always known for their quality roofing. Usually, they are thin and do not provide much in terms of insulation. Upgrading or installing a completely new roof can bring a new look as well as help in insulating the house better.
Of course, this renovation will require a large amount of expertise and effort, but the payoff is definitely worth the investment. A roof is the culmination of all the lower elements of the mobile home. As such, a great looking roof not only speaks to your personal taste but can save you a few bucks in heating and cooling the mobile home.
4. Adding A Basement
If a basement is within the realm of renovations you would like to have for your mobile home, it will require a bit of forethought. The mobile home must be placed on top of the basement foundation as it needs to remain solid despite having a recession underneath it.
Hiring professionals is always a good idea when working on large scale renovations such as this. After all, you don’t want to risk having the mobile home fall through the floor to the basement. Once the renovation is complete, your mobile home will begin feeling like a higher quality, solid house.
5. Installing Hardwood Flooring
Another renovation you can do to step up mobile home living quality is to install a hardwood floor. Contrary to popular belief, it is fully possible to have a hardwood floor even in a mobile home. So long as the foundation of the mobile home is solid enough to support the weight, you should have no problems.
Hardwood floors are great not just for their aesthetic value but also to help make the floors easier to clean and maintain. In a small living area like a mobile home, this becomes even more important as space is limited.
6. Install Additional Rooms
As a final suggestion, you can even install new additions to your mobile home that add more personality and functionality. These installations can be as simple as a porch in the front or a new bathroom to the side. Each room can then be given its own personality by decorating it.
However, if you want to go the extra mile, installing a large room with higher ceilings is sure to catch the eye. After all, how often does one see a mobile home with towering ceilings?
Conclusion
Hopefully, now you know a bit more about how to pick a suitable skirting for your mobile home. These simple yet effective additions can elevate the quality of your home and also allow for a sturdier base.
Mobile homes have become more complex over the years. Once the durability and safety of the skirting are taken care of, they can be adjusted to suit your personal tastes in color and texture.
Every renovation and addition to the mobile home is an investment that goes towards increasing the street’s value and the lifespan of your home. Mobile homes are not the most durable of residential places, but they can be made sturdier with this addition.
Making this investment is a great choice that has many benefits for mobile homes. What are you waiting for? Elevate your mobile home living today!
The kitchen's workhorse, the refrigerator, probably doesn't get as much cleaning as other household surfaces.
Without routine maintenance, debris and spoiled food residue can accumulate on the exterior surfaces and within shelves and drawers.
Follow these tips for the best methods to clean a fridge to keep it in good shape and stop odors.
Assemble basic home materials and natural cleaning products, such as baking soda, water, dish soap, and dry towels.
Transfer your food to a cooler, and you're prepared to start deep cleaning the fridge. Learn how to clean your appliance in detail to have your refrigerator sparkling like new!
What Are Chores to Do to Maintain Your Refrigerator?
Your freezer will function more effectively and efficiently if it is properly maintained. It will also save you money on electricity costs and extend the shelf life of the food inside.
To make sure the door seal is sealing properly, check it occasionally. If the seal is insufficient, the fridge door could need replacing.
Regular cleaning and defrosting. Ice accumulation will reduce its effectiveness.
Ensure the safety of your young children by locking freezers.
To ensure appropriate air circulation, constantly vacuum any exposed condenser coils.
Maintain a steady temperature to prevent food from becoming bad.
This advice is general; refer to your owner's manual for further maintenance instructions.
Discarding the food and cleaning your fridge if you have recalled items is critical. The recalled food may include germs that spread to refrigerator shelves or drawers.
The 10 steps listed below should help you clean your refrigerator.
1. Establish a Staging Area
Of course, cleaning a fridge requires removing food from it. Consider using a small folding table or a few chairs if your counter space is limited.
Consider putting your food in a cooler if you intend to undertake a thorough clean. Whatever you choose, you must have at least a shelf's worth of space to store your belongings.
Ensure that the kitchen sink is also empty. Put the recycling bin nearby while you're at it since you'll probably be throwing out products whose shelf life has expired.
A go-to cleaning solution for this task is vinegar.
When added to the acid, hot water transforms into a food-safe cleanser ideal for wiping any crud accumulated on refrigerator shelves. The acid from the vinegar dissolves grease and grime.
First things first: Toss away any foodstuffs that are stale or outdated.
While you clean the rest of the fridge, remove the still-edible meals and put them in a cooler with ice to keep them cold.
4. Shelf Removal and Drawer Removal
Remove and lay away any shelves and drawers that can be removed. Metal or plastic drawers and shelves can be immediately cleaned with hot water and dish soap.
Still, glass and ceramic items must be gradually warmed to room temperature before being cleaned with hot water to avoid shattering and cracking.
5. Clean the Interior With Dish Soap or Baking Soda and Water
To stop mold inside your fridge, avoid any bleach-based cleaner. Use hot water, some mild dish soap, and a soft cloth.
To avoid dripping on already-cleaned surfaces, work from the top to the floor of the fridge.
A warm, clean towel can be placed over the spilled area for a short period if the spill is particularly stubborn or stuck. A plastic, non-abrasive scrubber may also be necessary.
Even the hidden components of the appliance, like the refrigerator coils, require periodic cleaning using a coil brush and a vacuum. (Refer to your owner's manual for assistance.)
Cleaning refrigerator coils is a little more challenging, but doing it can enhance and prolong the function of your refrigerator.
Note
Most appliance manufacturers offer their manuals online, and you can discover yours by searching for the model number.
6. Tidy Cabinets and Shelves With a Damp Microfiber Cloth
After your shelves and drawers have warmed up gradually, please thoroughly rinse and wipe dry.
When handling slippery glass shelves, use extra care. Gloves for the dishwasher could be useful in preventing breakage.
7. Dry the Fridge's Interior
To ensure the refrigerator's interior is fully dry, wipe it down with a clean cloth or towel. Remember also to dry the internal doors.
8. Replacing the Food
Restock the refrigerator with the foodstuffs. A sticky jelly jar or a crusty salad dressing lid are two containers that could be cleaned now.
When handling your jars, wear clean clothes and dry them completely.
9. Empty the Freezer
The same techniques can be used to wipe out a freezer. The beautiful thing about freezers is that they rarely spill anything and require considerably less frequent cleaning.
You might need to look for and toss away expired meals. Use the same procedures as the refrigerator if a deeper cleaning is necessary.
10. Clear the Exterior
Simply wipe with a cloth sprayed with an all-purpose cleaner, giving a little extra elbow grease to the handles where grime tends to build up.
Using hot or warm water and mild dish soap, wipe down and clean the outside surfaces of the refrigerator, beginning at the top to the floor surface.
Use a soft, non-scratching cloth, vinegar, or window spray cleaner to keep your refrigerator's stainless steel surface glossy.
Pay special attention to the rubber gaskets' seals around the doors' edges. Here, filth and muck can gather and crack the stamp. Wash them thoroughly with warm water and soap.
Simply wipe the gaskets out to remove any debris. This needs to be cleaned regularly to ensure it maintains a tight seal.
Depending on how frequently you cook, dribble hot sauce, and buy new supplies, your refrigerator may sustain significant damage.
Your refrigerator, the most significant equipment in your house, demands care and regular maintenance. Deep-clean it once every three to four months.
To do this, load up your cooler with all your meals, turn it off, remove shelves and drawers, and rinse them in hot, soapy water.
Make sure to mop up spills before they dry between cleanings and remove any foodstuffs that have gone bad or have passed their expiration dates.
Clean Out A Refrigerator FAQs
The following are the most frequent inquiries on how to clean a refrigerator inside and out:
What Is the Best Thing to Clean the Fridge Interior With?
Wipe the interior of the empty refrigerator by wiping it down with warm, soapy water and then clean water to remove the soap. Use a fresh towel to wipe dry.
Can I Use Clorox Wipes to Clean the Inside of My Fridge?
You can, indeed, if you want to give your refrigerators a thorough deep clean; Clorox wipes are not the best product to use.
The door knobs may be cleaned, or tiny spills can be cleaned quickly and easily with these useful wipes.
Your refrigerator will remain clean and odor-free for an extended period if you follow a few straightforward procedures.
Restocking the fridge with sloppy food containers or expired produce should be avoided to prevent sticky spills.
Throw away anything expired or whose freshness is in doubt right away. Any jars, bottles, or cans with drips or crusty lids can be cleaned with baking soda and water.
Wipe refrigerator items as you use them in meal preparation and cooking to make this process easier.
You can maintain a clean, odor-free, and sparkling fridge by routinely taking these items out.
A black and white interior design is sure screaming out the strong and powerful attitude of the owner trough a classic apparel, a very bold contrast and huge color scheme that works with this amazing collection. You can use it anywhere from the living room to the the terrace and in backyard landscaping, a highly versatile combo that can mix and match everything just by adjusting the contrast and the ratio of black and white. You need a simple bright room? All you need to do is use stark white on the walls and most of the furniture and keep the gadgets as black accents.You need a Vintage Gothic Apparel? Go hardcore by using very strongly black in combination with Art Deco and Gothic motifs, you can use more iron, less glass expressing what you need trough textures and keep things as black as it`s needed.
There are hundreds of world architects and designers which just love to use black and white for contrast, mostly because such a contrast does not keep your attention fixed in, it`s a neutral way of controlling the surroundings. Take Colunata House as an example, if you look on the interior design, you will notice that even though the contrasts exists, the interior design is top notch, your attention will still go to the wonderful rocky shores, allowing you to enjoy the amazing landscape.
From another point of view, you can use such colors to make your room seem larger wider or taller depending on where you`re using the white or black; you can make a small bedroom seem huge using stark white paint or even smaller with black; in the same manner you can control the lightning and brightness of the room just b using the black and white color scheme.
There are hundreds of methods of using the black and white color scheme and hundreds of methods of transforming a home or an interior design using it, this bold and strong combination is considered a very powerful asset by any architect or designer that knows how to use it and we are obviously highlighting such setups for your dream home.
Pictures below are speaking for themselves of how far you can play with your interior design but we are really curious how are you using the black and water color scheme in your design.
For more inspiration we have posted bellow few of our articles which rely mostly on black and white :
17 Inspiring Wonderful Black and White Contemporary Interior Designs
A slow cooker, commonly called a crock pot, can help you save time and energy while still producing tasty and nourishing meals with minimal preparation.
In this article, we'll explore the benefits of using this popular kitchen appliance, offer tips for getting the most out of your appliance, and more!
Whether you're a seasoned cook or simply a food lover, we'll make you appreciate the beauty of slow cooking.
Prepare your ingredients ahead by washing and chopping them before cooking.
Choose the right ingredients, cut ingredients into uniform sizes, and use the right amount of liquid. Most slow cooker recipes require some liquid to prevent the ingredients from drying.
2. Fill the Slow Cooker With Ingredients and Close the Lid
Begin to layer ingredients in the slow cooker by starting with the denser and heavier items on the bottom and adding the lighter ingredients on top.
Be sure to fill the slow cooker evenly, or else the dish will cook unevenly or overflow.
Once all the ingredients are added, it's time to close the lid. Keeping the lid on is important, as opening it can release heat and prolong the meal prep time.
Find an electrical outlet for your appliance and ensure that it is grounded. Once the slow cooker is plugged in, you can set most slow cookers' temperatures and cooking times.
Depending on the model of your slow cooker, you may have various temperature and time settings.
Some have a warm setting that can cook your food at a safe, low temperature for a bit longer.
4. Set the Temperature According to the Recipe Instructions
Set the slow cooker to the desired temperature and cooking time, and let it work its magic.
It's generally best to avoid opening the lid during cooking, as this can cause a high temperature or high setting to drop and increase the cooking time.
If you need to check on the food, try to do so quickly and place the lid back as soon as possible.
Once done, you'll have to turn the cooker off or apply the keep warm setting unless it does so automatically.
It's important to wait for your slow cooker to finish cooking to ensureyour recipe is thoroughly cooked, safe to eat and has the best possible flavor and texture.
Allowing the slow cooker to finish cooking is especially important for lean meats and poultry.
This ensures that your food cooks evenly and that the appliance can accommodate the amount of food you plan to cook.
Oval slow cookers are ideal forcooking larger ingredients or cuts of meat, such as large roasts or whole chickens.
On the other hand, a round-size slow cooker is great for soups, canned beans, stews, or smaller cuts of meat (such as chicken breasts or pork shoulders) and small-cut root vegetables.
2. Check the Temperature Using a Thermometer
Many slow cookers come with built-in thermometers, but it's always a good idea to use a separate food thermometer to ensure accuracy.
To check the temperature, insert the thermometer probe into the thickest part of the dish, ensuring it doesn't touch any bones or the bottom of the crock pot.
3. Sear, Sauté, and Deglaze
Searing, sautéing, and deglazing are important techniques to learn, as they help enhance the flavor and texture of your favorite recipes.
Searing helps create a nice crust on the meat's outside.
Sautéing vegetables and aromatics help release their flavors and soften them up.
Deglazing uses liquid to loosen and dissolve the browned bits left in the pan after searing or sautéing.
4. Use Real Ingredients for Authentic Flavors and Texture
Use fresh and natural ingredients for cooking nutritious and filling recipes in a crock pot.
It may be tempting to take shortcuts and use pre-packaged or processed tough meats. However, some may have preservatives, artificial flavors, and other additives that can compromise the taste and quality of your recipes.
5. Season Constantly
Slow cooking can often dull the flavors of the ingredients, so seasoning can help to ensure that your recipe stays flavorful and well-balanced.
By seasoning throughout the cooking process, you can build layers of flavor, achieve balanced flavors, and personalize your recipes even after you have finished cooking.
6. Add Simple but Flavorful Ingredients
There are many affordable and simple but flavorful ingredients that are easy to find. Some of them are:
Garlic
Sour cream
Tomatoes
Mustard
Broths
Anchovies
Cream cheese
These are a great addition to any home cook's pantry. They have bold flavors that can bring a new dimension to your slow-cooked recipes.
7. Use Fresh Herbs
Herbs like parsley can enhance your dish's flavor. But they have several other benefits as well, such as:
Packed with nutrients and antioxidants
Incredibly versatile
Provide a pleasant scent to your kitchen
Create an inviting atmosphere
Add dried herbs and spices (like chili pepper and onion) later or whenever the recipe calls, as they might lose their flavor if cooked for an extended period.
8. Finish With Fresh Ingredients
These ingredients can brighten the flavor of a dish, adding a burst of freshness that can be missing in slow-cooked meals.
Consider finishing with fresh ingredients, like tender or quick-cooking chopped vegetables (such as zucchini, tomatoes, and carrots).
You can also add a squeeze of lemon juice to take your slow cooker recipe to the next level.
9. Trim the Fat
Removing the excess fat can help reduce the grease in your recipe and make it healthier overall.
Using a sharp knife, carefully trim excess fat from the meat. Chicken also needs to have their skin removed.
10. Reduce the Wine
Reducing wine is a technique that involves cooking the wine over low heat until the spirit evaporates, leaving behind a concentrated and flavorful sauce.
This can help thicken your dish's sauce, giving it a more luxurious texture.
11. Cook Pasta Separately
Pasta absorbs a lot of liquid when it cooks, which can throw off the balance of the other ingredients in your slow cooker.
Cook the pasta separately to prevent it from absorbing too much liquid and to allow you to adjust the sauce to your liking.
12. Thicken the Sauce
In contrast to conventional cooking methods, moisture in a slow cooker pot does not evaporate. Any additional liquids, like milk, will significantly thicken together.
Remember that adding the thickening agent towards the end of the recipes is important, as it will need more cooking time to fully thicken if added at the beginning.
13. Choose Your Meat Wisely
To choose your meat wisely, select tough, fatty cuts such as beef chuck, pork shoulder, chicken thighs, or brisket. These cuts break down during the long cuisine process, producing tender and juicy meat.
Avoid lean cuts of meat like chicken breasts or pork tenderloin, as they can become dry and tough in the slow cooker.
14. Safety Is Key
Always read the manufacturer's instructions before using your slow cooker to ensure it is secure.
Keep the crock pot out of the path of kids and pets.
Place them on a flat, stable surface and away from anything that could catch fire.
Know which parts of your crock are dishwasher safe, and avoid overfilling them to prevent food from spilling out— which could lead to a fire.
What Are the Different Features of a Slow Cooker?
With so many options available, knowing which features to look for when choosing the best small crock pot can be difficult.
Below are the different features that a good slow cooker should ideally have:
Portable/Locking - Spill-safe lids make it easier for you to take and transport these crock pots.
Programmable - Most crock pots have a specific high or low setting for different foods and can automatically lower the heat when you're done cooking.
Cool Touch Exterior - Prevents risk of burns.
Keep Warm Setting -This high setting keeps the food warm without overcooking.
Adjustable Temperature Settings -Food will cook on the high setting in half the time it takes on the low setting.
Auto Shut-Off - The auto shut-off feature automatically turns off your crock pot when not in use for safer cooking.
Timer - Allows you to automate your cooking.
Delayed Start Setting - This allows a crock pot to be set to start at a later time.
Easy-Clean Interiors - Removable slow cooker pots take the hassle out of cooking and cleaning.
What Are the Different Types of Slow Cookers?
With so many different types of appliances available on the market, choosing the righttypes of cookware options (like pots and pans) for your needs can be overwhelming.
For slow cookers, below are the different types you can choose from:
1. Classic Slow Cooker
These electric stovetop appliances typically have a stainless steel exterior with two handles.
They consist of a ceramic or porcelain pot (similar to a Dutch oven pot), a glass lid, and an electric heating element.
This appliance allows a low-setting cook for slow cooker meals like stews, dried beans, chuck roasts, soups, and even reheating leftovers and rice.
2. Roast Oven
A roast oven (or roaster) is a specialized kitchen stove designed to roast large cuts of tough meat.
It typically features a large, deep cooking pan with a removable rack holding the meat above it.
The pan is made of materials that can withstand high temperatures, such as stainless steel or enamel-coated cast iron.
3. Sous Vide Slow Cooker
The sous vide slow cooker is a home appliance that combines the features of a sous vide machine and a slow cooker.
It is designed to cook evenly over a long period and uses sous vide technology to maintain a precise temperature for most recipes.
What Are the Benefits of Using a Slow Cooker?
A slow cooker offers numerous benefits, such as:
1. Budget Friendly
Slow cookers are generally affordable appliances, making them accessible to those who want to save money. They are also energy-efficient, which can help reduce your overall energy costs.
2. Tender Meats
Most pork recipes are typically cooked using low and slow cooking, such as roasting and braising.
A slow cooker helps break down the tougher cuts of meat, like short ribs, making them more tender.
3. Convenient
Convenient cookware and bakeware appliances such as crock pots, instant pots, broiler pans, and microwaves can help simplify cooking and make meal prep more efficient.
4. Healthy Options
A crock pot can be a great tool for those looking to incorporate healthy options into their diet, as they allow meals to be cooked at lower temperatures for longer periods.
Doing so helps retain more nutrients in meals.
Slow Cooker FAQs
Have more questions about slow cookers? This slow cooker FAQs section has got you covered!
What Can You Make With a Slow Cooker?
Crock pots are versatile kitchen appliances that can make any delicious and comforting slow cooker meal. Slow cookers can even be used to cook rice the way a rice cooker does!
Here are some slow cooker recipes you can make:
Soups and stews
Pulled meats
Roasts
Vegetarian dishes
Dessert
How Can You Clean Your Slow Cooker?
First, unplug the slow cooker and let it cool down completely.
Then, remove the ceramic pot and wash it with warm, soapy water. Use a sponge or non-abrasive brush to scrub away any residue. If there are stubborn stains, use baking soda.
Clean the exterior of the slow cooker with a damp cloth and let it dry completely before using it again.
What Tools/Accessories Are Available for a Slow Cooker?
Various tools and accessories available for slow cookers can enhance their functionality and make cooking more convenient.
A slow cooker is a simple, affordable, and convenient way to cook delicious and healthy meals with minimal effort.
By following the basic steps of selecting the right recipe, preparing the ingredients, and setting the cook time and temperature, you can create a wide range of flavorful recipes that will satisfy your family and friends.
Are you thinking about remodeling your home flooring because the color has faded and the planks emit a hollow sound?
If we are not wrong, your top two choices are solid hardwood and engineered wood flooring, as these are the most sought-after options. The allure of wooden floors may entice you to spend a few extra bucks on actual hardwood, but what if you get the same benefits at a lower cost?
Or perhaps you want a durable flooring solution that won't need replacing anytime soon. Today's guide looks at the best bits of both solid and engineered wood flooring to help you make the right call.
What Is Engineered Wood Flooring?
Engineered wood flooring is one of the most popular and reliable options on the market. It is quite similar to solid hardwood flooring, and even shares many characteristics, which we will discuss later, but the primary difference between the two is in the construction.
Most people who know about the different flooring types will tell you that engineered hardwood floors have a plywood layer in the middle. A thin hardwood layer is bonded over and under this layer to lend stability.
You should note that engineered floors can last around 40 years and are less expensive than solid hardwood floors which makes them highly desirable.
They are made of 100% wood, but the best part is that different wood species are used for designing the flooring, especially the bottom and top layers. The final result is a durable and strong product that doesn't shift after installation and can withstand weather changes.
Another reason for its increasing popularity is that the flooring works well in areas like the basement, where other options may wear out soon. Thanks to the intricate layering, the chances of moisture warping or damaging the planks are less, particularly when you have a concrete subfloor.
The only thing you must remember is that engineered wood flooring requires refinishing. The planks are wider than solid hardwood flooring, and since they arrive in prefinished form, it's essential to maintain the quality of the wood over time.
What Is Solid Hardwood Flooring?
As the name reveals, this flooring comprises solid wood and comes in many hardwood species, such as oak, walnut, and maple. But we already told you that engineered hardwood flooring is less expensive, so why choose solid wood flooring?
This is because you can refinish or sand a solid hardwood floor several times without any deterioration in its quality. Also, people don't like the thin hardwood layer of engineered floors that can be refinished just once in most cases.
You will notice that the wooden planks on a solid wood floor are longer and feature grooves and tongues on either end. It helps with installation and ensures that the planks interlock and don't shift positions after a few years.
But the catch is that you will have to nail the flooring to the subfloor, which requires expertise and precision.
Advantages Of Engineered Hardwood Flooring
Now that you have a basic knowledge of both solid and engineered hardwood flooring let's review each type, starting with the advantages of engineered flooring.
1. Pocket-Friendly
If you're looking for a beautiful flooring option but don't want to spend a fortune on renovations, premium-quality engineered flooring will bail you out. The wooden layers on the top and bottom of the planks look just like solid hardwood floors with only minor differences.
Moreover, engineered hardwoods are available at half the price of their solid hardwood counterparts. You get the best of both worlds - quality and affordability in one product.
2. Easy Installation
You will love how easy it is to assemble engineered hardwood flooring, which makes the entire process swift and hassle-free. It would be best if you had durable glue to set the flooring and prevent it from shifting. But it's also possible to nail, screw, or place it gently over the underlay, like a floating floor, due to the stability offered by its unique design.
3. Durable
A major point in favor of engineered wood floors is the sturdiness of the surface since it can resist temperature variations and moisture to retain its quality. You already know how two layers of wood sandwich the middle plywood layer - this makes it suitable for rooms with underfloor heating.
If needed, you can reinforce the flooring further and add a scratch-resistant topcoat without affecting the color, width, and style of the plank finish. Sometimes, you can confuse engineered hardwood floors with laminate flooring but remember that the latter only has a picture of wood on the top surface, instead of real wood.
Advantages Of Solid Hardwood Flooring
Solid hardwood flooring offers different benefits than engineered wood flooring, although their dissimilarities aren't profound.
1. Appearance
It's often considered the holy grail of flooring options, and even people opting for engineered hardwood floors determine its worth by its resemblance to solid wood flooring. We noticed that it's made from only one solid piece of pure hardwood and has narrower boards to deliver a refined look.
You can choose between unfinished and prefinished boards while there are several colors and species of wood for specific needs. Also, the boards are interconnected through strong seams to prevent displacement.
2. Location
Solid hardwood floors are ideal for living rooms, dining areas, kitchens, and drawing rooms. Most above-ground rooms will benefit from this flooring, provided there's little humidity or moisture. That's why manufacturers advise against installing solid wood floors in the bathroom, basement, or laundry rooms where chances of contact with water are high.
3. Longevity
The durability of solid wood flooring depends on the species of wood and finish that you wish to achieve. If you live in an area with high footfall, we recommend going with oak or hickory as these are harder varieties and can resist denting or scratching. Many brands even offer products with a lifetime warranty, so be sure to read all the information before purchasing.
While solid wood flooring isn't the best option for dealing with moisture, it's still pretty durable and can last for several years. You can even sand or refinish the surface multiple times to uphold its quality.
Hardwood Vs Engineered Wood Flooring Comparison
It's time to answer the all-important question - solid wood flooring vs. engineered hardwood, which is better? Solid hardwood and engineered hardwood floors look pretty much the same. The differences between the two are more prominent in other aspects like lifespan, cost, type of wood, etc.
1. Versatility
A solid hardwood floor has planks of different widths that range between 8 and 12 inches. This ensures that the planks tightly adhere to each other, which strengthens the seams between boards. The best part is that you can choose from various color options, wood types, and finishes to personalize the flooring according to your requirements.
An engineered hardwood floor has more options for width and is flexible, thanks to a hardwood veneer layer. But you won't get many choices in color, style, or finishes compared to solid wood flooring since the panels are available in a prefinished form.
2. Construction
Hardwood floors are made from one solid block of 100% pure wood to guarantee durability. It imparts a timeless quality to the surface and ensures value for your money. Also, most solid hardwood floors in America come from the Appalachian region and feature intricate craftsmanship to deliver color consistency, stability, and a refined grainy texture.
An engineered wood floor has three layers(as said before), with two thin hardwood layers holding the middle plywood layer in place. You should note that the core comprises 5 to 7 layers of plywood that adhere to each other through a crisscross pattern for strength. It's also made from 100% natural wood, while the middle plywood construction lends stability to the surface.
This is how engineered hardwood resists shifting and withstands humidity, moisture, and temperature changes.
3. Type Of Wood
The three most popular options for solid hardwood flooring are - oak, maple, and hickory. All three species are durable and resistant to wear and tear due to their hardness. Apart from the many colors and textures, the width of the planks ranges up to 5 inches for customizable flooring solutions.
An engineered hardwood floor comes in many of the same designs as a solid hardwood floor. But you will find unique patterns and textures owing to many softer, exotic species of wood. Hence, you can subject the flooring to specific surface treatments and colors or choose extra-wide planks, which isn't possible with solid hardwood floors.
4. Lifespan
The lifespan of solid hardwood floors depends on the protective finish and wood species. As mentioned, you can choose stronger woods to prevent scratching or denting the surface, which makes them more long-lasting compared to other options. Solid wood planks won't deteriorate even after 30 to 100 years of heavy use, provided you don't compromise on maintenance.
That's why these wood planks can be sanded and refinished multiple times.
On the other hand, the thin layer of hardwood in engineered floors reduces the chances of refinishing or sanding. If refinishing is your priority, you can opt for a thick layer of hardwood on the top, but the number of times you can do it would still be less than solid hardwood floors.
Engineered wood surfaces also resist scratching, but they are most popular for not warping or changing shapes under the influence of moisture or humidity. All things considered, solid wood has the edge in terms of longevity since engineered hardwood flooring will last slightly more than 30 years even with proper maintenance.
5. Installation Method
Solid hardwood flooring has tongue and groove boards and needs to be nailed to the subfloor underneath. These grooves ensure the planks don't move after installation, and you can re-floor major areas of the house, such as the kitchen, dining room, bedroom, or sitting area. Any area with low humidity and less moisture is good for solid wood flooring.
Installing engineered hardwood floors is equally easy, and you can either nail the planks or use click-and-lock planks to design the flooring, a popular method for constructing a floating floor. Some manufacturers also allow you to glue the planks to the concrete subfloor, and most people install it in rooms with radiant heating systems, over basements, or concrete floors.
The main point in favor of engineered wood flooring is that it can resist moisture, humidity, and other environmental factors. Since it's thinner than solid hardwood, it's ideal for creating a thin space underneath kitchen appliances or matching the height of an adjoining floor.
6. Sizes
Most types of solid hardwood flooring have planks measuring ¾ inches thick and 2-¼ inches wide. The length also varies between 12 and 84 inches, and even though you can find other lengths or size options, the planks are seldom wider than 4 inches.
Engineered wood flooring is thinner and has ⅜ to 9/16-inch boards. The planks are much wider than solid wood floors and extend up to 7 inches, while they can be 12 - 60 inches long.
7. Cost
The price of solid hardwood floors is higher than engineered wood flooring, but it depends on several factors like quality, wood species, longevity, etc. Usually, the protective finish, staining technique, and texture all add to the cost. Prefinished solid hardwood flooring costs $8 per square foot, but options are also available for as high as $15 per square foot.
Engineered hardwood flooring is more affordable, but premium options can cost as much as solid hardwood. The flooring cost varies between $2.50 and $10 per square foot, with the average cost ranging around $7. But a thicker top layer, with the option of sanding and refinishing it multiple times, and higher durability will increase the cost.
8. Soundproofing
When considering the soundproofing properties of hardwood vs engineered wood flooring, engineered wood generally offers superior noise reduction capabilities. The multi-layered construction of engineered wood flooring helps absorb and dampen sound vibrations more effectively than solid hardwood. Although both flooring types can benefit from added soundproofing measures such as underlayment or padding, the inherent structure of engineered wood inherently contributes more to noise reduction.
Engineered wood flooring consists of multiple layers, including a core of high-density fiberboard (HDF), plywood, or medium-density fiberboard (MDF) which adds stability and improved acoustic performance. The presence of these layers creates a naturally better sound barrier when compared to solid hardwood, making it a more suitable choice for spaces where noise reduction is important.
In summary, if soundproofing is a priority for your flooring project, engineered wood flooring may be a more effective option due to its unique construction and enhanced acoustic properties. This makes it an ideal choice for spaces like music rooms, home theaters, or multi-level homes where sound transmission between floors is a concern.
What are some popular engineered and solid wood flooring brands?
Popular engineered wood flooring brands include:
Bruce hardwood flooring
Somerset hardwood flooring
Mohawk Industries
Harris Wood Floors
From the Forest
Well-known solid hardwood flooring brands are:
Shaw Floors
Carlisle Wide Plank Floors
Armstrong Flooring
Bruce and Somerset hardwood flooring also manufacture premium solid hardwood planks.
How can you tell the difference between solid hardwood and engineered floors?
Pick up a loose plank and check its side to determine the type of construction. If you notice a solid wooden plank with a grainy texture, know that it's solid hardwood while multiple layers will point to engineered flooring.
Can pets scratch solid or engineered hardwood?
Solid hardwood is more resistant to scratching than engineered planks, but the latter features a premium-quality wood top layer. This protects the surface from scratch marks even when the other layers aren’t of the same wood species.
Conclusion
As you can see, solid hardwood and engineered hardwood flooring are good for specific purposes and add to a property's resale value. If durability is your primary concern, solid hardwood is the best choice and lasts longer than most flooring options.
But when you're short on cash and looking for an effective flooring solution, engineered wood floors will be worth the investment. Even in terms of maintenance, you won't have much difficulty vacuuming or wiping the planks to sweep away the dust to uphold the quality of either surface.
Before installing a flooring option, think about where you live, the amount of footfall, climatic conditions, etc., to make an informed decision.
Any kid or beginner requires good watercolor instruction books to start becoming a watercolor artist. For kids, it is very helpful to gain perspective by painting in illustrated watercolor books. This way, they can work on their watercolor techniques before moving on to landscape painting or portrait painting.
Hence, here are some of the best watercolor books available today.
THREE WATERCOLOR ACTIVITY BOOKS: The Melissa & Doug Paint...
What I like
Kid-friendly
Mess-free painting
The watercolor paint palette provided
Charming front covers
What I don't like
Low-quality paint provided
The Melissa & Doug watercolor painting book is a three-pack water-coloring book, with each painting book featuring adorable animations on the front cover: a jungle scene, barn animals, and underwater ocean scenes. Hence, this is a perfect book for children to enjoy and learn watercolor painting and coloring.
The most special feature of these books is that they include watercolor paint palettes inside on each page! This means you just need a watercolor paintbrush and a jar of water, and you are all set to paint. There is no mess-up and no cleaning required since the paints are already included in the book. This makes it an excellent painting book to give to budding artists as an introduction to watercolor painting.
However, you will require actual watercolor paints to fill in all the drawings in spite of the watercolor palette provided. This is because the quantity of paint provided is very less and they are not really vibrant or pigmented either. Nonetheless, it can be a fun activity to do with a kid.
Number Of Pages: 60 (20 pages per book) | Product Dimensions: 8.25 x 11.2 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 6 years
Includes a watercolor paint palette and a paintbrush
Kid and beginner-friendly
What I don't like
Not enough paint included
This Ghantoy watercolor painting book is pocket-friendly and an excellent option for a small watercolor painting book. Being made of high-quality wood pulp, the paper is very durable and sturdy.
The book contains 20 different patterns to fill in with watercolor paints. The 20 thin cards can be used to create an entire beautiful painting. Additionally, you can also use each painted card as a charming bookmark. Hence, this watercolor painting book is perfect for not just kids, but also any beginners wanting to get into watercolor painting and learn new techniques.
Apart from showcasing a cute illustration, each page also includes a watercolor paint palette. So, all you need is some water and a watercolor paintbrush to get started. This means mess-free paintings and no cleaning required. This makes the watercolor painting book perfect for young aspiring artists looking to learn to paint.
Number Of Pages: 20 | Product Dimensions: 7.36 x 3.07 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 10 years
This Bamagoo set is a collection of 4 watercolor books in a budget-friendly pack. Each painting book contains 20 different drawings and 2 swatches. The two swatch cards can be used to improve painting techniques and encourage the creative process of young watercolor artists.
Since this is also a pocket-friendly watercolor book, you can use the small cards to create a big watercolor painting. Additionally, you can also use each card separately as a bookmark.
Each page also contains a watercolor paint palette. You can activate the paints using a little amount of water, and you are ready to start painting with the included handy paintbrush.
This particular set has a biological theme, consisting of animals and oceanic life. However, you can also get this same painting book in other themes like gardens, fantasy, and holidays.
Number Of Pages: 80 pages (20 pages per book) | Product Dimensions: 7.56 x 3.23 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 10 years
Watercolor Painting Book: The book contain 20pcs different...
Easy to Use: Each page comes with 6 squares dry set of paint...
What I like
Spiral-bound
Heavy-weight paper
Minimal warping
Charming illustrations
What I don't like
Less quantity of paint
The Kawaqiwa watercolor coloring and painting book is a handy and spiral-bound painting book. The book contains 20 different illustrations to fill in with watercolor pigments. The illustrations are very beginner and kid-friendly, perfect for learning texture techniques and sample paintings.
Each page contains six squares of dried watercolor paint, which can be activated using just a little amount of water. Hence, you don’t need to worry about the storage or cleaning of leftover paint, making the painting process very easy and mess-free. Moreover, the paint pigments are odorless and non-toxic, making this painting book safe for children.
Additionally, the paper is also quite heavy-weight, not allowing the watercolor paintings to bleed through. Also, the paper shows minimal warping or buckling, making it a perfect everyday watercolor book.
Number Of Pages: 20 | Product Dimensions: 7.87 x 5.91 inches | Recommended Age: N/A
This is a set of five Pureadee watercolor painting books, each book made out of the high-quality wood pulp. These watercolor books are not just good for kids but also for beginners to start painting watercolors.
Each page included a watercolor paint palette, which is easy to activate with just a little bit of water and ready to use immediately with a paintbrush. Additionally, each book contains 20 drawings, each drawing is unique to practice your watercolor techniques.
All 5 watercolor books have a different theme: World Adventure, Wonderful Holiday, Fairytale Dream, Wonderful Forest, and Enchanted Garden. Thus, this is a great modern watercolor book set for creative watercolor art and practicing basic techniques.
Number Of Pages: 100 (20 per book) | Product Dimensions: 3.15 x 1.57 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 14 years
This is also an affordable set of 5 Avitorry pocket watercolor painting books. Made from high-quality wood pulp, the watercolor book is very safe and durable for any kid or complete beginner to use.
Each watercolor painting book contains 20 different illustrations, with the small size making each card a perfect bookmark. Additionally, you can also combine all the small, painted cards to create a big watercolor painting. This way, you can work on your common watercolor mistakes and create stunning paintings.
Moreover, each page also has its own watercolor paint palette. All the dried paint squares require just a little amount of water for their activation. You can use the included paintbrushes to practice brush techniques and improve your artistic skills.
Number Of Pages: 100 (20 pages per book) | Product Dimensions: 8.27 x 8.27 inches | Recommended Age: 3 years - 10 years
Quick Comparisons Of The Top Watercolor Painting Book For Kids
Buying Guide To Watercolor Painting Books For Kids
Whether you are buying watercolor paints or watercolor books, you should always know what features to look for to make an informed purchase. This is especially true for watercolor painting books for kids since you need to check the paper's quality and safety standards. Hence, this handy buyer’s guide! Hopefully, this will help you make your decision.
1. Safety Standards
When buying something for kids, safety should be the utmost priority. This also stands true for watercolor painting books since the paper quality and paint pigments can cause harm to a child. So, before you buy a watercolor book for your kids, make sure that the paper is made from high-quality wood pulp. This will ensure its durability and non-toxicity.
As for the included paint palettes, check that the quality of the paint pigments meets the American standards for toy safety. High-quality paint pigments also mean high vibrancy and lightfastness. This way, you and your kid can enjoy and start to paint watercolor paintings.
2. Types Of Illustrations
When buying a watercolor painting book for a child, you need to consider the kid’s choices and preferences. Maybe they would like a space-themed watercolor painting book or an animal-themed watercolor painting book. So, before you go splurging your money on a pack of watercolor painting books, keep your child’s preferences in mind.
Choosing the child's preferred illustrations and drawings will also motivate them to paint more. This way, they can move on to complex techniques after practicing all the fundamentals.
3. Watercolor Book Size
The size of your watercolor painting book is important. When buying a watercolor book for your child, you need to take into account many different factors. If your child attends art classes, you need to make sure that all the art supplies fit perfectly in an art backpack, including the watercolor book.
As you read, many of the watercolor books on this list are pocket-friendly. The reason for that is that these watercolor books are perfect for beginners and art students since they can carry around the watercolor book easily. Additionally, these books are perfect options for plein-air painting.
4. Paint Quality
All of the watercolor painting books mentioned on this list include a paint palette on each page, meaning you get all the essential tools for painting right in the book. The paint palette is a few squares of dried paint stuck right on the top of each drawing. All you need is a little bit of water to activate the dried watercolor paint. This makes watercolor painting so simple, even for an absolute beginner.
But you should keep in mind that the watercolor paint palette provided will not contain high-quality pigments or be very vibrant. You can also expect the quantity to be quite less. So, you will need to keep the basic tools handy in case the provided watercolor palette does not have enough paint.
5. Age Group
Most of the watercolor books mentioned on this list have a recommended age between 3 to 10 years. So, these books are focused on helping kids to begin their journey to becoming advanced artists. Additionally, you can also use these watercolor books for beginners. Complete beginners will benefit from the practice and can use the book as warm-up exercises.
FAQs Related To Watercolor Painting Books
Can I do mixed media painting on watercolor books?
Yes, you can. Apart from watercolor work, you can also use other art mediums to paint on these books. You can color the illustrations using acrylic paints, oil paints, watercolor pencils, colored pencils, gouache, ink, etc. Thus, these books can support a broad range of dry and wet mediums.
How can my children improve their watercolor painting skills?
The watercolor books provided in this list are a perfect introduction to the world of watercolor painting. Since the illustrations are already provided, all a child needs to do is wet the paints provided and practice different painting techniques, like wet-on-wet painting, wet-on-dry painting, layering, etc. Slowly, after achieving an eye for the basic techniques, they can move on to advanced techniques.
With more experience and knowledge, you will start to notice improvements in your child’s paintings. Since these books are already illustrated, you might need to get another plain watercolor painting book so that your child can start practicing painting landscapes and trying to imitate nature.
Start with simple and small stuff like a leaf, a flower, a fruit, or a plant before moving on to more complicated concept art.
Additionally, your child can take inspiration from popular watercolor artists like Gordon MacKenzie, Cathay Johnson, Jenna Rainey, Matthew Palmer, Leslie Frontz, Jean Haines, and Ray Hendershot.
Can I paint en plein air using a watercolor painting book?
A watercolor painting notebook is very handy and easy to carry, especially a pocket-friendly one. Additionally, they even have a paint palette provided inside. This makes them exceptionally good options for plein air painting. All you need to do is carry a jar of water and a paintbrush to start painting en plein air.
Are the paints provided in the watercolor book enough?
To be completely truthful, no, they are not. You can expect the paints to be low in quantity as well as quality. They will not be very vibrant or pigmented and will also have a low lightfastness rating. Hence, it would be helpful if you kept some good quality watercolor paints around. Only with good watercolors can you really improve your painting skill.
What is some basic knowledge I need to have to begin watercolor painting?
You don’t need to have complete knowledge about paints to start painting compositions with watercolors if you are painting just as a hobby. But additional information can never go to waste. So, you can get a complete guide to watercolor painting and learn about color theory, different watercolor techniques, and different lightfastness ratings to improve your skill level.
Verdict
Coming to the end of this article, it is time to talk about the top watercolor books. The Melissa & Doug watercolor book is the best on this list due to its endearing illustrations, watercolor paint palette, and exceptionally adorable front cover.
Hopefully, this article helped you find the best beginner watercolor book for your kid or for yourself. Here’s to becoming a watercolor artist soon!
To use watercolor tube paints, squeeze out some paint on a mixing palette and use a paint brush to mix it with sufficient water, depending on the shade and consistency you desire. Then, apply the paint on paper using techniques like wet-on-dry, dry brushing, glazing, splattering, or salt technique, stippling or dry-on-wet.
Watercolor paints in tubes have always been a popular choice when creating art. They are convenient and versatile, which is why both professional and beginner watercolor artists prefer using watercolor tubes.
You can easily squeeze out the paint from the tube and mix it with water to create a variety of shades and effects. Moreover, watercolor tubes are made by mixing pigments with honey (or glycerin) and gum arabic binder, which is why they stick together so well. In this context, I consider them the clear winner in the battle of watercolor pans vs tubes.
That said, what are the painting techniques that you can try out using this paint? And what materials and preparation are required for the same? In this article, I will try to answer all these questions and more. So, let’s begin!
What Are The Materials Required To Paint With Watercolor Paint Tubes?
It is a no-brainer that watercolor paint tubes are one of the most important art supplies in this case. These types of watercolor paints are available in a wide range on the market, and you can buy several of them to create a variety of hues for your paintings.
However, only invest in a good quality watercolor paint tube brand for better results. And you should always read the label on paint tubes to get the right shade.
2. Brushes
Artists need different kinds of brushes for painting, each serving a purpose. Hence, make sure to have all the brushes that you may need. For instance, you can purchase brushes with thin bristles for detailing, whereas you should invest in ones with large bristles to paint bigger sections of your painting. Again, quality is king, so keep that in mind as well!
3. Watercolor Paper
You should use watercolor paper instead of traditional paper when using watercolor paints. This is because the former is designed in such a way that it absorbs water to stabilize the paint. Hence, they can hold the paint better on their surface.
4. Water
Always keep a jar of water near you while creating any painting to clean your brushes from time to time. Additionally, you can use this water to dilute the paints to create lighter hues for your artwork.
5. Palette
Often, your shade choice might not be readily available on the market. In such cases, you can use a mixing palette to create colors on your own! All you need to do is mix the required primary colors using a paint brush on the pallet to create the desired shades.
6. Masking Tape
Masking tape is primarily used to keep your painting still at a surface. You can also use this tool to create crisp edges or borders in your painting.
7. Pencils And Erasers
If you want to paint figures in your artwork, it is always a good idea to sketch it out first. For that, you will need pencils and erasers to draw on your sketchbook. It is advised that you only stick to the basic ones available on the market since you only need them to create a rough outline to adhere to.
How To Prepare The Paint For Use?
Preparing The Watercolor Paint Tubes For Use
1. Squeeze Out The Paint On A Clean Mixing Surface
The first step is to squeeze out your desired paint colors from their respective tubes on a mixing palette. You can also use a mixing dish if you do not have a palette.
It is best to squeeze out only a small amount of tube paint when you begin this step. Doing so will allow you to understand factors like pigmentation intensity carefully. Once you have assessed such factors, add more paint as needed.
2. Add Water
You need to add water to watercolor paints for better activation while painting. You can use a clean brush, dip it in water, and then use it to mix the paint with water.
The amount of water you add to the paint depends on several factors, such as the consistency of the paint you wish to achieve and the intensity of the hues you want to create. For instance, add more water if you want your tube paints to have a thin consistency.
3. Mix The Paint
You can use a mixing palette knife or a clean brush to mix the water and paint effectively. Use circular motions to mix the two elements thoroughly. It is an important step, and you must ensure no clumps or dry spots in the paint mixture.
4. Test The Paint
Sometimes, the pigmentation and consistency of the paint on your mixing palette may differ from what appears on paper. Hence, it is best to test the paint on scrap paper first.
Once you apply a small amount of paint on the scrap paper, assess whether or not factors like the shade of the paint seem right to you. If not, you can add more water or paint per your needs to fix the issue.
Tips For Preparing The Paint
If possible, use distilled water instead of tap water to avoid any sort of color contamination due to the mineral concentration in the latter.
Experiment with different ratios of water and paint to achieve a variety of shades and effects, such as transparent washes and opaque layers.
Label your paint mixtures with the paint colors and ratios that you used for future reference.
7 Watercolor Painting Techniques You Can Use With Tube Paints
1. Wet-On-Wet Technique
As the name suggests, the wet-on-wet technique involves the application of a wet wash on the surface of your paper before you add paint colors to it. This technique can be used to create various effects like wood grain or water ripples and is a great way of using watercolor paint tubes.
Doing the wet-on-wet technique can help you blend colors more easily. Further, it facilitates the paint to spread across the paper much more efficiently. It is most commonly used to create soft and blended backgrounds in watercolor paintings. To apply the wet-on-wet technique using watercolor tubes, you can follow these steps:
Step 1
Dip your brush in clean water and stroke it across your paper. Ensure that the paper is evenly wetted and there are no dry spots. Alternatively, you may use a spray bottle to dampen the surface you wish to paint.
Tip
You should never over-wet the paper. Since your paper may get damaged after it reaches its saturation point, it is always a good idea to stick to only moderately wetting its surface.
Step 2
Squeeze out your paint and mix it on your mixing palette. You can use different amounts of water to achieve your desired level of consistency and add different shades of tube paints to get the precise shades you want to create.
Step 3
Apply the watercolor paint directly on the wet surface of your paper. You can add more colors to blend with the background as you see fit in this step.
Step 4
Once you have created all the textures, patterns, and designs using the tube paint mixtures, let the painting dry completely. Remember that wet-on-wet paintings can take longer to dry out because the paints and the surface are wet.
Example Of Finished Paintings Using Wet-On-Wet Technique
2. Dry Brush Technique
You might like the dry brush technique if you like creating rough textures in your paintings. It requires you to apply a small amount of tube paint on a dry brush and then stroke it to create a variety of textures and highlights in your artwork.
You get a lot of control over your brush movements with this technique. As a result, you get the creative freedom to create a range of effects - from light to dark aesthetics.
The dry brush technique is popularly combined with other techniques, such as the wet-on-wet method of watercolor painting. You can follow these steps to try the dry brush technique:
Step 1
Take a clean and dry brush. Dip it in a small amount of paint and remove any excess paint using a paper towel.
Step 2
Hold the brush at a slightly tilted angle and create light strokes on your watercolor paper. Ensure that you do not apply too much pressure while doing so to avoid microtears. Wait for this layer to dry.
Step 3
Once your first layer dries out, add the next layer of dry brush strokes. Keep adding layers until you have reached your desired textures or patterns in your painting. You can experiment with different kinds of brushes, tube paint tones, as well as with textures like toothpick scratches.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Dry Brushing
3. Glazing Technique
A richly colored surface can change the look of your painting completely - and that is exactly what the glazing technique helps you achieve. It requires you to layer multiple thin washes one over the other.
The glazing watercolor painting technique can help you create a strong depth in your artwork. It can also help you strengthen the complexity of color in your painting. You can follow this step-by-step guide to apply the glazing technique easily:
Step 1
Mix the watercolor tube paints thoroughly and clean your brushes. Add water to the paint mixture as per your consistency requirements.
Step 2
Use a large damp brush to apply the first thin layer of this paint on your watercolor paper. You can also use a sponge for application. However, make sure that you do not use too much water, or else you might damage the surface of your painting.
Step 3
Let the first layer dry out completely before adding the subsequent layers. Remember that you may need to add several layers of the same color to achieve your desired textures and gradients.
Step 4
Once the layers of your glazes dry out completely, you can add fine details to your painting. These include highlights, outlines, and additional colors for a bolder punch.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Glazing
4. Salt Technique
More than washing and detailing is required to create an artwork that stands out. Hence, trying the salt technique with watercolor tubes is a great idea! It can help you create a unique texture and add an interesting visual treat to your painting.
When salt is sprinkled on the wet watercolor wash of any painting, crystalized patterns start forming on it. Since the salt crystals absorb water and pigment, a beautiful texture is produced. Here is a step-by-step guide to try out the salt technique with tube watercolor paint:
Step 1
Use a large brush to apply a wet wash on your watercolor paper.
Step 2
Add the salt crystals on the surface of your watercolor paper while the wash is still wet. You can choose your choice of salt depending on the texture that you wish to create. For instance, you can add coarse-grained salt to create rough textures or stick with fine-grained salt if you want delicate textures.
Step 3
Let the salt crystals sit on your painting until it is completely dry. This painting process can take several hours in this case since a tube of watercolor paint takes longer to dry.
Step 4
Once the paint dries, use a clean and dry brush to remove the salt crystals from the surface of your painting. Or, you can use your fingers (like how I do) to scrub off these crystals gently. Ensure that you do not apply strong pressure while doing so, or else you might damage your watercolor paper.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Salt Technique
5. Splattering Technique
If you ask me, the splattering technique is one of the best ways to create interesting and creative effects in your artwork. It requires you to spread random splatters of tube paints on your painting to create abstract effects.
Splattering can add textures and depth to your artwork and facilitate enhancing certain sections of the painting. You can use this technique to perform several tasks, such as creating an enticing background in your painting. Here is how you can use watercolor paint technique to try out splattering while painting:
Step 1
Pick the watercolor paint tubes that you want to splatter on your painting. Mix them with water to achieve the desired level of consistency in your paints.
Step 2
Dip a clean brush in this smooth mixture of paint and water. Lift it and hold it right over your watercolor paper.
Step 3
Use your free hand to tap or flick the brush. This will cause the paint accumulated on the bristles of your brush to splatter on your painting, thus creating your desired effect. Repeat the process with as many colors as you want.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Splattering
6. Stippling Technique
Stippling is a popular watercolor painting technique where a professional artist is supposed to use watercolor paint to make small dots or paint marks to create various effects. I often use this technique with watercolor tubes to create several kinds of patterns.
The key to creating a wide range of designs using the stippling technique is assessing the perfect size of dots or marks your painting needs. For instance, you can vary the density and size of your dots and marks based on whether you want to create subtle or graphic details. Here is a step-by-step guide for trying out this technique with watercolor tubes:
Step 1
Take your watercolor paper. Sketch the area you wish to stipple on using a pencil.
Step 2
Squeeze out the watercolor paint from the paint tubes on your mixing palette and dip a dry brush into it. Ensure that the brush is small, round, and clean.
Step 3
Hold the brush at a 90-degree angle over the space you wish to stipple. Then, dab its bristles lightly to create small dots and marks on your painting. You can play with spacing and pressure while creating each dot to make various designs and patterns.
Step 4
Once you have added enough dots to your painting, use another (preferably dry) brush to blend certain areas to create a softer look.
Examples Of Finished Paintings Using Stippling
7. Wet-On-Dry Technique
As the name suggests, wet-on-dry requires applying wet paint from the watercolor tubes to your dry paper. You will like working with this method if you want to create precise details in your paintings.
The tube paints remain in place when applied on a dry surface because they are thicker in consistency and hold their position on the paper. As a result, there is no issue of bleeding or spreading in this case. Here is a step-by-step guide to using the wet-on-dry technique to create controlled details:
Step 1
Take a bit of paint from the watercolor paint tubes and mix the pigments on your mixing tray. Using a wet brush, lift this mixture off of your plastic or ceramic palette.
Step 2
Using the tip of the wet brush, apply the watercolor paint on a dry sheet of your paper. Ensure that your brush is not dripping with water and is just damp enough to work with.
Step 3
Create all the designs and effects that you want in the first layer of your painting - fine lines, edges, and so on. Let it dry before you add the next layer of watercolor paint to the tube.
Step 4
Keep repeating the process until you achieve your desired design.
Once you have tried out the various techniques you can use with paint tubes, it is essential to clean up too. Doing so ensures that the watercolor paints in tubes won’t get degraded due to neglectful maintenance. Further, cleaning your art tools after painting with watercolor paint tubes can also help ensure that your future paintings are not muddy or dirty.
Tips For Cleaning Up After Painting With Watercolor Paints In Tubes
1. Clean Your Brushes
The bristles of your dirty brush can get hard over time, making the process of painting way more inconvenient than it is supposed to be. To avoid this issue, cleaning all your brushes right after you paint your beautiful artwork is always a good idea.
To clean your brushes, rinse them with clean water. Use your fingers to gently remove any stubborn dried paint from the bristles of your brushes. You can also use a mild soap for a better cleanup. Once you have cleaned the bristles of your brush, reshape them.
2. Clean Your Palette
Since artists use their personalized watercolor palette a lot while creating any painting, it becomes crucial for them to remove the dried paint from its surface. Working with a dirty paint palette can lead to the residue of the dried paint and dust mixing with your fresh paint - thereby causing muddiness in your fresh paint mixture.
Using a paper towel, remove the excess wet paint from the surface of your mixing palette. You can use mild soap to scrape off the dried paint from your mixing palette and rinse it under water. Hence, it is a good idea to clean your mixing palette right after you are done with one painting session.
3. Clean Your Workspace
While most artists remember to clean their mixing palettes and brushes, they commonly forget about cleaning their workspace too. Painting in a dirty workspace can cause a strong negative impact on you, such as a lack of motivation, due to the accumulation of clutter around you. Additionally, dirty tables can lead to staining on your paintings as well!
Hence, it is best to maintain a clean workspace. Collect all your art tools and put them back in their storage places. It would be best to clean your workspace with a damp cloth in areas where you might have spilled too much paint, such as tables or floors.
How To Store The Paint And Equipment Properly?
1. Store The Watercolor Tubes In A Cool And Dry Place
The best way to prevent dried watercolor paint tubes is to store them in a cool and dry box with a tight lid. Since heat and moisture speed up the tubes drying out, it is best to keep them away from areas with direct exposure to sunlight.
2. Seal The Watercolor Paint Tube Caps Properly
If you want to work with fresh paints every time you use watercolor paint tubes, you must seal their metal caps properly. By doing so, you can prevent the moisture from getting trapped inside the tubes to a great extent. Tighten the nozzle properly to prevent air from entering the paint tube.
3. Place Your Watercolor Tube Paint Set In An Upright Position
Since we squeeze out the paint whenever we use watercolor paint tubes, it is best not to store them by placing them horizontally. Instead, stick to storing your tube paint set in an upright position. This way, you can minimize the chances of your tubes leaking.
FAQs Related To Watercolor Paints In Tubes
How to restore dried watercolor paint tubes?
Most of us who have been using watercolors for a while will have old, crusty paint tubes lying around the house. As watercolors don’t really have an expiry date, you can easily restore them with a few simple steps.
Cut open the metal or plastic tube.
Remove the paint into a mixing palette or pan.
Add a bit of gum Arabic, and water to revive the paint.
Let the paint soften, and add a bit more binder or water if required.
Stir the wet paint with a toothpick to create a smooth paste for getting a consistent color.
You’ll need a little more patience while restoring old dried paints, but it’s worth it and can be done with only a few supplies.
Can you use watercolor paint straight from the tube?
Yes, you can directly pick up paint from the tube while working on a spot color. You need to unscrew the cap, and lift a little paint from the tube with a wet brush. Just make sure that the brush is absolutely clean to avoid contamination. But we don’t recommend using this technique frequently as it may promote mold growth.
How to properly store watercolor paint tubes?
After you use watercolor paint tubes, it’s pretty essential to store them properly to prevent mold growth and contamination. Remember to clean the mouth of your tubes with a damp cloth or paper towel to remove any excess paint that may get dried and clog the cap.
To avoid the paints from cracking or getting separated, store the tubes in a cool, enclosed space and an airtight container. Properly stored watercolor tubes may last a long time and remain vibrant, which can sometimes be more than ten years.
Artists love experimenting with new pure paint sets. Hence, if you are bored of using watercolor pans, it is best to switch to paint tubes. Watercolor paints are semi-liquid, highly pigmented, and can help you add bold color punches to your paintings - unlike watercolor pan cake paints.
You can use watercolor tubes to paint pigments through several kinds of painting techniques, such as wet-on-wet, dry brushing, and so on. With watercolor tubes, you have the flexibility to choose between using a watercolor paper or painting on a watercolor canvas. Even though such paints may have a higher cost price, they are definitely worth every penny!
Summing up, the best way to use watercolor paints in tubes is to experience and discover your own style. Don’t shy away from experimenting with different shades and hues, no matter how bold it may seem for your comfort zone.
If you’ve found this guide insightful, don’t forget to give my article on how to paint glassa read.
If you’re new to watercolor painting, you may think that painting natural landscapes is the best way to get the hang of the process.
However, this isn’t completely true, as you can also start your journey by painting buildings and structures. The fluidity of watercolors makes it quite easy to successfully create the effects of light, shadows, and different textures. So, you don’t have to worry about missing out on any finer details and a realistic finish!
That’s why for today’s tutorial, I will walk you through the step-by-step process of painting the famous Berlin Cathedral with watercolors. Clear your table and dive into the deets! It goes without saying that this would make a great En Plein Air painting, even if you don't live in Berlin, painting the reference and enjoying this process outdoors is worth considering!
Painting Berlin Cathedral In Watercolor
Before I explain the steps for painting the Berlin Cathedral with watercolors, let me quickly tell you about the supplies I will use today. The good news is I won’t use many watercolor paints or brushes, and you don’t need these exact products either. I am using whatever I have handy, and you can follow suit!
Paint: Daniel Smith George Politis MA Set 1 6x5 | Paper: Saunders Waterford Watercolor Paper - White, 300gsm | Brush: Princeton Aqua Elite Professional 4 Piece Set 4850
The first step for any painting, especially as a beginner, is to draw a rough sketch of the landscape or structure you have in mind on your watercolor paper. This will act as an effective reference to keep you from mixing the colors later.
My sketch today is a pretty simple representation of the exterior of the Cathedral (with domes and windows) and a bushy foreground. But you can seek inspiration from online images to better understand the overall structure and the different sections. Likewise, feel free to use a ruler for drawing straight lines.
The only thing I’d suggest here is to use light pencil strokes so that you can erase them easily without leaving any nasty marks if required. And don’t worry if sketching the structure takes more time and you have to do it multiple times.
Once you’re satisfied with the sketch, it’s time to get started with the real deal! Thin out some light and dark green with water separately in a palette and start painting the bushy foreground, using the two shades alternatively.
I am using short and quick dabbing motions to add texture as well as help the shades blend seamlessly. You can also apply more dark green to the sections where you want more shade than light. However, I haven’t covered the entire space with green, as the little white ‘‘specks’’ create a more realistic effect.
Continue doing this till you’ve completely covered the base of the Cathedral, but make sure you don’t enter the walls above.
With the foreground ready, the next step is to start painting the Cathedral walls.
For this, thin out some yellow ochre and paint the walls and the beams of the structure. You don’t need to use the same paint for all the walls, though, as we want to create the illusion of light and shadows.
So, use a darker shade of yellow or some light brown to add shadows to the walls like I’m doing here. As you can see, I’m using a deeper shade for the left side to create natural-looking shadows.
For the domes, I’ll be using a light shade of blue to paint the domes of the Cathedral, but you can also use turquoise. Thin out the paint with water and start painting these portions, barring the circular windows.
I’d suggest using only one layer of paint for the domes, as it will darken eventually upon drying. So, adding too many layers at once may make the domes appear too dark, thereby disrupting the overall balance of the painting.
Additionally, you can use the same color without adding much water to add shadows to the sides of the dome. In this case, wait for the domes to dry out completely to see how much they darken, and then take a call accordingly.
Now, take the thinnest brush in your collection and dip it in some dark brown color to paint the details of the Cathedral. Go over the joists between the upper and lower floors as well as the roof-like structures, followed by the perimeter of the walls and the circular windows.
A little tip: paint at least two lines for the triangular roofs and horizontal joists to accentuate these sections to give the illusion of dimension. This will keep your painting from looking flat. Similarly, make small strokes on the front roof and wall, as I have done here.
This step will also require a thin-tipped brush, so make sure you clean the one used in the previous step completely to eliminate any excess color. Or, you can use another thin brush if you have it handy.
I will be using some deep blue watercolor to paint some of the larger windows of the Cathedral while leaving a couple of them for the time being. Likewise, I have not painted the arch-like section of the windows on the bottom, as I felt using too much color will make for a crowded look.
Since we will be adding more details to the windows, let the base color on them dry properly to prevent it from smudging later. Meanwhile, let’s add some more details to the dome of our Berlin Cathedral.
Take a thin-tipped brush and dip it in the same color you used for painting the domes. Now, go over the ‘boundary’ of the domes using the pencil line as a reference. I am also adding a curved porch-like effect on the base of the main dome through horizontal and some vertical strokes.
You can use the same brush to add borders and fill in the circular windows on the domes like I’m doing here. For the final touch, I am using a thicker consistency of color to paint the structure of St.Paul and the apostle (besides the dome) to make it more prominent.
For this step, start by mixing some brown with yellow to paint the upper side windows. Here again, you may darken and lighten the color to create the illusion of shadows and light, respectively.
Using the same color or picking up some brown on the tip of the brush, add the boundaries of the top-most blue windows to give them dimension. Now, fill in the windows using vertical and horizontal lines to create the illusion of wooden panes. Repeat this process for the bottom windows and fill in the empty ones withthe ‘wooden panes.’
At this point, I felt my Berlin Cathedral could use some more detailing and highlights. So now, I am simply going over certain areas to create more shadows and darken the existing color.
I am also adding some brown highlights just below the dome to make the overall structure appear more vibrant.
To add the final touches, we will paint small brick-like structures on the bottom walls with some light and dark brown watercolors, again, to create the illusion of shadows and light. Use a fine-tipped brush to ensure precision, as the shapes should be clearly identifiable.
Finally, use some yellow watercolor to paint the vertical structures on the top of the three domes. And there you have it- the Berlin Cathedral painted in watercolors!
That’s all I had for you today! Although there are many detailed images of the Berlin Cathedral available on the internet, I’d advise first-timers to sketch a simple layout as I did and use only a few colors.
This way, you can focus more on practicing the different strokes and techniques of using watercolors. And once you have your hands set, feel free to sketch more complex versions and invoke life in them with the use of more colors.
As for the time being, you can practice creating light and shadows using lighter and darker shades of colors, as well as natural strokes, to create realistic effects before starting with painting the Cathedral. Or, you can use this painting as your practice guide!
Lastly, don’t lose hope if your first few trials don’t turn out perfect. Remember that practice and patience will always be the key to success, the beginner-to-expert guide on how to paint in watercolor might be helpful if you're feeling stuck!
Speaking of toaster ovens, it's a great option if you're looking for a space-saving oven.
A toaster oven is a small kitchen appliance that can readily fit on your counter. What makes it stand out is that it preheats quickly with less energy.
It's basically a mini oven that can reheat frozen food and bake small batches of pastries.
Unlike a microwave which can result in soggy food, a toaster oven guarantees crispy toast every time.
If you want to level up your toaster oven, giving it even more functionality, a countertop oven might be for you!
It is generally larger than a toaster and can even provide convection cooking.
A countertop oven heats up faster than a conventional oven while expending less energy. Newbies can benefit when trying their hand at baking since they don't need to worry about utility bills.
Many countertop ovens come with the same features as traditional ovens.
The main difference is that it has a lower capacity for larger dishes.
A microwave oven can make quick meals for someone on the go or someone looking to heat last night's leftovers for a midnight snack.
Microwave ovens use microwaves that objects absorb and convert to heat.
These appliances make it incredibly convenient to reheat and cook food. It may not toast bread or make things crispy, but the quick, hands-free heating more than makes up for it.
Do note that you need microwave-safe utensils to ensure food and thermal safety.
Because an electric grill doesn't produce fumes, it's the only type of grill that can be used indoors.
It's also more eco-friendly than gas grills because it uses less energy and emits no smoke.
Electric grills are designed with open-top grills and utilize electrical elements to grill your food. Many models also have tilted designs that help you drain grease effortlessly.
For a more specialized appliance, you can rely on a panini press, a cousin of the electric grill.
It's similar to a sandwich press that presses a sandwich down as it's heated. It's an ideal choice if you don't want to make a grilled cheese sandwich on the pan (no flipping!).
It distributes heat evenly and ensures that the whole sandwich gets grilled. With a panini press, you would typically use a flatbread like a baguette or focaccia.
Due to how niche it is, a panini maker only has limited uses, unlike a conventional sandwich press.
With an electric griddle, you can grill any food to perfection!
Because it doesn't have flames that can be affected by air movement, electric griddles maintain temperature and distribute heat better than gas griddles.
They're great for dry heat cooking because they have wells on the sides of the cooking surface that catch grease.
They are also far more energy efficient but can take longer to heat up. Fortunately, it doesn't need an exhaust system like gas alternatives.
An electric griddle is an excellent choice if electricity is a cheaper utility in your area.
When preparing pot roast for your next get-together, you'll need a reliable appliance like a slow cooker or a crock pot that can simmer your dish for hours, even if left unattended.
A slow cooker is a glazed ceramic or porcelain cooking pot with electric heating elements.
The glass lid collects vapor that also provides a low-pressure seal.
Unlike a pressure cooker, there's no risk of a sudden pressure release with a slow cooker because it maintains atmospheric pressure.
Arguably America's favorite appliance, a deep fryer can whip up donuts, fries, and chicken wings!
You can probably make it with a deep fryer as long as it's greasy.
A basic deep fryer has a basket that can be lowered into a tank of oil and raised when you're done frying.
Deep frying involves submerging food into oilbetween 350 to 375°F (177 to 191°C). It fries food fast and ensures that all sides are cooked simultaneously.
Our last kitchen appliance is as specialized as it gets.
A rapid egg cooker is incredibly convenient if you cook eggs frequently, especially in large quantities.
You simply need to add water to the heating plate, place the eggs in the holder, and close it for perfectly boiled eggs every time!
It's a self-contained machine that reduces clean-up and messes.
What are the Different Types of Cookers?
Many people find it challenging to choose the right cooker for their kitchen because there are so many types of cookers!
You can find various models with different features that vary in price and design. It can seem overwhelming, but first, we must cover the difference between a cooker and an oven.
A freestanding cooker is an all-in-one appliance with a stovetop or hob on top and an oven below it.
Freestanding cookers are generally more affordable than built-in ovens and stovetop units.
A range cooker is a large, multi-functional unit that offers more flexibility for cooks. It can have up to five burners and 50% more storage than built-in ovens.
Advanced range cookers even have a self-cleaning oven that burns away grease and debris effortlessly.
You can often see stovetops and ovens sold as separate appliances. Ovens come in a range of options, including under-counter and eye-level, and can even have built-in ovens.
Cookers can be split into several categories based on their fuel type, installation process, and design. In a nutshell, there are three basic types of cookers:
Gas cooker
Electric cooker
Dual fuel cooker
Let's look at how each cooking appliance stands out:
Gas Cookers
A gas hob is a preferred option by many because it provides instant heat. It's great for conventional cooking as it offers excellent control over the flame.
Gas-powered hobs are also reasonably economical, with many energy-efficient models that consume less gas. However, gas cookers are more complicated to clean than electric hobs.
One of the main advantages of a gas cooker is that the gas flame is visible. Unlike electric cookers, you can easily spot any problems with the burner.
With a freestanding cooker, the gas oven cavity will heat up quickly since most gas ovens don't come with fans.
Do note that because heat rises, the top of the oven will get hotter than the bottom.
As a result, you'll need to learn how to cook with different heat zones and use broiler pans to ensure air circulation.
Furthermore, you need to clean it regularly to remove grease and food residue. If you choose to get a gas hob, you also need to have a certified professional install it.
What I like
Instant heat
Temperature control
Visible flames
What I Don't Like
Uneven heating zones
Difficult to clean
Electric Cookers
An electric cooker is worth considering if you don't have a gas connection at your home.
An electric oven may take longer to heat up compared to gas ovens, but it does provide better heat distribution.
When it comes to electric hobs, electric ceramic hobs tend to take longer to heat and cool down.
Go for an induction hob instead, which responds to heat adjustments instantly. Remember that you need iron or iron-based cooking options for induction cookers.
Because there are no visible flames during induction cooking, you must check the built-in indicators to know if the burners are hot.
Take note of the residual heat that remains on the induction hob after you cook food.
There are three variations of electric ovens:
Convection ovens - You don't need to pre-heat convection ovens because hot air is evenly distributed by a fan and exhaust system. It results in a quicker cooking time.
Conventional ovens - A conventional oven has electric heating elements that heat the top, bottom, and sides. As such, this type of oven needs to be preheated.
Multifunction ovens - A multifunction oven combines the heating process and system of both ovens to allow for more versatility.
What I like
Even heat distribution
Easy to clean
Energy efficient
What I Don't Like
Requires ferrous pans
A ceramic hob does not respond well to heat adjustments
Relies on built-in heat indicators
Dual Fuel Cookers
If you want the benefits of a gas hob but the consistency of an electric oven, a freestanding dual-fuel cooker is a great option.
It's ideal for those who want to invest in range cookers, which provide immediate heat while maintaining even heating zones in the oven.
It's the best of both variations with this range cooker!
You can expect at least four high-efficiency gas hobs and one wok burner, a spacious oven cavity with automatic gas shut-off valves.
High-quality range cookers can also have a multifunction oven that comes with an electric grill.
What I like
Versatile
Uniform cooking heat
Direct heat from flames
Responsive temperature control
What I Don't Like
Expensive
Requires gas line AND sufficient voltage
Types of Electric Cookers
So, we've discussed electric ovens, but there are also different kinds of electric cookers on the market.
When looking at an electric cooker range, you can choose an induction hob, a ceramic hob, or a solid plate hob:
Induction Hobs
An induction cooker uses electromagnetism to cook food. It's electric-powered, but the heating element worksmagnetically.
Unlike gas stoves, it doesn't have visible flames but generates an electric current that heats up the pan.
When not in use, the hob will remain cold, which means it expends less energy than other hob types.
Almost all induction cooktops require cooking vessels made of ferrous metal like cast iron to work.
Solid Plate Hobs
Solid plate cooktops typically have four heating zones made up of electric coils that resemble traditional burners.
Similar to gas burners, solid plate hobs have knobs that make them easy to use. Should one of the plates malfunction, it can be readily unplugged and replaced with a new coil.
Among the different types of electric stoves, solid plate ones are the most affordable.
However, the main caveat with this type is that they are slow to respond to heat changes and can be challenging to clean.
Ceramic Hobs
Like a solid plate hob, a ceramic cooktop is electrically powered to produce heat under its ceramic glass surface. It includes advanced safety features and cleans easily.
Most top-quality ceramic glass hobs have temperature safety technology that prevents overheating and accidental burning.
Because of their sleek designs, ceramic cookers remain one of the most POPULAR electric stoves.
That being said, they can be difficult to clean and tend to scratch easily.
Single Oven vs Double Oven
When looking for the right oven, the main question you must ask yourself is: how often and how much do you cook?
If you rarely cook or live in a small household, a single oven should work well enough. Single ovens typically have an oven and a grill in one cavity.
On the other hand, if you have a LARGE family who loves cooking and hosting parties, a double oven is a better option.
Double ovens have two ovens in place of a storage drawer single ovens typically have. They have a main oven with electric or gas burners and grills on top.
The top oven is meant for pizzas and baking sheets, while the bottom one can contain a 20-pound turkey.
Keep in mind that double ovens do consume more energy than single ovens.
Types Of Cookers FAQs
Below is a related question about cookers:
What Type of Cooker Is Best for the Environment?
If you’re looking for an eco-friendly range cooker, induction hobs are the most energy-efficient choice for cooking.
An induction cooker doesn’t emit excess heat and concentrates all the energy in the pan.
Certain models also have automatic shut-off technology that switches off the burner when a pan is absent.
Finding a new cooker for your kitchen will depend on your cooking habits, preferences, and budget.
Some appliances are more specialized than others, so you need to consider which ones are worth investing in.
That being said, you can be sure there's a cooker for all sorts of cooking styles!
The most common types of watercolor techniques for beginners include the wet-on-wet technique, dry brush method, and wet-on-dry technique. Lifting, layering, glazing, and the salt technique are a few additional watercolor techniques through which artists can create an enticing artwork. An understanding of the various concepts of color theory makes the overall process of creating watercolor art much easier.
Understanding how to use different kinds of watercolor techniques can help you create a wide variety of elements in your vertical or landscape painting. From textures to transitions, every step can be smoothly established if you are well-versed in such techniques.
In this article, I will be walking you through the basic watercolor techniques for beginners through which you can easily create beautiful art using watercolors. I will also be touching upon the concept of color theory.
Let’s get started!
What Are The Materials Needed For Watercolor Painting?
One of the first and most vital materials that you need to get started with watercolor painting is a decent set of paints. There are a variety of options available on the market, and you can choose the one that suits your needs the most based on factors like the diversity of colors and brands.
If you do not have much experience with watercolors, you may have to go through your share of trial and error to land on the perfect set of watercolor paints.
2. Paper
While you may want to use any kind of paper lying around your house to create art, it is best to stick to watercolor paper when trying to learn the basic watercolor techniques for beginners. The texture and design of the papers in a watercolor painting book are manufactured in such a way that water-based colors do not damage them.
3. Brush
Another essential material required for learning the various watercolor techniques is a brush. One brush is not enough to learn the basics of such techniques. As you will go through the section that covers these watercolor techniques, you will realize that creating a watercolor painting requires you to use more than one brush.
Hence, you should have at least the three primary sizes of a brush handy. These include a small, a medium, and a large-sized brush. The varying widths of the watercolor brushes will help you establish different tasks.
For instance, a big brush can be used to paint a large area whereas a small brush will help you when you want to outline a drawing. You may also use a combination of different types of brushes, such as fan, angular, flat, and linear brushes, to create a variety of effects.
4. Palette
A palette is a base that is used to hold all your paints. Its function also includes acting as a surface for all your mixing requirements. Hence, you can create new colors by mixing two or more pigments on such palettes.
There are a variety of palettes available on the market, and you can choose one that fits your needs the best. For instance, you can either go for the traditional plastic palettes or its metal alternative. If you cannot arrange a palette, you can use substitutes like paper plates too.
5. Water container
If you have ever used watercolor to paint before, you must be aware of how quickly the brushes get dirty. After all, they are constantly dipped in different shades and colors, which leads to accumulation of debris on the bristles.
All watercolor painters keep a water container by their side to clean their brushes. Moreover, water is an important medium that helps watercolors spread easily on the paper, allowing you to paint with ease.
Tip
Keep a paper towel handy as watercolor can be a messy method of painting. You can also use paper towels to add variety to your watercolor painting by creating designs and patterns.
Whenever you wish to create a soft and blended effect in your artwork, it is best to use the wet-on-wet technique. As the name suggests, this method requires you to apply wet paint on a wet surface. You may need to apply a masking fluid to protect the white areas of your art while using this watercolor technique.
This method is most commonly used for creating soft and natural transitions between colors. The colors spread easily on wet paper, which is why this technique is also used for painting a sky or clouds.
Step-By-Step Guide To Practice The Technique
Step 1
Use a spray or paintbrush to carefully wet the paper with clean water. You need to carry out this step carefully, as an excessively wet surface might ruin the paper’s quality.
One might spray the water on the canvas, or use a damp paper towel to wet the surface. Keep this paper at a 45-degree angle for easy application of watercolors.
Step 2
Take your palette and mix the colors that you want to paint with. You can either create a color by mixing two pigments or apply the paint directly on the paper as per your needs.
Using a brush, dab the paint slowly on the wet paper. Rest assured of smooth application with no visible harsh lines.
Step 3
Once you add the first layer of colors, you can tilt the paper a little to cause the watercolors to spread on the paper. But I’d suggest refraining from doing this if you don’t want the colors to bleed into each other.
Additionally, ensure that the first layer of the paint dries out completely before you repeat the cycle of adding the second layer of paint.
Tips
Ensure that the quality of paper used is decent so that it can absorb water without getting ruined.
Paint as quickly as possible, so that the wet paper does not dry out while you are in the middle of carrying out the wet-on-wet technique.
2. Dry Brush Technique
Sometimes, you may be required to add texture to your paintings. In such cases, it is best to use the dry brush technique. It requires you to only use the dry brush and not wet it so that the rough look can be brought to life.
The ideal type of paper for using a dry brushing technique is the cold pressed watercolor paper. It allows you to create elements like fur, wood, and rough ground easily. This fun technique also ensures that the paint does not lighten in terms of saturation after drying.
Step-By-Step Guide To Practice The Technique
Step 1
Choose the correct brush to create the dry brushing effect. The best one to go for in this case would be a brush with firm bristles, ideally the ones that are made of goat hair.
You can also choose the brushes that you have had for a while now since they must have absorbed a decent amount of moisture over time, thereby becoming firmer in texture.
Step 2
Make a thick paint mix and dip your brush in it. Use it to apply watercolor on a dry piece of paper. Then, create soft and quick brush strokes on the paper to give your painting a rough and textured touch to it.
Step 3
Keep adding the strokes until you feel the need to stop. Using this technique, you can also create highlights and other relevant details to the background of your painting.
Tips
Use a decent quality of paper to paint on because dry brushing may tear thin or poor quality papers.
Do not add excess paint to your brush to have more brush control over the creation of strokes in your painting.
3. Wet-On-Dry Technique
As the name suggests, the wet-on-dry technique requires you to use wet paint on a dry surface. This is the best method for beginners since it gives them a decent amount of control over the movement of brushes and paints on paper.
If you want to create a defined and crisp painting that has all its elements well defined, then you should practice mastering the technique of wet painting on a dry surface.
Step-By-Step Guide To Practice The Technique
Step 1
Take a dry sheet of paper. Wet the medium-sized brush that you will be using to create your watercolor art in clean water, and then dip it in your desired shade of watercolor.
Step 2
Apply smooth strokes to create defined shapes of the figure that you want. Since the surface of the paper is dry, you will be able to easily apply the watercolor in whichever direction you want.
Step 3
Once the paper dries out, add the next layer of paint to it. Watercolor fades to a lighter tone after drying when applied using this technique, so you might be required to layer the colors more than once to create a smooth and opaque finish.
Tips
Don’t wet the brush too much because an excessive amount of water may hamper the process of creating well-defined figures.
To prevent different colors from mixing or bleeding, add the next layer of paint only when the previous one dries out completely.
Color Theory
Why do some colors suit certain elements of art better than others? It happens due to color theory, which is the study of how different colors work with each other and how humans perceive them. Before you start exploring the various watercolor painting concepts, it is crucial that you are aware of this theory to produce better art pieces.
Colors symbolize different things, thereby affecting human emotions. The understanding of this concept helps designers and marketers create designs that people can relate to and connect to on a personal level.
For instance, red and yellow are known to induce appetite - that is the combination used by food outlets such as McDonald’s in their logo. This theory also involves understanding how different primary colors are mixed to formulate the differing shades of secondary and tertiary colors on the color wheel.
1. Basic Color Mixing
The three primary colors - red, yellow, and blue paint - do not need to be mixed with any other pigment to be created. On the other hand, secondary colors are formed by mixing an equal ratio of two primary colors in a balanced amount.
An example of this basic mixing can be mixing red and yellow paint to create an orange pigment.
Similarly, when we mix a secondary and a primary color, we obtain a tertiary color. For instance, if you mix blue, which is a primary color, with green paint, which is a secondary color created by mixing blue and yellow - you can create the shade of blue-green.
2. Complementary Colors
Understanding the concept of complementary colors and color theory can help you create a more suitable piece of artwork for your audience.
Complementary colors are nothing but the colors that lie opposite to each other on the color wheel. These opposite colors, when used together as a combination, give a more vibrant touch to your watercolor painting.
It increases the contrast of your designs as well. A few examples of complementary colors include pairs of red and green, yellow and purple, and ultramarine blue and orange.
3. Warm And Cool Colors
You can use warm and cool colors to accurately depict certain emotions through your art by setting its mood. Colors like red, yellow, brown, and orange fall under the category of warm colors. Such tones are used to give off the emotion of passion and energy.
On the other hand, colors like blue, green, and purple are cool colors. Hence, they can be used to symbolize the emotions of calmness and peace. These shades also create a sense of objects being placed far away in the painting.
Additional Basic Watercolor Techniques For Beginners
1. Glazing
If you need to create a sense of depth in your painting, or maybe add a layer of shimmer to it - glazing is one of the best watercolor techniques to do so. It involves applying a thin layer of watercolor paint over your painting, such that it appears close to being transparent.
Glazing can help you establish a variety of tasks, such as adding a rich layer over your entire painting to create a layered effect. You can also enhance a certain section of your painting to make it stand out by glazing it.
2. Lifting
No one is perfect, which is why it is common for even veteran painters to make a mistake while creating their artwork. Fortunately, watercolor techniques like lifting can help them correct such mistakes easily.
To carry out this technique, all you need to do is take a wet brush or a paper towel and blot it over your painted paper to take off the extra little pigment from it.
You can also purchase a specialized lifting tool for a more precise result. While it is a popular technique used for rectifying the mistake of adding too much pigment, you can also use it to add highlights.
3. Layering
Layering is another commonly used watercolor technique, which requires the artist to add layers and a flat wash of watercolor paint on top of an already existing layer. It is used primarily to enhance a few sections of the painting, create depth, and for adding texture to paintings.
An important thing to note about layering is that you need to wait for one layer to dry out completely before you put the next layer of watercolor paint over your art. This would ensure that the colors of your painting do not mix and bleed.
4. Salt technique
If you like giving interesting textures to your paintings, you need to try the salt technique! You need to apply paint on your paper for this and keep it wet by sprinkling a generous amount of water on it.
Next, sprinkle a decent amount of salt over the region where you wish to create the textures. The size and shape of the salt crystals will influence the design of textures formed in your watercolor painting.
Let it dry overnight. Then, remove the salt by rubbing your fingers over the textured paper. And voila! You have created an interesting textured effect.
FAQs Related To Basic Watercolor Techniques For Beginners
What are the different types of watercolor brushes, and how do I use them?
There are various kinds of watercolor brushes. The most common ones include round, flat, fan, mop, detail, and angle brushes.
You should keep them clean at all times, and reshape the bristles of your brushes to ensure that they don’t dry out.
Additionally, brushes may be categorized based on their size. Hence, there are small, medium, and large brushes as well with varying widths. You may use either of them based on factors like the area that you wish to paint.
For instance, you should use a large brush while painting the background of your painting and a small brush for precision.
What is the best way to mix watercolors to achieve the desired color?
To achieve your desired shade of color, you should always start by mixing a small amount of the necessary colors on your palette. It is important to not take a large amount directly, since there is no guarantee that you will create the shade that you want on your first try itself.
You should also use water to dilute the watercolors as and when required. Even after you feel satisfied with the shade that you have created on your palette, it is best to test it out on a piece of white paper first to ensure that it looks like the shade that you were aiming for.
How do I create different textures and effects with watercolors?
You can easily create interesting textures and effects using different watercolor painting techniques, such as dry brushing. This method requires you to dip your dry brush in paint and create a thick stroke directly on dry white paper to give off a textured and rough look.
Similarly, you can use other watercolor painting techniques such as the wet-on-wet method to create soft transitions and salt watercolor techniques to create a textured background. You may also create a look of splattered water using the splatter method, or use the method of scratching with a sharp object such as a toothpick to create textures like grass or fur.
What are some common mistakes to avoid when starting with watercolor painting?
One of the most common mistakes that people make when starting with watercolor painting is investing in cheap supplies. While buying high-quality paints and papers might seem too expensive, it is worth the outcome that you produce in the end.
Another common mistake is not letting the paper dry out completely before adding the next layer of paint. The colors bleed into each other as a result. You should also not forget to clean your brushes routinely using water and wiping them with a dry paper towel.
How do I care for my watercolor brushes and other materials?
One of the best ways to care for your watercolor brushes is to clean them right after you are done with painting. This will help you prevent any form of buildup on their bristles. Similarly, you should also reshape your brushes regularly and store your materials properly to avoid any form of damage.
It is also crucial to take care of your color palette. Since you will be mixing different shades on it, you should ensure that it is clean at all times to avoid compromising the desired shades.
Can I use watercolors on other surfaces besides paper?
You can use watercolors on other surfaces besides paper too. However, most of them need to be compatible with this form of paint. For instance, you can use watercolor paints on surfaces, such as boards and canvases that are specially designed for this medium of paint.
Apart from that, you can use watercolors on porous surfaces like wood and textile. However, you may be required to prep some of these surfaces by priming them a bit so that the colors don’t seem dull.
How do I know when a watercolor painting is finished?
Knowing when a watercolor painting is finished depends significantly on your personal goals. It is best to step back and check out the various aspects of your painting to assess whether or not they are balanced up to your desired level.
For instance, if you are making a realistic painting, you might want to evaluate whether or not your work is finished by seeing if the art needs any more detailing. Similarly, you can assess the tones of your watercolor painting and adjust the areas that seem to sway away from the intention that you had in mind.
Where can I find resources for further learning and improvement in watercolor painting?
Many free tutorials on YouTube can help you learn and improve your watercolor painting skills. You can also find relevant resources on platforms such as Quora and Reddit, where people share their experiences of anything new that they try out or take a course on reputed platforms.
Although watercolor paintings are a visual treat, the watercolor techniques to create the same may seem a little difficult to master. However, with the right amount of dedication and practice, you can easily use these watercolor techniques to paint your ideal form of artwork.
The best way to apply all these watercolor techniques is to use them as a combination of more than one method. This will allow you to create a wide variety of elements on one sheet of paper itself.
The basic watercolor techniques for beginners include wet-on-wet and dry wet watercolor techniques, dry brushing, layering, and lifting. Apart from them, you can use the salt technique or glazing to add an interesting texture to your paintings.
With that, I have reached the end of this article. Feel free to share your creativity through watercolor paintings as you experiment with the different watercolor techniques mentioned above.
Goodbye for now!
The best soundproof panels are the Sonic Acoustics Hexagon Panels, offering excellent noise reduction capabilities without breaking the bank. That said, every panel set aims at a different requirement, and the right choice rests on the user’s preferences. Further, attenuation will only be achieved with 100% coverage of the target walls.
Creating a quiet environmentis quite important for a home recording studio, especially if you live in a noisy locale.
Moreover, a home office setup benefits immensely if it is in a quieter place, improving your productivity and allowing you to focus on the task. And to achieve this, you’ll need a set of soundproofing panels that suit your specific needs.
To help you choose the right product, I’ve curated a list of the 8 best soundproof panels that perform this task effectively.
Made from high-density materials, the Sonic Acoustics Hexagon Panels are designed to provide sound insulation while being flame retardant, non–toxic, and corrosion-resistant. These hexagon panels can be used as wall art to decorate and are available in various colors and styles.
The material primarily used to make the Sonic panels is polyester fiber, a commonly used element for absorbing sound that is effective at noise control. For frequencies ranging from 2000 to 6000 Hz, the material can absorb more than 90% of the noise. The acoustic panels have an average NRC rating of 0.92, which is sufficient for most small and medium-sized spaces, but may not be enough for large rooms.
Sonic Acoustics panels come in a 12-panel set with a surface area of 14 x 12 inches each, which completely covers my home office room. However, the hexagon shape means that the panels can’t cover every corner of the room whole. For this purpose, the acoustic panels were made to be cut easily and affixed to the surface in the desired shape.
The set can be installed with a general-purpose adhesive that can be sprayed on walls to stick the panels in the desired positions. I was also able to use a roll of 3M double-sided tape to stick the soundproof panels to the walls after reading the manufacturer’s instructions.
The Troy Studio Acoustic Foam Panel features groove-style sound-absorbing foam that can double as wall décor. These sound panels are square-shaped, thick, dense, and non-toxic while being affordable for beginner home studio setups.
TroyStudio Foam Panels are made primarily from polyurethane open-cell foam for room reverb cancellation, echo, and noise control. This, in turn, helps improve the sound quality in a room and makes recordings much less noisy. These panels feature an NRC rating of 0.75, which is ample for small spaces and can effectively reduce undesired sound reflection once set up properly.
Installing acoustic panels of this set is as easy as cutting them up and using spray adhesive. I was able to get them up and ready using a box cutter and the adhesive, albeit with some trouble keeping them adhered to the wall.
Coming in a pack of six, 12, 18, and 36, the acoustic panels cover a lot of space per panel on the wall. With a surface area of 12 x 12 inches per panel, eight of them were enough to cover the length of my home office walls. The high surface coverage, in addition to the 2-inch thickness and low weight, make these panels suited for acoustical treatment.
The sound-absorbing foam brick has beautiful appearance and...
Made of environmentally friendly polyurethane foam. In order...
What we like
48 panels in a pack
Acoustic wedge foam sound absorption tiles
Polyurethane panels
Environmentally friendly
What we don't like
A bit less effective at soundproofing
The Xin & Log Acoustic foam panels are a set of foam bricks with a checkered pattern that absorbs sound. This checkered pattern was made with wavy triangular shapes that help with noise reduction in addition to the visual design.
These sound panels are made from environmentally-friendly polyurethane foam that is also non-toxic. A common problem with some soundproofing materials is that they have a noticeably foul odor, something that is completely absent from the Xin & Log panels.
At 12 x 12 inches, the Xin & Log panels are sized sufficiently for small or medium-sized rooms such as vocal booths, studios, and control rooms. However, the low NRC rating of 0.4 and thickness of a single inch may somewhat deter it from being effective as a sound treatment option.
The polyurethane panels are soft enough to be cut through with shears or box cutters, and they can be installed using double-sided tape or spray adhesive. And they come in a pack of 48, ensuring that you have enough acoustic foam tiles to line your walls completely with the foam panels.
You can find the Xin & Log Acoustic Panels in black and black-and-blue colors, which you can match with your preferred aesthetic schemes.
Material: Polyurethane Foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
【FASHIONABLE APPEARANCE】: This unique hexagonal sound...
【EASY TO CUTTING AND REMOVE】: Easy to cut with a sharp...
What we like
Hexagonal acoustic foam panels
Odorless and non-toxic polyester fiber
Straightforward reshaping and installation
Panels can be detached post installation
What we don't like
Thin acoustic foam panels
Available in plenty of colors, the Dekiru Acoustic panels are hexagonal soundproofing implements with bevel edges for both aesthetic and functional purposes. This design choice enables the acoustic panels to effectively minimize echo while doubling as honeycomb wall décor.
The Dekiru panels come in a set of 12 and are made with odorless, non-toxic, flame-retardant, and formaldehyde-free polyester fiber. This material remains soft and easy to breathe in, making it simple to reshape the panels. Moreover, the panels can be detached from the walls and relocated without leaving visible blemishes or holes in your walls.
With a surface area of 14 x 13 inches, the panels promise to dampen sounds by a noticeable degree. That said, I found their 0.4-inch thickness to be a point of contention, ultimately limiting how much sound the panels absorb.
As for the installation, it is simple and straightforward and can be performed using 3M adhesive tapes, spray adhesive, nails, or glue. I would recommend using spray adhesive to keep the walls free of major blemishes if you ever wish to relocate your acoustic panels.
🧽【Quick-Recovery】Be different from other Acoustic...
🔇【1 Inch but High Density】You may be concerned that...
What we like
Quick recovery acoustic panels
Wedge-style panels
Highly elastic and high-density material
High noise absorption
What we don't like
Self-adhesive may not hold for long
The HEMRLY Acoustic Foam Panels feature a wedge design on high-density and highly elastic materials for soundproofing small and medium-sized spaces. They are available in three colors: carbon black, gray, and black-gray.
These panels are self-adhesive, meaning that they come with glue applied to the non-wedge side. All you need to do is remove the cover on the back, line the acoustic tile up against a wall, and apply sufficient pressure. Installation can be completed within minutes, requiring very little effort at most. And if needed, the HEMRLY panels come with some extra tape just to be safe.
As for the soundproofing capabilities, the 12 x 12 inches panels can absorb sound and echoes from the surroundings. They can be used in recording studios or at home offices for professional needs or to create a quiet environment to relax in.
The soundproofing foam can be cut and reshaped to fit a room as necessary, and it can be machine-washed without any issues. And once compressed, the acoustic panels take a few minutes to decompress, cutting down on the waiting time before beginning installation.
Material: Acoustic foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
★ Professional Sound Absorbing Properties - Acoustic foams...
★ Quality - Our Acoustic Foam Panels are made with...
What we like
High soundproofing capability
Wedge-style design
Available in a set of 52
Can be used in various areas
What we don't like
Only available in black
The wedge-style Audiosoul Acoustic Panels come in a pack of 52, featuring sound maskingcapabilities that can reduce noise pollution and remove echoes. Made from professional-grade acoustic foam, they can be used in professional soundproofing projectsand treatments for rooms, doors, garage spaces, and more.
Owing to the acoustic foam, the Audiosoul Acoustic panels are lightweight while being quite dense, further reducing the intensity of unwanted sound reflections. Furthermore, the foam remains dense and consistently firm across its surface to keep the noise reduction high.
Covering a surface area of 12 x 12 inches, the 52-acoustic panel set will be ample to cover most spaces. But, if you do not need 52 panels, the Audiosoul panels are available in 24 and 12 packs as well, available at an affordable rate.
These panels, when combined with acoustic foam bass traps, can suppress noises of any frequency. Without a bass trap, the acoustic panels can successfully dampen the sounds of mid and high frequencies.
Installation is fairly standard in the Audiosoul sound-dampening acoustic panels; simply use double-sided tape, spray adhesive, or glue to install them to hard surfaces.
Material: Polyurethane acoustic foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
【Ultimate Audio Clarity Enhancer】 Crafted from advanced...
【Sustainable Design】 Our acoustic foam panels stand the...
What we like
High-quality polyurethane foam construction
Capable of high noise reduction
Available in three colors
Suits home setups
What we don't like
May take a few hours to expand
Designed to be used in spaces like home offices and studios, the JBER Acoustic Foam Panels are wedge-style panels that reduce outside noise in an enclosed space. These can be used to spot-treat a studio or a home recording space as well if needed.
JBER Acoustic Foam panels are made from acoustic polyurethane foam, an odorless and flame-retardant material with high noise-reduction qualities. The sound-dampening panels can improve the sound quality of recordings by reducing background noise, echo, and reverb.
You can find the JBER acoustic panels in a 12 or 48-pack in three different color schemes: black, red, and charcoal. Each panel is sized at 12 x 12 inches with a 1-inch thickness, making it sufficiently sized for most home setups. YouTubers, music producers, and podcast hosts can make use of these panels.
When combined with a layer of sound insulationpanels, the JBER foam panels can completely soundproof a room with no issues. And much like other acoustic panels on this list, the sound-absorbing panels can be resized and altered without affecting their acoustic capabilities.
Material: Polyurethane acoustic foam | Surface Area: 12 x 12 inches | Thickness: 1 inch
Premium Material Construction：Crafted from top - grade...
What we like
Pyramid pattern for improved noise reduction
Polyurethane foam dampens reverberations
2-inch thick acoustic panels
High-density foam
What we don't like
Panels take a while to decompress
Featuring a pyramid pattern, the SD SODOCT Acoustic Foam Panels are designed to increase the contact area with sound. This leads to the absorption of flutter echoes and standing waves, which is necessary for acoustic treatment.
Made from polyurethane acoustic foam, the SD SODOCT panels are non-toxic and flame-retardant panels that control and dampen reverberation and typical background noises. This contributes to better sound clarity in recordings, video and audio calls, interviews, and more.
Each panel is sized at a standard 12 x 12 inches, with a thickness of two inches. The extra inch of thickness makes a noticeable difference in the sound-dampening qualities of a room. Adding to the noise reduction is the high material density, which sits at 25 kg/m3, deterring residual sound effectively.
The premium acoustic foam panels are easy to alter and install, owing to their soft nature. It is worth noting, however, that the panels take a day or two to decompress after unpacking.
When choosing a set of soundproofing panels, you’ll want to ensure that the product you purchase performs its task well. Sound treating a room is a necessary part of any recording studio, after all.
The best soundproofing panels reduce sound, dampen sounds and provide you with better sound quality. They can also reduce the intensity of unwanted noise and reverb, making your recordings sound clear and professional.
Here is a brief overview of each quality that most foam panels have to transform your room into a quieter place.
A. The Make
Soundproofing panels are made with all kinds of materials, ranging from natural materials like wood to artificial ones, such as foam. What each of these has in common is that they stop sound waves from entering a space, reducing any noises that come from the outside. As a result, the room becomes quieter and more suited for working or recording purposes.
Depending on the size of your room and the scale of your needs, you can choose from a host of panel materials. Each soundproofing solution will have a different way and in turn, a different level of effectiveness for successfully performing its task. Smaller rooms and spaces can work with thinner and sleeker soundproofing panels, while larger, noisier rooms require thicker foam panels.
There are more than 30 soundproofing materials to choose from at different price ranges and effectiveness, so you won’t be starved for choice. Some of the most common soundproofing material types are acoustic membranes, fiberglass, textile materials, and soundproof drywall, to name a few.
A common misconception is that an egg crate can be used as an effective soundproofing solution. While this isn’t exactly untrue since adding any kind of mass to your walls will reduce noise, the effectiveness of crates is extremely limited. So, it’s best to use materials made specifically for soundproofing purposes.
B. Noise Reduction Coefficient Rating
The Noise Reduction Coefficient Rating (NRC) is a measurement of how much sound a soundproofing panel can reduce and dampen. These ratings range from 0.00 to 1.00, with the latter being the most effective.
Small spaces don’t require much soundproofing, so you can use a panel with a relatively low NRC rating without an issue. Larger spaces, however, benefit immensely from panels with an NRC rating that approaches or is 1. Background noises and bass frequencies become an issue the larger a space is, necessitating greater soundproofing solutions.
C. Dimensions
Typically, soundproof panel sets come in bundles of six, 12, and 24, with a surface area of 1 ft2, 2 ft2, and 2ft x 4ft each.
Your set of soundproof panels should be able to cover an entire room well, and the panel dimensions determine how much of your walls they cover. An average home studio can use up to 48 1ft2, which is why most starter panel bundles come in a combination of all the panels you’ll need. These combinations may include 48 of 1 ft2 panels, 12 of 2 ft2 panels, or six of 2ft x 4ft panels.
D. Surface Pattern
Most soundproof panels come with a pattern on them to dampen any sounds, with wedged and pyramid patterns being the most widely used.
Though there is a marked improvement in the soundproofing performance of panels with patterns as opposed to those without, the pattern type makes little difference. For instance, the difference between the soundproofing performance of wedged and pyramid patterns is minimal, so feel free to choose as per your aesthetic tastes.
2. Soundproofing Principles Used
Soundproofing a room makes it acoustically isolated by reducing or outright blocking sound waves passing in and out of it. Acoustic isolation stands on five key principles, namely deflection, absorption, decoupling, thermal conversion, and constrained layer damping. Each of these principles works independently, with soundproofing panels making use of one or more of them at once for added effectiveness.
Let’s look at these principles briefly to know how your soundproof panels work and focus on which principle will net you the best results.
A. Deflection
Deflection is a principle that works by adding mass and density to the walls, floor, and ceiling of a room. The density and thickness of a soundproof panel act as a deterrent for sound waves, causing them to lose energy as they pass through the soundproof panel.
This is a principle put to use by most soundproofing panels on the market and is effective in rooms of all sizes.
B. Absorption
Have you noticed that some soundproof panels have perforations? These perforations facilitate the absorption of sound, achieving acoustic isolation while preventing reverbs, resonance, and amplification of sound waves.
C. Decoupling
Decoupling occurs when the area of the direct link between the structure and soundproof materials is reduced. This interrupts sound vibrations that travel through a room’s connectivity from one side to the other.
You can think of this principle being enforced by creating what is, effectively, a room within a room.
D. Thermal Conversion
This principle converts sound waves into trace heat energy through friction in the acoustic sound insulation membrane. Professional-grade soundproofing solutions employ this strategy to maximize noise reduction and dampening, in addition to the other principles on this list.
In contrast to some of the other principles, thermal conversion doesn’t rely on mass for soundproofing, making it standalone as a soundproofing material.
E. Constrained Layer Damping
Constrained layer damping reduces the natural resonant frequencies of a structure by using specific materials in a given ratio. This is typically enforced by applying damping compounds in the middle of two rigid panels like plasterboard or drywall.
When sounds strike these compounds, shearing forces between panels cause friction in the damping compounds, essentially converting sound energy to heat.
3. The Differences Between Soundproofing And Sound Absorption
Soundproofing and sound absorption are fundamentally different concepts, but they are often confused with one another. In truth, sound absorption is a subset of soundproofing and is chiefly used in two ways.
The voids in a stud wall can cause unwanted reverberations, which is where sound absorption materials are used as a part of soundproofing systems. Oftentimes, absorption materials are used to line the surface space of walls and ceilings to reduce soundresonance in the room by absorbing sound waves.
Soundproofing is a process that is much more involved than sound absorption, employing all manners of sound and reverb reduction techniques. The materials used for soundproofing prevent sound waves from entering or passing through a room, creating what is known as acoustic isolation.
Soundproof Panels FAQs
What is the difference between soundproofing and sound absorption?
Soundproofing is the blocking of sound from entering or leaving a space. Sound absorption, on the other hand, is about soaking up sound waves to reduce echo and reverberation within a room. Soundproof panels are designed for sound absorption.
Can soundproof panels completely eliminate noise?
While soundproof panels significantly reduce noise levels, they are not designed to completely eliminate noise. They can, however, dramatically improve the sound quality within a room by reducing echo and background noise.
Are soundproof panels safe for indoor use?
Yes. Most quality soundproof panels are designed with indoor safety in mind. They are typically fire-retardant and non-toxic. However, it’s always wise to check the product specifications before purchasing.
How many soundproof panels do I need for my room?
The number of panels needed depends on the size of your room, its shape and the sources of noise you want to address. Manufacturers often have guides or calculators to help determine how many panels you’ll need for your specific circumstance.
Do I need a professional to install soundproof panels?
Not necessarily. While a professional can ensure panels are installed for maximum effectiveness, most soundproof panels come with instructions that are easy to follow for DIY installation.
How do I install soundproof panels?
Soundproof panels can be mounted or hung on walls, ceilings, and even doors. They usually come with installation instructions that are easy to follow. Some require adhesive strips or glue, while others may need to use mounting brackets.
Are soundproof panels easy to maintain?
Yes, they are. Just use a vacuum to remove dust from the surface as needed. For tougher stains or dirt, use a damp cloth with mild soap. Be sure to check the manufacturer’s instructions for any specific care requirements.
Conclusion
Picking a soundproofing panel on a budget can be an ordeal, but it needn’t necessarily be so. After all, all that matters is that unnecessary noises are removed from your room once you soundproof it.
At the end of the day, the soundproof panel set I found to be the best was the Sonic Acoustics Hexagon Panels. It showcases noise reduction at an affordable price point that makes it worth a recommendation. That said, the remaining soundproofing solutions are not far behind.
Some sound absorption panels offer high soundproofing capabilities, while others have a high panel count per set. Each of these products offers something for every niche and based on your personal preference, you can make an informed decision on the matter.
Are you an underground musician trying to come up with new tunes and melodies at home?
Or are you at the other end of the spectrum, sick and tired of your neighbor’s jamming sessions? Well, in both cases, installing soundproof drywall will help reduce noise and promote better relations with your neighbors!
In fact, soundproofing drywall is the most effective solution to block sound waves. And the best part is that most homeowners can install soundproof drywall themselves without requiring professional skills and knowledge.
That said, let’s get a little more into the nitty gritty of soundproofing drywall and find the best out of the lot…
Best Soundproof Drywalls
What Is Soundproof Drywall?
Also known as acoustic drywall or pre-damped drywall, soundproof drywall consists of multiple layers of standard drywall made with a combination of clay, mica, mineral gypsum, and two layers of paper. Additionally, it contains internal sound-deadening barriers usually made of ceramic/viscoelastic.
As sound travels through hard surfaces, the soft layers act as sound-absorbing materials, making soundproof drywall better than just multiple layers of drywall.
How Does Soundproofing Work?
The speed of sound is 343 m/s (1,230 km/h; 767 mph), and it travels as waves from the source to the surrounding area. Contrary to how light travels in shorter waves, sound consists of longer wavelengths too, which can diffract around walls as well as travel through the tiniest air gaps.
Moreover, unlike light, which only travels through specific media, sound can traverse through most solid materials without much change in its form and volume. Notably, metal is a superconductor of sound as it can transmit sound waves at a speed of 21,460 km/h (13,330 mph).
Sound waves are basically vibrating air particles that reach our eardrums, making them vibrate. These vibrations are “heard” as sound, so larger vibrations create louder sounds. As such, soundproofing involves adding mass and density to an area to eliminate sound transfer.
Sound Transmission Class (STC)
Developed in 1961, Sound Transmission Class (STC) is a rating given to structural surfaces based on how sound vibrations travel through them. Usually, internal walls boast an average STC of 40, while hotel walls may have an STC of 60 or more.
Given below are the STCs by audio distinguishability, STC ratings, and the level of sound that can be comfortably heard through them:
STC
What you can hear at this level*
25
Soft speech can be heard and understood
30
Normal speech can be heard and understood
35
Loud speech audible but not intelligible
40
Loud speech audible as a murmur, heard but not understood
45
Loud speech can be heard, the threshold at which privacy begins
50
Loud sounds can be heard but faintly, indistinguishable
60+
Good soundproofing starts here; most sounds do not disturb neighbors
*Values in this table relative, as they are influenced by background noise levels in the receiving room, the greater the better perceived sound insulation
Accordingly, it is imperative to know the STC score of soundproof drywall while choosing one for your room. However, you must remember that not all sounds are measured by the STC scale, as the range is at the standard decibel level of the human voice (125-4000 Hz). As such, to prevent very low-frequency and high-frequency sounds from traveling, you must consider other measures.
How Does Soundproofing Drywall Reduce Sound Transfer?
1. Dampening
Soundproof drywalls act as dead panels, which is imperative to reduce sound transmission. However, they become more effective when used with a sound-damping compound like Green Glue. Basically, Green Glue imitates natural rubber and absorbs sound vibrations. You can further employ fiberglass sound insulation to the soundproofing drywall panels to add approximately ten more points to the STC rating.
2. Insulation
According to the relationship between mass and sound, the higher the mass, the lower the frequency of vibration. As such, heavier interior walls ensure better soundproofing, so consider using a double layer of 5/8″ drywall to achieve a higher STC rating at a lower cost.
3. Decoupling
Sound waves travel from one surface to another. That’s when decoupling helps separate the drywall adhesive from the steel studs, thereby disrupting the path of sound transmission. Hence, a staggered stud wall makes an effective sound barrier.
4. Absorption
You can use a variety of sound-absorbing materials in your wall assemblies to reduce noise. Some of these materials are viscoelastic foam, rubber, fiberglass, mass-loaded vinyl (MLV), etc.
Best Drywall For Soundproofing
1. QuietRock Drywall
Known as the first sound-dampening drywall, QuietRock drywall is a popular pick among homeowners who wish to maintain privacy. The brand has been in the industry for almost two decades, so it is no surprise that you’ll find multiple drywall options catering to varying needs.
Plus, thesesoundproof drywall panelsare easy to install, making them suitable for beginners or DIY enthusiasts who wish to try their hands at framing (construction). All QuietRock drywall panels come with a tapered edge too.
Depending on your budget, you can opt for QuietRock EZ Snap or QuietRock 545, the former being a budget buy while the latter is a premium pick. However, I must add that QuietRock 545 offers the ultimate amount of soundproofing (goes up to 80 STC), which is, of course, favorable but not always required by regular homeowners.
In fact, this high-end drywall for soundproofing is often used in studios and movie theaters and not in residential areas.
Thanks to the three-layered construction of QuietRock soundproof drywall, they are much easier to install than traditional drywall. You will need minimal effort and time to snap the drywall panels into place.
Speaking of construction, the noise-reducing drywall features two layers of gypsum drywall with a viscoelastic polymer in between. The middle layer acts like a rubber compound, thereby increasing viscoelasticity and blocking sound waves of varying frequencies.
Overall, QuietRock boasts a better STC rating than the standard drywall. So, try covering the entire wall with these panels for the best result.
Quietrock Panels
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
Core
STC*
EZ Snap
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’
2.6 lbs/ft2
QRES/Type X
48-60
EZ Snap Mold Resistant
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’
2.6 lbs/ft2
QRES/Type X
48-60
QuietRock 510
1/2”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.13 lbs/ft2
QR510/Regular
47-69
QuietRock 530
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.88 lbs/ft2
QR530/Type X
52-74
QuietRock 530RF
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.88 lbs/ft2
QR530/ Type X
52-74
QuietRock 545
1 ⅜”
48”
8’
6.25 lbs/ft2
QR545/Regular
60-80
*STC: The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
2. National Gypsum SoundBreak Board
National Gypsum is yet another brand that’s slowly emerging as a popular choice for soundproof drywall, the panels are a Gold Bond building product and they offer the Gold Bond Soundbreak acoustical panel range.
The brand offers a variety of sound-dampening drywall, but I recommend Sound Brake XP 1/2 inch Wall Board for those on a budget. However, if you’ve got more to spare, Sound Break XP Ceiling Board 3/4 inch is a high-quality drywall forsoundproofing commercial spaces. The paper in the Soundbreak panels is made from 100% recycled material and is resistant to mold, mildew, and moisture.
Generally, any National Gypsum panel boasts an STC rating of 64, thereby effectively absorbing sound transmission despite the budget-friendly price.
National Gypsum Panels
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
STC*
SoundBreak XP Wall Board
½”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
39-51
SoundBreak XP Wall Board
⅝”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
43-63
SoundBreak XP Ceiling Board
¾”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
59-60
SoundBreak XP Retrofit Board
5/16”
48”
8’,10’
N/A
36-53+
*STC:The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
3. CertainTeed SilentFX Panels
Best known for its acoustic panels, Silent FX QuickCut, CertainTeed is another brand you can consider. Just as the Quietrock, both variants are offered with tapered edges.
Its bestseller offers a width of ⅝ inches and is easy to install, almost like the soundproof drywall panels from QuietRock. Plus, it is a fire-resistant board that can absorb airborne sound fairly well, although not as efficiently as QuietRock 545.
CertainTeed Panels
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
STC*
SilentFX Quickcut
½”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.1 lbs/ft2
41-54
SilentFX Quickcut Type X
⅝”
48”
8’,9’,10’12’
2.8 lbs/ft2
40-64
*STC: The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
4. CertainTeedType X Drywall
Type X drywall is another common pick from CertainTeed, more so because it offers the best of both worlds - soundproofing and fireproofing. Both regular SilentFX and Type X gypsum boards meet the ASTM C 1396 standard specification. However, the regular drywall is made with gypsum, which provides natural fire resistance but is not fire rated.
Type X drywall has special core additives that make it fire-resistant, the fire-resistant board boasts a thickness of ⅝ inches, offering a dense layer of protection. In fact, it is denser than paper and gypsum drywall. Type X boards have a UL/ULC marking on the back of each board to confirm the fire-resistance rating.
For best results, I recommend using a double type X 5/8″ drywall with 3-1/2″ of insulation and steel studs on a wood stud wall. Coupled with the green glue between the layers of drywall, you can get two hours of fire resistance and amp up the STC rating to 58.
Drywall Panel
Thickness
Width
Length
Weight
STC*
CertainTeed Type X Gypsum Board
5/8"
54"
8’,9’,10’12’
N/A
50+
*STC:The variation is influenced by the frame material type (wood or steel). Wood frames perform better acoustically and thus produce higher STC scores.
5. Multiple Layers Of Traditional Drywall
Of course, if you have standard drywall lying around the house, you can use layers of the existing drywall to soundproof your room.
We suggest using 5-8 layers of existing drywall panels to close any air gaps that may allow sound transfer. However, doing so will shrink the size and floor space of the room and can add a lot of stress to the walls and ceilings.
Moreover, using layers of standard drywall sheets can get expensive. Not to forget, stacking standard drywall layers will take a lot more effort and time than using a single layer of drywall for soundproofing. As such, if you hire professionals for the job, using layers of traditional drywall will become all the more expensive.
How To Choose The Best Drywall For Blocking Sound Waves
Knowing the brands that manufacture the best soundproof drywall is just half the journey completed. Next comes understanding the factors you must consider to choose the appropriate drywall for soundproofing. Here are some that I keep in mind while buying soundproof drywall…
1. Installation Process
Anyone can install drywall with a few instructions, so there is no brand that particularly stands out in this aspect. However, if you choose to install more than one layer of regular drywall, the process will become relatively challenging.
I recommend going for soundproofing drywall panels instead of alternatives, especially for beginners who have no knowledge of construction. You’ll be saving a lot of time and energy.
2. Durability
Soundproofing drywall from the aforementioned brands is known to be durable. And if you add moresoundproofing material, the drywall will become tougher and more resistant to damage. In the case of accidents, too, soundproof drywall can be repaired easily.
3. Cost
Among the brands I recommended, QuietRock is the priciest, with many high-end variants available for commercial soundproofing purposes. But remember that while it may be difficult to resist the “best” drywall for soundproofing, it may not always be required, especially in residential areas.
Coming to installation, most professionals will charge similar rates, depending on the number of layers of drywall you plan to use. Overall, I suggest checking the building materials of the drywall you choose and analyzing whether the total costs will be worth it.
4. Soundproofing Preferences
Ask yourself the reason for soundproofing your space. Is it because you want a quiet space for yourself, isolated from the rest of the household? Or is one side of the house facing the traffic and the hustle and bustle of city life?
Whatever the reason may be - ensure you research soundproof drywall, the different frequencies each type of drywall can block, the installation process, and more. Checking customer reviews of the products will also help get a clearer picture of the quality and durability of the soundproofing drywall.
Moreover, if you’re looking to cut down distractions and promote productivity in a workspace, consider sound masking for the best results.
5. Frequency Of Use
If you’re considering soundproofing a room that is used often, you may want to invest in a premium option like the relatively expensive QuietRock drywall. On the contrary, if it’s a room that is used, say, once a week, you can simply add standard drywall layers.
6. Other Factors To Keep In Mind
When installed correctly, your wall assembly should be able to prevent noise and resist fire. On that note, you must ensure a gap between the soundproof drywall and the adjacent walls and ceiling. These gaps can be filled with acoustic caulking for effective noise reduction.
Moreover, switch boxes, heating pipes, vents, and other fixtures can transmit sound waves. So, I suggest using putty pads for sound damping. Also, note that resilient clips and channels can reduce sound by 12-15 STC points.
How Much Does Soundproof Drywall Cost?
Compared to standard drywall, soundproof drywall costs higher, around $50, as opposed to a $10-dollar standard drywall. But when I say that opting for soundproof drywall is more cost-effective, I mean using a single layer of it, whereas you’ll require more layers when using regular drywall.
At the end of the day, however, it comes down to your preference. If your space is relatively quiet anyway, adding a layer of traditional drywall or using soundproof curtains may do the trick!
Conclusion
The best drywall for soundproofing will definitely work better than your existing sheetrock. Although the material costs may be considerably high, it is a small price to pay for a tad bit of privacy!
Not to forget, high-quality drywall offers significant fire resistance and water absorption and prevents mildew growth. As a result, soundproofing your walls can indirectly help safeguard your health and improve your quality of life.
Finally, I recommend installing soundproof curtains, window shutters, and rugs on the entryway to soundproof your doors and windows further.
A new bathtub does not have to cost a bomb!
If you are looking for a new tub, try the acrylic models that have flooded the market due to their popularity. And while you're at it, why settle for just another tub when you have limitless options for gorgeous and luxurious tubs at similar costs?
People nowadays prefer acrylic bathtubs over others because they are affordable, easy to maintain, and above all, look great. But the question arises- which brand should you go for? Worry not; we've compiled a list of the best acrylic bathtubs for you to choose from.
We've also added a buying guide, so be sure to check that out as well.
Best Acrylic Bathtubs
From renowned brands to innovative designs, this list encompasses a range of features and styles to elevate your bathing experience. So, without further ado, here’s the list of the 14 best Acrylic Bathtubs that will transform your bathroom into a haven of relaxation and indulgence.
Modern bathtubs are a specialty of the brand Kingston Brass. They have come up with a new model, the VTDE603122L, that is made of superior-quality acrylic. With a clean and straightforward design, this acrylic bathtub would fit right into any bathroom. Along with an easy installation method, this option tops our list as one of the best acrylic bathtubs.
Product dimensions – 30-11/16" W x 60" L x 22-1/6" H |...
Why Did We Like It?
Let's start with some unique features of this white acrylic bathtub by Kingston Brass. This model is constructed using fiberglass and resin reinforcement, so there is no doubt about its durability and strength. It is comfortably sized at 30-inch width, 60-inch length, and 22-inch height and is not too heavy, weighing not more than 95 pounds.
Moreover, this acrylic bathtub has a three-wall clove installation so it can fit into your bathroom space from three sides, leaving only one open. Along with that, it also includes a tile flange and an integral tub apron. These features make the model modern and sturdy while allowing easy installation.
Speaking of the installation process, we thought the entire process of fitting this option in the bathroom was a breeze. The construction is simple and pristine, with a polished finish over the interiors. Also, this left-hand drain bathtub has a pretty good tub capacity of 58.2 gallons.
What Could've Been Better?
We couldn't find any significant issues with this product. Its sturdy design, ease of installation, along with positive customer reviews told us pretty much all we needed to know. Those of you who enjoy minimalistic designs for acrylic bathtubs will appreciate this model. However, if you're looking for an artistic approach to bathtubs, this unit may not be your cup of tea.
Pros
Effortless installation
Large capacity
Affordable
Polished and attractive appearance
Cons
Basic bathtub design
Size (inches): 60 x 31 x 22 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 64 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
We present another Kingston Brass product to you, but this one is the right-hand drain model, VTAP663222R. While it is similar to the previous unit in many aspects, this model has a few features that differentiate it from other acrylic bathtubs from this brand. Yes, it is still an alcove bathtub, but it has a larger water capacity.
Acrylic construction with fiberglass and resin reinforcement
Alcove tub with apron
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this tub by Kingston Brass is an alcove type which is a pretty popular choice for home developers and contractors. Not only does this design look great with its three sides closed and one apron for entering, but it's also easy to install.
When it comes to acrylic tubs, you need a timeless glossy finish that stays. And, this is precisely what you can expect from this acrylic bathtub. It is also quite large at 32 inches in width, 66 inches in length, and 20 inches in height. While the water depth is 16 inches before it flows over the tub, it also has a larger tub capacity at 62.17 gallons.
Also, we think that shape matters immensely when trying to find the perfect fit for the bathroom. For instance, a modern bathroom with limited space calls for a rectangular acrylic bathtub since it is the easiest to fit in a corner.
What Could've Been Better?
Despite coming at an affordable price, this acrylic bathtub appears high-end and improves the aesthetic of the bathroom. It's also spacious enough to fit tall people. However, it is a classic rectangular bathtub that may appear boring to some people. So, make a note of that if it concerns you.
Pros
Large water holding capacity
Sturdy acrylic construction
Easy installation
Can fit in bathroom corners
Cons
Very simple design
Size (inches): 66 x 32 x 20.5 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 62.17 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Up next, we have an acrylic bathtub by the well-known brand American Standard. This model by American Standard is an acrylic, white, deep soaking tub for full-body immersions. If you are looking for a tub to enjoy rose petal soaks to relieve stress, this might be the tub you are looking for!
Deep and roomy for total body immersion and comfort
Drop-in or undermount installation options
Why Did We Like It?
Right off the bat, we knew we had to include this model by American Standard. It was one of the few models that checked all the boxes for a good-quality acrylic bathtub. But this product specializes in one particular feature, i.e., full-body immersion. That's right; it is so large that you can use this for deep soaks for therapeutic benefits.
In case you are wondering, this model weighs only 7 pounds because it is an under-mount or drop-in style tub. So, it's also 36 inches wide and 72 inches in length. At this length, it is easy to accommodate even those of you with long legs. Also, at 18.5 inches deep, the water level will be enough to cover the entire body.
Another good thing about this model is that it has dual molded-in armrests and a pre-leveled tub bottom. These features allow you to rest your arms and maintain good posture for the back.
What Could've Been Better?
This brand has been known for its quality and style for 130 years, and the model in question is a clear example of that. However, the installation method might not be convenient for everyone. With this model, you will need to pick and drop it in the bathtub section, which is not as straightforward.
Pros
Spacious for total body immersion
Slip-resistant tub floor
Budget-friendly
Comfortable for back and spine
Cons
Complicated installation
Size (inches): 72 x 36 x 21.5 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Drop-in | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Now we introduce to you a beautiful standalone tub by the brand Vanity Art. The model VA6610-L by Vanity Art is an oval, freestanding tub that is luxurious and comfortable for a relaxing soak at the end of the day. Thus, this high-gloss white acrylic tub is a royal option for your modern bathroom.
First of all, who can resist a tub with a high gloss finish in pure white? This acrylic bathtub is a piece of art that would be a fantastic addition to your bathroom. The model is made of lucite acrylic and is reinforced with ash-land resin and fiberglass. These ingredients should give you a good idea about the product's quality.
Moreover, this freestanding bathtub is a textbook definition of luxury mixed with comfort and chic design. The size is appropriate for modern-day bathrooms with a width of 29.5 inches, length of 59 inches, and height of 23.6 inches. It also has a flexible drain pipe that levels all four legs.
Nothing can replace the pleasure of a relaxing bath, and freestanding acrylic bathtubs give you this comfort even if you have small bathrooms. They are designed to fit in modern and traditional bathrooms alike and include sloping lines that follow your body's natural curves.
What Could've Been Better?
All you need is warm water and this tub to destress after a long day. This beautiful model is a truly stunning addition to the bathroom and can be used for any bathroom renovation. But even though this acrylic bathtub is incredible, we wish it were slightly larger than its current size.
Pros
Stain and scratch-resistant
Fits in small bathrooms
Durable fiberglass material
Easy to clean
Cons
May be too small for some users
Size (inches): 67 x 30.5 x 23.6 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Next, we have another sleek and trendy acrylic bathtub by Vanity Art, once again. The VA6814-S is a freestanding bathtub that is similar in size to other models by Vanity Art. This model comes in pure white color and has a glossy polished exterior.
We decided to check yet another Vanity Art product because this one was as unique and elegant as the previous one. This model is a drastically different style compared to the previous model we reviewed, even though there are many similarities. In our opinion, what’s similar is the use of white acrylic material, which is the best option for acrylic bathtubs.
Furthermore, this design also falls in the category of freestanding bathtubs. But the shape is much more sleek and sharp as compared to the oval designs. But what differentiates this model from the rest is the polished chrome finish that shines, giving the tub a smooth and luxurious feel.
Apart from that, with this acrylic bathtub, you can mount the tub spout, diverter, and showerhead at either end of your choice. You even have the option to add these fittings to either side.
What Could've Been Better?
This model has a durable construction, making it the ideal acrylic tub for any bathroom. We say that because there was one issue that came to our attention. With high-quality products, you would expect a scratch-resistant surface. But this tub tends to develop slight scratches over time.
Pros
Fits all bathrooms
Can add shower accessories
Anti-slip floor
Affordable
Cons
Prone to scratches
Size (inches): 59 x 29.5 x 24 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 60 Gal | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Here we have another high-end option for modern bathrooms. The 67" Luxury Freestanding Bathtub by Empava is made of white fiberglass and is very durable. It has a brushed finish that is pleasing to the eye, and the oval tub shape is comfortable to sit in.
Elegant Modern Look: Upgrade your bathroom with a...
Deep Soaking Comfort: Immerse yourself fully in the...
Why Did We Like It?
One of the first features we liked about this acrylic bathtub was the new-age design of the tub. This pure white freestanding tub that features 100% glossy acrylic complements all kinds of bathrooms.
It also sports an ergonomic design that makes it comfortable to lie in for as long as you like without straining your back.
Besides this, it has a versatile system that allows pairing with any tub filler of your choice. These additions can change the way you view bathing and transform it into a therapeutic experience. If you place this model in your bathroom, it will inevitably become the focal point due to its gorgeous curved appearance.
It is wide enough to fit one person comfortably with a length of 66 inches, a width of 31 inches, and a depth of 26 inches. Finally, it has an impressive tub capacity of 58 gallons.
What Could've Been Better?
The curved design with its pristine white glossy finish makes this option a gorgeous addition to the bathroom. However, we thought that one aspect might not make this one a good choice for everyone. It falls on the smaller side, so taller people might have a hard time fitting in.
Pros
Glossy acrylic material
It goes well with modern homes
Comfortable for long soaks
Easy installation
Cons
Slightly small
Size (inches): 66.9 x 29.5 x 26.38 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 58 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Another option we decided to include in this list was the Ruby 65 in. model by Ove Decors. This contemporary acrylic bathtub is a freestanding model that has a pop-up drain and waste overflow feature. This brand has different sizes ranging from 59 to 70 inches; however, we wanted to look at the 65-inch model.
Ove Decors has a really interesting service policy that lasts all of 25 years. They guarantee that their acrylic bathtubs will be defect-free in construction, and you can ask for repairs and services for 25 years from the purchase date. That is a confident claim, but the brand has the quality to back it up.
Essentially, the materials are entirely certified and constructed using high gloss acrylic and reinforced fiberglass. These acrylic bathtubs are incredibly durable and do not wear quickly, and they are easy to clean and maintain.
Apart from that, the design is perfect for modern-day bathrooms and is ideal for relaxing deep soaks. And the soaking depth is good enough for a medium-sized person to fit in comfortably. The best part is, this model has the correct amount of slope for supporting the back. This efficient design maximizes comfort allowing you to spend more time in the acrylic bathtub.
What Could've Been Better?
After reading some online reviews, we found that a couple of customers had issues with surface-mounted bathtub valves. They claimed that the regular-sized valves they purchased were not the correct match for this tub. So, it's better if you research further because you don't want to end up buying the wrong parts.
Pros
Service for 25 years
Ideal for immersive soaks
Sturdy material last long
No leakage issues
Cons
Accessories not easily available
Size (inches): 65 x 29.1 x 28.4 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 53.9 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Next, we have another freestanding acrylic bathtub that comes in a rounded, oval shape. This model, B-0018 by Woodbridge, is made of premium materials that other manufacturers do not as often use. The superior quality of the materials reflects in the cleaning aspect too. This acrylic tub is much easier to clean and maintain.
Now we come to another great option - an oval freestanding bathtub made of the most premium material. This acrylic bathtub is made using 100% high gloss lucite material in the color white. It is also reinforced with Ashland resin and fiberglass, making it a superior-quality product.
This elegant bathtub is 59 inches long, 31 inches wide, and 22 inches deep. It also has a decent water holding capacity of 55 gallons at any given time. The brand has taken time and care in developing a non-slip bathtub that ASTM approves. The tub floor is smooth but will still keep you safe by preventing slipping.
Apart from that, this acrylic tub is easy to maintain and clean. After purchase, it does not easily develop stains and scratches and retains its glossy finish for a long time.
What Could've Been Better?
All in all, this option was one that we could not leave out from the list. We were impressed by the inclusion of a brushed nickel drain and overflow with the packaging. To top that, they also provide a one-year limited warranty. However, this option is costlier than other models.
Pros
Strong enough to bear 1000 pounds
One-year limited warranty
Many accessories included
Comfortable design
Cons
Slightly pricey
Size (inches): 59 x 31.5 x 22.8 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 55 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
The 1957-LA-0 model by Kohler is one of the acrylic alcove bathtubs you should consider. This model is rectangular with built-in white acrylic material deemed to be the standard for most bathtub options. What's unique about this option is the integral flange which is responsible for preventing water leaks and seepage.
Luxurious, deep soaking experience with 68-gallon capacity...
Molded lumbar support and sloped backrest for enhanced...
Why Did We Like It?
Let's get one thing out of the way. The material used for the construction of this alcove tub is the regular solid acrylic material. But simply because it is common does not mean that they are not high-quality materials. This rectangular is a frontrunner when it comes to alcove tubs and can easily compete with its competitors on the market.
Apart from that, we'd like to mention a few features that make this tub worthy of consideration. This acrylic tub measures 60 inches in length, 32 inches in width, and 21 inches in height. It can also contain 68 gallons of water at any given time.
Also, it contains an overflow drain that you can use for immersed soaks. While resting in the tub, this model takes care of back support with its ergonomic design.
What Could've Been Better?
At first, we were not sure if this product would live up to our expectations, but we were pleasantly surprised. But, after digging into the product details, we found the drain kit is not included in the packaging. Basically, you'll have to spend extra to get the complete kit.
Pros
Clean design
Affordable
Fewer water spills
Easy to install
Cons
Accessories are not included
Size (inches): 60 x 32 x 21 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 68 Gals | Drain Kit: No | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
While we have already mentioned a different acrylic bathtub by American Standard earlier, we had to include this one too. After all, it's not our fault that this brand has more than one option for decent acrylic bathtubs. The 2461002.020 model, in particular, is a right-hand drain-style model with a painted finish.
Durable Americast is lighter than cast iron, easier to...
Soothing 14 inch depth for soaking comfort
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this model is slightly different from the ones we have reviewed so far. Some features like the materials, finish, and functions vary from other models, but we thought you might find this option interesting. This tub is made of a material called americast, which is lighter than cast iron.
Compared to cast iron tubs, this model is far more durable too and easier to handle. Also, the final coating consists of a porcelain enamel finish which is pretty glossy, non-porous, and scratch-resistant. This coating also creates a slip-resistant floor automatically. The textured floor allows the feet to get a grip, thus preventing accidents.
Next, we have to mention the heat retention qualities of this tub. Simply speaking, it keeps the water hot for a long time for a relaxing bathing experience. Finally, the Americast backing helps to insulate the bathtub allowing for a quieter shower or bath.
What Could've Been Better?
There is no doubt that this model delivered when it came to the durability and a pleasant bathing experience. Yet, a few reviewers felt that the glossy appearance was lost after using it consecutively for a long time.
Pros
Heat retention properties
It prevents slipping and accidents
Insulates tub for quiet showering
Scratch-resistant
Cons
Loses gloss over time
Size (inches): 60 x 32 x 14 | Shape: Rectangle | Installation Type: Alcove | Capacity: 50 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: No | Jets/Whirlpool: No
When it comes to minimalist designs, the Shangri-La bathtub by FerdY is by far the most pleasant and user-friendly one. This oval, freestanding bathtub has a brushed finish that gives it a glossy appearance that is generally sought after for tubs. It also has a feature that allows for heat retention.
🛀 CLASSIC DESIGN: Clean, elegant, and contained, FerdY...
🛀 A PERFECT BATHING EXPERIENCE: With 47-inch length and...
Why Did We Like It?
The first thing that caught our eye was the minimalistic yet elegant design of the acrylic bathtub. It is an oval acrylic tub that allows for deep, immersive soaks while also providing back and spine support. This model features a cast resin material that forms the perfect curves, while the hand-finished detailing adds personality to the tub.
Speaking of which, the material used for its construction is glossy white acrylic that is reinforced with fiberglass that makes it durable. Not many tubs can boast that their materials are sourced from the most environment-friendly and non-toxic courses. But this option guarantees these benefits along with non-cracking, stain-resistant, and easy-to-clean features.
Moreover, the user guide is simple to understand and gives detailed steps that will help you with the installation. It provides instructions on tub accessory placements like the plastic and brass drain pipes located on the inner side of the tub. Finally, another impressive feature is the adjustable foot leveling it provides.
What Could've Been Better?
This freestanding tub is a worthy contender for several reasons. Its double-wall insulation and its 1750-pound load capacity are only a few of the reasons. However, the use of plastic in drain pipes doesn't sound like a good idea. Our doubts were seconded by reviewers who found leakages in the tub.
Pros
Glossy and pleasing appearance
Easy installation instructions
Keeps water warm
Pre-installed brushed nickel drain
Cons
Plastic drain is not durable
Size (inches): 47.24 x 25.59 x 22.83 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 40 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
Who doesn't enjoy a good soak? We're sure you would love to check a variety of tubs for soaking and relaxing before purchasing the perfect one. This is why we have searched the market and found the following product, the FT-AZ090 bathtub by the brand ANNI.
Let's face it, even though you are going to buy only one bathtub; it's nice to see the options available. And, making the right choice might seem complicated because there is no shortage of brilliant options out there. Take this model from ANNZI, for example - it's a beautiful modern glossy white acrylic bathtub that gives the feeling of a spa at home.
It's exciting to see an acrylic bathtub built of incredibly durable materials. It is Rhino Alloy certified and has the best acrylic and fiberglass in its construction. Besides, these materials are known to retain gloss over a long time and do not easily develop scratches or stains.
What's more, this high-quality bathtub is quite spacious. It measures 71 inches in length, 35 inches in width, and 30 inches deep. With a 52-gallon water holding capacity, it makes for a roomy, relaxing experience to soak in this tub.
What Could've Been Better?
While this beautiful acrylic bathtub has tons of impressive features, we think it comes with a share of drawbacks. This option is not the best acrylic bathtub for reliable customer service. A few online reviewers faced issues with the motor and airflow but did not receive a timely response from the customer service team.
Pros
Scratch and stain-resistant
Limited lifetime warranty
Perfect for a spa experience at home
High water level for submerging
Cons
Poor customer service
Size (inches): 67 x 31.5 x 28.3 | Shape: Oval | Installation Type: Freestanding | Capacity: 79.26 Gals | Drain Kit: Yes | Overflow: Yes | Jets/Whirlpool: No
While we are on the topic of bathtubs that feature several additions for maximizing relaxation, another worthy option comes to mind. Enter the Acrylic alcove whirlpool bathtub by the brand Empava! This tub has a multitude of features like a self-leveling base, removable pillow, and water jets.
[SPECIFICATIONS] Outer Dimensions: 59. 49 in. L x 29. 53 in....
[PREMIUM QUALITY] The acrylic whirlpool tub featuring...
Why Did We Like It?
While on the lookout for the best acrylic bathtub, we came across this alcove model by Empava. This tub also features water jets that improve the bathing experience. There are a total of 11 water jets spread across the tub - four near the foot area, three jets near the body, and four small ones near the lumbar region.
Besides this, the tub differs from others in shape and style. It is constructed using the best acrylic material and reinforced with fiberglass, but that's not all. It also has a stainless steel frame that has a load-bearing capacity of 660 pounds. The front panel is unique because it is made of tempered glass which adds to the appeal of the bathtub.
Furthermore, operating the system is easy due to its ergonomic controls. And, with a length of 59 inches, an average-sized person can easily fit in the tub with room to spare.
What Could've Been Better?
While this is a pretty attractive option for relaxing baths and soaks, we think a few things need care while using it. You need to handle the glass at the front of the tub with care. If too much weight is applied, the glass might break.
Yet another model we liked by the brand Empava was this 72-inch acrylic whirlpool bathtub. This model is the largest option we checked. The rectangular alcove tub can hold a tremendous amount of water, and it's also much wider than a regular tub.
Empava Whirlpool Tub with 10 Water Jets: With careful...
2 Person Whirlpool Tub:The 2 person whirlpool bathtub can...
Why Did We Like It?
Before we talk about anything else, we want to point out that this might be one of the best acrylic alcove bathtubs for two people. It has a generous length of 72 inches which is big enough to stretch legs, and the width is a comfortable 48 inches. Also, it has a timeless double-ended design with lumbar support.
Along with that, the tub has a set of 10 water jets. It has two water jets along the body, four near the feet, and four jets near the lumbar area. The 1.2 HP water pump is powerful enough to work all the jets simultaneously. You could also adjust the water pressure according to your liking.
Moreover, the three-year limited parts warranty covers the overflow, jets, knobs, and drain pipes. Even if there are any leaks, you can get a replacement within three years of purchasing.
What Could've Been Better?
Even though there are several attractive features of this option, there are some downsides too. During our research, we found that this option needed more upkeep than regular models. It is much more delicate and prone to leaks as compared to other tubs.
Now that you have seen the top options available on the market find out what features to look for before selecting the final tub -
1. Bathtub Type
Arguably one of the first things you should determine is the kind of tub required for your home. It's possible that you already have an idea about what would look best in your bathroom. An alcove type might be better suited than a freestanding acrylic bathtub if you have a smaller bathroom. Alternatively, if there is room to spare and you prefer the bathtub to take center stage, a freestanding option would be the best choice.
2. Durability
The best acrylic bathtub is one that is durable and lasts long. No one wants a bathtub that cracks soon after the purchase, and that's not the only issue with low-quality tubs. If the materials used for the construction are not up to the mark, the glossy white color fades quickly too. Make sure you select an acrylic tub that is reinforced with fiberglass. This material is super tough, and the color will remain pristine white for ages.
3. Depth
The gallons of water a tub can hold varies across companies and models. But if you are looking for complete body immersion, go for a tub that holds above 65 gallons of water. An immersion of 18 inches or above should be enough to cover the entire body.
4. Warranty
If parts happen to break or you face leaks pretty soon after purchasing, it can be costly to get these issues fixed. But, you would be saved from this stress if you had a warranty from the company. Look for a company that offers at least one year warranty for the bathtub. It's best if it provides a replacement for all parts; if not, check which parts fall under the warranty blanket.
Acrylic Bathtubs FAQ's
What are the advantages of acrylic bathtubs?
Acrylic bathtubs offer several advantages. They are lightweight, making them easier to install compared to heavier materials like cast iron. Acrylic is also a good insulator, meaning it retains heat well, providing a comfortable bathing experience. Additionally, acrylic bathtubs are highly resistant to stains, scratches, and fading, and they are available in a wide range of designs and colors.
Are acrylic bathtubs durable?
Yes, acrylic bathtubs are generally considered durable. Acrylic is a sturdy material that resists cracking and chipping. However, it is important to note that the durability can vary depending on the quality of the acrylic used. It is advisable to choose acrylic bathtubs from reputable manufacturers known for their quality and craftsmanship.
Can acrylic bathtubs be repaired if they get damaged?
Acrylic bathtubs can be repaired if they get damaged. Small scratches or scuffs can often be buffed out or repaired using acrylic repair kits available in the market. For more significant damage, such as cracks or deep scratches, it is recommended to seek professional assistance to ensure a proper and long-lasting repair.
Can acrylic bathtubs fade or discolor over time?
Acrylic bathtubs are designed to resist fading and discoloration. However, prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or harsh cleaning chemicals can potentially cause some color fading or discoloration over time. It is best to follow the manufacturer’s care instructions, avoid abrasive cleaners, and limit prolonged exposure to direct sunlight to maintain the appearance of the acrylic bathtub.
Can acrylic bathtubs be customized or modified?
Acrylic bathtubs can be customized or modified to a certain extent. Some manufacturers offer customization options, such as different colors, finishes, or additional features like jets or whirlpool systems. However, it’s important to note that major modifications may not be possible once the bathtub is manufactured, so it’s best to discuss customization options with the manufacturer before making a purchase.
How long do acrylic bathtubs last?
The lifespan of acrylic bathtubs can vary depending on usage, maintenance, and quality. Generally, a well-maintained acrylic bathtub can last for many years, even decades. High-quality acrylic bathtubs from reputable manufacturers often come with warranties that provide an indication of their expected lifespan. It’s advisable to choose a bathtub from a trusted brand and follow proper care guidelines for optimal longevity.
Conclusion
Here we reach the end of our review-based guide for the best acrylic bathtubs. While all the options we reviewed are efficient and durable, we did have a couple of favorites. For us, the clear winner was the VTDE603122L bathtub by Kingston Brass. This option is constructed using durable materials, spacious enough for long baths, and easy to install.
The second best option was the VTAP663222R model by the same brand Kingston Brass. Its glossy finish and large water-holding capacity were unmatched, in our opinion.
We hope this guide helped you pick the best acrylic bathtub for you. See you next time, take care!
Finding a furniture store with a variety of furniture styles and designs can be a tiring chore. Even more, it can be costly and have indifferent customer service.
To narrow down the search, we have compiled a list of the best furniture stores in the Chicago area where you can rest assured of the best customer service and quality furniture pieces.
Putting together your room’s aesthetic will be a breeze with these suppliers. Read on to find the best store and begin turning your house into a home!
Best Furniture Stores In Chicago
57st. Design
Truly a furniture store of Chicago-based residents, 57 st. Design has its beginnings in the city itself.
Beginning as a bookshelf builder 30 years ago, the founder started his company on the 57th street of Hyde Park. Since then, it has expanded, and now the company does everything from designing pieces to manufacturing and selling the products in their own showroom on Cermak Road.
As every piece of furniture is designed in-house, they are also able to customize anything down the inch to suit your home’s specifications.
Additionally, they give the option to buy a piece that has been pre-owned and restored for a discount. This same piece can be sold back to them, regardless of its condition; restored to its original state, and then sold to the next owner. In exchange, you get store credit to purchase your next piece of furniture.
All pieces are hardwood and finished by hand, ensuring quality that allows it to be repaired and restored back to a brand new condition. This system of circulation allows for furniture that has been built to last to actually last a lifetime.
New Age Chicago Furniture
A family-run store, New Age Chicago Furniture has been on the market since 1910. This company has been providing years of quality customer service and long-lasting furniture for Chicago’s indoor and outdoor needs.
It supplies loveseats, curio cabinets, pub tables, chaise lounges, and Cheval glass pieces, just to name a few. These are testament to the wide variety of furniture types and designs available for purchase.
What’s more, when you shop at a family-run store like New Age, they treat you like family. Their financing options can be accommodating even for those who may be getting on their feet. The New Age family does not discriminate just because you may have an unsatisfactory credit history.
Modern Classics
Inspired by the Bauhaus Modern design, Modern Classics aims to bring high-quality furniture with a mid-century modern touch that they call a modern classic.
Originally an online retail website, the store has expanded to a physical location in the Michigan Avenue Fine Arts Building to showcase its pieces. If modern furniture is what you are looking for, then Modern Classics is the perfect blend of modern styles to create a truly unique piece of furniture.
All designs are manufactured and sold by them. From daybeds to sofas and benches, the most iconic designs from the modern era are available. Every piece is handmade to ensure a quality finish can capture the essence of the original design.
There is also the option to customize the piece you select. You may opt for a different material, upholstery, or for changing the color of the finish. Additionally, they offer free shipping for any retail and design trade orders.
Plain And Simple Furniture
A unique furniture store out of Everton is the Plain and Simple Furniture boutique. What makes this boutique so unique is its entire Amish-made collection. You can choose from one of their many contemporary and traditional designs or have a custom-made piece just for you.
While the majority of their furniture is made-to-order, there are still simpler designs for instant purchases. However, the more common options are the made-to-order pieces to have complete control over design, material, and wood finish.
Employing a number of skilled Amish builders, they can modify any of their pre-existing designs available to fit your taste. Additionally, there is a choice to select what wood you would like and any other details on the piece. Standard delivery can be done within a 25-mile radius, which includes assembly and placement.
Every furniture item is a quality build from solid hardwood like maple, walnut, oak, and cherry. With excellent branding, this is a perfect option for those who are looking for simple designs.
What is more impressive than the craftsmanship is their delivery service nationwide. You can have your furniture delivered even if you aren’t in the Chicago area! More than ten years of experience will ensure that you are getting the best value for your money.
Wrightwood Furniture
For those who have a particular taste for rustic pieces of furniture, Wrightwood Furniture out of Lakeview is a perfect place to start. All the pieces have a certain Chicagoan vibe in their material of wood and dark metals. Some colorful pieces are also available, sure to catch the attention of any room.
From bedside tables to coffee tables and media cabinets, Wrightwood can help channel the Chicago spirit and energy into your home. Quite literally, if you choose to pick up one of their Chicago flag-themed items from benches or throw pillows.
Truly a unique experience with beautifully crafted furniture, Wrightwood Furniture is an excellent stop for channeling the proud Chicago spirit into your home.
Pagoda Red
A one-stop-shop for those who wish to bring a touch of the Orient into their homes, Pagoda Red offers unique antiques and furniture locally. Located on the corner of Bucktown and Lincoln Park, the 15,000-square-foot warehouse stores its collection of over 4,000 pieces.
All antiques were carefully collected over more than 20 years of traveling. Every piece has a story behind it and is sure to be the conversation starter in any room you place it in.
Besides antiques, there are beautifully designed furniture pieces with their own flair of elegance and grace. These are similarly based on traditional designs to replicate old Chinese furniture from different dynasties.
Pagoda Red may be a niche store, but it is more than enough to satisfy any search for that Oriental touch you are looking for.
Interior Define
Finding a sofa that fits your home perfectly can be a difficult chore. There is always an issue with either the sizing or material, which may not match; the smallest detail can make the most significant difference.
Interior Define allows you to take control of every aspect of your custom sofa. Everything from the size, build, legs, and material, there is not a single detail of your couch that you can not change. After picking out what you want your sofa to look like, Interior Define will do the rest,
Beyond couches, Interior Define provides their customization service to beds and chairs as well. Recently they have expanded to providing dining collections.
Ever-changing and adapting to the times, Interior Define truly defines what a modern furniture store is. The brand has its own iOS augmented reality app that can show you what your custom furniture piece will look like.
Milwaukee Furniture
Milwaukee Furniture is a family-owned establishment that has become widely recognized in the Chicago area as an assured quality provider for furniture. They have consistently been available to customers who need a refreshing new look to replace their old, worn furniture.
Milwaukee Furniture is a great budget-friendly option with a quality service paired with their range of furniture and accessories. Going to their showroom feels like being treated like family; getting great advice of what accessories or design choices would pair well. Not only are the staff friendly, but they are knowledgeable. Any question on a specific piece was answered right away from availability all the way to the different colors it came in.
Chicago Best Furniture
Carrying a wide range of name-brand furniture, Chicago Best Furniture offers excellent service and prices to match.
Established by two brothers in the business for 20 years, they worked their way up to build a chain of stores in the Chicago and Illinois area. Carrying a variety of brands such as Sealy, Englander, Ashley, and others, the choices are bountiful, and all are priced low to get you the quality furniture you need for less.
It is difficult to find the same quality name-brand furniture pieces at the price offered at Chicago Best Furniture. Their variety in furniture, as well as free delivery to your door, makes the entire buying process that much smoother.
Staff members are patient with you to determine what it is you’re looking for and what models available can fit those criteria. To have a good experience at the store is just as important as the fantastic price and any discounts offered.
Room & Board
Established in 1980, Room & Board is a beautifully designed modern furniture store on the Magnificent Mile in Chicago.
With a stunning view of the city skyline, this four-floor establishment has settings to inspire your own designs for any room. From children’s rooms to living rooms and outdoor areas, as well as matching home decor, Room & Board has a great collection to choose from.
The staff are friendly and will talk you through selecting pieces that will complement your house and personality at the same time. Understanding the rich culture that Chicago has, these Design Associates are there when you need a helping hand but also allow you to shop freely with no pressure.
Additionally, their delivery service with flat rates includes the complete package. Not only will they deliver the furniture to your door, but they will handle setup as well as clean up afterward. All this applies to every item purchased; there is no cap on how many items can be included in the one-time delivery payment fee.
Roy’s Furniture
Based in Lincoln Park, Roy’s Furniture has a welcoming environment and staff to help you have a smooth experience when buying that new bed or couch.
Providing quality furniture is what Roy’s prides itself on. While the delivery times may vary, Roy’s is able to deliver the quality it prides itself on. Customer service is a priority at Roy’s as the Design Associates will understand your needs and recommend what the best model would be to meet those needs.
Besides providing furniture, Roy’s also handles furniture customization. This can elevate a simple, basic couch into a personal, colorful one-of-a-kind work of art in your living room.
Any piece of furniture can be customized to change out the material for any you choose. To help you pick the best material, the Design Associates are knowledgeable in selecting the best material for your needs. Their catalog of materials is extensive and covers many designs and aesthetic choices.
Inside Home
Located in the Ukrainian Village neighborhood of Chicago, Inside Home is a furniture store that supplies curated pieces, both new and old.
For those who are looking for a vintage designer aesthetic, Inside Home is your friend. They specialize in Mid-Century Modern and Hollywood Regency pieces, but they can also cater to your style. Restoring old pieces to new, the staff are not only helpful in guiding you to the items you need but are friendly and conversational as well.
The furniture has a blend of both modern touches and vintage aesthetics. If you are unsure of what you are looking for, the staff of this family-owned boutique will do their best to cater to your tastes. Finding the perfect piece of furniture for you is what they strive for.
Additionally, they offer a custom, made-to-order upholstery route. Using only the best quality materials, you can determine every detail of your furniture. Anything from style, fabric, size, wood stain, and cushion inserts, the custom piece will be unique to your needs specifically.
Al-Mart Furniture & Bedding
Situated in Oak Park, Al-Mart Furniture & Bedding offers excellent prices and discounts for name-brand and quality furniture.
Affordability is the main draw when browsing Al-Mart’s collection. Offering regular discounts on their name-brand items is a common occurrence at Al-Mart. They make sure you get the furniture you need at an affordable price.
It truly is a furniture store for the Chicago people; not only are the prices low, but the customer service is exceptional. Delivery times are fast, and even on-the-spot purchases can be delivered on the same day itself.
The owner, Alan, is an accommodating businessman and understands the Chicago people. He has a hands-on approach in providing only the best customer service that will make you want to visit again.
Hay
Founded in 2002, Hay is a Danish company that aims to bring the Scandanavian design ethos to a larger audience. Being their third location in the US, their Lincoln Park branch is a 3,500 square foot area of Scandinavian designed furniture and accessories.
Combining the contemporary design of Scandinavian furniture with the modern living environment, their furniture has a fresh and simple design. Each piece is designed with extra attention given to durability and functionality.
When buying a piece of furniture or accessory from Hay, the genius of its simple design, while remaining functional, immediately stands out. From rugs to outdoor seating, you can rest easy knowing every aspect of the furniture has been meticulously designed by hand.
Cassona Home Furnishing And Accessories
Operating out of Chicago, this store is well known as a brand of high-quality service and products. All pieces in-house are American-made with a design that will add a modern touch to any home. From sofas and lift-top coffee tables to media units and nightstands, Cassona has it all.
If decorations are all you are looking for, then the store has many pieces that can help tie a room together. Sculptures, rugs, and wall art are just a few of the many different accessories they provide.
To browse their complete collection, their entire catalog is available on their website. If you can’t make it to their physical store, there is also the option to add it to your online shopping cart. They can have them delivered right to your doorstep.
Conclusion
Chicago is a beautiful city with vibrant character and people with different backgrounds all living together. The reflection of individual personality in a house is what truly makes it a home.
So, no matter where you may choose to pick up and furnish your home, the Chicagoans have your back. Fill up your home with beautiful pieces of custom furniture or more traditional designs that will never go out of style.
There is no one who can ultimately say what looks good and what doesn’t match. Express yourself through your furniture, and live life to its fullest in a house you can call home.
Out of all the construction materials, concrete is one of the most commonly used types due to its durability and versatility.
However, this durability does not last forever as it is still exposed to various elements which erode the concrete’s bond. Over time rain, UV rays, wind, and freeze-thaw damage weaken the concrete’s structure.
To combat this inevitable breakdown, bonding agents are used in maintaining the integrity of the concrete. In this guide, we will highlight a few of the best bonding agents for concrete, as well as some pointers to keep in mind when choosing an option.
Without further ado, let us begin!
Best Concrete Bonding Agents
Here's the list of the 11 best concrete bonding agents to help you maintain the durability and integrity of your concrete structures against the damaging effects of weather and time.
Loctite provides a highly versatile adhesive in their PL Premium line. It adheres to many different material types even under tough weather conditions. A strong bond is formed within 15-20 minutes and claims to give an adhesion three times stronger than standard adhesive. Additionally, waterproofing and freeze preventative measures further increase durability.
While using the Loctite PL Premium adhesive, the fast dry times were probably the most appreciated feature. Not having to wait for the adhesion to set in allowed for more efficient applications on multiple surfaces.
As for the strength of the bond formed, it held together exceptionally well. In fact, it’s three times stronger than other adhesives and gives a solid bond nonetheless.
The versatility of this premium adhesive included many common construction materials. From concrete to masonry, stone, and even metal, the adhesive had no problem in securing two surfaces together.
Of course, painting the adhesion may not be an essential feature, but it is a good option to have. Should you so choose to paint the adhesive once dried, it can give a cleaner look to the repair or project overall.
What Could've Been Better?
Due to the application method of the adhesive, the more precise application procedures were challenging. The solution is expelled at a constant steady flow which is by no means thin. This makes surfaces that require a thin, precise application almost impossible to reach.
Pros
Weather-resistant
Versatile application to different materials
Low odor
It doesn’t shrink in freezing or wet conditions
Cons
Struggles with precise applications
Compatible Materials: Polyurethane | Dimensions: 10.75 x 7.25 x 9.75 inches | Weight: 4 oz | Cure Time: 24 hours | Waterproof: Yes
Gorilla is a well-known brand in the adhesive market. The heavy-duty construction adhesive is popularly used due to its flexibility in the materials it can be used with. Withstanding various weather conditions and accommodating its shape to changing expansion and contraction makes it stand the test of time.
All purpose glue: A waterproof glue formulated for virtually...
Fast grab: Despite being a heavy duty glue, this adhesive...
Why Did We Like It?
What made this heavy-duty adhesive from Gorilla stand out is its ability to fill in gaps of the surfaces being bonded. The solution will permeate and fill these gaps to create a stronger bond. Having those gaps filled not only kept the two surfaces bonded well but held each individual piece together better.
As the Gorilla adhesive gives off little odor and is VOC compliant, it can be used indoors as well as outdoors. Its flexibility of adapting to changes in size due to temperature is especially helpful. Freezing or expanding due to heat is no problem; the adhesive will adjust to maintain its hold.
A fast drying time further helps the adhesive to be used comfortably for larger projects. Once dried, the bond is sandable and paintable for a more polished look.
What Could've Been Better?
There are multiple cases of the nozzle breaking or bending, causing the adhesive to leak out. Additionally, the screw-on cap has a tendency to become clogged, requiring a deeper cut to be made to access the formula. The resulting exposure can cause the glue to dry faster in the tube.
Pros
No solvent or water
VOC compliant solution
Low odor
Indoor or outdoor use
Cons
Weak nozzle and screw-on cap
Compatible Materials: Brick | Dimensions: 1.92 x 1.92 x 11.28 inches | Weight: 9 oz | Cure Time: 24 hours | Waterproof: Yes
Epoxy gels are incredibly strong in forming bonds, albeit they do require preparing the epoxy before applying. This epoxy gel from PC Products is a two-part epoxy that works great with concrete. With the ability to fill in the cracks in the concrete, it can give a lasting seal against water and extreme temperatures.
Two-part epoxy adhesive paste to fill and repair cracks in...
High-tack paste resists moisture for application in damp...
Why Did We Like It?
Mixing the two epoxy parts is not as big of an issue, and the application process is relatively easy even for novices. There were 20 minutes or so of working time, which allowed the material to be adjusted before the epoxy bonded securely. After that, the adhesion was set within a few hours.
PC Products used a high tack paste for this epoxy, which means any moisture is resisted when it is applied. Additionally, this high tack consistency makes vertical applications easier. The epoxy was able to be spread evenly to fill in cracks better.
After the epoxy is cured and dried, it becomes waterproof for extra protection throughout the concrete. It can then be sanded or painted to complete any restoration or construction project.
What Could've Been Better?
Two mixing nozzles are included with the epoxy by default. These nozzles provide an easier mixing of the epoxy in perfect ratio and can then be immediately applied. However, these nozzles are for one-time use. For multiple uses, either the nozzle must be cut, or more mixing nozzles must be purchased.
Pros
Resists moisture for damp applications
Gray finish for easier cleanup
Easy mixing of epoxy in one tube
High viscosity for filling gaps
Cons
A limited number of mixing nozzles
cons
Compatible Materials: Concrete, Masonry, Grout Filled Block | Dimensions: 3.5 x 2 x 10.3 inches | Weight: 1.76 oz | Cure Time: 4 hours | Waterproof: Yes
Another standout product from Gorilla is their Ultimate Construction Adhesive, with an advertised zero-second bonding time. While this claim may be difficult to believe, the fact remains that this adhesive is robust and tough. Capable of underwater application as well as an outstanding level of durability, this adhesive performs exceptionally for a range of projects.
OUR MOST DURABLE FORMULA: Higher Average Bond Strength...
INSTANT GRAB: Easy to Dispense Paintable Formula Holds in 30...
Why Did We Like It?
Touted as the Gorilla brand’s most durable formula, expectations were high. As is the norm with Gorilla adhesives, this particular product was able to adhere to a variety of surfaces with ease. Any concerns of whether or not a specific material was compatible with this adhesive were not an issue.
Performance-wise it held its own in various degrees of moisture, expansion, and contraction due to temperature changes. Furthermore, being able to fill in the gaps of the materials is always welcome to create a more closed-off seal.
Durability is the key feature of this adhesive. No moisture will be able to penetrate past the gap-filling adhesive once it is dried. What’s more, the adhesive is durable enough to be able to work underwater as well! Once dried, the bond is 100% waterproof.
What Could've Been Better?
An almost instant, zero-second dry time is one of the biggest pulls of this product. However, under different circumstances and use cases, this drying time can vary drastically. Under certain conditions, it can range from a few minutes to a few hours. While it is not an instant bond every time, the drying time does remain minimal.
Pros
Applicable to a wide range of materials
Fills gaps
Shrink proof against changes in temperature
Paintable once dried
Cons
Varying drying times
Compatible Materials: Wood, Fiberglass, Ceramic, Concrete, Stone | Dimensions: 1.9 x 1.9 x 11.2 inches | Weight: 9 oz | Cure Time: 4 hours | Waterproof: Yes
Not to be confused with the previous PL Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive, this formula differs in its application method. This adhesive uses a tube rather than a caulking gun to be applied, with similar durability. Able to be used inside or outside on almost any construction material, it is incredibly versatile and easy to use.
Adhesive comes in a 4 oz. Tube, is perfectly safe to use,...
Constructed of 100% polyurethane, this adhesive is perfect...
Why Did We Like It?
Packaged in a four oz. tube, applying this adhesive is a walk in the park as compared to the caulking version. So long as the instructions are correctly followed, a strong bond can be formed on almost any surface.
Additionally, cleanup is easy with a putty knife when the adhesive is semi-cured and has a clay-like consistency. When dried, it has a grey-tan finish, so cleanup is essential to maintain a clean look before the adhesive dries.
When it comes to the actual strength of the adhesion, it does form a secure, permanent bond when applied correctly. Filling gaps is ideal with this adhesive, thanks to its thick viscosity. It is rated to be able to fill up gaps of up to ⅜”, which is a sizable allowance for most projects or repairs.
What Could've Been Better?
A downside to using an adhesive stored in a tube is the strong dependence on the nozzle of the container. In the case of this Loctite adhesive, the nozzle did tend to become clogged with dried formula and needed to be cut away. In some extreme cases, the entire tube needed to be replaced.
Pros
VOC compliant
Waterproof
Cures even in extreme temperatures
Easy application from tube
Cons
Nozzle frequently becomes clogged
Compatible Materials: Wood, Concrete, Stone, Granite, Marble, Brick, Carpet, Metal, Stainless Steel, Ceramic, Fiberglass, Drywall, Pvc Trim | Dimensions: 3.89 x 9.7 x 23.2 inches | Weight: 4 oz | Cure Time: N/A | Waterproof: Yes
Cracks are one of the most common repair jobs when working with concrete. The Slab sealant from Sashco is an excellent option for easily filling these cracks. The formula has been textured to best match the look of concrete to have the cleanest result possible. Additionally, it can flex to adhere to the shifting concrete for a long-lasting repair.
Thanks to the numerous features the Slab sealant has, it is an ideal choice for repairing cracks in concrete. The texturing of the formula, as well as the flexibility and durability, all work together well to give a quality result.
Needing to touch up repairs to concrete constantly can be a bothersome chore. This is not the case with the Slab sealer, as it adjusts to any shifts the concrete goes through over time due to temperature.
Although this sealant may not fill the cracks within the concrete, it keeps the separate pieces bonded together at the surface level. Once dried, it can withstand any foot and vehicular wear and tear similar to regular concrete.
For a more comprehensive repair, the sealer can be applied along with a backing rod for internal support. This can give the solution a firmer grip within the concrete, filling the hole beyond the surface level.
What Could've Been Better?
Weather and humidity can affect how long this adhesive takes to dry and cure. In order to have complete protection from moisture, the Slab sealant requires a long curing time. This can range from a full day to a full 48 hours. This is a large window for possible contamination and can affect the durability of the sealant.
Pros
Seamless repairs
Adhesive’s elasticity adjusts to shifting material
Easy application
Ideal for fixing cracks in concrete
Cons
24-hour cure time for rain
Compatible Materials: Wood, Fiberglass, Ceramic, Concrete, Stone | Dimensions: 3.5 x 2 x 10.3 inches | Weight: 14.8 oz | Cure Time: 24 - 48 hours | Waterproof: No
Another adhesive from Loctite is a construction adhesive with a few unique features. Where this adhesive shines is in its durable and flexible nature. Air pockets are no problem for this adhesive. Loctite has developed this adhesive to have a stronger bond than their PL Premium line, definitely one for heavy-duty uses.
Strong, Versatile Adhesive: PL Premium MAX is strongest,...
Solid Durability: Doesn’t develop air pockets for better...
Why Did We Like It?
Having peace of mind that no air pockets will bubble up once the adhesive has settled is a great feeling. No air bubbles mean the overall bond remains solid throughout the material’s recesses. It keeps the entire structure together and resists any minor movements due to temperature changes.
Applying the adhesive is relatively easy as it takes hold of the material quickly. Additionally, there is some allowance given for cold temperatures; the adhesive will not dry out even if it is exposed to colder weather.
Furthermore, the fast grab that the adhesive has helps when working with surfaces that are difficult to clamp or are positioned awkwardly. However, there is no rush as the fast adhesion time still allows you to reposition the material before it sets and dries.
What Could've Been Better?
Once this adhesive dries, it becomes incredibly solid; keep in mind there is not even room for air pockets to form. This rigidity has its drawbacks as the adhesive can potentially crack and brittle up. Possibly even breaking under extreme pressure, this adhesive may be strong, but it is not the most flexible.
A two-part epoxy from PC Products, this is an exceptional choice for any projects involving moisture or water. The high resistance to water is the standout feature of this epoxy. A tensile and cohesive structure makes this epoxy hold its shape even when applied vertically or overhead.
Two-part marine epoxy adhesive paste bonds materials in dry,...
Bonds many materials, including fiberglass, concrete, many...
Why Did We Like It?
Waterproofing in this adhesive is impressive no matter where it is used; the bond will hold strong with no problem. Even in projects that are underwater, like a pool or tank, this epoxy holds its own without allowing any moisture to pass through.
Furthermore, the mixture has a thicker consistency that prevents dripping or sagging while it sets and hardens. There are not many adhesives that are strong enough to hold their own shape after application, so this is a truly unique feature.
There are 35 minutes of working time which is more than enough time to set the epoxy in position. Once it begins to harden, the total time to cure is eight to 15 hours. Once set, the epoxy takes on an off-white finish.
What Could've Been Better?
Due to the thick viscosity, this epoxy has many strengths against water and holding its shape. On the other hand, this thick consistency can make it difficult to mix or work with, especially when using a large quantity. Of course, it is still entirely feasible to work with when using smaller amounts.
Pros
Can withstand up to 1710 PSI
Fresh and salt water-resistant application
No dripping or sagging
Indoor and outdoor use
Cons
Thick viscosity can be challenging to mix and apply
Compatible Materials: Fiberglass, Glass, Ceramic, Concrete, Metal | Dimensions: 5.75 x 3 x 3 inches | Weight: 17.92 oz | Cure Time: 8 - 15 hours | Waterproof: Yes
This caulk from General Electric was designed to seal cracks in concrete and masonry with a quality bond, more of a repair or touch-up adhesive. Once thoroughly dried, it is completely waterproof and resistant to cracks and shrinking. For sealing minor cracks and recesses in concrete, this caulk is a quick and easy fix.
General Electric GE5020 Concrete and Masonry Silicone II...
Why Did We Like It?
Applying any concrete bonding agents on a rainy day can be challenging as the rain can wash away any applied adhesive. The General Electric silicone caulk is rain-proof within three hours of application, so any rain forecasts are no longer a threat.
Besides the fast rainproofing feature of the silicone, the caulk remains permanently flexible. There is no deterioration or yellowing over time; it will shift and adapt to changes in its surroundings. As a result, the need for future touch-ups is unnecessary.
The caulk itself is easy to apply using a caulking gun. It is pushed out of the tube smoothly with a nozzle that makes precise applications easy. Once applied, it can be worked on using a putty knife to have a cleaner adhesion between the caulk and the material.
What Could've Been Better?
Once the caulk is applied and set, any excess caulk can be difficult to remove. Using the appropriate materials to remove the caulk can still leave a residue or cause some discoloration. As such, it is crucial to have as clean an application as possible.
Pros
UV-resistant
Resistant to freeze-thaw damage
Fast cure time
Easy application
Cons
It can be challenging to clean up
Compatible Materials: N/A | Dimensions: 2 x 2 x 11.5 inches | Weight: 10.1 oz | Cure Time: N/A | Waterproof: Yes
Outdoor stonework and concrete are most prone to breaking down due to constant exposure to different weather conditions. Liquid Nails landscape adhesive is the weather-proof solution to keep these pieces together and looking brand-new. It holds them together as one solid piece and prevents any shifting due to weather or temperature.
Whether it is a quick touch-up or a repair project, this adhesive gives excellent performance when binding exposed stone or concrete. These pieces tend to shift due to extreme temperatures or as a result of freezing and thawing.
This landscape adhesive keeps the entire structure bonded and resists the external factors trying to break the material apart. Not only does the structure become more solid overall, but the adhesive can also fill the gaps to repair the pieces.
Weatherproofing is a versatile, helpful feature to have in an adhesive. The numerous effects that weather conditions have on stone and similar materials is a tough challenge to prevent. Liquid Nails achieves this protection in their adhesive with astonishing success. The adhesive can maintain its bond through heavy exposure and climatic conditions.
What Could've Been Better?
A clean application is imperative with this adhesive, as once the adhesive is applied to the recess, working it into the desired shape can be challenging. The adhesive takes on a putty consistency that only hardens over time. As such, make sure the adhesive does not get anywhere you don’t want it to go.
Pros
Weather-resistant adhesion
Heavy-duty strength bond
Fills and repairs gaps
Low VOC
Cons
Challenging to spread once applied
Compatible Materials: Brick, Concrete, stone | Dimensions: 2 x 2 x 11.4 inches | Weight: 13.92 oz | Cure Time: N/A | Waterproof: Yes
Truly a feat of adhesive engineering, Weldbond offers a universal adhesive that works as a versatile option. Depending on the material type and application, the adhesive will have different effects. Plus, it is incredibly easy to apply and clean up, making for a high-quality bond between various materials.
✅ BONDS MOST EVERYTHING: No need to carry multiple types...
✅ GREAT FOR CARPENTRY: Bonds stronger than wood! Easy to...
Why Did We Like It?
There are many reasons to like this universal adhesive, almost a fix-all solution for any adhesive needs. The versatility and flexibility that Weldbond brings make using it a breeze no matter what skill level or experience you may have.
A clear finish maintains the underlying material’s aesthetic. However, if a particular color is needed, it can be painted over once dried. Additionally, once the adhesive has dried, it acts as a sealant and priming coat that flexes with minor changes in the concrete.
All these useful features packed into one product increase functionality and durability. The adhesive is not the only benefactor of this incredible bond strength - the material it is applied to is protected all around.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the Weldbond universal adhesive has a fast drying time, there was a notable change in colder temperatures. The adhesive would lump up within the container and become difficult to apply. What’s more, once it is on the material itself, it would be difficult to spread and adhere to the surface.
It can be overwhelming to choose a suitable option with all the different terminologies and various unique features of cement bonding agents. Using the most appropriate type of concrete bonding agent can determine how effective a bond is formed.
Concrete binding agents come in five main variants with particular applications depending on the materials being bonded. Knowing these types and their use cases can help you make a more informed decision.
Two-Component Agent
As is evident from the name, this agent is composed of two components mixed together to form a surface bond. A common type of two-component agent used is an epoxy resin.
This type of agent is suitable for large projects. Waterproofing is an important feature to look for in a two-component bonding agent, especially for outdoor applications.
Use cases, such as binding wood to a concrete surface, are where this bonding agent performs well. Additionally, the two-component agent can be used with insulating foams to insulate concrete.
Concrete Glue Adhesive
A versatile variant of a bonding agent, the glue adhesive has a straightforward application. This adhesive is ideal for quick touch-ups or if a simple adhesion is all that is needed.
It does not need any preparation or tools; a simple coating is sufficient. Consider how much strength is required for your project as the glue adhesive is available in a wide range of bond strengths.
Assembly Adhesive
This variant of concrete bonding agent is designed to handle heavy-duty projects. Perfect for indoor and outdoor use, it has an easy application thanks to a nozzle and narrow tip.
Additionally, it can be spread over larger areas once it has been applied. Once the adhesive has been set, the bond formed is incredibly durable and stable.
Cement Adhesive And Filler
What makes this bonding agent unique is its ability to fill up the gaps in the concrete as compared to the other agents which only form a surface bond.
This particular agent is able to level concrete while maintaining an adhesion. It is a great choice to use where maintaining an even surface is vital, such as in replacing tiling or filling drill holes in a wall.
Silicone Concrete Adhesive
Typically, this type of bonding agent is used on concrete that is part of a building. It forms a tight seal between the pieces. There are two types of bases used in silicone adhesives-acrylic or silicone. These adhesive agents are not as strong as other options, so making sure the compound has sufficient bond strength is important.
Where this bonding agent shines is in its resistance to moisture. Furthermore, the adhesive strength is suitable for delicate materials such as ceramic or glass. If binding glass to cement is in your project description, a silicone adhesive can give you the performance you need.
Concrete Bonding Agents FAQs
What are concrete bonding agents?
Concrete bonding agents are substances used to improve the adhesion between concrete surfaces or between concrete and other materials. They help create a strong bond by enhancing the bond strength and ensuring a durable connection.
When should I use a two-component concrete bonding agent?
Two-component bonding agents, such as epoxy resin, are suitable for large projects and outdoor applications. They provide a waterproof bond and perform well when bonding wood to concrete surfaces. They can also be used with insulating foams for concrete insulation.
How is cement adhesive and filler different from other bonding agents?
Cement adhesive and filler not only form a surface bond but also have the ability to fill gaps in concrete. It is particularly useful for maintaining an even surface when replacing tiles or filling drill holes in a wall.
Can I use concrete bonding agents for vertical surfaces?
Yes, most concrete bonding agents can be used on vertical surfaces. However, it is essential to follow the manufacturer’s instructions and ensure proper surface preparation for optimal adhesion.
How do I apply a concrete bonding agent?
The application method may vary depending on the specific bonding agent. In general, it involves cleaning the surface, applying the bonding agent according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and allowing it to cure or set before proceeding with the desired application or bonding process. It is important to follow the guidelines provided by the manufacturer for the best results.
Conclusion
Selecting the perfect bonding agent for concrete can be a tough choice. Hopefully, knowing all the factors to look out for and a selection of a few options to get you started, can help you make the right choice.
From the above 11 Best Concrete Bonding Agents to Use this Year, the top three expert recommendations are Loctite PL Premium Polyurethane Adhesive, an ideal option for its fast dry times, strong bond formation, and versatility in application.
Gorilla Construction Adhesive is a good option for its ability to fill gaps, flexibility in accommodating changes in size, and low odor. And lastly, PC Products 72561 is the right choice for its easy mixing process, resistance to moisture, and high tack consistency for better crack filling.
Depending on what project you need the bonding agent for, pick the option which has the most relevant features to you. These unique features can be the difference between successful adhesion or not.
Owning the best colored pencils can give you an edge over competitors and artists since it offers rich pigments and bright colors.
However, choosing the right one can be tricky since every brand claims to be the best on the market. In addition, colored pencils come in different shapes, sizes, and types, which makes it all the tougher to choose the right one.
For instance, artist-grade colored pencils are designed to offer a wide color range and smooth texture finish. Some artists prefer to use professional colored pencils because they can try more complex techniques and designs. But they are one of the most expensive types of colored pencils, so you must think twice before purchasing them.
So, in this guide, we have listed a few brands that offer some of the best colored pencil brands. We have also specified the various benefits of different types of colored pencils so that you can make the best art piece.
Best Colored Pencil Brands
1. Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils
Prismacolor is one of the oldest brands that specialize in art supplies, and it was founded by the Eagle Pencil Company in the year 1938. It primarily manufactures three types of pencils which are soft pastels, colored, and graphite pencils. Over the years, it has started making color paints and charcoal for professional art.
Colored pencils are one of the best sellers of this brand, and they are divided into two main categories; scholar and premier. The scholar pencils line of Prismacolor colored pencils is made from a hard wax with fewer pigmentation properties. However, this line of colored pencils is cheaper than the premier ones. Moreover, there are around 150 different shades of colors that come in packs of 12, 24, 48, 60, 120, and 150.
On the other hand, the Prismacolor Premier is specifically designed for professionals and experienced artists. The wax used to form the lid is smooth and easy to work with since it blends well. However, you must be careful since the tip can easily break from excessive pressure or sharpening.
2. Crayola Colored Pencils
Next on our list is Crayola pencils, an American crayon manufacturing company with expertise in art supplies. When it was first launched in the industry, it focused entirely on making crayons, but eventually, it started to manufacture art supplies such as markers, chalks, colored pencils, and more.
Moreover, all Crayola products are non-toxic; therefore, you don’t have to worry about your kids using them since it is safe for children to use. The oil-based pencils and softcore pencils are two of the best sellers of this brand since they provide vibrant colors and depth while drawing and coloring.
Also, the pencils are available in a wide range of colors which makes it easy for an artist to choose their personal preference
3. Arteza Colored Pencils
Unlike most pencils brands that focus on a business perspective, Arteza's main priority is to inspire the young people around it with art and creativity. The brand wants to keep the spirit of art alive; therefore, they manufacture all types of art supplies, such as student-grade pencils, wax-based pencils, water-soluble pencils, and many more.
It also prefers to make some traditional colored pencils since it wants to inspire young artists to learn old art techniques. In fact, you can use these colored pencils for all types of colored pencil skills, such as cross-hatching, shading, drawing, depth creation, and many more.
Although wax-based colored pencils have vibrant colors, you might experience some wax bloom if you blend multiple colors in a single spot. However, there is nothing to worry about since practice will reduce the chances of having wax bloom on the drawing surface.
4. Faber-Castell Polychromos Color Pencils
Lastly, Faber-Castell is known for producing high-quality colored pencils for children, but it also specializes in making professional-grade colored pencils. Interestingly, Faber-Castell was first founded in the year of 1761, which makes it the oldest brand in the art industry.
At the beginning of the 1850s, the brand started using graphite and cedar wood to make its pencils, leading to affordable, higher-quality pencils. Later on, the brand started producing slide rulers, which were quite famous between 1880 to 1975. Some of the main products include Professional Art and Graphic pencils, pastel, and sharpeners, as well as kid's pencils such as watercolor pencils.
Buying Guide For The Best Colored Pencil
Now that we have discussed some of the best colored pencils on the market, we would like to share a few important factors that can help you make the right choice.
Color
Nowadays, most colored pencils come in a wide range of color options which makes it extremely difficult for artists to blend them and find the perfect hue. Nevertheless, you can still do many things with different colors since art is all about experimenting. On that note, we recommend purchasing a pencil set that contains at least 24 shades of color.
Apart from this, you can purchase additional pencils since they are also sold individually.
Blendability
Just like any other traditional art form, colored pencil drawings require the artist to blend and merge different layers of shades to achieve the right color combination and hue. Artist-grade pencils are one of the best choices you can go for since they are designed to mesh well with different colors without causing any difficulty.
Besides this, you should ensure that the shades are naturally cohesive and pleasing to the eyes.
Lightfastness
Lightfastness is defined as the amount of light the color can resist so that it doesn’t fade away and remain bright for a long time. Hence, you must choose a colored pencil with a high level of lightfastness. This will ensure that the colors remain more permanent and they don’t fade away easily.
Vibrancy
These days most colored pencils are optimized to be more vibrant and dynamic while producing a beautiful art piece. To have vibrant colors on the canvas, you must choose a pencil with a higher level of pigment in the lead. However, excess pigment can cause the drawing to lose its luster over time due to exposure to light.
You can avoid this problem by optimizing the lightfast pencils to be more complex and vibrant. In addition, they are usually expensive, but they are ideal for large art projects.
Durability
Colored pencils are made ofwood; therefore, they tend to break if you don’t take the right precautions. Hence, fine artists prefer to use pencils made from premium wood since it offers better durability. Moreover, high-quality wood is less likely to break when it is accidentally dropped from a high height. In fact, professionals find it easier to use firmer pencils since they offer a better grip while drawing and shading.
Similarly, you must ensure that the colored pencils can offer realistic and stellar art while being extremely durable. There is no point in selecting a durable pencil if it can’t get the job done. As such, testing the pencils before purchasing can help you find the best choice for your personal needs.
Furthermore, you can opt for mechanical pencils if you don’t trust the durability of wooden colored pencils. In fact, they don’t require any strict storage requirements since the pencil leads are within the mechanical pencil itself. However, you will need to purchase the pencil leads separately.
Colored Pencil Brands FAQs
How Long Do Colored Pencils Usually Last?
Normally, a colored pencil can last for around two to five years if you use them sparingly; however, you can prolong the duration. For instance, we recommend storing them in a cool and dark place since exposure to heat will eliminate the moisture and leave the pencil dry.
This can cause your colored pencils to turn brittle and become difficult to use. Nowadays, professional artists prefer to store their colored pencils in a special case that preserves the moisture of the pencils.
How Should You Sharpen A Colored Pencil?
When it comes to colored pencils with soft leads, we recommend not to sharpen them too much. Long points can easily break, and this will cause you to waste more energy and resources. Instead, you can use mechanical colored pencils since they don’t require any sharpening and they are beginner friendly.
On the other hand, you can test out different sharpeners to see which one suits you the best. Sometimes, brands will offer a pencil sharpener with the pencil sets.
Conclusion
With that, we have reached the end of this informative guide. Before signing off, we would like to share tips to help you enhance your artistic skills using these colored pencils.
Firstly,you can use colored pencils on a canvas as long as you prep the surface. For instance, oil-based colored pencils can easily damage the integrity of the canvas. Hence, applying a primer will prevent the oil from damaging the surface of the canvas.
Besides this, we recommend choosing premier pencils over affordable pencils since they offer vibrant color and a very fine point, which plays a crucial role in art.
That said, it is time to sign off. See you next time!
Are you tired of racking up excessively high energy bills during winter? Well, we’ve got just the thing for you.
In most circumstances, the windows in our house are not entirely insulated which leads to air leaks and cold drafts escaping into the house. This, alternatively, increases the consumption of heating devices and ultimately leads to very high heating costs, especially during the winter months.
Purchasing and installing a window insulation kit, in this context, is an effective and budget-friendly way to keep your home warm and toasty but also a great solution to soundproof your windows and reduce noise from the outside. This kit is not only DIY-friendly and compatible with most windows but it also seals in heat emitted by the sun and conserves energy in the process.
But how do you figure out the right window insulation kit to invest in? To answer your question, we have compiled a meticulous guide discussing 8 of the best window insulation kits available.
So, without further ado, let’s jump right into it, shall we?
Best Window Insulation Kits
Here is the list of the 8 best window insulation kits that you can use to save money on your energy bill and improve the comfort of your home.
The Duck Brand is a reputable company known to manufacture weatherization products for American homes. It has consequently developed a versatile window insulation kit that is compatible with and thereby can be installed on a variety of different doors and windows.
Reduce your energy costs by insulating your windows
Crystal clear film heat shrinks to seal out drafts and cold
Why Did We Like It?
With the onset of winter, it can be really difficult to keep your homes warm without amping up the energy bill. But this window insulation kit comes packaged with a comprehensive instruction guide, making it easy to install and efficiently insulate your house in no time.
The crystal clear film included in this kit readily lets the sunlight and heat enter your home, all the while insulating it from further escaping outside. Moreover, this film can effectively cover up to 5 windows having the dimensions of 3' x 5' and block cold air drafts from leaking into your home.
Furthermore, the double-sided tape provided in this kit can be easily applied on a wide variety of surfaces, including painted or finished wood, vinyl, and aluminum. It’s also simultaneously very easily removable and does not strip out any paint or ruin finishes in the process. This tape therefore effectively seals the room and does not allow the warm indoor air to escape or the cold outdoor air to enter.
What Could've Been Better?
The adhesiveness of the double-sided tape provided in this kit is a little weak. This, therefore, leads the film to slip off the tape or the tape to come off the wall in just a few short weeks after installation. Hence, chances are, this insulation setup might not last you the entirety of winter like it’s supposed to.
Pros
Increases energy efficiency and reduces costs
Made of earth-friendly material
Seals out cold drafts and air leaks
Easy to apply and remove
Cons
Low-quality adhesiveness
Size: 62" x 210" | Coverage: 5 Windows | Material: Plastic | Transparent: Yes
3M has developed a window insulating kit that utilizes one of the most high-performing insulating technologies in the market. It comes equipped with a clear film, along with a heavy-duty roll of double-sided scotch tape to help you install it.
First of all, we would like to mention that the window film included in this kit is one of the clearest and most effective insulating films on our guide today. Once applied to the tape, it needs to be patiently heated with a hairdryer and readjusted accordingly to achieve a smooth and stretched-out look. Moreover, this film considerably lowers condensation and prevents the build-up of frost on the windows.
The double-sided scotch tape, on the other hand, has unparalleled adhesiveness that makes it incredibly easy to install and facilitates creating an airtight teal seal around the film. This leads to the formation of a secure seal that neither allows warm air to escape the room nor cold air/drafts to enter.
Hence, the heavy-duty insulation provided by this kit allows you to readjust your thermostat to a low energy-consuming setting. Consequently, this action considerably reduces your energy consumption and thereby lowers the value of your utility bills in the long run.
What Could've Been Better?
The clear film in this kit, much like in the Duck Brand above, needs to be smoothed out with a hairdryer after application. However, some customers have lamented saying that it remains wrinkly no matter how much you blow dry it, which gives your windows an overall shabby look.
Pros
Fast and simple installation process
Reduces condensation and thereby prevents frost build-up
Helps you save on heating costs
Keeps cold air out and warm air in
Durable and lasts throughout the season
Cons
Clear film is difficult to smoothen out
Size: 62" x 210" | Coverage: 5 Windows | Material: Plastic | Transparent: Yes
As we mentioned earlier, Duck Brand is one of the most reliable companies when it comes to the production of weather solutions commodities. This window insulation kit manufactured by them in the variant MAX Strength creates a heavy-duty barrier to obstruct the entrance of cold air inside the house.
Insulates up to three 3 feet by 5 feet windows to block...
Kit includes: heavy-duty film and window kit tape
Why Did We Like It?
This window insulation kit, as compared to the previously reviewed Duck Brand kit, has a more durable structure. The shrinking film that is a part of this kit is thick and puncture-resistant and therefore more long-lasting and ideal for homes with young children and pets.
Furthermore, the double-sided tape provided as a part of this kit has a unique adhesive quality that makes it especially easy to remove after usage. It leaves no marks and does not ruin any finishes and hence can be safely applied to a variety of different surfaces.
What’s more? This kit is very easy to install and comes equipped with a comprehensive set of instructions. Additionally, the transparent film is very easily shrinkable with a hairdryer and provides a smooth and professional look to all your insulated windows.
What Could've Been Better?
This insulation kit, much like the other Duck Brand insulation kit we reviewed above, has a tape with low-quality adhesiveness. This considerably reduces the longevity of the product as it tends to allow the film to fall off after only a couple of weeks of usage.
Pros
Removes cleanly and easily at the end of the season
Effectively seals your home
Simple and straightforward to install
Thicker and puncture-resistant film
Easy to shrink up
Cons
Weak adhesiveness of the tape
Size: 62" x 126" | Coverage: 3 Windows | Material: Plastic | Transparent: Yes
Frost King offers you an affordable yet effective solution to shield your home from the extreme cold of winter. This insulation kit developed by them consists of 9 clear sheets and a roll of double-sided tape to facilitate a simple installation process.
The sheets provided in this kit are of standard size and can cover a variety of different window sizes effectively. They offer great versatility and can be installed on basement windows, standard windows, or even on patio doors.
Since the sheets are crystal clear they give you an unclouded vision of the outside without compromising on the warmth of the room temperature. Apart from that, the translucency of the sheet also allows sunlight to enter the room which is always an absolute requirement during winter.
Moving onto the double-sided tape, it has excellent sealing properties that firmly hold the sheet on all four sides of the window. The adhesiveness on this tape is tempered and therefore it can be put on painted or varnished wood, vinyl frames, or even on metals. The only point to be kept in mind is the surface should be grease-free and clean to provide better adhesion.
Last but not least, this kit comes equipped with a limited lifetime warranty, making it one of the most dependable insulation kits on our guide today.
What Could've Been Better?
Most grievances shared by customers are regarding the subpar adhesiveness of the tape. This has ultimately forced users to separately buy tape again from the local stationery stores. In a couple of instances, users noticed the adhesive leaving marks on the metal or wood after the plastic was taken off.
Pros
Quick and easy to install
A budget-friendly product
Transparency of film allows sunlight to enter and for us to see the outside
Keeps rooms 35% warmer than usual
Cons
The adhesiveness of the tape needs improvement
Size: 42" x 62" | Coverage: 9 Windows | Material: Plastic | Transparent: Yes
XFasten initially started off in 2015 as a small company providing adhesive solutions to the average American citizen. Since then, however, they have grown considerably as a brand that now offers a wide selection of products ranging from safety tapes to carpet tapes.
STRONG BUT SURFACE-SAFE ADHESIVE. Transparent weather...
AIRTIGHT WEATHER STRIPPING TAPE. The XFasten...
Why Did We Like It?
XFasten’s motto is to provide its customers with simple solutions to everyday problems and hence has developed a unique weather-sealing tape for everyday insulation. This product is quite the steal and is perfect for sealing any kind of leakage from windows. The tape is in fact, weather-resistant and therefore works great under a variety of stress conditions.
Furthermore, this adhesive is incredibly easy to use, and hence easy to install and even easier to remove. You can simply seal all the windows of your house that are prone to leaks and gaps before the onset of the winter. Additionally, this tape also works by sealing out exceptionally cold temperatures starting from -17 degrees centigrade.
But wait, that’s not all! Because this tape is not only effective in keeping out the cold, but is also great at blocking smog, dust, or even warm air from entering an air-conditioned room. Apart from that, the adhesive side of the tape does not ruin surfaces and leaves no residue post-removal, which we love.
What Could've Been Better?
This sealing tape is not recommended for exterior use as water tends to seep in and get clogged very easily whenever it’s applied. Furthermore, since it’s made of plastic one must not use it as an insulation coating for electrical wires.
Duck Brand has released a single roll of double-sided replacement tape to help you efficiently seal your homes when paired with their previously discussed insulation kits. This modest indoor tape has the ability to provide you with effective insulation for a full season.
This double-sided tape is essentially meant to act as a replacement for the tape provided in their previously mentioned insulation kits. The clear and transparent look of this tape does not stand out and efficiently blends into the décor of the room you apply it in.
Furthermore, this product is remarkably convenient to apply and helps in completely sealing windows of all sizes. It is built to be specifically applied on wooden surfaces including clean ones. painted, or varnished wood. Additionally, the double-sided adhesiveness holds the plastic sheets more securely against the window to provide optimum insulation.
But what’s more? The enhanced insulation properties of this tape can keep rooms warm and comfortable while saving you money and energy in the process. Apart from that, the tape can also be used to keep the heat during summers at temperatures above 50 degrees Fahrenheit.
What Could've Been Better?
The tape is meant for interior use only and can be applied on a very limited number of surfaces. The brand clearly advises against applying this tape on plaster, drywall, and unsealed wood. Hence, application on these surfaces may lead to damage and an adhesive residue being left behind.
This innovative insulation kit by LBG consists of 2 large black foam panels that are meant to be installed against the windows. It is built to keep unwanted air from entering the house in order to keep it comfortable inside.
[✔Universal Design]：Air Conditioner Side Insulating...
[✔Keep House Comfortable]:Work like a window seal,seal out...
Why Did We Like It?
These foam insulation panels are one of the simplest insulation kits to install and use. Equipped with highly adhesive side channels, all you have to do is peel off the tape sticker and apply it to the window unit of your choice. Most consumers appreciate the sturdy and well-designed paneling of this insulation that comes in use for multiple purposes.
Furthermore, the foam panels in this kit are pretty thick and therefore give good insulation against both cold winters and hot summers. The large and opaque build of this panel keeps the sunlight out entirely and leaves the temperature of the room entirely on the thermostat. This alternatively helps many households save money on electricity.
What’s more? The foam panels in this kit are also anti-vibration and can effectively control vibrations and absorb noise made by household appliances like air conditioners. Hence, in a way, it also works as a noise-canceling or soundproofing panel.
What Could've Been Better?
It’s important to remember that the foam in this kit is not waterproof and hence cannot be installed outdoors. If set up outside, it will get ruined at the first of the rain. A few consumers also felt that this product is like any regular and hence too high-priced for its quality.
Pros
Anti-vibration and noise absorbing
Can be cut easily as per requirement
Strong adhesive and no residue
Self-stick side channels
Windproof and dustproof
Cons
Not waterproof
Size: 17" x 9" x 3.1" | Coverage: 2 Panel Frames | Material: Foam | Transparent: No
This gray tape by Fowong is made of neoprene rubber foam and is therefore completely weatherproof by nature. It comes packaged in 2-roll sets and is perfect for insulating gaps between the air conditioner and the window as well as for door gaskets.
This insulation tape by Fowong is very soft and thereby can be customized and applied as per your needs and requirements. You can easily cut it with a pair of scissors or blades making it extremely easy to install and use. Additionally, the tape has an extremely strong adhesive side and is waterproof making it ideal for a versatile set of purposes.
But that’s not all! This product is also oil-resistant, flame-retardant, dustproof, corrosion-resistant, shock-absorbent, anti-skidding, and sound dampening. You can use this to seal or insulate sliding doors, garage doors, or windows to keep your room cozy and comfortable. It also insulates effectively enough to reduce energy consumption and thereby save you on your electricity bills.
If that wasn’t enough, this foam tape can work well within a temperature range of -50 degrees Centigrade to 150 degrees Centigrade making it exceptionally versatile. Fowong additionally provides a dedicated service and warranty, assuring us of extended and durable performance.
What Could've Been Better?
Some consumers have expressed that the thickness of this tape is not enough to seal the doors and windows. At times the tape gets compressed where the door touches and it peels off in a short while. Additionally, it may also peel off easily when not applied to cleaned and dried surfaces.
Pros
Extremely flexible
High durability and great insulation
30% more resilience than its counterparts
Can be applied easily
Value for money
Cons
Gets compressed easily
Size: 0.50" x 0.25" x 156" | Coverage: N/A | Material: CR Foam & Neoprene | Transparent: No
Purchasing the right window insulation kit can be quite a confusing task, especially considering the diverse kinds of kits available in the market. For this reason, we have compiled a comprehensive buyer’s guide listing out all the important factors to contemplate. These pointers will help narrow down the options so that you can buy the right product for yourself. So, what are we waiting for? Let’s jump right into it!
Transparency
The transparency of the film determines how much sunlight can enter the room. The more transparent or crystal clear the film is, the higher the rate of sunlight and heat dispersed within the room. Alternatively, the more opaque it is, the cooler your room stays because of its ability to actively block out sunlight.
Hence it is essential to check customer reviews and the manufacturer’s description to ascertain the transparency level of the sheet. This will enable you to buy a kit according to your personal requirements and insulation criteria.
Reusability
Window insulation kits are mainly used only during the colder winter months and hence most of the kits available are meant for one-time use only. However, if buying a kit every consequent year doesn’t sound appealing, you can always invest in one that can be reused for multiple seasons.
While these kits tend to cost more than their counterparts, they considerably reduce your overall expenses. Additionally, they also lower the amount of waste produced and hence are better for the environment.
Effectiveness of Sealing
The sealing properties of your window insulation kit are very important factors to consider while purchasing one. This feature determines how effectively your product can keep out cold air from inside your home while keeping the temperature consistently warm. Look for details regarding the airlock properties in order to get a better idea of how good the sealant is.
Installation and Removal Process
It is essential to look for a window insulation kit that facilitates easy installation and removal especially if you are planning to do it by yourself. This process will mainly depend on how good the materials provided in your kit are since flimsy materials are usually more troublesome to install. Alternatively, you must also look for products that cause the minimum amount of damage to your windows and walls upon removal.
Longevity
The longevity of a product can only be ascertained by comparing the reviews posted by consumers. It is crucial to invest in an insulation kit that is of high quality and lasts for at least a couple of months at a stretch. This will enable you to avoid constantly repurchasing and reapplying to the same product in a short duration over and over again.
Window Insulation Kits FAQs
Does a window insulation kit impact indoor air quality?
No, a window insulation kit should not impact your indoor air quality. However, ensure the room is adequately ventilated during installation to avoid inhalation of any adhesive fumes.
Can window insulation kits work for other types of insulation besides heat?
While primarily designed for thermal insulation, they can also provide a degree of sound insulation, reducing noise from outside.
Can I install my window insulation kit myself?
Absolutely! Window insulation kits are generally designed for easy DIY installation. They should come with clear instructions, and only requires basic household tools.
Can the window be used normally after installing the insulation kit?
As the film is typically applied to the interior of the window, it will prevent the window from being opened. It’s best installed on windows that do not need to be opened frequently.
How long does a window insulation kit last?
Window insulation kits are typically designed to last through one heating season. However, its longevity might depend on the quality of the kit and how well it was installed.
Conclusion
Insulating your home, especially during the colder months, is a critical step in improving energy efficiency, reducing costs, and enhancing the comfort levels of your home. Throughout this review, we have taken you through an in-depth look at eight brilliant window insulation kits that excel in their own way.
From the above 8 best window insulation kits, here are the top three expert recommendations:
The Duck Brand 286217 is an ideal option for you if you're seeking versatility. Being compatible with various doors and windows makes this a versatile option. Despite its low adhesiveness, it has other noteworthy benefits including increased energy efficiency, cost reduction, and easy-to-apply and remove insulating film which lets sunlight in while effectively blocking cold drafts.
On the other hand, the 3M 2141W-6 is a good option for those who prioritize high performance and durability. Its clear film is known to be one of the most effective insulating films in the market today, reducing condensation and preventing frost build-up. Despite the challenge of smoothing out the film, its easy installation process and unmatched adhesiveness provided by the included scotch tape still make it a top contender.
If durability is your main concern, the Duck MAX Strength 284351 is the right choice. With its puncture-resistant and long-lasting shrinking film, it's ideal for homes with young children and pets. Its easiness of installation and clean removal is extraordinary. Despite the weak adhesive tape, its straightforward installation and durability set it apart from the rest.
Remember, the ultimate choice of a window insulation kit is significantly influenced by your unique circumstances, including the type of windows you have, the severity of winters in your region, your budget, and personal preferences. These recommendations provide a solid starting point when shopping for the right window insulation kit to meet your needs. Explore each option and choose a kit that will offer optimum performance and longevity. Happy shopping!
Tired of the dingy, old-fashioned furniture in your dwelling? It’s time you go to furniture stores and revamp your home with modern and elegant pieces.
Shopping for furniture online or visiting a physical store? We prefer the latter, because what could be more gratifying than snuggling down on a bunch of assorted recliners or trying out beds, furnishings, and sofas to your heart’s content.
But with zillions of furniture stores out there, how do you know which one’s the best to explore? That is where the internet walks in. You can explore all the different couches, recliners, and every furnishing trending currently, with just a click.
With that in mind, we are letting out the best furniture stores in Houston that you can walk in and get your old furniture replaced with modern ones.
So, without further ado, let’s check them out!
Best Furniture Stores in Houston
The Amish Craftsman
Location - 5555 Washington Ave Suite M, Houston TX 77007
Want to revamp your dining space, living room, bedroom or office space? The Amish Craftsman has it all. This boutique store creates some of the best furniture that’s not only unique and stylish but is also designed to last a lifetime.
Handcrafted in the USA by the Amish Craftsmen since 1926, you can also customize sofas, beds, loveseats, and other types of furniture you have in mind. So, you don’t have to settle for anything less than what you want.
The Amish Craftsman store also features pieces for home decors. This boutique store is something you should surely explore, for it will cater to all your needs and requirements.
Exclusive Furniture
Location - 12200 Gulf Freeway Houston, TX 77075
With 7 exclusive stores in Houston, Exclusive Furniture has been offering affordable furniture. Be it your living room, bedroom, dining room, or even office - Exclusive Furniture is the one-stop solution for all your furniture needs.
Since 1988, they have been the leading manufacturer and producer of top-quality furniture in Houston. If you are looking forward to visiting one of its showrooms, we recommend you visit the one at Gulf Freeway road.
Apart from furniture, they also offer mattresses and home decor pieces. With their friendly customer service, you are sure to find the right furniture within your budget.
Noel Furniture
Location - 2727 SW Freeway Houston, 77098
Looking to adorn your home with something unique? Noel Furniture is a furniture store you must not miss. Designed by designers, Noel Furniture offers everything for your home.
From premium furniture for living rooms or bedrooms to hand-woven carpets, you are sure to discover an assortment of exclusive items to furnish your place. Whether classic or modern, Noel Furniture caters to every taste.
Houston’s leading furniture showroom also offers design services. Just walk into the store and get assisted by their designers. Schedule an appointment today and transform your place into the house of your dreams.
Fond of handcrafted furniture? Living Designs Furniture has it all. Get everything at factory prices without compromising on quality. Whether it is that exquisite couch or that upholstered bed that you’ve seen online and wish to have in your bedroom, Living Designs Furniture can make all your dreams true.
You can choose from thousands of fabrics, and rest assured you won’t be disappointed. Handcrafted in Texas, they offer premium quality, exclusive furniture at affordable rates.
Rush to their showroom factory to collaborate with their design team and create the perfect furnishing for your home to transform your space.
Nadeau - Furniture With A Soul
Location - 1502 Durham Dr Houston, TX 77007
Nadeau offers exclusively handmade furniture from all over the world at incredibly affordable rates. Because they are handcrafted, each piece of Nadeau’s furniture has a soul. Every piece of furnishing is specifically designed to add grace and warmth to your living space.
From carved tables for your living rooms to bookcases for the reading room, Nadeau has everything that you will want. Their pieces are going to adorn your space and completely remodel them.
The carved mirror frames of Nadeau are really beautiful and would be an ideal piece if you want to add something eye-catching to your living room. If you are fond of boho décor, then you must pay a visit to their store.
La Sierra Home Furniture
Location - 11245 Southwest Fwy, Houston, TX 77031
La Sierra Home Furniture is one of the finest furniture stores in Houston which aims at providing a lavish living to you while being easy on the pocket. If you want to breathe life into your living room and bedrooms, pay a visit to the La Sierra furniture showroom.
You will find everything from love seats, sofas, beds to decor and mattresses. Their unique furnishings will breathe life and add beauty to your space. Want sofas, beds, or any other furniture to be customized your way? Head on to the La Sierra showroom - they will design precisely what you have in mind.
Modani
Location - 5370 Westheimer Road, TX 77056
One of the best furniture stores not only in Houston but also in the United States, Modani caters to almost all your furniture needs from the living room to bedroom, outdoor, and offices. Also, you will find sculptures in its showrooms which can add to the aesthetic appeal of your living space.
Love decorating your walls? Modani has a wide variety of wall arts to choose from. Although they specialize in contemporary design, you will find a few vintage pieces as well. Because of their exclusive collection, Modani has become a favorite store amongst celebrities and interior designers.
Star Furniture
Location - 18107 North Fwy, Houston, TX 77090
Star Furniture store is one of the oldest furniture stores in Houston. If you are looking for quality and durability along with comfort, head on to the Star Furniture showroom. Plus, their unique pieces add beauty to your space.
Their showroom consists of a wide variety of furnishings - from armoires to dressers, cocktails, standard ottomans, rugs, and lamps. They don’t compromise with quality, and so, they are slightly more expensive than other stores. You can also order online through their e-store.
Featured on Houstonia, Tidbits, Mid In Mod furniture store is ideal for those who have a fondness for mid-century modern design. They excel in mid-century modern furniture, and this is why they are ahead of the game.
They offer leather sofas, lounge chairs, dining tables, and a lot more. Want to order that favorite couch or anything that you want? You can now shop online from the comfort of your home. Moreover, they ship orders within 3 - 5 business days.
Home Source Furniture Post Oak Showroom
Location - 1705 Post Oak Blvd, Houston, TX 77056
If you love decorating your house from pieces around the world, then Home Source Furniture is the perfect place. Their showroom consists of a variety of handcrafted pieces imported from China, Indonesia, Central America, and India.
With stunning elegant pieces from Home Source Furniture, you can give your house a complete makeover. Their furnishings are pretty affordable. So, you can beautify your house within your means. Their handcrafted pieces are unique and have a soul of their own. Visit their showroom today and browse through their exclusive pieces to get your favorite one.
Bi-Rite Furniture
Location - 7114 North Fwy, Houston, TX 77076
Are you looking to give your bedroom a complete makeover? Bi-Rite Furniture has it all. Whether you are in the quest for furniture for your bedroom, living room, or dining room, take a look at of Bi-Rite Furniture showroom.
Moving on, they have a warehouse behind their showroom, and so you can take home your favorite piece. Also, if you are too lazy to visit the store, you may choose to shop online. Just place an order on their website and wait for your furniture to be delivered.
You can browse through a wide variety of furniture of various styles and materials by stepping into the Furniture Town showroom. Whether it is your living room, bedroom, office, or outdoor requirement, their pieces can add beauty to your living space.
Stepping into their showroom, you will be taken into a different world of furniture where you will come across all kinds of bed styles - from canopy beds to platform beds and upholstered beds. Whether you are looking for a new dresser, mirrors, or a complete set, Furniture Town has it all.
Gallery Furniture
Location - 6006 North Freeway, Houston, TX 77076
Gallery Furniture offers furniture of the highest quality, manufactured in the United States at the most reasonable prices. You’ll love the warm, friendly atmosphere of the employees at the Gallery Furniture showroom.
The showroom is furnished with plenty of styles, finishes, and varieties to choose from. With such versatility, you can select the best piece for your home. Also, they offer same-day delivery so that you can take your favorite pieces home without delay. You can win exciting prizes by participating in the giveaway hosted by Gallery Furniture.
Ikea
Location - 7810 Katy Freeway, Houston, TX 77024
If you are on the lookout for stylish furniture with modern designs, then Ikea is your go-to store. With their comfortable mattresses, classic drawers, fashionable lighting, and trendy pieces, you can transform your bedroom from a monotonous space to a lively one.
Just step into their showroom, and you will find furnishings of various styles, designs, materials for every space of your home. From living rooms to kitchen cabinets, Ikea has it all. You can adorn every corner of your home without worrying about the budget, for they are easy on the pocketbook.
With Ikea’s furniture, you can create a warm living space within your means.
Sarah Furniture
Location - 8009 Harwin Drive, Houston, TX 77036
For over 16 years, Sarah Furniture has been offering top-notch quality furniture to its Houston-area buyers. Their showroom floor is filled with a wide range of furnishings and accents from renowned manufacturers.
You can explore its showroom and discover items for your bedrooms, living rooms, dining area, kids room, and a lot more. Plus, you can beautify your space with their exquisite accent pieces. From rugs to pillows, lightings, and accessory sets, Sarah Furniture has it all.
Do you want to add a splash of color to your plain wall? Browse through their varied assortment of mirrors and wall arts.
Bellagio Furniture
Location - 5869 W 34th Street, Houston, TX 77092
If you are looking for a furniture store delivering high-quality furniture that is long-lasting, Bellagio Furniture is your go-to place. Their wide range of furniture is aesthetically appealing and is a perfect embellishment for your space. They have dining tables that will add elegance to your dining area.
Also, Bellagio Furniture has stylish home décor items which you can buy without spending a fortune. With such affordable décor pieces, you can not only give your home a complete makeover but also add a stylistic flair to the living spaces.
Castle Fine Furniture
Location - 3911 Fondren Rd, Houston, TX 77063
For over 23 years, Castle Fine Furniture has been offering unique furniture to the residents of Houston. It caters to the taste of not only the minimalist who is fond of classic furniture but also of those who prefer modern, stylish fittings for their space.
With their wide-ranging variety of furniture, you can add colors to the décor of the space and make your home a welcoming one. You are sure to love the elegant sets offered by Castle Fine Furniture.
Conclusion
Don’t let your old-fashioned furniture kill the beauty of your living space.
Instead, give your room a complete makeover by replacing your furniture with modern and luxurious furnishings. After all, your home is a place where you relax from the hustle and bustle of life.
So, it must be designed in a way that would provide you with much needed comfort and relaxation. At the same time, it must be attractive. The furniture stores mentioned in this guide are among the best ones in Houston where you can get marvelous pieces to adorn your space.
You can even get your favorite pieces customized. Add colors to your space with the unique accents offered by these stores. Do let us know your favorite furniture stores in Houston.
Tile floors are beautiful flooring options to have in a home. Not only are they great for adding character, but they are also great for their durability.
A spilled drink or food is no problem for a tiled flooring; simply wipe it away with a mop or cloth, and it's as if it never happened. Sadly, they are not the ultimate flooring option; they come with their share of drawbacks.
Dust and dirt can still build up on tiled floors and cause their color to become muddy. The cracks between tiles are also dirt magnets, making the floor look grimy and unkempt. So, keeping them clean in the long run can be a chore without a proper cleaning tool.
Now, many vacuums do not have enough suction power to clean these small crevices. However, if you are looking for an option that can get the job done, read on and find the right vacuum cleaner for you.
Best Vacuums For Tile Floors
Here's the list of the 10 best vacuums for tile floors of 2023, designed to tackle dust, dirt, and grime to keep your tiles looking pristine.
A cordless vacuum, the CHV1410L, is a powerful vacuum with great additional features that seem to be designed with cleaning tiles in mind. With a great battery and quick charge paired with easy maintenance, this offering from Black+Decker is a small machine with extreme suction power.
OPTIMAL PERFORMANCE - 16V MAX lithium-ion battery provides...
Why Did We Like It?
The CHV1410L is compact and lightweight, making it easy to maneuver and reach those tiny crevices. There are several extra features and its powerful 15.2 AW suction power, which makes it great for cleaning tiled floors.
With an extendable crevice tool that makes getting in tight spaces much easier, as well as a rotating slim nozzle, it's ideal for getting in between tiles. Additionally, the “cyclonic action” suction of the vacuum keeps the filter clean and maintains the same strong suction power over time.
As for maintenance, the washable dust bowl and filter are easy to remove and make cleaning up a hassle-free experience. To charge up the lithium-ion battery inside, simply attach the vacuum to its charging base, and in four hours, you’ll be ready to go!
What Could've Been Better?
One issue we did find with this model is related to the battery and its longevity. A lithium-ion battery is meant to last for years; however, this was not the case with this vacuum cleaner. The battery might die within a few months despite light use. Furthermore, the battery itself is not replaceable in this model.
The Featherweight Stick is a stick vacuum cleaner with a unique three-in-one design that can convert into a handheld or stair vacuum. This lightweight model is excellent for hard floors, with a 15ft. power cord that allows you to reach anywhere in the house with ease.
Powerful, convenient, and easy to use.2033.0 watts.Specific...
Powerful suction makes it great for quick pickups with...
Why Did We Like It?
Having the ability to change the vacuum type as needed in the situation is a treat and makes cleaning so much easier with an all-in-one machine.
The Featherweight is able to pick up pet fur and dust from tiles with sufficient power. Be it on a flat floor, furniture, or stairs; it is a pleasant experience to switch between the modes. Moreover, the crevice tool came in handy, especially for reaching tough spots in the corners and tiles.
That's not all; storing the vacuum away was easy as the overall footprint is smaller than many wired vacuums. The wire itself tucks away neatly and efficiently behind the handle, making the maintenance that much easier.
Cleaning the vacuum out is a simple task as well. After all, it has a filter with a bag-less design that requires simply opening the vacuum and emptying the collection chamber out.
What Could've Been Better?
While some may enjoy having a smaller-sized vacuum, it may be a nuisance for those with larger areas to clean. The Featherweight truly is small and will require more passes to cover larger areas.
Although the 15ft. cord is sufficient for the standing vacuum, it can lack when using the other two vacuum modes.
Another corded vacuum option, the Shark Rocket from SharkNinja features a two-in-one design with great suction, be it in the stick or handheld form. It has included attachments to clean those tight spaces and handle pet hair with ease. Taking it one step further, the fingertip controls allow fast switching between cleaning carpet and hard floors.
SHARK ROCKET PET CORDED STICK VACUUM: Ultra-powerful, corded...
PERFECT FOR PETS: Powerful pet hair pickup attachments like...
Why Did We Like It?
One feature which stood out the most while using the Shark Rocket was the swivel steering. Maneuvering it around furniture was a breeze and made cleaning much easier than having to go around table and chair legs manually.
Another thing we liked was the reachability it offered. The low-profile, 8.5-inch wide cleaning path allowed us to reach under furniture: an included crevice and precision tool allowed for cleaning in even the tightest of spaces. Additionally, the handheld mode combined with the long wand gave easy to reach from the floor to the ceiling.
Furthermore, storing the vacuum away was simple and easy. Simply detach the hand vac portion and hang it from the wand. After all, it comes with a free-standing and compact design.
Finally, the dust cup is easy to empty with a unique, bagless, bottom-opening design. At the touch of a button, the bottom of the dust cup is released, and the debris falls through into the disposal.
What Could've Been Better?
Due to the design of the Shark Rocket, the top half offsets the weight distribution of the whole vacuum. This is why the storage calls for you to detach the hand vac and attach it closer to the ground. We have had multiple instances of it falling over, which could have caused damage or hurt someone.
Another cordless option, this time coming from Hoover, the BH50010 uses a lithium-ion battery as its power source. Featuring a simple build, it gets the job done with ease thanks to its lightweight body. And with a low-profile design coupled with a powered brush roll, it can pick up dirt and debris on any floor surface.
EXTREME RECLINE HANDLE: Reach further without having to move...
EDGE CLEANING BRISTLES: Removes dirt, dust, and pet hair...
Why Did We Like It?
Cleaning multiple floor types can be a hassle when vacuuming as the suction power may not always be strong enough for both hard floors and carpets. However, the powered Brushroll in the Hoover was fantastic at pulling the dirt and dust up from both these spaces.
Of course, the suction power itself is not lacking either. Equipped with Hoover’s WindTunnel airflow technology, there was no problem in picking up dirt. Additionally, the low-profile design helped reach lower areas, under furniture and such, which is always great for convenience.
An included rechargeable lithium-ion battery on a base brings another level of freedom while using the vacuum. Additionally, the display in the front of the vacuum will show how much power is left in the battery to keep the vacuum ready to go.
What's more, the model comes with a washable filter inside that will allow reusability and make sure the dirt is collected properly.
What Could've Been Better?
Without a dedicated slim nozzle option, you must rely solely on the Brushroll and suction power to reach the crevices on the floor. Apart from that, the battery charger seems to be lacking. After a few uses, it would stop charging the battery altogether, prompting us to buy a whole new charger.
A modern robot vacuum option, the Roomba 675 is an autonomous cleaning device. With several onboard sensors and motors, it will power itself throughout your home and pick up dirt and debris. Paired with an app, it offers a futuristic experience when it comes to cleaning.
Capacity volume - .6 liter. Works with Alexa for voice...
Clean and schedule from anywhere with the iRobot HOME App;...
Why Did We Like It?
This is one of the most technologically advanced vacuums currently on the market. You may control it using voice assistant, through the app, or even letting it automatically clean based on your set schedule, making it convenient to use.
Autonomy on the Roomba 675 goes a long way when it comes to power, as it will run for up to 90 minutes before docking itself and recharging. Furthermore, the sensors will detect different floor types and adjust the bristle height to pick up dirt, from carpets to hardwood floors.
It also has multi-surface and edge-sweeping brushes to handle corners and tight spots. Pair this with the Dirt Detect sensors, and it will get to areas that you may have missed or can’t reach right away.
What Could've Been Better?
Comparing the Roomba 675 to traditional vacuums, it does fall short in some areas. With such a compact build, it does not have as strong of a suction power that other vacuums might have. Additionally, it can miss spots that the sensors are unable to pick up due to obstacles, so the coverage is not always accurate.
Essentially the big brother of the 675, the i7+ from Roomba is packed with many of the same features but comes with a few more tricks up its sleeve. With more autonomy and power, as well as sensors and learning capabilities, this vacuum adapts to your needs specifically.
ALWAYS GETTING SMARTER - Quality that lasts; Intelligence...
COMPLETE CONTROL OF YOUR CLEAN - With Smart Mapping, your...
Why Did We Like It?
Watching the i7+ in action is a delight, knowing that it will handle the entire vacuuming job from charging to collecting to even disposal; this is definitely one for low-maintenance lovers.
One feature that was especially useful was the smart learning capability. To be able to tell the vacuum where exactly you want it to clean without lifting a finger was a great, hassle-free experience. You can also tell it where not to go, such as play areas or pet bowls, instead of having it roam around looking for dirty areas to clean.
iRobot states the i7+ as being ten times more powerful than their 600 series in terms of suction power. This, combined with the adaptive bristles underneath, the i7+ will be able to power through many cleaning jobs across whatever floor surface you may have.
What Could've Been Better?
There were issues that we ran into with the brush bristles getting caught on the hair while cleaning. This clogged up the system and kept the i7+ from picking up more dirt, essentially just roaming aimlessly.
Furthermore, the sensors need light in order for the Roomba to function, which can be a nuisance at times.
Corded vacuums can be limited in their maneuverability due to the length of the cord. The NV352 from SharkNinja is not one of these vacuums. With a detachable pod and excellent Swivel Steering, cleaning around tight spots and spaces is a breeze. Attachments and different-length crevice tools are a nice touch as well.
LIFT-AWAY FUNCTIONALITY: lift away the detachable pod and...
ANTI-ALLERGEN COMPLETE SEAL TECHNOLOGY: Works with a HEPA...
Why Did We Like It?
With a larger build, the NV352 remains lightweight and easy to maneuver even with one hand. The lift-away pod feature is helpful to reach spots the vacuum wouldn’t fit. There are two crevice tools of different lengths to get to those spots better to increase the reachability further.
Additionally, the swivel steering smoothly guides the vacuum around any obstructions like furniture legs and corners for full cleaning coverage. For cleaning on hardwood floors that may be prone to scratches from a vacuum’s bristles, a quick shutoff feature is also available.
Weighing 14 pounds, the NV352 is a portable dust and allergen trap with a HEPA filter and two foam filters inside. Suction power is excellent on this vacuum, and with the substantial cord length, it can get around any room with ease.
What Could've Been Better?
While the suction on the NV352 is strong, it does struggle with hair getting tangled in the roller brush. Additionally, the vacuum is top-heavy, which means using it with any of the attachments on the hose can cause it to tip over easily.
An excellent corded vacuum designed ideally for pet owners, it has a built-in washer so you can vacuum and wash in one go. Essentially a mop and vacuum in one build, it removes pet hair with a tangle-free brush roll. It can also remove odors with a multi-surface Febreze formula.
The Crosswave Pet Pro is an excellent vacuum for what it offers. The mopping feature is useful for any cleanup job, be it wet or dry. With two tanks to keep the clean and dirty water separate, the floor gets an even scrub of clean water and formula every time.
There are different cleaning formulas to work specifically with a particular floor type. The hard floor formula is excellent at removing sticky stains and odors from tiled floors, for example. Carpets and hard floors alike benefit from the multi-surface brush.
Another great feature is the hair strainer while cleaning out the tanks. It catches the hair collected in a filter to keep it from clogging drains, which is a nice convenient touch. What’s more, the tangle-free brush roll can pick up hair from any surface up to eight inches long without becoming entangled.
What Could've Been Better?
With an excellent mopping feature built into it, it is not recommended that you use this vacuum on carpeted areas as it can cause damage to the flooring. It is an ideal choice, however, for tiled floors.
The cleanup must also be thorough as any remaining debris in the vacuum itself can cause odors if not done correctly.
Another of the robot vacuums from iRobot, the Braava Jet 240, is a cleaning machine for mainly hard floors like wood and tile. It mops and sweeps with different cleaning modes with an innovative design to ensure all the edges of a room are reached. Indeed, a great autonomous option for hard floors.
Gets into hard-to-reach places, including under and around...
Automatically selects the correct cleaning mode based on...
Why Did We Like It?
Using robot vacuums can be a hit or miss, but this lithium-ion battery-powered machine from iRobot hardly misses. It is simple to use; simply select the cleaning pad type designed for your floor, and it will mop based on the pad type. Additionally, the Virtual Wall Mode confines it to rooms even without a physical doorway to keep it in the rooms with hard floors.
Cleaning and mopping are done with the jet spray firing in front of the robot and a vibrating pad that will gently scrub the floor underneath. To dispose of the pad when it is done, simply hold the Jet 240 over a trash can and eject the pad with the push of a button. Convenient!
Each pad has its benefits when used on different flooring and cleanup jobs. Utilizing these differences makes it versatile in dealing with hard floors.
What Could've Been Better?
Being designed as a mopping device, the Jet 240 does not pick up dirt well. Of course, there is no suction being done with this machine. It simply breaks down dirt with its vibrating pad.
Moreover, the water must be replaced when using it in rooms more extensive than it was designed for.
A bagless vacuum from Eureka, the Whirlwind is a lightweight yet highly effective vacuum for any type of flooring. A wand attached to the large dust cup will allow you to reach any surface with ease. Furthermore, included attachments are ready at your fingertips to extend your reach even further.
Innovative Multi-Surface Vacuum: Deep clean with EUREKA...
Lightweight And Easy To Maneuver: Eureka whirlwind...
Why Did We Like It?
What stands out right away when using the Whirlwind is the long reach and maneuverability. Its 16 ft. cord paired with the long wand extends this reach even further. The wand has a telescopic design which helps fold the vacuum away easily.
Attachments are already at the end of the wand and can be switched between using controls on the handle itself. Additionally, all components, such as the tube and wand, connect with a secure snap for easy access. No more losing attachments or fumbling to get them on.
Maintenance is another area with great features to save time and money. The filters are washable, and the high-capacity container is easy to clean with a bottom-opening design that drops the dust and dirt directly into the trash. What’s more, the power cord retracts at the push of a button, saving so much time and energy.
What Could've Been Better?
While the whirlwind shines in its convenience, it lacks suction power. While ideal for hard floors, it struggles to pick up dirt trapped in carpets unless it is passed over the area a certain way.
Additionally, the 16 ft. long cord may fall short in reaching certain areas of the house.
To ensure you have a vacuum that works best for your home, you should take into consideration a few points to look out for.
Maneuverability
A traditional vacuum is usually large and clunky. That is not the case with new, modern models sporting lighter materials and power in compact builds.
Modern vacuums have great features to help you maneuver them around the house. Especially with corded vacuums, it is common to unplug the vacuum to move it to another room to be cleaned. This process is overall made easier with lightweight models.
Additionally, how effectively the vacuum can reach corners and edges is a factor to consider. Many models have a narrow cleaning path despite being wide. This can leave gaps along walls and in corners when vacuuming.
As a result, be sure to have the weight of the vacuum as well as its ability to reach tight edges and corners. This can make a difference in the time and energy spent while using the vacuum.
Suction Power
When it comes to how strong a vacuum can pull dirt from a surface, Of course, the performance is dependent on multiple factors.
The thickness of the surface being vacuumed, the type of debris being pulled, and the actual power of the vacuum will affect how well dirt is cleaned. For carpets and similar thick surfaces, higher suction power is useful.
Similarly, tiled and hard floors require even more power as rotating brushes will not be able to pick up and throw the dirt into the vacuum. Thus, the effectiveness of a vacuum on a tiled floor depends solely on the vacuum’s suction power.
Power Source
There are two main types of power sources that you can choose from when it comes to your vacuum. Having a battery or corded vacuum brings its own strengths and weaknesses. However, the introduction of robot vacuums has brought a new contender when it comes to power sources.
The battery-powered vacuums have the advantage when it comes to maneuverability as they are not limited by a cord attached to a wall. On the one hand, they are usually more lightweight, and the power source is built into the design. On the other hand, they do require charging when not in use.
Using a corded vacuum is the more traditional option. They are limited in the cleaning radius around the length of their cord. One advantage they have is the ability to draw more power and, as a result, have stronger suction than battery-operated ones. What’s more, the availability of a suitable power socket in the room is a must, or it is unable to work.
Robotic vacuums are the latest advancements in vacuuming technology. They have an onboard battery, with some charging themselves when low on battery is low. However, if this autonomous charge feature is not available, it is just another battery-powered vacuum.
Vacuums For Tile Floors FAQ's
Can a vacuum cleaner damage my tile floors?
Using the wrong type of vacuum or a vacuum with abrasive brush rolls can potentially damage your tile floors. To avoid this, opt for vacuums that are specifically designed for tile floors or have adjustable brush settings to prevent scratching or scuffing.
Should I choose a corded or cordless vacuum for tile floors?
Both corded and cordless vacuums can be suitable for tile floors. Corded vacuums offer consistent power without the need for recharging, while cordless vacuums provide more maneuverability and convenience. Consider your cleaning needs and preferences to decide which type of vacuum is best for you.
Can a vacuum effectively remove pet hair from tile floors?
Yes, many vacuums designed for tile floors are also effective at removing pet hair. Look for models with strong suction power and specialized pet hair attachments or brush rolls to ensure thorough pet hair removal from your tile floors.
Can I use a steam mop instead of a vacuum on tile floors?
Steam mops can be used on tile floors to provide deep cleaning and sanitization. However, they are not a replacement for vacuums, as vacuums are more effective in removing loose debris and larger particles before using a steam mop. It’s recommended to vacuum first and then use a steam mop for a thorough clean.
Can I use any vacuum on tile floors?
While most vacuums can be used on tile floors, it’s recommended to choose a vacuum specifically designed for tile floors. These vacuums usually have features like specialized attachments, soft brush rolls, and strong suction power to effectively clean tile surfaces without causing any damage.
Conclusion
So now that you know what to look for in the best vacuum for tile flooring, choosing a model from a handpicked list of great options with different strengths and weaknesses should be easy.
Depending on how large of an area you are cleaning, your choices can vary considerably. The handheld CHV1410L from Black+Deckeris perfect for small cleanup jobs. For larger cleaning jobs, there is another cordless standing option from Hoover, the Linx BH50010.
Cordless vacuums are nice for convenience, but the stronger wired vacuums have greater suction power. Bissell's Featherweight Stick is still lightweight for being a corded vacuum. Another great cordless bagless vacuum is theShark Rocket HV302 from SharkNinja.
Hopefully, now you have a better idea of how to go about selecting a vacuum for your tile floor. Let these models clean away the mess and take care of that stress!
The Wine Enthusiast 32-bottle Dual Zone MAX wine cooler is a $499 product(price at time of publish) designed in the United States that delivers small top and large lower zones to cater to different wine needs and bottle sizes, such as:
Champagne bottles in 12-1/4 inches
Large California Red in 12-7/8 inches
Sparkling wines in 12-1/4 inches
Standard Bordeaux in 11-3/4 inches
Turley in 11-1/2 inches
Typical Pinot Noir in 11-7/8 inches
Typical Riesling in 13 inches
Additionally, this wine cooler can hold up to 32 bottles and is equipped with compressor cooling technology to ensure the wines inside are stored in unchanging, consistent temperature zones.
What I liked about this dual zone wine cooler was the molded polystyrene interior liner embedded in this digital touchscreen Wine Enthusiast wine cooler.
This material is known for its durability and helps prevent bacteria and moisture buildup.
However, I agree with some customer feedback that the Wine Enthusiast 32-bottle dual zone MAX wine cooler produces some noise contrary to its 40 DBA rating.
Yet, despite this dip from the full-glass-black-trim wine cooler, it still works well, just as it's marketed.
Capacity: 32 bottles | Shelving style: 4 - Wavy Wire, 1- Fixed, and 1- Wire Bin | Door: 2 glass panes; full glass | Temperature zone: Dual zones | Noise: 40 dBA | Installation: Free-standing | Warranty: 1 year for parts and labor; 3 years sealed system | Dimension: 33.4 inches (height), 19.5 inches (width), 16.9 inches (depth) | Other features: Electronic touch for temp. zones control; Chrome wine shelves for rust-resistant wine holders; Removable shelves for easy wine access
The dramatic blue LED lamp lighting disrupts the overall design
There's always space for wine collectors' wines with the Wine Enthusiast Classic 70 Dual Zones Wine Cellar that retails for $1,099 (price at time of publish).
First and foremost, it is undeniable that this wine cellar caters to 70 standard wine bottles, one of its characteristics collectors would love to have.
Aside from that, this dual-zone wine cellar has an adjustable thermostat that ensures stable cellar temperature zones to store wine. With stability in humidity comes the perfect pace at which chilled wines can age.
The Wine Enthusiast Classic 70 is about more than just functionality. It also shows its finesse as it offers natural wood trim details on the shelves, fitting for those who prefer a modern minimalist interior design.
However, I do not like the dramatic blue LED lighting, especially when viewed from the right and left sides, because it does not complement the overall design.
Capacity: 70 bottles | Shelving style: Rolling | Door: Triple pane glass door | Temperature zone: Dual zones | Noise: 39 dBA | Installation: Free-standing | Warranty: 1 year for parts and labor; 3 years sealed system | Dimension: 40.87 inches (height), 23.5 inches (width), 25 inches (depth) | Other features: Rolling shelves; Non-VOC natural wooden shelves; UV protection
The removable racks offer easy access to wines and create more space
The sturdy, airtight seal secures the wine away from UV light and moisture exposure
What I don't like
The compressor makes loud noises
The innovation in the Ivation 28-bottle compressor wine cooler fridge will surely put wine connoisseurs like you in a good mood for only $339.99 (price at time of publish), thanks to its fully-stacked features.
One of the features that caught my attention is the built-in fan responsible for uniform air circulation, which means stable temperature and preservation of intrinsic wine flavors.
Aside from that, the entire wine cooler is sealed with sturdy materials that prevent spoilage and untimely stoppage of natural aging, such as:
UV-resistant dual thermopane glass
Smoked door
Moreover, the removable racks are essential to all these features. Although this is not a high-technology characteristic, it holds the following benefits:
Easy access to all the stored wines
Creates larger space for bigger wine bottles
It provides a convenient way to clean racks
However, just like the previous wine fridge, it creates loud noises that can distract a peaceful home. Nevertheless, you can get a good deal from its price and features.
The digital control panel enables visual and audio alarms
The integrated handle and locking system keep the wine fridge secure
The detachable cellar lighting system makes it easier to read the labels in the dark
What I don't like
It is quite expensive
Suppose you are looking for a wine cellar that can give security and a modern design in one, regardless of the price. In that case, you can consider the EuroCave Premiere S Wine Cellar as a possible solution.
The Premiere S is armed with a digital control panel with alarms which is an efficient way to track if there are changes in the cellar temperature.
It also offers a sensitive touch button to access the said features, which makes it possess these characteristics:
Interactive
Convenient
User-friendly
Another thing I liked about this wine cellar refrigerator is that it puts security on top with the alarms and the integrated handle and locking system. It even comes with a leather material keyring and two keys.
Aside from security, you can count on the usability of the Premiere S thanks to its detachable cellar lighting system. It is a functional element you can use whenever you want to read the labels or check on the insides of your wine fridge.
However, $2,295.00 for a solid door and $2,495.00 for a glass door with black trim is quite expensive. Yet, its features speak for themselves.
Capacity: 74 bottles | Shelving style: MDS adjustable | Door: Glass | Temperature zone: Single | Noise: 38 dBA | Installation: Free-standing | Warranty: 1 year for parts and labor; 5 years sealed system | Dimension: 38" (height), 27" (width), 27-1/4" (depth) | Other features: Light timber shelves; MDS adjustable shelves; Low emission UV-protected door
The double pane glass with UV protection prevents chemical reactions with the wine
Great budget option
What I don't like
It does not have dual temp. zones
If you're the type of wine collector that likes to see the labels even without touching the bottles, the Wine Enthusiast VinoView 28-bottle Compressor wine cooler is a good catch at $399(price at time of publish).
This free-standing compact wine cooler is equipped with the VinoView design and a PVC-coated steel wire for the shelves, making it sleek, functional, and sturdy.
Moreover, its double pane glass with UV protection makes the VinoView 28-bottle wine fridge an efficient storage system that secures the wines away from ultraviolet rays that can distort the innate characteristics of sparkling, red, and other chilled wines.
It is also equally important to note that it has an adjustable thermostat that can be maneuvered from a temperature range of 39 F to 65 F to balance the humidity.
However, unlike most wine fridges from this list, the Wine Enthusiast VinoView 28-bottle does not have two temperature zones. It could have been a competent feature to make this an all-in-one fridge.
Capacity: 28 bottles | Shelving style: Sliding | Door: Two glass panes; black stainless steel door | Temperature zone: Single | Noise: 39 dBA | Installation: Free-standing | Warranty: 1 year for parts and labor; 3 years sealed system | Dimension: 32.7" (height), 17" (width), 18.9" (depth) | Other features: LED lighting; Molded polystyrene interior liner
The electromechanical temperature regulation maintains ambient temperature
The vibration-free feature protects the wine
What I don't like
The single-zone unit feature
In the long list of wine fridges, it wouldn't be right to exclude the EuroCave Artevino S Wine Cellar, which has notable features, including shelf capacity, temperature range, and others, at the cost of $2,299.
To start, it features a large shelf capacity that can accommodate 98 bottles of different sizes. Aside from that, it is paired with a low shelf profiling, making it more spacious.
It also has an electromechanical temperature regulation that is reliable for keeping the desired temperature for white, sparkling, and other chilled wines.
Yet, the EuroCave Artevino S is streamlined to cater to red wines, which explains why it focuses on a single-zone unit rather than a dual-zone wine fridge.
What I like best is that the design prevents vibrations because the latter can negatively affect the chemistry of the wines. The vibration can even halt the aging and instead proceed to spoil the wine.
Capacity: 94 bottles | Shelving style: Adjustable sliding | Door: Two glass panes; Black glass | Temperature zone: Single | Noise: 37 dBA | Installation: Free-standing | Warranty: 1 year for parts and labor; 3 years sealed system | Dimension: 38" (height), 27" (width), 27-1/4" (depth) | Other features: Spacious shelves; Cold wall cooling technology; Beechwood shelving material
The full-length glass door provides a snippet of your wines
The beech wooden shelves offer durability and visual aesthetics
The LED lighting makes it easier to view wines in the dark
What I don't like
The lack of tinted glass doors with UV protection
Any list of excellent wine fridges must include the Eurodib 168-bottle single temperature range full glass wine refrigerator for $1,589.
It has a full-length door that enables a full view of the wine you need before opening the wine fridge, making it energy efficient because of its energy conservation (electricity-wise).
With the LED lighting, the searching and reading part has become even more accessible because it illuminates the wines, unlike other wine fridges.
Also, the shelves are made of beechwood, offering a non-porous surface that provides resistance against moisture and bacteria.
However, even with its glorious visuals and the usability of the full-length glass door, I must acknowledge that this wine fridge needs a more modern tinted glass door with UV protection.
A tinted door could spell the difference when preventing light sources from entering the wine fridge to stop unnecessary disruptions in the aging process of wines.
Capacity: 168 bottles | Shelving style: Sliding | Door: Full glass with steel frame | Temperature zone: Single | Noise: N/A | Installation: Free-standing | Warranty: 1 year for parts; 3 years compressor | Dimension: 71-1/3" (height), 23-2/5" (width), 26-4/5" (depth) | Other features: 41-64 degrees Fahrenheit temperature control; 15 beechwood shelves
The advanced cooling technology keeps the taste intact
The smart digital control
What I don't like
The upper zone temperature fluctuates from time-to-time
Kalamera knows best about catering to left and right-handed wine collectors, as this model is equipped with a reversible door you can open on either side for $719.10.
A frost-free design is also incorporated to elevate the Kalamera's door game. Yet, don't fret because even if it's not tinted, the door showcases double-tempered glass for wine protection.
Aside from the reversible door, it has advanced cooling technology that keeps white, rose, sparkling, and other chilled wines in their natural aroma, crispness, and acidity.
To efficiently control everything inside the wine fridge, the Kalamera 46-bottle dual-zone wine refrigerator provides a smart digital control that is user-friendly and readily accessible.
However, I agree with other customers when they say this wine refrigerator occasionally acts up, resulting in a fluctuation in upper zone temperature.
Nevertheless, Kalamera has reliable customer service support to address issues within business hours.
Capacity: 46 bottles | Shelving style: Sliding | Door: Double-layered tempered glass; stainless steel | Temperature zone: Dual zones | Noise: N/A | Installation: Built-in and free standing | Warranty: 2-3 years (case-to-case basis) | Dimension: 33" (height), 23.4" (width), 22.4" (depth) | Other features: Blue LED cold light system; Two interior fans
Wine fridges are also called wine refrigerators, coolers, and wine cellars. All these pertain to one thing: a way of storing wine in a controlled space that has ambient temperature efficient for helping finely age wine.
There are two types of wine fridges:
Built-in wine fridge
Free-standing fridge
A built-in fridge can be embedded into your furniture(cabinetry, pantry drawer, other shelf storage) as it has front ventilation.
On the other hand, the free-standing wine fridge needs enough space to exhaust the air and energy through its side ventilation.
Why Would a Wine Enthusiast Need a Wine Fridge?
A wine enthusiast with a wine collection needs wine storage for the following reasons:
A wine fridge can keep the wine safe from moisture and heat.
A wine fridge can prevent external elements from producing chemical reactions in the wine that can affect taste and aroma.
A wine fridge can secure the collection in one place and can act as a wine display storage.
A wine fridge can help make the wine age in its standard aging time.
Benefits of a Wine Fridge/Wine Coolers
Now that you know what wine fridges are, it is time to understand the benefits of having the best wine refrigerators. These include:
A great wine fridge can keep the wine in an ideal temperature range (cool or ambient)
A dedicated wine cooler can shield the wines from UV rays, especially when tinted and with double-tempered glass.
A small wine fridge is a plug-and-go home appliance.
Factors to Consider When Choosing a Wine Refrigerator
In choosing the best wine fridges, there are certain factors to consider, such as their purpose, capacity, shelving, doors, temperature zones, noise, installation, and price.
I have listed everything you MUST assess to find the right one for your needs.
Purpose
The first thing you need to consider is the wine storage's purpose. It can be for display, keeping the wines cool for a specific time, or preserving it until it has aged to your liking.
To know what you intended a wine refrigerator for, here are the questions you need to ask yourself:
How do I want to use it?
Am I one of the serious wine collectors that need these electronics?
Where should I put it?
Moreover, remember that it differs from the typical beverage fridge with a crisper drawer for frozen foods, snacks, meats, condiments, vegetables, fruits, cheeses, and other grocery store and Delicatessen finds.
You can proceed with the other considerations only after knowing why you need a wine refrigerator rather than the usual fridge.
Tip
To differentiate it from typical refrigerators, read this article on the best refrigerators available today!
Capacity
Next in line is the capacity of your wine storage. There are wine fridges that can only accommodate around 12 bottles and others that are big enough to store more than 100 bottles of wine single-handedly.
Choosing the capacity is a matter of getting the average between how many bottles you have and how many bottles you intend to have in the future. It is better to think long-term regarding capacity because it is more cost-efficient.
If you buy a fridge that can only accommodate a few bottles but intend to expand, it will leave you with no choice but to buy another one at the same price. In turn, it will just leave you with more expenses.
Shelving
The shelving design and material are also important to consider as it dictates the durability, accessibility, and security of the wines.
Different shelve designs are on the market, such as sliding, rolling, adjustable, and removable shelves. With this, the decision on what design to choose is up to your preference.
However, a removable rack is a better option as you can quickly arrange, see, and check your wine bottles.
Moreover, the materials used are usually beechwood and stainless steel, which are durable and resistant to damage. Yet, it will depend on your overall kitchen design on whether to choose sleek stainless or aesthetic wooden shelves.
Doors
You must also consider doors, especially what they are made of, how they are designed, and how you can open them.
The best door choices are made of glass, double-paned, and designed with tints and double-tempered glass, as these characteristics can help preserve the aging of the wine.
Moreover, a bottle wine cooler can be opened from the left, right, or reversible. Again, it will depend on how you usually open a door and where you are most comfortable.
A bottle wine cooler made of a full glass that can make the insides visible is an excellent choice for those who want energy-efficient products.
It is also worth considering whether to buy a single-zone wine cooler or a dual-zone wine fridge.
For one, a single zone can only cater to a single temperature range at a time, so you must only put wines with similar temperature needs inside the fridge.
On the other hand, buying dual zone wine fridges will give you the liberty to store wines of varying temperature needs in a single place and put them under different temperature ranges.
The decision on whether you go for the single-zone wine cooler or the dual-zone one depends on the assortment and needs of your collection.
Noise
Also, consider the noise levels of each wine fridge, as it can also say a lot about the longevity and efficiency of the best wine fridge.
To give you an idea, average wine refrigerators have 35 to 45 dBA of noise. Of course, it is much better if under 35, but it can be a cause of concern when it goes over 45.
Installation
The installation is a critical factor that needs to be pre-determined because you must choose between a built-in and free-standing wine-collecting fridge.
Consider your kitchen counter space, indoor environment, and preference in choosing. On the one hand, you can squeeze a built-in bottle wine cooler into your furniture because it has front ventilation.
On the other hand, the free-standing quality wine fridge stands alone and needs ample space from other furniture and machines because its ventilation is located on the sides.
Nevertheless, if you are looking for a cheaper option, it is usually the free-standing wine cooler that comes at a lower price.
Price
Speaking of price, it is most important to consider the cost of coolers and fridges, and in getting a good grasp of the best value, always ask yourself these questions:
Is the purpose of having a wine bottle fridge achieved with this price?
Do the capacity, shelving, doors, temperature range, and noise set off the price?
Is it necessary for a free-standing or built-in fridge to cost like this?
Is it energy efficient?
If you have the answers to the questions, you can choose whether to invest high on the first buy or start small and invest big in the future.
Wine Refrigerator Related FAQs
I know you are not just here to see the wine coolers I think are the best but also to have your questions answered. So, in this section, I got the answers to some of your FAQs.
How Many Bottles Can You Fit in a Wine Fridge?
A wine fridge can hold at least 12 bottles to 168 bottles and above, depending on the design and make of the wine fridge.
How Long Should You Chill Wines in a Wine Refrigerator?
It depends on the wine you are storing, but it should be between 45 minutes and 2.5 hours on average. Here are some of the common chilling time examples:
Full red wines: 90 minutes
Light red: 45 minutes
Sparkling wines: 2 hours
White wine: 2 hours
Champagne bottles: 2.5 hours
How Long Does Wine Last in a Wine Fridge?
Unopened wines in energy-efficient coolers and fridges with the proper temperature settings can last one year to five years. For example:
White wines: 2 years
Red wines: 3 years
Champagne bottles: 4 years
Sparkling wines: 3 years
My Top Picks
I know that you want to get straight to the point, and I will give you that by sharing my top picks for the best wine fridges in this summary.
When you are included in the list of serious wine drinkers, and your primary purpose is to store 28 wine bottles while staying within your budget, this Ivation wine cooler can be your best buy for only $339.99.
The wine refrigerator cost is less but does more with its UV-protected smoked glass door, airtight seal, and removable racks that bring your wine protection and ease of access.
If you are stuck on a budget and need wine fridges that can accommodate more than five dozen bottles, then the Classic 70 Dual Zones wine cellar from the Wine Enthusiast line will knock you off your feet for just $1,099.
Aside from that, it offers visual aesthetics for your modern minimalist home with its natural wooden shelves that balance the sleek black design.
The best overall wine refrigerator comes from the Wine Enthusiast series, and this is the Wine Enthusiast 32-bottle Dual Zone MAX compressor wine cooler for $499.
For a relatively affordable price (at time of publish), you can get a 32-bottle-capacity wine beverage fridge with dual-zone temperature control.
On top of that, its shelves are made of durable materials that can withstand the test of time and the weight of your wine.
Conclusion
After all the information I've poured in this article, I am sure you're now ready to choose the best wine coolers, whether it be dual zone fridges, small ones for your kitchen counter, thermoelectric wine coolers, or others.
Remember that as wine lovers, the passion for consuming and storing wine must be paired with the right mindset to factor in purpose, capacity, shelving, doors, temperature zone, noise, installation, and price in every purchasing decision.
Get the ball rolling, and start your wine collection with your preferred wine coolers and fridges' brand!
Vegetable spiralizers are one of the best to make vegetable noodles. It's a fun and unique way to cut vegetables your guests love.
Not to mention, it's also an awesome way to sneak some vegetables into your kid's diet. You don't have to lure them with different tricks anymore.
Today, I will review some of the best spiralizers in the market. Keep reading, and let's get started!
What Are the 10 Best Spiralizers to Buy?
You'll want a spiralizer if you've always been fond of those vegetable noodles you see in infomercials.
It's one of the best kitchen gadgets that can help bring fun to the kitchen.
Quality Above All - Stronger Than Ever – Spiralizer is the...
Never Get Bored On A Keto/low Carb, Paleo, Raw, Vegan, Or...
What I like
Powerful, sharp blades: ribbon blade, peeling blade, and more.
Comes with a lifetime replacement
Dishwasher safe
Strong suction feet
What I don't like
Clean-up can be tricky
This handheld spiralizer is a must-have in the kitchen, with over 26,000 rave reviews on Amazon.
I was so excited to try it out and see what this gadget could do!
I can tell you now that it certainly didn't let me down; it comes with seven stainless steel blades designed to make noodles of various sizes from both hard and soft vegetables (ex. cucumbers, sweet potatoes, etc.).
It's as simple as suctioning the cup to the counter and cranking the handle - no fuss!
Not only does this spiralizer deliver quality results, but its convenient size and sleek ribbon blade make storage a breeze.
However, cleaning all those components is slightly tricky. All in all, this seven-blade vegetable slicer is an excellent addition for any home chef looking for top-notch performance.
Compact and cleaning is a breeze - unlike large units which...
Functionality with ease - 4 options to fulfil all of your...
What I like
Space-saving handheld spiralizer
Sharp stainless steel blade vegetable slicer
Very easy to use and dishwasher safe
Compact and portable
What I don't like
Labor intensive
If you're looking for an efficient vegetable slicer, this one is the perfect choice.
Its dual stainless steel blades will quickly and easily cut through your vegetables, leaving you with perfectly-sliced spirals.
What I love most about this item is its small size - it's ideal for those who don't have ample storage space.
Not only do you get two blades for slicing and dicing, but also a vegetable holder and removable container to store your freshly-cut veggies.
When it comes time to clean up after use, just pop the slicer into a dishwasher - no need to worry about dealing with messes!
The only downside of this device is that since there's no hand crank, all the slicing has to be done manually which can become quite tiring when prepping lots of vegetables.
Latest Design With Superior Value: Don't waste your hard...
Strongest Yet & Quality Above All: No expense was spared in...
What I like
Dishwasher safe parts
Powerful suction cup
Sharp spiralizing blades
Can make a lot of vegetable noodles
What I don't like
Hard to crank
The Brieftons vegetable spiralizer is one of the most heavy-duty hand-crank models I've seen. Spiralizing hard vegetables like sweet potatoes is a walk in the park.
At the outset, the suction feet at the bottom of this spiralizer are very reliable. It also has a suction lever to add additional counter security.
I also enjoy the interchangeable five-blades because I can cut my vegetables the way I want them to look. While they're not in use, I can store them for later use.
And speaking of storing, you'll be happy to know that taking this spiralizer apart is so easy. You put them inside your kitchen cabinets when you don't plan to use them.
One thing this spiralizer can improve on is its hand crank. I found it a bit hard to turn, especially on hard vegetables. Other than that, I love this slicer so much!
Connect to any household KitchenAid Stand Mixer power hub...
Includes 5 quick-change blades so you can be creative with...
What I like
Tried and tested reliable brand
Fast and automatic operation
Flexibility to cut a thin or thick spiral
Perfect for beginners
What I don't like
Requires a separate KitchenAid machine
KitchenAid is one of my favorite brands for kitchen gadgets. They've been around for so long no one can deny they provide outstanding quality and durability in their products.
Imagine my delight when I discovered that KitchenAid offers spiralizer attachments for their machine. I was over the moon and ecstatic to make vegetable noodles.
This five-blade vegetable spiralizer can cut vegetables faster than other hand-crank models. The machine does the cutting for you; you no longer have to strain your hands cranking!
After trying this attachment on my stand mixer, I don't feel like returning to my handheld models. This is just so convenient and hassle-free to use.
Unfortunately, if you don't have a KitchenAid stand mixer, you won't be able to use this attachment. The attachment is very limiting in that aspect.
Material: Stainless steel | Number of Blades: 5 stainless steel blades | Blade Shape: Round | Operation: Electric | Weight: 2.2 pounds
Create three different sizes of vegetable noodles in uniform...
Food holder/cap protects Hands when in use and during...
What I like
Creates even spirals
Non-slip design
Reliable and sharp OXO blades
Very easy to clean and dishwasher safe
Compact and lightweight
What I don't like
Not ideal for people with small hands
I was able to get the job done with ease because of how lightweight and compact this OXO handheld spiralizer is.
My friends were super impressed when I pulled out this cool gadget during our cook-off!
The OXO good grips 3-blade spiralizer makes it so easy to create delicious meals that are not only aesthetically pleasing but also healthy and nutritious.
With its interchangeable blade attachments, you can easily make spaghetti, fettuccine, and ribbon cuts - no more guessing which blade is which because they're color-coded for convenience.
Despite having small hands like me, I could still use the OXO good grips 3-blade spiralizer without a problem, thanks to its lightweight and compact design.
I can't say the same for all the handheld models from other brands.
Make quick work of creating uniform spirals from fruits and...
Three stainless steel blades create spaghetti cut (1/8th...
What I like
Perfect for beginners
Some parts are dishwasher safe
Stays stable on the table
Creates long noodles
What I don't like
Suction tends to get loose at times
Another amazing product from OXO is the good grips 3-blade tabletop spiralizer. The OXO good grips is just as reliable and impressive as the OXO handheld spiralizer, but maybe even more.
Personally, I prefer the tabletop version because it packs a ton of power, perfect for cutting hard vegetables. The hand crank works as expected, and it holds vegetables well.
The blade attachments are easy to put on and off the gadget. Just be sure you put it in the right direction so you can cut your sweet potatoes properly!
Once you finish the blades, you can put them away inside the onboard storage for added safety and convenience!
The only problem I experienced with the OXO good grips was its suction cup feet. It doesn't stick well on my counters, which is annoying and a serious safety hazard.
HOLDS UP TO 6 CUPS: The large bowl on the spiralizer for...
What I like
Large food holder
Very easy to clean and dishwasher safe
Easy installation
Comes with additional blades
What I don't like
Takes some time to cut hard vegetables
The Hamilton Beach electric spiralizer is a game-changer against other handheld spiralizers when cutting hard vegetables.
It has a powerful motor, a large chute, and an impressive storage container capacity.
Plus, it's easy to use and requires no hand cranking - saving you time in the kitchen.
Like other handheld spiralizers, cutting hard vegetables like butternut squash takes some time. But at least you don't need a hand crank to operate this one.
I'm so glad I got this machine; it makes prepping my meals so much faster and easier!
Material: Plastic | Number of Blades: 3 metal blades | Blade Shape: Round | Operation: Electric | Weight: 3.3 pounds
New and unique blades. Features 3 additional blades not...
What I like
Perfect for cutting all types of vegetables
Strong suction cup
Dishwasher safe parts
Includes a small brush for cleaning
What I don't like
Doesn't come with a food holder
Judging by its looks alone, the Paderno World Cuisine spiralizer looks like any other manual slicer. But playing around with this kitchen gadget proves otherwise.
There are six removable blades that come with the set: spiralizer blades, straight blade attachments, flat blade, julienne blades, and more!
Slicing my vegetables to the desired size and style is easy and perfect for different dishes. I love the angel hair blade and curly fries attachment because I can cut thin strands of vegetable noodles.
The small brush that comes with the set is also very handy. I can safely clean the blades after I use the spiralizer.
Thanks to the extra blades and cleaning brush, I would consider the Paderno World Cuisine spiralizer the complete package. I just wish it came with a food holder to complete the set.
TRANSFORM MASON JARS into a convenient spiralizer and...
HEALTHY VEGGIE NOODLES are just a twist away! Create spiral...
What I like
Can fit wide-mouth mason jars
Doesn't require a ton of storage space
Easy to clean and dishwasher safe
Durable and long-lasting
What I don't like
Small blade attachments
Sharp blade might cut your fingers
The first time I saw this spiralizer attachment, I didn't really know what to make of it. But after experimenting with it a few times, I'm now a believer!
It's the perfect tool for those who want to get creative with their salads or pasta dishes.
Plus, it fits perfectly on mason jars so you can take them around easily. Just be careful when handling the blades as they can be sharp!
Factors to Consider When Buying the Best Spiralizers
There's a golden rule I always live by when buying anything: to buy only the best product given the several factors I have in mind.
Finding the best spiralizer means going through several considerations I'd love to share. Doing this ensures you find only the best gadget to cut veggie noodles.
Versatility
Always choose a versatile vegetable spiralizer. This will help you have an easier time in the future, saving you all the headaches we both don't want to experience.
A versatile spiralizer does many functions easily, given only a single piece of equipment.
Blades
One of the most important parts of a spiralizer is its blades. The blades should be sharp enough to cut through any vegetables. You don't have to exert too much effort anymore.
Keep in mind that spiralizers also come with different blade attachments. In general, two blades are enough for basic cutting. Three or more blades are ideal if you want more power and stability.
Stability Features for Countertop Models
When choosing a countertop spiralizer, ensure it stays stable on the table. I always check how powerful the suction cups are before buying.
You wouldn't want your spiralizer falling off your table whenever you use them. Luckily, there are a lot of reliable countertop models out there that can stay in place for days.
Maintenance and Cleaning
Clean-up is probably the last thing you want to do after a tiring day, and even I'm guilty of it. This being the case, I always find a dishwasher-safe spiralizer.
I can put them inside the dishwasher to clean while I rest after several hours of cooking! Just follow the care instructions on the packaging to make the most of your product.
Ease of Use
Veggie noodles are often challenging to do, the last thing you want to deal with is battling with the spiralizer. As much as possible, your spiralizers must be easy to use!
You should be comfortable handling the gadget and feel confident cutting veggie noodles. This ensures you get the most fun out of your cooking experience possible.
Size and Storage
I don't like bulky kitchen equipment. They're hard to put away, especially if you have little storage space in the kitchen.
If this is your problem, I recommend sticking to a compact-sized spiralizer to cut your zucchini noodles. You can easily store them in your kitchen drawer right after!
Price
Finally, the most important factor of them all is price. Always set a realistic budget for yourself before buying anything.
This helps narrow your search and find the best spiralizer, given the price point you're willing to spend.
What Are the Different Types of Spiralizers?
There are different types of spiralizers out there that come with their pros and cons. Knowing what they do helps you find the best kitchen gadget to work with.
To give you a brief overview, you can choose between a manual, countertop, or electric model. I'll review each of them and why they might be for you.
Manuel/Handheld Spiralizer
You can't go wrong with a handheld spiralizer in your kitchen drawer. It easily cuts and spirals vegetables, which is what you need it for.
Handheld spiralizers come in different blade attachments, making sure there's always a manual spiralizer for you.
I love manual models because they're more compact and affordable than other models out there. Not to mention, most of them are dishwasher safe so clean up will be a breeze.
My only problem with them is that cutting hard vegetables can be challenging.
Countertop Spiralizer
I love countertop models because they're so easy to use, thanks to their hand crank. Cutting hard vegetables to make long noodles is a breeze!
Install them on your kitchen counter so they don't fall when making vegetable noodles. Use among your favorite separate blades to get the best outcome.
I also recommend checking the grip of the suction cup and whether it's effective at its job. If not, you can use third-party suction cups to help you out.
But if you don't want a permanent fixture in your kitchen, countertop models might not be for you.
Electric Spiralizer
Always go for electric models if you're looking for a powerful spiralizer. They're very easy to use; you'll hardly need to exert any effort.
The machine does the job for you; you don't have to worry about pulling the hand crank. You can create as many vegetable noodles as you want!
This is perfect for cooking large batches of food. The next time you plan a cook-off, consider having an electric spiralizer.
Fair warning, the electric models tend to be pricier than the handheld ones. They also tend to take up a lot more storage space than you might want.
How to Use Spiralizers
Watching your spiralizer create vegetable noodles seems like an easy task. You hardly need to break a sweat, which entices many people to try one now.
But believe it or not, creating vegetable noodles is more challenging than it looks. It has a learning curve, especially with the different vegetables you must handle.
Here are some useful tips to help you get the most out of your spiralizers.
Tip 1: Cut Your Vegetables
Cutting your vegetables makes your job a lot easier. This is especially true for hard fruits and vegetables, like apples and carrots.
I recommend cutting hard vegetables to make your life easier. This is one of the best pieces of advice I can give any beginner out there.
Tip 2: Apply a Small Amount of Force
Apply a small amount of force when running your vegetables in the machine. Push them slightly in the machine until you get even and long noodles.
Don't worry if you end up with uneven noodles on your first try! With enough practice, you can perfect this cool kitchen skill.
Tip 3: Always Read the Manual
As much as I'd love to wing using my vegetable slicer, but I've learned to read the manual before using the gadget.
I've encountered several mistakes before, which I could have avoided if I had read the manual. It also helps you understand the other uses you can do with the gadget.
How to Clean Spiralizers
I often feel too lazy to clean my vegetable spiralizers. However, cleaning your blades is important to make sure it remains sharp at all times.
Warning
Watch out for sharp blades to prevent any accidental cuts. You can use safety gloves to help you out.
Tip 1: Rinse or Soak the Blades
Rinsing and soaking your spiralizer blades is a good place to start. All you need to prepare is a mixture of warm soapy water, and you're all set!
Doing this helps prevent any hard vegetable build-ups that become hard and stubborn to remove.
Tip 2: Carefully Scrub the Blades
Use a brush or a sponge to remove any hardened particles on the blade and the areas around it. Just be careful of any loose blades so you don't accidentally cut yourself.
You can soak the blades first to soften any hard bits that might have gotten stuck. This is one of the best tips you do for a single attachment with multiple blades.
Tip 3: Take Your Spiralizer Apart
Some spiralizer models can be removed, meaning cleaning the gadget will be much easier. You can clean each component properly and ensure no gunks are left.
There are other models; however, that need to be taken apart. Cleaning them may be challenging, but it is possible.
FAQs Related To Spiralizers
I always get many questions about vegetable spiralizers, and I’ve decided to answer some of them here.
I’m sure you’ll be able to learn a thing or two from them, which can help you decide whether this nifty kitchen gadget is for you.
What Foods Can You Use in a Spiralizer?
The sky’s the limit regarding the type of foods and vegetables you can use in a spiralizer.
I love using this kitchen gadget to make noodles out of hard vegetables. Some vegetables include the following:
Carrots
Cucumbers
Daikon
Fennel
Potatoes
I often also use my spiralizer to shred my vegetables, especially if I’m too lazy to take out my food processor. You can use it even for small fruits and vegetables like:
Apples
Broccoli
Cabbage
Onions
Radishes
You’ll have bite-size pieces of your fruits and vegetables! This is a cool trick to incorporate some healthy food items on your kid’s plate.
Are Spiralizers Worth the Money?
Yes, spiralizers are worth the money, and they live up to their hype. It’s a kitchen must-have that can make your cooking experience more fun and much easier!
Regardless of how much you’re willing to spend, there’s a vegetable spiralizer for you. You can start making your favorite zucchini noodles in no time.
Can You Use a Food Processor to Spiralize?
Unfortunately, not all food processors can be used to spiralize. You need a spiralizer attachment to get the job done, which not all processors have.
The beauty of using food processors is they can cut vegetables faster than your handheld spiralizer.
Should You Peel Zucchini Before Spiralizing?
You don’t have to worry about peeling your zucchinis before spiralizing them. The skin is edible and packs a ton of nutrition we don’t want to waste. You won’t need an apple peeler anymore.
But at the end of the day, keeping the peel on is a matter of preference. Personally, I’d rather have them on than stress over getting the peel off.
Can You Freeze Spiralized Vegetables?
Yes, you can freeze spiralized vegetables. This is one of the best life hacks I’ve learned, which helps me with my meal prep.
Just store your vegetables in a container before leaving them inside the freezer.
A Recap of the Top Picks
I've named some of the best spiralizers in this list, and they all come highly recommended by different people. Choosing any of all the models in this list is a safe choice.
But of all those I've mentioned today, three vegetable slicers deserve one final mention: the Ontel Veggetti cutter, Fullstar vegetable slicer, and Spiralizer vegetable slicer.
Bring the fun of spiraling vegetables at home with the Ontel Veggetti cutter. You'll impress your friends with this unique cooking skill you didn't have to break a sweat to do.
You can spiral sweet potatoes, zucchini, carrots, and more! Despite being a handheld model, its ribbon blades are powerful enough for the job.
I can have angel hair and curly fries vegetable noodles any time of the day. Whipping up a healthy and tasty meal is so easy.
If you're looking for a handheld spiralizer, the Fullstar vegetable slicer is a great choice. It may not be as spectacular as other models, but it does the job.
The blades are tough and sharp enough to make noodles from butternut squash! Now that's one tough blade vegetable slicer.
Although this slicer doesn't come with interchangeable blades, I don't consider it a deal breaker.
For a manual and handheld spiralizer, this kitchen gadget is everything you need to cut and slice your favorite fruits and vegetables.
With its seven blades and reliable hand crank, you can create a mound of fresh veggies for your salad and pasta.
All this comes at a pretty affordable price point that other handheld models will have difficulty competing with.
Conclusion
With the best spiralizers, you can sneak some delicious ribbon noodles into your kids' diet. Pair it with the best mandoline in the market, and you're good to go.
You can have a mound of thin or thick noodles to serve. I hope you enjoyed this article. Let me know which of the vegetable spiralizers you want to try out.
I'd love to hear your thoughts! Feel free to share this article with your friends and family who you think will love vegetable noodles.
A blunt pencil is practically useless! And to achieve precise sharpening, all you need is an excellent electric sharpener.
Electric sharpeners are best when they are portable, durable, and perform sharpening in a fast and efficient manner. That being said, we know that it is quite a challenging task to find a good product for yourself. The market is filled with a plethora of options that you can choose from, and it can all get very confusing.
To help you, we conducted extensive research to come up with a list of the top 9 electric sharpeners out there. In the upcoming section, you will find a detailed description of all the products along with a buyer’s guide to help you with the selection procedure.
We urge you to go through the details minutely in order to select an option that will meet your requirements perfectly.
So, without any further ado, let’s dive right in!
Best Electric Pencil Sharpeners
Here is the list of the 9 best electric pencil sharpeners that you can use to quickly, conveniently, and easily sharpen pencils at home or in the office.
If you like sharpeners that come with stellar design and are also very lightweight, Bostitch Personal Electric Pencil Sharpener is an excellent option to consider. The manufacturers have designed this keeping in mind both home and office use. This product boasts a modern design with an incredible space-saving characteristic.
HHC Cutter – The hardened helical allows for 4x longer...
Powerful Motor - The days of sharpeners stalling are behind...
Why Did We Like It?
Well, the first thing to catch our eye was its compact design. It does not take up any extra space because it is designed in an exceptionally smart way. Its footprint is really small, and it will only occupy a very small portion of your workspace.
Furthermore, with this device, you do not have to worry about safety at all. It is equipped with MagnaSafe Technology, and this makes it completely tamper-proof. If the shaving tray is removed, the sharpener stops functioning. So, there is no reason for you to worry that the area might get dirty.
Moreover, what good is a sharpener if it does not offer precision? This option comes with an HHC cutter that is very durable and enhances the precision by four times. It has a powerful motor that makes constant, stall-free operations possible. Your pencil tip will be at its sharpest every time you use this!
What Could've Been Better?
Although this product performs quite well, there's one thing that could have been better. The manufacturers have not really paid much attention to packaging. When it arrived, we found the box that it came in was a little flimsy.
Pros
Brilliant design
Very safe to use
Delivers highly precise results
Easy to clean
Cons
Packaging is not up to the mark
Power Source: Corded Electric | Blade: Helical | Pencil Diameter: N/A | Sharpening Speed: N/A | Auto-Stop Feature: No
X-ACTO School Pro Electric Pencil Sharpener is made keeping in mind the needs of the students. With this, pupils can spend more time on their coursework and less time sharpening. Your wooden pencils will get one of the finest and most precise tips when you decide on using this item.
Flyaway cutter prevents oversharpening by stopping the...
Why Did We Like It?
We have to say that even though it has 'school' in its name, its use is not just restricted to that. It is actually a heavy-duty device that can equally fulfill sharpening needs in your workspace and home too.
The material that is used to make it is highly durable and it features rugged construction. This makes it highly resistant to regular wear and tear. Moreover, it has a Smart Sharpening Technology that helps it deliver better performance.
Furthermore, what really caught our attention was the versatility that this sharpener offers. It stands apart from its contemporaries by offering six variations in size. Because of this adjustable feature, you can sharpen pencils of various sizes using this device.
Additionally, it has a helical steel blade that cuts with an equal amount of precision on all sides of the pencil. Another thing worth mentioning is the auto-reset feature that prevents the device from getting overheated and protects it from probable damage.
What Could've Been Better?
There's hardly any complaint we have with this product. However, after using it for a while, we found that its shaving tray is not very efficient. If not installed properly, you might face a problem of shavings flying from the corner of the container.
Pros
Can perform heavy-duty sharpening
Highly versatile
Very durable
Safety features included
Cons
Shaving tray is not very efficient
Power Source: Electric | Blade: N/A | Pencil Diameter: Fits Most Woodcase Pencil Size | Sharpening Speed: N/A | Auto-Stop Feature: Yes
We cannot compile our list of the best electric pencil shavers without mentioning JARLINK Electric Pencil Sharpener. It is one of the most liked and popular options among students and office workers. With one of the most outstanding designs, it has made sharpening as easy as a breeze!
Fast Sharpen: With a more powerful motor, this electric...
Auto Stop & Save Pencils: The colored pencil sharpener works...
Why Did We Like It?
What stands out about this item is that it does not require you to do much work. It is fully automated, and the moment you plug your pencil in the device, it gets automatically sharpened. It stops when it detects that the pencil is sharpened or when the lid is opened.
Moreover, it is extremely easy to power this device. All you have to do is to plug it into an electric socket or simply put 4AA batteries. Apart from that, you can easily opt for a USB cord or a power bank to get this device charged.
Furthermore, it has a big capacity bin where all the pencil shaving gets dropped. As a result, cleaning becomes super simple as the flyaways are reduced to the minimum. All you have to do is to clear the tray once it fills up to the brim.
Additionally, not only does it sharpen lead and charcoal pencils, but you can also use it on your colored pencils.
What Could've Been Better?
There is no doubt that this item delivers excellent performance. However, it needs to be mentioned that it comes with a sharpening port of a single size. If you are thinking of using it on pencils of a wide range of sizes, this item might not be very helpful.
Pros
Easy to power
Very easy to clean
Lightweight
Efficient helical motor
Cons
Single-size sharpening port
Power Source: Corded-Electric/Battery-Operated | Blade: Helical | Pencil Diameter: No.2/6mm to 8mm | Sharpening Speed: 5 to 10 Seconds | Auto-Stop Feature: Yes
Next up on our list, we have X-ACTO Heavy Duty Electric Pencil Sharpener. This is best known for the dual brilliance it offers; smart technology and a beautiful design to suit your modern home. This item is built to enhance your home décor and, at the same time, provide the maximum amount of efficiency.
Stylish electric pencil sharpener ideal for home or office
Classic design fits with most decor
Why Did We Like It?
This item comes with a helical cutter that lasts 16x longer than most of its contemporaries. So, this item is a lot more durable and provides more precise results as compared to its competitors.
And this highly efficient blade is supplemented by a very powerful motor, which honestly, according to us, is the cherry on the cake.
Additionally, you won't have your neighbors or classmates complain about the noise with this item. It is constructed of heavy-duty metal and hardly makes any noise. As a result, you can get the job done in complete peace without having any noise disrupting your concentration.
Moreover, when it comes to hi-tech features, this item aces it. The in-built Pencil Saver technology detects when a pencil is plugged in for too long and prevents the problem of over-sharpening.
Also, in case the device gets too heated up, the auto-reset feature immediately shuts off the device to prevent any form of damage.
What Could've Been Better?
Despite the brilliant performance it delivers, we have to say that this item is not a good bet for everyone. It is quite delicate, and you need to maintain it well to ensure that it runs for a long time. This item is not very suitable to be used by small kids.
Pros
Prevents damage from overheating
High-performance
Does not make any noise
Prevents over-sharpening
Cons
Item is delicate
Power Source: Corded Electric | Blade: Helical | Pencil Diameter: N/A | Sharpening Speed: N/A | Auto-Stop Feature: Yes
For the ones who are looking for an option that offers excellent quality, AFMAT Electric Heavy Duty Classroom Pencil Sharpener is the perfect bet. It comes with a very strong blade that is suitable not just for lead pencils but also for colored pencils. To know more about it, read on.
Sharpen 10000 Times Without Wearing out: This heavy duty...
UL Listed Electric Pencil Sharpener: Our classroom pencil...
Why Did We Like It?
If you are a teacher or a working professional who needs pencils sharpened regularly, this heavy-duty sharpener will make your life easier. It can easily sharpen both normal lead pencils and colored pencils to perfect precision in 3-5 seconds.
Furthermore, what makes this product stand out from other helical blade sharpeners is that it is UL listed and will not face any trouble even after sharpening more than 200 pencils one after the other. The blade and the motor both are incredibly efficient and durable. The blade can sharpen pencils more than 6,000 times.
Additionally, it comes with 2 major safety features that ensure that the item does not malfunction. In case you have the shaving box removed, this item will not operate and thereby prevent unnecessary mess.
And if by any chance something gets stuck in the machine, it will immediately stop to prevent the problem of overheating.
What Could've Been Better?
It is true that high functionality, speed, and noteworthy efficiency is what makes this item commercial grade. However, this is not exactly the best when it comes to packaging. The boxes are a little too light, and we were concerned whether the product might have been damaged on arrival.
Pros
Can sharpen a variety of pencils
Highly effective blade
Safety features included
Does not overheat
Cons
Inferior packaging
Power Source: Corded Electric | Blade: Helical | Pencil Diameter: No.2/6mm to 8mm | Sharpening Speed: 3 to 5 Seconds | Auto-Stop Feature: Yes
POWERME Electric Pencil Sharpener - Pencil Sharpener is one of the best-looking smart sharpeners that are out there. It is made of high-quality stainless steel and will easily sharpen more than 1000 times without getting worn out. Once you test this product, you will agree with us that it is designed to achieve perfection.
The Perfect Choice! - Whether you are an artist, teacher,...
Guaranteed to Last - Crafted from high-quality materials,...
Why Did We Like It?
Whether you are an artist, a student, or a businessman, you will like this item for its design and the high-quality material that it is made of. You can use it for commercial purposes and also in classes or offices. It comes with a table mount that fits perfectly on all sizes of desks.
Furthermore, this item is highly durable, and if you manage to use it with proper care, it can deliver more than 3000 rounds of sharpening. Because of the ultra-durable and efficient helical blade, the sharpening is extremely precise and gets done in less than 3 seconds.
And, when we said it is designed to achieve perfection, we were not exaggerating! Its spiral drill design always helps ensure that the tip of your pencil is pointed, and the auto-jam release feature prevents your pencil from ever getting stuck.
Moreover, this item is very lightweight, and you will find no difficulty in carrying it around.
What Could've Been Better?
There are hardly any complaints that we have with this incredibly well-designed product. However, we have to say that it would have been better if it came with multiple sharpening ports to sharpen a variety of pencils. This item supports lead and colored pencils only.
When compiling a list like this, there's no way we could have missed Bostitch QuietSharp Executive Electric Pencil Sharpener. It provides 70% higher speed than most of its contemporaries and also lasts 10% longer than regular sharpeners. To know more about this highly efficient sharpening tool, read on!
The first thing that we noticed is that this product has mastered the art of precision. This durable cutter delivers a very precise and clean pencil tip. The powerful motor that it comes with enables constant and stall-free functioning to provide you with a clean sharpened pencil, every time you use it.
Furthermore, this item is very smart. Whenever a pencil is plugged in, it only sharpens it to the point that it is necessary. It never sharpens more than needed, thereby extending pencil life.
Once the pencil is totally sharp, the sharpener retracts without you having to take the pencil out of it. So, you do not need to be constantly mindful while using this item.
Moreover, this provides a completely hassle-free service. In case the shaving tray is not in its place, the MagnaSafe Technology completely stops all forms of operation till the tray is put back in its place. You can also keep the tray away if you have small children in the house.
What Could've Been Better?
To be honest, this product has performed brilliantly. However, we have one complaint and that is the noise. If you are doing a job that demands complete concentration, this noise might completely distract you. To avoid this, we suggest that you keep your pencil pairs sharpened before beginning to work.
Pros
Provides precise pencil tips
It does not over sharpen
Very clean
Easy to use
Cons
Make noise
Power Source: Corded Electric | Blade: Helical | Pencil Diameter: No.2/6mm to 8mm | Sharpening Speed: N/A | Auto-Stop Feature: Yes
Be it your classroom, home, artist's studio, or office, Riyo Riyo Electric Pencil Sharpener Heavy-duty Helical Blade is perfect for all. The sharpening port is broad enough to insert the pencil without fearing that you might get hurt. Moreover, the blade and motor ensure that the efficiency of this device is always top-notch.
[Heavy Duty Steel Blade] 360°fast sharpener and powerful...
Why Did We Like It?
This device is popular for being very smart with its mechanism as it prevents your pencils from incurring any form of damage while sharpening. It takes around 3-5 seconds to sharpen the pencils and prevents problems like over-sharpening and broken tips.
Additionally, the heavy-duty blade requires a special mention. It is made of steel and can sharpen your pencil more than 3,000 times.
Also, it offers versatility in terms of the amount of sharpening that you prefer. You can use this device to select a sharp, medium, or blunt level of sharpening for your pencils.
Moreover, this item comes with a very compact storage box. It is quite handy, and you can use it to store things like paper clips, staples, erasers, and so on. It is ideal for keeping your stationery organized and your desk clean.
Also, it is very easy to clean the product. Just twist open the cover and insert a cleaning brush to remove pencil dust and shavings.
What Could've Been Better?
Honestly, we did not face many hindrances while using this item. However, we did face a little difficulty while setting it up. The user manual is not very detailed, and you might face some hardships before you can start using it. We recommend that you look up some tutorial videos on the internet, and it would become quite easy.
Pros
Does not damage pencils
Highly efficient blades
Additional storage box
Very easy to clean
Cons
User instruction is not very clear
Power Source: Battery-Powered | Blade: Helical | Pencil Diameter: No.2/6mm to 8mm | Sharpening Speed: 3 to 5 Seconds | Auto-Stop Feature: Yes
Well, if you are one who enjoys the benefit of having a choice, Aogwat Electric Pencil Sharpeners is the perfect bet for you. With this option, you can choose the modes when sharpening pencils. Also, it is quite efficient in the way it shapes the tip of your pencil to a desired precision.
It is extremely easy to get this item charged, and you can start using it without much fuss. To use it, you will need to get your hands on 2AA batteries, and that's all. It does not support direct charging or USB charging.
This might seem like a disadvantage at first, but it is actually a quite praiseworthy safety control for kids.
Additionally, this item offers you the chance to use two modes when sharpening: the automatic and manual modes.
Moreover, the blade requires a special mention. The stainless steel blade, along with a robust motor, helps to shape your pencil tip to perfection. This enables you to produce the finest pencil works.
To top it all, what is quite unique is that the blade can be easily replaced. By twisting the security lock and taking the blade out, you can install a new blade every time the old one gets worn out. This way, you do not have to keep replacing the entire sharpener.
What Could've Been Better?
One issue that we faced while using this item was that the blade gets unscrewed quite easily. It takes some time to figure out how to align the blade with the base of this device. Once you figure that out, it is easy as a breeze.
Pros
Very easy to charge
Has two modes of operating
Efficient motor
Blade is replaceable
Cons
The blade gets unscrewed
Power Source: Battery-Powered | Blade: Flat | Pencil Diameter: No.2/6mm to 8mm | Sharpening Speed: 3 to 5 Seconds | Auto-Stop Feature: No
Buying Guide For The Best Electric Pencil Sharpener
After going through this thorough and detailed list, we hope you now have a better idea about how to select the best electric pencil sharpener. Look for ones that are portable, and it won't matter if you are a student, an artist, or a working professional. It will take care of all your pencil sharpening needs.
However, until now, we have only discussed the products in great depth and in order to make an informed choice, there are a few more things that you have to take into account. Besides the usual features that the sharpeners offer, there are a few more factors that need to be taken into consideration.
In this section, we will be discussing some of those factors. So, without any more delay, let's check them out.
Aesthetic
Since the electric sharpeners are mostly kept in open display, you can always go for one that comes with good design elements. If you are an artist who constantly uses a sharpener, it's better to go for one that looks good, because you will see a lot of it.
From the above-mentioned list, you can find quite a few options that boast good design and, in no time, will enhance the beauty of your workspace. This will improve your mood and help you become more productive.
Type Of Pencil
We always recommend that our users identify their needs before choosing a product. And this time, it is no exception. As students or working professionals, you will have a need to sharpen different kinds of pencils.
What you need to keep in mind is that not every electric sharpener can sharpen all types of pencils. Some of them are hexagonal, some round, and a few are also triangular in shape. Also, the lead type acts as a determining factor.
So, we recommend that you read the label carefully before buying to ensure that you do not end up spending on something that would be of no use.
Speed
Depending on the purpose that you are using the sharpener for, you should choose an option. If you are on the go and buying a product that will be continuously used for work, it is better to go for one that can get the job done fast.
However, how fast a device can get pencils sharpened is determined by the motor and the blade that is installed in it. An easier way to understand how fast an option operates is to read the labels. All details regarding the speed, motor, and blades are clearly stated in the labels to make it easy for the users.
Blade Replacement
If you have used sharpeners before, you would know that the blades have to be replaced after prolonged use. And the electric ones are no different.
However, replacing the blades is more comfortable in some units than in others. So, before you decide on going for an option, see if they offer a replacement blade in the kit. Or, if there is no such thing available in the kit, do a little bit of market research to know if replacements are available.
In case there are no blade replacements available for a particular product, go for one that is cheap. In that case, when the blade gets worn out, it would not burn a hole in your pocket to buy a new device that has a brand new blade.
Electric Pencil Sharpeners FAQs
Why should I opt for an electric pencil sharpener over a manual one?
Electric pencil sharpeners offer greater precision and a quicker, more uniform sharpening experience compared to manual sharpeners. They also tend to reduce the risk of breakage of pencil tips.
Are electric pencil sharpeners safe for children to use?
Safety varies from model to model. Some electric pencil sharpeners have an auto-stop feature when the shavings reservoir is removed, or they may not operate unless a pencil is inserted. These features make them safe for children, but supervision is always recommended.
How much power does an electric pencil sharpener consume?
Power consumption varies from model to model. Battery-powered and USB models generally use less power than corded models. If efficiency is a concern, look for models with an energy-saving feature.
How sharp can electric pencil sharpeners make my pencils?
This often depends on the make and model of the sharpener. Most electric sharpeners can consistently achieve a fine point, but some models may feature different settings for varying degrees of sharpness.
How frequently should I clean my electric pencil sharpener?
The frequency of cleaning depends largely on usage. However, as a general rule, empty the shavings reservoir once it becomes about 75% full to prevent any obstruction or damage to the blades.
Conclusion
With that, we have reached the end of this fun and informative guide that we curated for you. We hope that it has given you as much pleasure as we had while testing each of the recommendations.
Combining all the information about the top 9 products and the buyer's guide, we hope that you can make an informed choice.
While traditionally, carpenter levels were the go-to products for professionals, they soon realized that these do not fit into small spaces.
You would not want to be stuck with a 2-feet level, which then gets difficult to work with. And that is where torpedo levels come in. These are smaller versions that can be used by DIY hobbyists and professionals alike. The compact size makes them easier to carry around from one place to another.
Having said this, there are multiple types available in the market, and it might become challenging to choose one. So, we conducted an in-depth study and curated a list of the top 15 torpedo levels in the market today. We have listed the pros and cons for each and have provided a buyer’s guide at the end.
So, what are you waiting for? Grab a cup of coffee and start reading now!
Best Torpedo Levels Reviewed
So, whether you're a homeowner, a carpenter, or a professional tradesperson, we've got you covered. Without further ado, here's the list of the 15 best Torpedo Levels that will help you achieve perfect alignment and ensure your projects are on the level.
One of our top suggestions for brilliant performance is the Craftsman Torpedo Level (CMHT82390). It is made to be very sturdy and will not break even if you drop it. We were thrilled with the peace of mind that this gave us.
ACCURACY: Magnified center block vial for durability and...
DURABILITY: Extruded aluminum body for strength and...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this level has a strong body made of extruded aluminum. It provides more strength while being light on the other hand. The total weight is 3.91 ounces, and you can work with it for long hours without facing any kind of hand fatigue.
The aluminum body is accompanied by over-molded rubber end caps. These will not only prevent the body from absorbing shocks in case it falls but will also ensure that it creates no marks on the surface.
Plus, it comes with 3 vials which provide maximum accuracy. You can rest assured that all your measurements will be accurate. The center vial is very well placed for maximum user convenience.
What’s more, this is backed by a lifetime warranty, and you can contact customer service in case of any problem.
What Could've Been Better?
The only downside to this product is that it does not come with a magnet. This means you cannot use it for hands-free applications. Now, if you were going to work on walls, this would not be a problem. But it might be an issue if you are into steel construction work.
Pros
Made of strong aluminum
Molded ends for protection
Vial is placed in the center for better visibility
Backed by a lifetime warranty
Cons
No magnets
Length: 9" | # of Vials: 3 | Vial Type: Bubble | Magnetized Base: No | Additional Features: Durable construction, shock-absorbing end caps
Are you looking for a product for professional work? The Swanson TL043M is the perfect option for plumbing and electrical professionals who need to measure and work on construction sites. This comes equipped with great features and is made for heavy-duty use. Read on to know more about its bells and whistles.
POWERFUL MAGNET STRENGTH: The 4 Strong Neodymium Magnets are...
DURABLE MATERIAL: Solid billet aluminum construction makes...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this product comes with lights which will help you work in the dark. There is a battery compartment, and you will need 2 AAA batteries to switch the light on.
Plus, this is equipped with 4 neodymium magnets which are very sturdy and will help professionals with hands-free use. These are considered to be one of the strongest magnets in the world, and we were very happy with this feature. You can place it correctly on any steel surface, and it will stick on.
Coming to its body, this one is made of aluminum alloy, which is anodized to ensure that it lasts longer. The edges are cut with precision, and you will have a sturdy product to work with. It weighs 9.1 ounces and will fit into most toolboxes easily.
What Could've Been Better?
While the product in itself functions well, we would have preferred if the on/off button was placed better. It keeps switching on when in the pocket or in the tool kit. You will have to keep it separate to prevent this from happening. The brand should have given a little more thought to this.
Up next is another product with extremely strong magnets. The Klein Tools 935AB4V Level is known for its brilliant quality and will ensure complete precision and accuracy. It can be used by professionals and hobbyists alike because of its versatile nature.
PATENTED MAGNET TRACK: Level features a patented magnet...
THUMB SCREW ATTACHMENT: Thumb screw allows for easy...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this comes with a patented magnetic track that will prevent magnets from falling off. Very powerful rare magnets have been used to make this, and the track ensures that they stay in place when not in use.
Secondly, this has a thumbscrew that will allow you to attach it to a conduit. This helps in measuring angles when you are bending.
Adding to this is the strong billet aluminum body, which is colored orange. This ensures better visibility, and you can also easily spot the tool among many others.
Lastly, we will have to mention the easy readability and vials, which are highly visible. There are 4 of them placed at 4 angles including, levels, 30, 45, and 90 degrees.
What Could've Been Better?
We found this to be one of the most expensive products on this list. Yes, it offers a lot of conveniences, but if you are on a budget, you might not be able to afford it. Having said that. If you can go over your budget, then this will be a great choice to make.
If you are into a lot of woodwork that needs accurate drilling, the Winnsty Torpedo Level will help you out. It is short and works perfectly for tight and hard-to-reach spots. We loved the ease of use that it offered, and we were able to use it for attaching window trims and bookshelves around the house easily.
3 Acrylic Vials - plumb, level, and 45 degree provide the...
Powerful magnetic strip hold firmly to iron and steel...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this level comes with 3 distinct vials placed beside each other. These include level, plumb, and 45 degrees, and you can use them for various purposes around the job site.
Moreover, the reading window is clearly visible, and you can read from the top, even in tight areas. It projects vertical or horizontal lines, dots, and crosshairs which will guide you while working. We were able to hang cabinets, stick tiles, and photo frames easily on the wall, and they were all perfectly aligned.
Moving on, levels should have a sturdy body as it will be prone to rough use. This one has a plastic shell that can take high impacts without breaking down. The body is lightweight, and you can work with it for long hours.
What Could've Been Better?
The one point that disappointed us was the packaging quality of this product when it arrived. It was placed loosely in an envelope and shipped over. Although ours worked fine, it could easily have been affected by shocks received during the shipping process. We hope the brand looks into this.
Pros
Made of durable plastic
3 acrylic vials
Magnetic strip for a firm hold
Equipped with a V-groove
Cons
Inefficient packaging
Length: 6" | # of Vials: 3 | Vial Type: Bubble | Magnetized Base: Yes | Additional Features: Magnetic base, sturdy construction
Are you looking to level conduits and pipes? Then the Kapro 227-08 Toolbox Level will prove to be a brilliant choice. It is extremely versatile and comes with a magnetic V-shaped groove. You can work on all sorts of DIY projects with this in your toolbox.
ADJUSTABLE - The Kapro 227 Toolbox Level features 3...
ACCURATE - Our Toolbox Level features three easy to read...
Why Did We Like It?
This is a 9-inch long level that is equipped with one plumb, level, and an incline vial. This will help you in determining both vertical and horizontal surfaces along with inclined ones. Also, the vials are made of injection-molded acrylic, which protects them from tampering and damage.
Next, we will talk about the sturdy body, which is made of molded plastic. Molded plastic is light, and the total weight of the item is 3.9 ounces. You will find rubber end caps which are provided for both corners. This prevents shocks from being absorbed by the body.
Plus, it is known to be lightweight and compact. Although this is longer than most of its peers, it will fit into most toolboxes easily. You can check the size of your toolbox and compare it with this tool before purchasing.
What Could've Been Better?
This is another expensive product that might be a little heavy on your pockets. But you will be getting what you paid for, and this is going to work very well. So, if you have the liberty of going above your budget, then we will recommend getting this.
Up next is a brilliant product that will help you with many jobs around the house. The DOWELL Box Torpedo Level can be used for home furnishing and decoration, and it offers stellar performance. You will love the user-friendly design and the accuracy with which it works.
3 different bubbles for leveling,level and 45 degrees,90...
Strong holding magnetic edge can be attached to any iron for...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this has 3 different bubbles or vials, which include levels, 45, and 90 degrees. It will enable you to work horizontally and vertically.
Plus, we loved the magnetic edge, which is present at the back of this device. You can use it to attach to any steel surface. This will ensure that you can use both your hands while working while this sticks onto the metal surface.
Coming to the body is made of aluminum and is extremely sturdy. There is a top opening that will allow you to view while measuring. We were very happy with the accuracy and durability of this option.
Moreover, this comes with a hanger hole on top that will ensure you can hang it from anywhere.
What Could've Been Better?
We found that there were a number of bubbles forming in the vial, and it was extremely difficult to bring it down to a single bubble. This made it a time-consuming process, and the entire job was prolonged because of this.
Pros
Made of aluminum and stainless steel
Comes with a hanger hole
3 clearly visible vials
Compact and light
Cons
Bubbles form in a vial
Length: 9" | # of Vials: 3 | Vial Type: Bubble | Magnetized Base: No | Additional Features: Lightweight design, durable construction
Now that we are reaching the middle of the list, it is time to introduce the Swanson Tool Co TBL001M. This is going to be an excellent addition to your tool kit and will ensure that you can measure from any angle. Packed with great features, you will not be disappointed with this easy-to-view option.
HEAVY DUTY - Durable extruded aluminum frame provides a...
MAGNETIC - Full-length, heavy duty magnetic strip provides...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this has an aluminum frame that is strong and durable. This protects the vials and will prevent damage in case it falls out of your hands. There is a full-length magnetic strip just below, which provides more strength and sturdiness. You can measure by letting the level stick to steel and metal surfaces. We loved the hands-free operation that this allowed.
Moving on, there are multi-pitch white vials that will help you read from level to ½ -inch with increments measuring ⅛ -inch. The vials are white in color and can be easily viewed from all angles. Light reflects off the vials providing you with better visibility.
Plus, this is equipped with a V-groove design that will allow you to use it with conduits and pipes. Overall, we had a great time using this, and it made our job way easier.
What Could've Been Better?
Although we found no faults with the product in itself, this one arrived with scratches on the body. This probably happened due to inefficient packaging, and the brand should look into it. There was a tiny scratch over one of the vials, and that made it difficult to read.
Pros
Full-length magnetic strip
V-grooved design for working with pipes
Easy to view vials
2 top-read windows
Cons
Arrived with scratches
Length: 12" | # of Vials: 4 | Vial Type: Bubble | Magnetized Base: No | Additional Features: Compact size, aluminum construction
We were looking to replace our old level when we came across this. The Stabila 25100 Magnetic Level is a heavy-duty option that will assure you great accuracy. We were able to get the right readings every time, and all our frames were positioned accurately.
This sports a 10-inch die-cast frame which is made of metal. There are 2 acrylic vials placed in the center, including one vertical and another horizontal. We were very impressed with the vials as they were non-fogging and made of unbreakable material.
You will get crystal-clear visibility at all times, and the surface is resistant to scratches. This ensures that the product will last long. It is also compact and durable and will easily fit into your toolbox.
Plus, it has a certified level accuracy of 0.029 degrees when you are reading from the top. Accompanying this is a lifetime limited warranty on the entire item. In case anything malfunctions, you can immediately contact customer care for help.
What Could've Been Better?
Although the 2 magnets present are strong, they are small and placed near the center. We would have preferred if there were more pieces of the magnet as that would ensure that it sticks to surfaces easily. We were constantly worried that this one would fall off when attached to a smaller piece.
The next option in this list comes with excellent features that make it perfect for use by professionals on construction sites. The Empire Level EM81.9G is a trusted product and is popular among professionals. It ensures excellent visibility and makes the work process easier.
OVERHEAD VIEWING SLOT built into the top of this level lets...
MAGNETIC EDGE lets you mount this on metal or on piping,...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, the Empire torpedo level comes with a magnetic edge that will allow you to mount the product on pipes and metal. This will ensure hands-free operation; you can work with other tools while it is attached to the surface.
Next, it has a pipe groove that is present on the edges of the level, and this will allow you to slide it easily. You can slide it above or below the piping to get accurate measurements.
Plus, the vials are extremely beneficial; there are 3 of them, including level, plumb, and a 45-degree variant. They are placed on top with enough space between them. To make them more visible, all of them are surrounded with white color. This provides maximum visibility, and you can work in peace.
Furthermore, it is made of plastic; now, this may not be as strong as an aluminum body, but it makes it light and easy to carry.
What Could've Been Better?
Because the body is made of plastic, you will have to be careful while using it. A bad fall could lead to numerous scratches on the surface, which looks bad and can hamper accuracy. So, keep it away from kids and store it in a separate box if possible.
Do you need to work on a number of vertical surfaces? The WORKPRO Torpedo Level comes with a vertical site view which will allow maximum readability from different angles. This will ensure that you can see the vials from the front, top, back, and other angles. Read on to know more about its features.
Easy-to-read high-visibility bubbles at 4 angles: level, 90,...
Verti.site view enables easy readability from multiple...
Why Did We Like It?
This is equipped with highly visible bubbles too, and there are 4 of them placed at different angles. This includes level, 30,45, and 90-degree angles, and hence you can use it on all kinds of surfaces.
Coming to its body, this has a strong aluminum frame which is accompanied by anodized grit blasting. We were very happy with the sturdiness, and this product is known to be very durable because of the materials used.
Moving on, this has a thumbscrew that will let you connect the device to pipes and conduits in order to measure the angle when you are bending down.
Lastly, this has some strong magnets attached that will provide you with superior holding capacity. It will securely hold onto any metal surface while you work with both hands.
What Could've Been Better?
The issue with this product is that it cannot be used in narrow and tight spaces. This is because the magnets are bulky and take up a lot of space. This makes it difficult to fit into small spaces. But for other work, this will provide you with accurate measurements. Make a note of your needs before purchasing.
If you were looking for a high-impact frame that would ensure that the product stays protected even with prolonged rough use, the Johnson Level & Tool 7500M is perfect. It is made for job sites and construction sites where professionals would need to use this for long hours.
RUBBER EDGE LEVEL: The level features a rubber magnetic...
QUALITY CONSTRUCTION: The magnetic level has a high-impact...
Why Did We Like It?
This is a small yet very efficient level that will work amazingly well for small jobs. With a length of 9 inches, fitting it into a toolbox will not be an issue.
Plus, it comes with a magnetic edge that will help you attach it to steel surfaces. This has worked perfectly for us when working on sites with steel walls. There are 3 vials in the center that will guide you in making the correct measurement.
Moreover, this product has a thick plastic molded body that is not prone to corrosion and is non-conductive. Although plastic will not be as strong as aluminum, it is capable of preventing damage in case it falls.
Lastly, this product is backed by a 1-year warranty in case of defects or workmanship errors. The company will get the product replaced if necessary.
What Could've Been Better?
Many customers complain that the tag is tough to remove, and well, it is true. We took a lot of time to do that and ultimately had to use a hacksaw for the purpose. However, other than this, there are no significant drawbacks, and you should have a smooth experience.
Do you want vials that are visible from a distance? Then the Skil Level LV941801 is going to be an incredible choice as it comes with blue vials that are very visible. It will ensure that you can see them even while working because of the vibrant blue color.
High-accuracy blue vials – the vials are easy to see,...
Read from any perspective – the digital LCD screen is...
Why Did We Like It?
This is indeed one of those levels which will always provide you with excellent visibility. We have already spoken about the vials, but that is not all. This one comes with a digital LCD screen that is backlit. You can read it from any angle, and it is visible from a distance.
Plus, there are arrows and audible tones which will guide you through the entire process. Then you can freeze the value of any angle. This will enable you to compare it with another angle, all thanks to the hold mode. It boasts of an internal memory and can hold up to 10 values which you can later refer back to.
To work with this, you will need 2 AAA batteries which are readily available in the market. This company provides a set with the pack already and you don't have to purchase new ones in the beginning.
What Could've Been Better?
The only issue here is that the vials would not catch your eye. The bubble becomes very difficult to see and locate, and you will mostly have to follow the digital reading. Since the screen is backlit, the vials could also have been lighted up for enhanced visibility.
Pros
Digital LCD screen
2 AAA batteries provided
Comes with internal memory
Known to be durable
Cons
Vials are difficult to see
Length: 12" | # of Vials: 2 | Vial Type: Bubble, Digital | Magnetized Base: No | Additional Features: Lightweight design, V-groove for pipe leveling
Do you want a device that is known for its durability? The Milwaukee 4932459097 Torpedo Level will offer you just that with a compact design and a sturdy body. You can keep it anywhere easily, and it will meet all your measuring requirements too.
Reinforced acrylic vials offer durability and maximum...
Weld Clearance, esily level over weld joints in pipes and...
Why Did We Like It?
This is one of the slimmest products currently available in the market. It comes with a tapered design and can be easily kept in pouches and pockets. You do not need a large toolbox to carry this around. It only weighs 4.9 ounces and hence will not be a bulky product.
Plus, the laser-etched rule edge is extremely beneficial and will help you measure quickly and accurately.
Next, this is equipped with a V-groove design which makes it perfect for pipes and conduits. This will let you level over weld joints for non-ferrous pipes easily and will ensure better stability. .
Lastly, the vials are made of acrylic and are known to be very durable. They offer maximum readability, and you can view them from all angles.
What Could've Been Better?
Now while it can easily fit into pockets, remember that this has very sharp corners. So, ensure that the material is thick before sliding it in. Otherwise, the edges can easily tear away pockets and rip jeans if you are keeping them in them.
If you are looking for easy reading, then the Calculated Industries 7210 AccuMASTER PRO is going to be a brilliant option. It comes with a display that can be inverted in case you are using the level upside down. Read on to know more about the other incredible features that it has.
LARGE, BRIGHT GREEN LED display with .475” digits for...
Why Did We Like It?
This one comes with strong magnets attached to the base. It is made of solid aluminum and, along with the magnets, forms a very sturdy and beneficial device. The base is steady and is also equipped with a V-groove design. This provides steadiness when working with pipes and conduits.
What’s more, you can directly take out the product from the box and begin using it. Yes, it comes with a detailed guide and 2 AAA batteries inside the pack. You will also get a tough case that will protect it in construction sites. The brand had surely thought it through, and this was very impressive.
Plus, it works as a digital level and an electronic inclinometer or a protractor. This will let you measure the angles between different surfaces. You can then see the measurements on the large green LED display.
What Could've Been Better?
You can work with it efficiently in the case of horizontal surfaces, but if you are considering vertical planes, then this might not work out. This factor was slightly disappointing but now that you know that, make a choice carefully. Otherwise, there were no significant drawbacks to the product.
Now that we are nearing the end of this list, it is time to introduce the SOLA LSTFM Torpedo Level. It is very sturdy and will ensure easy readability. Now you do not have to squint your eyes to read anymore! You can view it from any angle, and this will provide you with a clear vision.
Break-resistant acrylic block FOCUS vials with greater...
Luminous backing strip allows visibility of the vial in low...
Why Did We Like It?
The brand takes a lot of precautions when it comes to its levels. The maximum deviation allowed is 0.55 mm/m, and that is strictly followed. Plus, you will be getting a luminous backing that will let you read in low light. This is a great feature and allowed us to work at night.
Next, the vials are made of break-resistant acrylic and come with a magnifying lens. This further increases visibility while ensuring there is no form of leakage even if the device falls.
Not only this, but it also has a strong aluminum die-cast body with V-groove. The body is sturdy and durable, while the V-groove allows working with conduits.
We even loved the measuring accuracy, and you can keep it straight or inverted while measuring.
What Could've Been Better?
We feel that the magnet could be stronger as it does not stick to surfaces for long. Also, if you are working with bending pipes, it isn't easy to get the magnet to work since it is placed just in the middle. But again if you need to measure a brick wall, magnets would not be needed.
If you have a toolbox at home, you will need a level as it is an essential part of any kind of construction work. Now the list that you just went through has options for all and you would be able to find one which is suitable.
To help you further, we have listed some of the basic factors that need to be kept in mind before purchasing. There are differences in the material, accuracy, vial types, and screens, to name a few. Learn more about it in the following section.
Materials Used
Now generally, levels are made of either aluminum alloy or molded plastic. These are both good and have certain pros and cons. While plastic ones are more resistant to heat and cold, they can be less durable than aluminum.
Aluminum, on the other hand, is sturdy, but the surface temperature can change. If it is very hot or you are working outdoors, the body will heat up, and the same goes for cold climates. Keep this in mind before making a purchase.
V-Groove
Some products will come with a V-groove, while others will not. Now, this typically helps in working with pipes and will give you more control. The pipe gets into the groove snugly, and that will help in stabilizing this better. We will recommend that you determine the use first and then purchase accordingly.
Vials
Vials can be made of plastic, glass, or acrylic, for that matter. Now, glass is the toughest and is most resistant to fogging. It will stay clear and will not crack or leak. It is indeed a great choice but may increase the weight of the product.
Moving on, some brands are also trying to make UV-resistant vials that will work well under the sun. So, if you are planning to work outdoors mostly, then these could be a great option.
Also, when your product arrives, check for the bubble inside the liquid. The bubble will move as you adjust the product, and that is generally how measurement is done.
Magnet
If you purchase a level with magnets attached to the edge, it will help in working with both hands. The magnet will ensure that it sticks to the surface and will allow hands-free use.
However, this is only true in the case of metal or steel surfaces. If you are going to use it on a wall, then the magnet will be of no use. Again we will recommend understanding your use before purchasing.
Digital Display
Some products come with a digital display screen that will light up, allowing maximum visibility. This works best with people who have a problem with clear vision. Here the screens are large, and you can view them from all angles.
In some cases, the display is reversible, and you can use the level upside down without any issues.
So, if you love to use the latest technology and are a fan of gadgets, then digital levels are a great option. These may be slightly more costly but will provide you with a lot of satisfaction.
Size
The size of the product may vary with different models. While torpedo levels are not very big, there may still be significant differences. Check the size of your toolbox and see what size will fit. There are some small 6-inch ones that can even fit into your pocket, for that matter.
Remember that magnets can make a level bulky and prevent it from entering tight or narrow spaces. Check the dimensions of the product carefully before purchasing.
Also, pay attention to the weight as some products can weigh more than 14 ounces. These could cause a strain on your hand if you are going to work with them for long hours. Look for a lightweight model in such cases.
Storage
Wheel toolboxes should be able to hold levels easily; there might be scratches formed on the body due to larger and sharp tools kept beside this one. Some options come with their own box, and that is the best way to store them. There remain no issues with scratches as the device is kept separately.
We will otherwise recommend wrapping the level in a thin cloth before putting it in a box with other tools for complete safety.
Torpedo Levels FAQ's
How is a Torpedo Level different from a standard level?
While a standard level is longer and typically used for larger projects, a Torpedo Level is smaller and more portable. It is designed for smaller-scale tasks, tight spaces, and situations where mobility is essential.
What are the main uses of a Torpedo Level?
Torpedo Levels are commonly used for a variety of tasks, such as hanging pictures, aligning shelves, installing appliances, checking the levelness of surfaces, and ensuring accurate measurements in construction and woodworking projects.
Can a Torpedo Level be used for both horizontal and vertical leveling?
Yes, a Torpedo Level can be used for both horizontal and vertical leveling. Its compact size and multiple vials allow for versatile usage in various orientations.
Are digital Torpedo Levels better than traditional ones?
Digital Torpedo Levels offer precise electronic readings, making them convenient for specific applications. However, traditional bubble vial Torpedo Levels remain popular for their simplicity, reliability, and ease of use.
Can a Torpedo Level be recalibrated if it becomes inaccurate?
Generally, Torpedo Levels do not require recalibration as they are factory-calibrated and built to maintain their accuracy. However, if you suspect a level to be inaccurate, it’s best to contact the manufacturer or consult the user manual for guidance.
Can I use a Torpedo Level for professional construction work?
Yes, many Torpedo Levels are suitable for professional construction work. However, for highly precise and specialized applications, such as in surveying or engineering, more advanced leveling tools may be necessary.
Conclusion
We are finally nearing the end, and we will give you a moment to take all the information in. It is indeed a long list, but we hope you were able to learn all about the various types of torpedo levels available in the market.
Some products will just help you see if the surface is flat, while some come with extra features like magnets, thumb screws, and more. Make a choice based on your needs, and you should have a trouble-free experience.
Finally, the Swanson TL043M is a great choice for professionals. We will bid you goodbye now. Have a great shopping experience!
Finding unique and fun flower pots can be really hard and even when you find them they may cost you a fortune. So, why don't you get down to work to give the boring terracotta pots an interesting look on your own according to your preferences and style? There are so many different designs that you can make with ease, you just have to grab some paint and some brushes. This is the easiest and the cheapest way to decorate your home with matching pots. Scroll down through the photos below and see How To Give The Dull Terracotta Pots Super Interesting Looks. It will be hard for you to choose a favorite design because all of them are more than amazing. Check them out and see what I'm talking about!
Is Batman your favorite superhero? Well, it seems that is about time to make yourselves your brand-new Batman terracotta pot that everyone is going to love!
Even if you are not feeling very artistic there are some designs that you can rock as well. This dotted pot doesn't require much proficiency. Just paint the pot in the color you want and make some dots here and there in the size you like the best.
By using lace you can give your terracotta pots a new and fresh look in no time. All you have to do is to stick the lace on the pots with glue. As easy as a pie.
Is the decoupage technique your thing? You can try it out on your terracotta pots too! Get some designed tissues and give the pots a new, colorful life.
If you have your small garden planted in amazing terracotta pots, then this is the design that you should try next. Writing the name of each plant on the pot is really fun and even those who don't know them will have the chance to learn them easily.
Color blocking is an interesting way to add color to these brown and dull pots, so use tape to do them perfectly. You can even paint the inside of the pot since a small part of it it's still visible.
Even your favorite quote can be written on the pot and get you through the day. The daily motivation will be on your favorite pot and flower in your home decor if you recreate this design. What do you think?
What do you think about these projects? Are you ready to reinvent your flower collection?
Do you want to wake up to birds chirping outside your window? If you are enthusiastic about nature, it's time to take that extra step.
Bring home a beautiful feeder that will not only keep hummingbirds fed and happy but will also make them want to hang out in your garden. If you are a gardening enthusiast, you must already have a beautiful garden. Place a few feeders around it, and you can hear birds chirping all day long.
Now the problem is that there are multiple choices in the market, and selecting 1 becomes challenging. To make it easier for you, we have curated a detailed and comprehensive guide about the 7 best hummingbird feeders right now. The pros and cons have been mentioned too and will help you understand the product better.
So, without further ado, let's move on.
Best Hummingbird Feeders
Whether you're looking for durability, easy cleaning, or a specific design, we've got you covered. So, without further ado, here's the list of the 7 best Hummingbird Feeders that will enhance your bird-watching experience and bring joy to your outdoor space.
If you are looking for a feeder with 8 feeding ports, the Juegoal 12 oz Hanging Feeder will be an excellent choice. It can be hung anywhere around the house or on the terrace where birds come mostly. We were impressed by the simple design along with its brilliant efficiency.
Hummingbird Feeders: 12 ounce nectar capacity with 8 feeding...
Nectar Guard: In order not to pollute nectar by crawling...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, we will mention the anti-polluting moat. This prevents insects and other pollen from falling or crawling into the nectar. The moat also keeps ants away.
This is accompanied by a Maggift cover, which is made of plastic and is easily removable. The cover has 8 openings on the sides for the birds to feed from. It can be taken out and cleaned while you can fill the feeder easily.
Further, the plastic body is lightweight and can be easily hung anywhere. A metal hook is also provided, which can be used to hang the feeder. Try to keep it away from beehives or trees as that attracts many insects. Although they cannot reach the feed, you do not want insects buzzing around.
Overall we found this to be very beneficial for us, and the bright orange shade looks good wherever you decide to place it.
What Could've Been Better?
Now we want to recommend that you clean the feeder regularly. This is because you will be putting sugar water or nectar in it, which could lead to mold. If you leave it for a week without cleaning, molds appear on the side, which would be very difficult to clean.
Cover is detachable
Can be cleaned easily
Comes with a built-in ant moat
Lightweight body
Mold problems can appear
Capacity: 12 fl oz | Material: Plastic | Feeder Type: Hanging | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: Yes
One of our top recommendations is the Best Home Products Autumn Impressions, which is a beautiful orange-yellow glass feeder. We loved the beautiful colors, and the light reflects from it, making it a decor element too. Hummingbirds are attracted to the yellow and red shades and will not miss this one!
To begin with, we found it to be big enough to hold a lot of nectar at one time. With dimensions of 10.47 x 6.77 x 6.61 inches, this product can feed a number of birds. There is enough space for the birds to hang out after having had their fill. We found that many of the birds stayed longer than usual on it.
Secondly, the holes are small and will prevent any big bird from feeding out of it. Also, smaller insects or animals without beaks will not be able to reach the liquid at all. This makes it perfect for hummingbirds. Bees cannot reach the nectar as they do not have beaks, and that saves you the trouble of warding them away.
Plus, we have to mention the shape of the feeder, which does not provide space for big birds to sit on it. Hence, they cannot take over the feeder, and hummingbirds will have access at all times.
What Could've Been Better?
We found that the bottom tray does not remain in place, and to deal with it, you can use a rubber band. The rubber band will hold it tight, and its seal will prevent any of the sugared water from leaking out.
Beautiful orange-yellow shades
Rubber seal prevents leakage
Nectar can be easily reached
The bottom part is slightly loose
Capacity: Not specified | Material: Glass, Iron | Feeder Type: Hanging | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: Yes
If you want a handmade product that is unique and is bound to stand out, the Grateful Gnome HB511 is going to be a great choice. It has double layers of glass to prevent any damage and is known to be very easy to assemble and clean. Read on to know about its other features.
Nature at Your Side: Our beautiful hand-blown glass feeder...
Hand-Crafted Glass: Each of our products is a unique,...
Why Did We Like It?
The body is made of premium quality thick glass, which has been hand-blown individually. The glass is strong and does not fade with time. Also, we loved how it was packed. There was padding on both sides to prevent the glass from facing any damage during transport.
Moving on to the capacity, it can hold 26 ounces of liquid at one time. This could last for a few days depending on the number of birds that feed from it. 4 flowering feed ports on the different sides ensure that 4 birds can feed together.
Lastly, we have to mention the customer service, which is very good. We were able to reach them every time we had a query, and they were very friendly and always ready to help.
What Could've Been Better?
We found that the cover needs regular cleaning. If you let the water stay for long, it will start rusting immediately. This could spoil the entire product, and hence you should take good care. In case it does rust, talk to customer care, and they might send you a replacement.
Premium quality thick glass is used
Easy to assemble
Every product is handmade
Purple-speckled mushroom color
Cover can get rusted if not cleaned regularly
Capacity: 26 fl oz | Material: Glass | Feeder Type: Hanging | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: Yes
Do you want a well-protected piece that will keep ants away while feeding the hummingbirds at the same time? The LUJII Hummingbird Feeder is a great option to choose. It looks beautiful when placed in the sun and works perfectly too.
ATTRACT MORE HUMMINGBIRDS: The bright color and style of the...
HANDMADE BLOWN GLASS: Each product is individually blown and...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, we noticed that the bright shades are attracting a lot of hummingbirds to it. Try to keep it an open area where the light reflects off the body. There are 5 feeding stations, and 5 birds could be drinking at the same time. There is also space for them to rest comfortably while drinking.
The body of the product is made of 2 layers of glass to protect it from fading or damage. Each is individually made and hence, will not match the other.
It is also very easy to fill, as there is a wide mouth. You can fill it quickly, and the 2-part base will help you see when it needs refilling. We did not constantly have to open and check for the level of remaining liquid thanks to this.
Another great fact about this feeder is that you can use it as a candle holder or a vase when it's not the season for hummingbirds to come.
What Could've Been Better?
Make sure that you provide this item with enough support when you are filling it up completely. That is because it can become very heavy when the entire 40 ounces of liquid is filled. The S hook needs to be strong enough to be able to hold it, or you have to reduce the amount of liquid.
Easy to clean
Wide-mouthed reservoir for quick filling
2 layers of glass for extra protection
Hand-blown stained glass
Can be very heavy when full
Capacity: 36 fl oz | Material: Glass | Feeder Type: Hanging | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: Yes
Up next is a big product with a capacity of 38 ounces. The REZIPO Feeder With Perch is a great option and has the capacity to lift the entire ambiance of your porch. We loved the beautiful colors on its body.
EASY TO CLEAN: The clear glass makes seeing red hummingbird...
EASY TO FILL NECTAR: Clear glass, Wide-mouth reservoir and...
Why Did We Like It?
This is a beautiful and heavy glass feeder. One good part about the glass being heavy is that it will not move in the wind. The swinging is stopped making sure it does not bang against anything, and this allows the birds to eat in peace.
There are attached perches that allow the birds to stand. We found that they spent more time resting on the feeder than actually eating. Keep the feeder under a shade, and the birds will love to hang out longer.
Next, it is pretty easy to clean, and you will be able to assemble and disassemble in no time at all. Our kids could also do it with no issues. You will not have to worry about cleaning away ants because of the ant moat provided. Fix it in place and fill it up with oil.
What Could've Been Better?
The only issue with this product is that the rope that they provided was not helpful. We purchased a separate chain that could hold the weight of the glass body, and now it hangs outside our house perfectly well. We would recommend this to keep the feeder safe.
Sealing ring prevents leak prevention
Brushed copper glass
Ant moat is provided
The rope is not helpful
Capacity: 38 fl oz | Material: Glass | Feeder Type: Hanging | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: Yes
We are nearing the middle of this list, and it is time to introduce the Martha Stewart MTS-CBF1 Real Copper feeder. It is beautifully designed and looks like a wind chime. You are going to love the sleek surfaces and the efficiency that this provides.
This is a unique product made with real copper. There are 4 feeding ports on all sides and a large perching place. This is pretty wide, and the birds can sit on it easily after feeding. The sleek top is shaped like a hut roof and will protect the birds from rain and direct sunlight. Around 5-6 birds can stay here under protection.
Plus, the feeding tray is lipped. This prevents wastage and ensures every bit of the nectar is available to be eaten.
To top it all, there are drain holes around that keep the bird feeder dry. These will drain off any excess water or sugar liquid. It also prevents water spots and helps it remain clean for longer.
Also, since it is made of copper, the material prevents the sugared water from freezing inside in case of cold temperatures. While glass can crack in such temperatures, this one is not prone to cracking at all.
What Could've Been Better?
We found that hummingbirds had a difficult time figuring out the feeder in the beginning since it does not look like a flower. So, we placed some ornaments nearby, and then the birds started coming. If you have a similar problem, this is something you can try out too.
Prevents water from freezing
Protective roof for shade from sun and rain
Lipped feeding tray
Not noticeable for the birds initially
Capacity: 14 fl oz | Material: Glass, Copper | Feeder Type: Hanging and Stake-mounted | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: No
If you were looking for an inexpensive product that will do the work while not burning a hole in your pockets, this is a great option. The product is made entirely of plastic and has 4 feeding ports on its sides. It has a bright red feeding base with yellow flowers, which act as the feeding ports.
Holds 16oz. of hummingbird nectar in see through plastic...
Why Did We Like It?
This is one of the lightest products on this list, and that is because it is made of plastic. With a capacity of holding 16 oz of nectar, it works well and can be refilled once a week. The product comes with a hook that will help you attach it to a branch or a chain easily.
Adding on, since the body is absolutely transparent, we could see the level of liquid even from a distance. This made it easier for us to keep a tab on the level without having to open it up or go closer to it.
Plus, it is small in size and measures 6.5 x 6.1 x 1.5 inches. This makes it almost unnoticeable to humans, while the red color attracts birds. Overall, we found that it does a decent job of providing birds with the food they need.
What Could've Been Better?
Unlike glass or copper, this plastic feeder is flimsy and is difficult to clean. The sugared liquid sticks to the sides, and there is only a small opening that will allow you to clean. Also, we found that the liquid heats up when kept in the sun. The plastic is thin and does not protect the liquid from heat rays.
Can hold 16 oz of hummingbird nectar
Transparent plastic reservoir
Not expensive
Bright red attracts hummingbirds
Difficult to clean
Plastic is thin
Capacity: 16 fl oz | Material: Plastic | Feeder Type: Hanging | Perches: Yes | Cleaning System: Removable Base | Ant Guard: No
Now that you have a clear idea about the different types of feeders, we will move on to discussing certain points that will help you decide. You must have seen that there are many similarities among the types, but then each product is different. Make sure that you note down the following points and make an informed decision on the basis of it.
Leakage
It is essential that you prevent leakage at all costs. This not only saves a lot of nectar but also allows the birds to drink freely. Check if the ring on the bottom is tight or not. If it is slightly loose, use a rubber band to fix it. Make the feeder sway a little and see if it leaks. If it does, it is best to get it replaced. If not, then you have a great feeder for yourself.
Ant Moat
There is an ant moat that comes with most feeders. These prevent ants from reaching the nectar and are very important, especially if your area has a lot of them.
Also, make sure that the holes of the feeder are small, and larger birds cannot feed from it. If they do, then the feeder will be taken over, and the hummingbirds will not get a chance.
Capacity
Every feeder has varying capacities, and you need to select one which works for you. If you have lesser hummingbirds in your area, then a small one should suffice. On the other hand, if your area sees a lot of these birds, go for a bigger feeder. This will keep the birds happy, and you will not have to replace the syrup very often.
Number Of Feeding Ports
This is an important consideration when it comes to selecting feeders. You will have to decide on the number of feeding ports that the feeder should have before purchasing. Now, initially, you might think, the more the number, the better it is since it will be able to feed a larger number of birds at one time.
But remember that the birds may not want to share the food, and it might end up that only 1 bird feeds at a time. This would mean that it is better to buy feeders with fewer ports. We would suggest settling for a general number of 4-5 ports and seeing how it works.
Material Used
There are 3 common materials to make bird feeders, glass, plastic, and copper. Plastic options can be lightweight but are not very durable, and the sugar buildup can be very difficult to remove. But it is the cheapest option, and you can purchase it if you do not plan to use a feeder for long.
Coming to glass, it is thicker and sturdier than plastic, and most glass models look very attractive. These do not sway in the wind and stay in place, making it easier for the birds to feed.
Copper models are also similar but slightly less heavy. They work well, but sometimes birds might find it difficult to spot these. If you face something similar, add some artificial flower decorations around to lure the birds.
Visibility
Some feeders have a transparent body, and that makes it easier to see the level of liquid left inside the feeder. These are more efficient as you will not have to open the entire unit to check.
Semi-transparent ones need you to go near the feeder in order to check it, while the transparent ones can be viewed from a distance. Completely opaque bodies are difficult to handle and make the process of checking time-consuming. You will have to open the top to peek in and check the level of fluid inside.
Plastic v/s Metal Base
The 2 popular kinds of bases are plastic and metal. Plastic ones are lighter and not prone to rusting. But they are not sturdy and may not last for a long time. Also, you might see that they lose shape due to bigger birds trying to sit on them.
Metal ones are sturdy and will not lose shape with time. But these are prone to rust. It is best to wipe them with a cloth every day to prevent liquid from accumulating on them.
Hummingbird Feeders FAQ's
What is the best location to hang a hummingbird feeder?
The ideal location for hanging a hummingbird feeder is in a quiet and shaded area, away from direct sunlight. This helps to prevent the nectar from spoiling too quickly. It’s also recommended to hang the feeder at a height where it is easily visible and accessible for both the hummingbirds and for cleaning and refilling purposes.
What is the best nectar recipe for hummingbirds?
The most common recipe for hummingbird nectar is a mixture of four parts water to one part white granulated sugar. Boil the water to remove impurities, then stir in the sugar until it dissolves. Let the nectar cool before filling the feeder. Avoid using honey, artificial sweeteners, or red food coloring, as these can be harmful to hummingbirds.
How do I attract hummingbirds to my feeder?
To attract hummingbirds to your feeder, consider the following tips:
Place the feeder near flowers that hummingbirds are attracted to.
Keep the feeder clean and filled with fresh nectar.
Use feeders with bright colors or attractive designs.
Hang multiple feeders to accommodate more hummingbirds.
Provide perches or natural elements near the feeder for hummingbirds to rest.
What should I do if ants or bees are attracted to my feeder?
To deter ants, you can apply a thin layer of petroleum jelly or use an ant moat, which is a device filled with water that creates a barrier for ants. Bees can be deterred by choosing feeders with bee guards or using feeders with smaller feeding ports that are more difficult for bees to access.
When is the best time of year to put up a hummingbird feeder?
The timing for putting up a hummingbird feeder depends on your location and the migration patterns of hummingbirds in your area. In general, it’s best to put up the feeder a few weeks before the expected arrival of hummingbirds in your region. Research the migration patterns of hummingbirds specific to your area to determine the best time to set up the feeder.
How can I prevent the nectar from freezing in colder temperatures?
In colder climates, you can use a heated hummingbird feeder or wrap insulation around the feeder to prevent the nectar from freezing. Some feeders are designed with features to keep the nectar from freezing, such as built-in heaters or insulation. Additionally, you can bring the feeder indoors during freezing temperatures and put it back outside when it warms up.
Conclusion
Hummingbirds can be pretty dominant and may not be up for sharing the nectar. So, we would recommend having more than one feeder at different locations around the house. That would make sure that all the birds looking to feed get their fill.
With this, we come to the end of this comprehensive guide, and it is time to do a quick recap of our favorites. The Juegoal 12 oz Hanging Feeder is our favorite overall because of its lightweight design and efficiency. On the other hand, if you want a very sturdy product, the Grateful Gnome HB511 will fit you well.
Let us know your favorite in the comment section below. Happy shopping!
TV mounts need to be selected carefully based on your requirements, budget and the rest of the furniture. The mount from Pipishell offers great versatility at its reasonable price point, while the Mounting Dream mount offers full range of motion.
A wall-mounted TV can be a great addition to any living room as it offers a sleek and space-saving setup while providing an optimal viewing experience.
It can be difficult to choose the right mount for your TV, as there are many different options available on the market. It's important to consider factors such as the weight and size of your TV, the VESA pattern, and the type of wall you'll be mounting it on.
You should consider the bestviewing angle and height to mount your TV. A good wall mounted TV should be sturdy, easy to install, and provide a full range of motion for easy adjustments. With the right TV wall mount, you can enjoy your favorite shows and movies in style.
12 Best TV Wall Mounts | Maximize Your Space And Viewing Experience
Are you looking for the right TV wall mount to create the perfect viewing experience? Look no further! Here is the list of the 5 best TV wall mounts that will provide you with the perfect position for your TV:
Whether you have a small TV or a large one, need a fixed or adjustable mount, or want a tilt or full-motion capability, we've got you covered. So, if you're ready to elevate your TV-watching experience and reclaim your living space, here's the list of the 12 best TV wall mounts.
TV Mount Compatibility - TVs wall mount fits SAMSUNG, SONY,...
Full Motion for Optimal Viewing - Our articulating arm mount...
What we like
Full motion design allows easy adjustment
Neat and organized cable management
Built-in bubble level
Easy to install, instructions included.
What we don't like
Difficult to screw in bolts
The Pipishell Full Motion TV Wall Mount is a versatile and durable option for mounting your TV on the wall. This mount supports TVs from 13 to 42 inches and up to 44 pounds. It supports a VESA pattern range of 75x75mm to 200x200mm, making it compatible with most TV brands.
It allows for a maximum swivel of 90 degrees, making it easy to adjust the angle of your TV for the best viewing experience. It also has a tilting function that allows for a 9-degree up and 11-degree down tilt, which can help reduce glare and improve the viewing angle.
The Pipishell Full Motion TV Wall Mount is also easy to install. It comes with all the necessary hardware and detailed instructions, so you can get your TV mounted in no time. The mount also has a built-in bubble level, which helps ensure that your TV is perfectly level when you're done installing.
Additionally, the mount has a cable ties management system that helps keep cords and cables organized and out of sight.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 75x75mm - 200x200mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 44 lbs | TV Size Range: 13" - 42" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
[TV Wall Mount and Suitability] The Mounting Dream TV wall...
[Space Saving] Due to the low-profile TV bracket being 1.5...
What we like
Low profile, space-saving design
Pull straps for easy locking and releasing
Durable and sturdy steel construction
Built-in bubble level
What we don't like
Lack of velcro cable ties makes wire management troublesome
The Mounting Dream TV Mount is one of the best TV mounts for your living room wall. This mount is designed to support TVs from 37 to 70 inches and up to 132 pounds. It has a VESA pattern of 200x100mm to 600x400mm.
It allows for a maximum swivel of 180 degrees, making it easy to adjust the angle of your TV for the best viewing experience. The tilting TV mount function allows for an 8-degree up-and-down tilt, which can help reduce glare and improve the viewing angle.
Moving on, the Mounting Dream TV Mount is easy to install. It comes with all the necessary hardware and detailed instructions, so you can get your TV mounted in three simple steps. The mount also has a built-in bubble level, which helps ensure that your TV is perfectly level.
The mount is made of high-quality steel construction and has been tested to withstand four times the weight it's rated to support, ensuring safety and stability. Additionally, you may require concrete anchors for installing this mount so keep an eye out for that. The brand clearly specifies that not all its wall mounts are meant for drywall.
That’s not all; the innovative pull straps on the mount enable you to lock and release the TV effortlessly.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Metal | VESA Compatibility: 200x100mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 132 lbs | TV Size Range: 37" - 70" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Universal Design: This full motion TV mount fits for most of...
Adjustable View Comfortable : This TV bracket with dual...
What we like
Full motion design allows for a maximum swivel of 45 degrees
Compatible with most TV brands and sizes, up to 84 inches and 132 pounds.
Beginner-friendly installation
Retractable design
What we don't like
Drill bit for the big bolts not included
Our next pick is undoubtedly one of the best TV mounts out there. Don’t take our word for it - it has nearly 40,000 ratings on Amazon with an average of 4.8 out of 5 stars. It is suitable for TV sizes ranging from 47 to 84 inches and up to 132 pounds. It sports a VESA pattern of 200x100mm to 600x400mm, making it a versatile pick for most TV brands.
Moving on, this mount allows for a maximum swivel of 45 degrees. It also has a tilting function of up to 5 degrees up and 15 degrees down, making it easy to adjust the angle of your TV and remove any glare.
Also, the USX Mount Full Motion TV Wall Mount is rather easy to install. You get detailed instructions and all the required hardware in pre-labeled bags, so you can get your TV up and running quickly. The mount also has a built-in bubble level, which helps ensure that your TV is perfectly level when you're done.
Another impressive feature of this TV mount is that it can be pulled out to 16.49 inches and retracted back to 2.40 inches from the wall. Lastly, you get a pack of 3 cable ties with it to ensure that your TV is not surrounded by untidy wires.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 75x75mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 132 lbs | TV Size Range: 47" - 84" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Get your TV off it's stand and onto the wall in under 30...
Extend, tilt, and swivel your TV exactly where you need it....
What we like
Solid frame that’s built to last
Excellent hardware selection
Tested to hold more weight than its single-stud counterparts
Easy to install with all the necessary hardware and detailed instructions included, including a bubble level
What we don't like
Not suitable for extremely large or heavy TVs
The Echogear Full Motion TV Wall Mount is a versatile and durable option for mounting your TV on the wall. This mount is designed to support TVs up to 75 inches and 132 pounds. It has a VESA pattern of 100x100mm to 600x400mm, making it compatible with most TV brands.
One of the standout features of this mount is its full-motion design. It allows for a maximum swivel of 130 degrees and a tilting TV mount function of up to 15 degrees, making it easy to adjust the angle of your TV for the best viewing experience. This can be especially useful for reducing glare or finding the perfect viewing angle from your couch or bed.
The Echogear Full Motion TV Wall Mount is also easy to install. It comes with all the necessary hardware and detailed instructions, including a bubble level to ensure that your TV is perfectly level when you're done.
Additionally, the mount is designed with a built-in cable management system, which helps keep cords and cables organized and out of sight.
The mount is made of high-quality steel construction and has been tested to withstand four times the weight it's rated to support, ensuring safety and stability. The Echogear Full Motion TV Wall Mount also comes with a 5-year warranty and US-based customer support, which shows the company's confidence in the product's durability and longevity.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Stainless Steel | VESA Compatibility: 200x100mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 132 lbs | TV Size Range: 37" - 75" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Universal TV Mount - This full motion TV mount fits most...
Optimize Viewing Experience - The single stud swivel design...
What we like
Effortless installation
Compatible with most TV brands and sizes
Sturdy construction
Includes a bubble level
What we don't like
Additional tools provided are of low quality
The Elived TV Wall Mount is a portable and durable option for mounting your TV on the wall. This mount is designed to support TVs from 26-55 inches and up to 88 pounds. It has a VESA pattern of 100x100mm to 600x400mm, making it compatible with most TV brands.
The full-motion design of this TV wall mount allows for a maximum swivel of 180 degrees and a tilting function of up to 15 degrees. This allows the user to adjust the angle of the TV easily and enjoy the best viewing experience.
This can be especially useful for reducing glare or finding the perfect viewing angle from your couch or bed.
The Elived TV Wall Mount is also easy to install. It comes with all the necessary hardware and detailed instructions, so you can get your TV mounted in no time. The mount also has a built-in bubble level, which helps ensure that your TV is perfectly level when you're done.
The mount is made of high-quality steel construction and has been tested to withstand four times the weight it's rated to support, ensuring safety and stability. Additionally, the mount has a cable management system that helps keep cords and cables organized and out of sight.
The Elived TV Wall Mount also comes with a 5-year warranty, which shows the company's confidence in the product's durability and longevity.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Cold-Rolled Steel | VESA Compatibility: 100x100mm - 400x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 88 lbs | TV Size Range: 26" - 55" | Swivel: No | Tilt: No | Cable Management: No
UNIVERSAL TV WALL MOUNT - The tilting TV wall mount is...
LOW PROFILE TILT TV MOUNT - The wall mount TV bracket...
What we like
UL listed, ensuring safety and meeting industry standards.
Clear and concise instructions
The tilt feature allows for easy adjustment of the viewing angle
Heavy-duty steel construction and sleek appearance
What we don't like
No room for the cable input on the TV
The Mountup UL Listed TV Wall Mount is a high-quality and durable option for those looking to mount their television on the wall. This mount is UL listed, which means it has been tested and certified by Underwriters Laboratories, a globally recognized safety science company. This provides peace of mind knowing that the mount has been thoroughly tested and meets safety standards.
One of the standout features of this mount is its versatility. It can accommodate most televisions of up to 75 inches, with a maximum weight capacity of 99 pounds. This makes it a great option for a wide range of television sizes and types.
Additionally, the mount has a tilting feature that allows for easy adjustment of the viewing angle, ensuring that you can find the perfect position for your television.
The mount is also easy to install, with all the necessary hardware included in the package. The instructions are clear and easy to follow, making it a great option for those who want to do the installation themselves. The mount is also made of high-quality materials, ensuring that it will last for a long time and provide a secure hold for your television.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 150x100mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 99 lbs | TV Size Range: 37" - 75" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Get the maximum amount of tilt no matter how big your TV is....
Mount extension means easy cable access. As a bonus, it...
What we like
Easy installation and compatibility
Allows for tilting of the TV to reduce glare
Premium mount features
Sturdy build
What we don't like
Poor customer service
The Echogear Tilting TV Wall Mount is a high-quality and durable option for those looking to mount their television on the wall. This mount can accommodate most televisions between 40-86 inches, with a maximum weight capacity of up to 125 pounds (UL certified to hold 4x this amount). The tilting feature allows for easy adjustment of the viewing angle, ensuring that you can find the perfect position for your television.
The mount is also easy to install, with all the necessary hardware included in the package. The instructions are clear and easy to follow, making it a great option for those who want to do the installation themselves.
The mount is also made of high-quality materials, ensuring that it will last for a long time and provide a secure hold for your television.
Additionally, the Echogear Tilting TV Wall Mount comes with a 5-year warranty, which gives you extra peace of mind knowing that the mount is backed by the manufacturer. The company also provides excellent customer service, so if you have any questions or issues, you can reach out to them for assistance.
Motion Type: Max Tilt | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 200x100mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 125 lbs | TV Size Range: 40" - 86" | Swivel: No | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Glare Reducing Tilt- This wall mount tv bracket features 12...
Versatile Fit: The Sanus Premium Tilt TV Mount is designed...
What we like
Well-built stand with sturdy handles
Easy-to-follow instructions for beginners
Easily pulls out enough for cable organization
Compatible with Sanus sound bar mounts
What we don't like
The wall bracket is not as wide
Lack of variety of bolts provided
The SANUS Advanced Tilt Premium Universal TV Wall Mount is a high-quality mount that is designed to securely hold televisions from 46 to 90 inches. One of the best features of this mount is its ability to tilt the TV up to 15 degrees, making it easy to reduce glare from windows or overhead lighting. This feature is especially useful for people who have to place their TV in a room with a lot of natural light.
The mount is easy to install and comes with a detailed instruction manual and a variety of hardware to ensure that it will fit most TVs. It is also compatible with VESA patterns up to 600x400, which means that it will work with a wide variety of TV brands and models.
Another great feature of this mount is its ability to hold up to 125 lbs, which means that it can accommodate even the heaviest of TVs. The mount is also made of high-quality materials and is built to last, which is why it comes with a 5-year warranty.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 75x75mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 150 lbs | TV Size Range: 46" - 90" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Universal TV Wall Mount - This wall mount fits most...
Optimal Viewing Angle - Wall TV mount can swivel +/-45° to...
What we like
Articulating arm design allows for tilting, swiveling, and extending for a wide range of motion.
Flexible, full-motion design for better viewing position
Reliable cold-formed steel construction
Quick and easy to install
What we don't like
Innermost holes prevent free movement of the arms
The Elived Bracket Articulating TV Wall Mount is a high-quality mount designed to securely hold televisions from 37 to 75 inches. One of the best features of this mount is its articulating arm design, which allows for a wide range of motion, including tilting, swiveling, and extending. This feature is especially useful for people who want to be able to adjust their TV to the perfect viewing angle, no matter where they're sitting in the room.
The mount is easy to install and comes with a variety of hardware to ensure compatibility with most TVs. It is also compatible with VESA patterns up to 400x400, which means that it will work with a wide variety of TV brands and models.
Another great feature of this mount is its ability to hold up to 100 lbs, which means that it can accommodate even the heaviest of TVs. The mount is also made of high-quality materials and is built to last, which is why it comes with a 5-year warranty.
One of the unique aspects of this mount is that it can be folded up to only 2 inches from the wall, which makes it a great space saver option. This feature is especially useful for those who have limited space and want to have the TV mounted on the wall without sacrificing too much space.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 150x100mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 100 lbs | TV Size Range: 37" - 82" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Watch the videos in the Image Gallery to See the MM340 In...
Full Range Motion: Up to 27" Vertical Travel, 30° Swivel...
What we like
Allows for pull-down and swivel features for a perfect viewing angle
Solid materials and sturdy build
Easy to pull down and push back with the right tightness adjustments
Clear instructions with pictures
What we don't like
Requires more than one person to install
The MantelMount MM340 Above Fireplace Pull Down TV Mount is a unique and innovative mount designed for people who want to install their TV above a fireplace. The mount allows you to pull the TV down from its mounting location, so you can adjust it to the best viewing angle and then push it back up when not in use. It is one of the best pull-down TV mounts. This feature is especially useful for people who want to be able to use their fireplace while still being able to watch TV.
The mount is easy to install and comes with a variety of hardware to ensure compatibility with most TVs. It is also compatible with VESA patterns up to 600x400, which means that it will work with a wide variety of TV brands and models.
Another great feature of this mount is its ability to hold up to 90 lbs., which means that it can accommodate even the heaviest of TVs. The mount is also made of high-quality materials and is built to last, which is why it comes with a 5-year warranty.
One of the unique aspects of this mount is that it allows you to pull the TV down to eye level and swivel it left or right, this feature is especially useful for people who want to be able to watch TV from different angles. The mount also has an auto-straightening feature that keeps the TV level at all times, even when you're pulling it down or pushing it back up.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 200x200mm - 600x600mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 90 lbs | TV Size Range: 40" - 80" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Full Motion TV Mount Compatibility - Our articulating tv...
Upgrade Your Viewing: Our 26-65 inch TV wall mount tilts...
What we like
Smooth extension and retraction for saving space
Graphical installation guide and video included
Robust design
Prompt customer service
What we don't like
Few instances of customers not receiving the required mounting hardware
The Perlegear Full Motion TV Wall Mount Bracket is a high-quality mount designed to securely hold televisions from 26 to 65 inches. One of the best features of this mount is its full-motion design, which allows for tilting, swiveling, and extending the TV, giving you the flexibility to adjust your TV to the perfect viewing angle. This feature is especially useful for people who want to be able to watch TV from different positions in the room.
The mount is easy to install and comes with a variety of hardware to ensure compatibility with most TVs. It is also compatible with VESA patterns up to 400x400, which means that it will work with a wide variety of TV brands and models.
Another great feature of this mount is its ability to hold up to 99 lbs, which means that it can accommodate even the heaviest of TVs. The mount is also made of high-quality materials and is built to last, which is why it comes with a 5-year warranty.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 100x100mm - 400x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 99 lbs | TV Size Range: 26"-65" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
27.36 INCH LONG ARM EXTENSION: Extra long arm TV wall mount...
COMPATIBLE WITH MOST TVS: Full Motion TV wall mount is...
What we like
Packaging contains all the required hardware (including a spiffy torpedo level)
Step-by-step instructions with pictures
Pre-assembled
Heavy-duty construction
What we don't like
May require more than one person to install
Some customers have complained about the poor user design
The Perlesmith Full Motion TV Wall Mount is a versatile and durable option for mounting your television. This mount allows for full motion and swivel capabilities, making it easy to adjust the viewing angle for optimal comfort.
The articulating design also allows for easy access to cables and connections, making it a great option for those who frequently need to make changes to their TV setup.
In terms of construction, the Perlesmith Full Motion TV Wall Mount is made of high-quality materials that can support a wide range of TV sizes and weights. This mount can accommodate televisions between 37-75 inches and can support up to 110 pounds. The mount is constructed with heavy-duty steel and features a durable powder-coated finish that will last for years to come.
Motion Type: Full Motion | Material: Alloy Steel | VESA Compatibility: 200x100mm - 600x400mm | Weight Capacity: Up to 110 lbs | TV Size Range: 37" - 75" | Swivel: Yes | Tilt: Yes | Cable Management: Yes
Buying Guide For The Best TV Wall Mounts For Your Home
When it comes to mounting a TV in your home, there are a few key factors to consider to ensure you choose the best TV wall mount for your needs. These FAQs or factors will ensure that you pick the ideal product.
A. Size And Weight Of The TV
First, consider the size and weight of your TV. Not all TV wall mounts are designed to hold the same size or weight of the TV, so it's important to choose a mount that is compatible with your specific TV. It's also important to check the maximum weight capacity of the mount to make sure it can safely hold your TV.
B. Location Of The TV
Next, think about the location of your TV. Will the TV be mounted in a living room, bedroom, or another room? This will determine what type of mount you need. For example, a tilting mount may be more suitable for a living room where the TV will be viewed from multiple angles, while a fixed mount may be more suitable for a bedroom where the TV will primarily be viewed from one angle.
C. VESA Pattern Of The TV
Another important factor to consider is the VESA pattern of your TV. The VESA pattern refers to the distance between the mounting holes on the back of your TV. Many TV wall mounts are designed to match specific VESA patterns, so it's important to choose a mount that is compatible with the VESA pattern of your TV.
D. Style And Aesthetics Of Your Home
Additionally, consider the style and aesthetic of your home. There are many different types of TV wall mounts available, from sleek and modern to more traditional and ornate. Choose a mount that complements the style of your home and blends in with your decor.
E. Additional Features
Lastly, think about any additional features you may need. Some TV wall mounts come with built-in cable management systems to help keep cords and cables organized, while others may include adjustable arms or other features that can help improve the viewing experience.
By taking the time to consider these factors, you can ensure that you choose a mount that meets all of your needs and helps you enjoy the best viewing experience possible.
TV Wall Mounts FAQ's
How do I choose the right TV wall mount for my TV?
When choosing a TV wall mount, consider factors such as the size and weight of your TV, the VESA pattern compatibility, the desired mounting location (e.g., wall type), and the level of adjustability (fixed, tilt, full-motion) you prefer.
What is a VESA pattern?
The VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) pattern refers to the standardized hole pattern on the back of your TV. It helps ensure compatibility between the TV and the wall mount. Common VESA patterns include 100×100, 200×200, 400×400, and 600×400, among others.
Can I mount my TV on any type of wall?
TV wall mounts can typically be installed on various types of walls, including drywall, concrete, and wood studs. However, it’s important to follow the manufacturer’s instructions and ensure that the wall can support the weight of your TV and the mount.
How do I determine the weight capacity of a TV wall mount?
The weight capacity of a TV wall mount is usually specified by the manufacturer. It is important to select a wall mount that can safely support the weight of your TV. Be sure to consider the weight of the TV along with any additional accessories, such as soundbars.
Can I install a TV wall mount by myself?
The installation process for TV wall mounts varies depending on the model and wall type. While some people may choose to install the mount themselves, it is recommended to have the installation performed by a professional to ensure proper and secure mounting.
Are TV wall mounts adjustable?
Yes, TV wall mounts come in different types of adjustability. Fixed mounts keep the TV in a stationary position, tilt mounts allow vertical adjustment for better viewing angles, and full-motion mounts offer the most flexibility with options for swiveling, tilting, and extending.
Can I hide the cables with a TV wall mount?
Yes, there are TV wall mounts available that offer cable management solutions to help hide and organize your cables. These mounts often have built-in channels or cable covers to keep the cables neatly tucked away.
Conclusion
In conclusion, when it comes to buying the best option for your home, it's essential to take into account several factors. These include the size, weight, location, and VESA pattern of your TV, the style and aesthetic of your home, and any additional features you may need.
Choosing the right TV wall mount can enhance your viewing experience by positioning your TV at the right angle, providing a safe and secure mount, and keeping your cables organized. Make sure to do your research and choose a mount that meets all of your needs and preferences.
The Pipishell wall mount is the most versatile option in terms of compatibility with different TVs, like OLED, flat panel display, and cable television. One of the best TV wall mounts for a range of motion is the Mounting Dream product we shortlisted. And the best TV mount for saving space is the one from USX.
Modern architecture and design advancements have left no stone unturned in ensuring only the best of everything for your house.
From stunningly beautiful design ideas to highly functional protective measures for your home, the urban decor scenario has royally changed the game for conventional housekeeping!
And one such unbelievably smart and utilitarian weatherproofing idea that you could get for your sweet home right away is “Siding”!
Featured Image | Factory Roof Houses / Delmulle Delmulle Architecten
Siding is a protective cladding or wall that you can attach to the exterior walls of your house to protect it from the onslaught of weather that includes storms, rain, snow, the sun, and the like. It maintains a comfortable environment inside the house and keeps the exterior walls from weather damage. Furthermore, siding can enhance thermal performance and soundproofing, leading to increased energy efficiency and improved acoustic comfort within your home.
And if you’re looking to reap the benefits of an excellent home siding service, then do visit the link anchored here!
In this extensive read, we’re going to decode all types of siding materials that you could opt for and the benefits of each!
Types of House Siding
Wood
Wooden sidings are the most common type of material used for home exterior sidings. The most significant benefit of wooden siding is its versatility of design and availability in several styles.
It gives a beautiful traditional, organic look to the house as well as maintains a peaceful, natural environment inside and around the house.
The most commonly used type of woods that are used for sidings are pine, spruce, redwood, and cedar. You can either use a wood stain for your wooden sidings or leave it in its natural state.
Black House by Buero Wagner
You could also customize the overall style by opting for different profiles in which the wood is applied to your home exterior. Common wood profiles include batten and board, clapboards, drop siding, shingles, wooden sheet siding, vertical boards, and logs.
However, wood requires regular maintenance and is susceptible to rot, termites, woodpeckers, and fire. It is also not advisable for your house if you stay in an arid climate or where a forest fire is a common occurrence.
Vinyl
As you might have guessed by now, vinyl siding for home exteriors consists of synthetic protective material. This is an extremely popular siding option owing to its versatility, durability as well as affordability than most other types of siding materials.
Vinyl siding is easy to install and doesn’t require high or frequent maintenance, unlike wooden ones. It can endure weather damage for a considerable period of time.
One of the greatest benefits of vinyl siding is its energy efficiency and insulation which reduces your heating bills significantly in both hot and cold climates
It is available in a range of different colors and styles such as shingles, vertical panels, horizontal panels, fish scales, beaded designs, and lap.
However, on the downside of it, vinyl siding could not be painted over or customized all that much. Also, it is non-biodegradable, which does have an adverse effect on the environment.
Vinyl siding, if not installed properly, could lead to seepage of water on the inside which may damage the wood under it.
Metal
Metal is unquestionably one of the most long-lasting and enduring that one could have for siding options for home exteriors. It is completely resistant to water damage and hence, does not rot or mold.
Metal siding will always retain its color without fading out, and it can also be painted over. It is not susceptible to pest attack, rodents, or insects of any sort and is highly resistant to fire as well. It is also a low-maintenance option to go with.
Shanghai Office by Schmidt Hammer Lassen
However, metal sidings are pretty expensive with additional charges incurred on labor, as it is not easily installable. Also, metals will not retain heat and hence can increase the cost of your electricity bills in winter.
While softer metals such as aluminum may dent easily if hit by rocks, heavier steel will increase your labor charges during installation.
Brick
Bricks are one of the most durable materials you could ever choose when even when it comes to getting a house siding as, with proper care, they could last over a century!
There are essentially two sorts of subtypes that you avail in the category of brick sidings: traditional brick masonry which consists of solid brick constructions, and brick veneer, which uses thin layers of bricks.
Immensely low-maintenance, a brick exterior usually requires little to no maintenance. You will only need to give it a pressure wash occasionally to clean the surface.
Brick exteriors could keep a pleasantly cool environment inside your home at all times. But, this could be an issue in winter when you have to have proper heating.
One of the biggest cons of brick siding is that of cost, as it is immensely expensive. Installation would be a labor-intensive process and might require special skills, in which case you could consider brick veneer.
Stone
Similar to brick exteriors, stone sidings bestow a beautiful natural look on your house. It is incredibly durable and weather-resistant needing fairly low maintenance for substantial periods of time. Stone sidings are available in variants of limestone, granite, slate, and other natural stones.
Apart from natural stones, you could also get stone sidings in different other kinds such as manufactured stone, natural stone cladding, stone veneer panels, and foam panel “stone.”
Stone exteriors are completely resistant to moisture or fire damage as well as pest or fungus.
However, the cost of material for stone siding and installing it could be highly expensive, as it will require professional expertise.
A comparatively cost-effective alternative to natural stone exteriors is stone veneer siding. These cost roughly half of what natural stones come at and are also easier to install.
Fiber Cement
Fiber cement is manufactured using wood fibers, cement, and sand.
A fiber cement house siding is strategically created to mimic the nature of natural wood, providing the benefits of a wooden appeal with the weather-resistant nature of an artificial texture.
24 Housing Units / Zanon + Bourbon Architects
It is actually more affordable than wooden sidings, durable, and exceedingly easy to maintain. But, the most significant benefit of fiber cement is that it’s fireproof coming with a Class A1 fire rating. Additionally, it is also resistant to water and insect damage.
There are two variants of fiber cement: a pre-coated/painted siding and another one which could be stained or colored after it’s installed.
However, the cons to it could be that it is expensive to install, is double the price of vinyl ones, and may not be as long-lasting as stone or brick siding.
Stucco
Stucco is made using a combination of lime, cement, and sand, but it could also be manufactured using other elements and recipes. A stucco siding is similar to a plaster and created by layering the mixture all over the exterior of the house.
Karuna House by Hammer & Hand
There are many different ways to apply it on wooden, stone, or brick surfaces, and it could be given different shapes and textures.
The benefits of having stucco siding are that they are long-lasting and provide proper insulation, which helps to reduce electricity bills. It is resistant to fire and requires any additional fire retardants.
But, stuccos do not do well around water and are not a plausible alternative in places that receive frequent rainfalls or remain damp or humid. Also, the cost of installation is pretty steep as you’d require professional help.
Imitation Stone/Brick
Taken to be the precursor to modern vinyl, imitation stone or bricks are considered a decent alternative to the more expensive brick or stone exteriors for houses.
Although the popularity of other, more functional, and beautiful types of sidings have foreshadowed the fame of imitation stone/ brick that was highly in demand even a decade back, it hasn’t completely gone out of trend.
The primary benefit of using this type of home exterior is that they cost substantially less but look almost as good as the real thing!
However, these artificial sidings are not anywhere near stone or brick in durability and are susceptible to water damage. These could be used for outhouses and garages, for that matter
Also, it could be difficult to customize them according to the overall look of your house. And honestly, the options we mentioned earlier are far superior and more functional than these fake stone/brick walls.
Engineered Wood
Engineered wood is made using composite materials, yet looks exactly like real wooden finishes. Engineered wood house sidings are superior to fiber cement or wood-like vinyl owing to the fact that it actually contains real wood.
Numerous strands and fibers are combined together to create a finished product that looks like real wood in every way.
Woodview Mews by Geraghty Taylor Architects
The greatest benefit of getting engineered wood siding is that it comes at a comparatively lower price than other materials and could be customized to suit your preferences.
It is, in fact, a highly durable alternative that could last up to 20-30 years, not requiring very high maintenance for that matter. It is resistant to moisture, fire, and pests, being a decent weather-proof protective material.
However, it can’t be repainted or re-stained, and that could be one disadvantage you’d have to do with.
Insulated
Insulated siding is a way better alternative than vinyl ones, and you could call it an improved version of the latter. It has almost all of the features of the vinyl siding with the huge added benefit of a unique insulating layer, made from expanded polystyrene foam (EPS).
This layer of EPS is fused on the reverse side of the vinyl which provides a snug fit between the real wall exterior of your house and the vinyl material.
This insulative layer actually provides more than 20 percent more energy than the best vinyl or other insulative siding options out there on the market.
Insulated siding is also an incredibly durable option that could last up to 40 years or more.
While, on the other hand, the disadvantage of using this is that it is not customizable or re-paintable in any way. The exterior may not look all that attractive with the insulative cover unlike most siding, but it does provide significant value for the money you pay for it.
Concrete
Concrete is made with a mixture of gravel, sand, cement, and water. These ingredients are mixed well together in various proportions to form a thick paste which is then applied to the exterior walls of the house, much like a stucco, to create concrete siding. The paste dries to form a sturdy, durable wall siding around your home exterior.
T&G House by Nicolás Campodonico
The cost of installation could be high, and it will largely depend on the complexity and size of the structure of your house.
Concrete sidings are usually considerably long-lasting if formed and mixed correctly and can last as long as stone or brick walls. You can also form them into different shapes and sizes. These can endure natural calamities such as floods, hurricanes, or tornadoes and are also resistant to fire.
Additionally, these can also reduce the cost of cooling and heating owing to their insulative nature.
Glass Exterior
While one may question the efficiency of glass as an exterior or “siding,” it can look absolutely beautiful if you do have the budget for it. Glass exteriors will bring all the natural light into the room, always maintaining a cheerful environment inside your house.
However, do make sure that you go for high-grade fiberglass installments, so that is strong enough to withstand the onslaught of weather. Moreover, it should always be resistant to the harmful UVA and UVB rays of the sun.
So, all of these factors make the cost of glass sidings plus installation a highly expensive investment.
Premium quality glass sidings can even work wonderfully as insulative barriers trapping all the heat and preventing them from escaping during colder weather. This will lower your electricity bills substantially!
But, glass floor-to-ceiling exteriors involve high maintenance. You will require to clean it frequently and protect it from external shocks. Also, these will hardly provide any privacy in your space.
Steel Log Siding
Steel log sidings bring the best of both steel and wood for making a great exterior for your house. This combines the formidable nature of heavy-duty steel with the beautiful natural charm of wood to create magnificent exteriors for your homes.
It is resistant to almost all kinds of issues and determinants, including fire and water. And even with everything included, steel log sidings require really low maintenance, lasting for an incredibly long span of time.
The steel body of the exterior of these protective exteriors is treated with wood grains and made to have impressions that are made by wooden chinks or hewing, so that looks absolutely like natural wood.
The significant downside to getting steel log siding is the price of the material, which is immensely high. Installing a steel log siding is far from easy and entails a lot of money and labor.
Half-Timbering on Stucco
A beautiful mix of wood with Stucco is one of the ways to get a brilliantly functional siding arrangement for your house. Half-timbering on Stucco is actually a style dating back to the Tudor Revival, that made a huge impact, especially during the mid-19th century in England.
To this day, the style is popular for its durability and immense versatility of a functional design.
15th-century half-timbered Black Swan Public House, Peasholme Green, York, Yorkshire, England
The combination of wood and stucco brings the combined benefits of both these materials into the play of modern architectural ideas.
While the wood makes for a charming organic appeal to the overall structure, stucco ensures the durability of the protective cladding as well as its resistance against inclement climate or fire. It is an exceedingly customizable design that you could design according to your personal preferences.
However, the cost of the material and installation is considerably high, requiring professional skills and assistance.
Wood Shingle Siding
Shingles are made of uniform blocks of wood that may be cut and formed into different shapes. These shapes are cut with a machine that ensures the uniformity of shapes and sizes as well as a smooth texture for the pieces.
A shingle siding is then created by applying the shingles over the wall exterior in an overlapping arrangement.
But, the cost of installation of shingles is extremely high and depends on the size and location of your house. Also, these are prone to rot, moisture, and fire damage.
If you’re opting for shingles for a home that tends to get affected by moisture, then go for mildew repellents on the sidings as a protective measure.
Shingles sidings are delicate and need to be stained every 3 years and repainted after 6 years. These could warp or crack in extreme temperature conditions or loosen with time.
Board and Batten
The board and batten siding allows you to be creative in making a protective arrangement for the exterior of your walls using wooden boards of different lengths. You can install the boards both vertically or horizontally.
These are easy to install and are comparatively more affordable than most other siding options. They are also easy to maintain and are available in many different colors.
The most common types of woods used for this include cedar, pine, fir, and redwood.
Wood is usually what is used to make board and batten siding, but you could even get vinyl or engineered ones for your wall exteriors as well.
Although these hold up considerably well in harsh conditions, if you end up with the ones that are not well-treated or are of low grade, then they could develop rot and mold or become infested by pests and insects. Also, these could crack in extreme weather conditions.
Log Siding
These are made by piling on logs on top of each other in an interlocking design. The common kinds of woods used for making log sidings include cypress, redwood, cedar, and pine. Before forming the structures, the logs are dried and treated to increase their longevity and endurance. These can be easily stained or painted.
However, the natural state of the logs is usually preferred over painted ones, or they are given just a clear basic coat for the purpose of protection.
Log sidings provide a natural, cabin-like charm to your house. But, the initial cost of installation of the logs could be high and require professional expertise.
These are susceptible to moisture, fire, pests, and insects which makes the cost of maintenance pretty high for these. Also, if the logs are cracked or so, make sure to immediately seal them up to prevent decay.
Horizontal or Vertical Wood Boarding
In horizontal wood boarding, the protective layer for your wall exterior is made using thin strips of wood that are placed horizontally. In some instances, these might also be arranged using a tongue and groove. If the wooden strips are placed vertically, then that helps accentuate the overall height of the home.
The most common types of wood used in this case include pine, cypress, spruce, or Douglas fir.
This brings in a beautiful organic look that is natural yet elegant for any modern design and enhances the curb appeal of the building.
The cost of installation could be high and so can the maintenance charges. These sidings could be easily customized using stains or paints.
The exteriors will require regular maintenance so that the wood doesn’t crack, split or warp or develop rot and fungus. These should be re-stained and repainted every three to six years, which is part of the protective measure for wooden sidings.
However, wooden boarding does maintain a cool atmosphere within the house and is greatly admired for its versatile nature and posh appeal.
Lap Siding
Horizontal lap siding which is also known as bevel siding or clapboard is one of the most popular siding styles out of all that is mentioned here in this list.
It is an immensely versatile design and can be made using a vast range of different materials such as wood (most commonly), aluminum, vinyl, and fiber cement.
It is also available in a vast range of colors and could be customized using different finishes.
Since its introduction during the ’60s, lap sidings are used for almost all kinds of structures. These are affordable, and the cost of maintenance for these are low.
There are many different styles available for lap sidings such as vertical panels, shakes, shingles, fish scales, and beaded patterns or brick veneer patterns that look marvelous on all sorts of buildings.
However, you do have to get your lap siding frequently repainted and caulked to prevent weather damage.
Conclusion
And we that, we come to the very end of our extensive guide on all the types of house sidings you could get right now to protect and adorn your house with!
We hope you liked our effort and got exactly what you were looking for.
The Craftsman House, also known as the American Craftsman, is an architectural style that originated from the American Arts and Crafts Movement towards the end of the 19th century.
This has been an integral part of the very beginnings of practical skills that include interior designing, landscape designing, and decorative and applied arts in the American domestic architectural scene at that time.
These Craftsman homes gained some serious popularity almost as soon as they started appearing, owing to their clean layouts and a spectacular blend of antique England houses of the Victorian era and modern designs. This brought in the beauty of the ornate Victorian forms with a spring-like freshness of modern designs.
Craftsman House Style & Why It's Popular
What happened was because of this style, more and more people came forward to invest and put mass production in creating these beautiful structures. Not only these had a very contemporary look and feel about them but they were also exceedingly durable and profound in character.
So, as the world took its very first steps in moving away from the Victorian influence, the American Craftsman homes provided them with a much cleaner, modern look that was a welcome spell and substitute for the expected Victorian frills.
Image via Creative Architects
History of the Craftsman Home
The most interesting thing about the origins of the Craftsman homes is that the style was born out of the late 19th-century British social movement. During this time, Britain was going through all of the direct impacts of the Industrial Revolution more severely than any part had to sustain at that point of time in history.
The contrarian Arts and Crafts Movement at this time marked one of the most critical moments in the history of architecture. The movement was focused on rejecting any trace of the new and mass-produced construction style in favor of handcrafted products made by artisans.
The movement eventually pervaded America, at the turn of the century, under the deft leadership of Gustav Stickley, the founder, and editor of The Craftsman magazine. His publication sold blueprints for homes that were designed in the Arts and Crafts style. His motive was to make “serious architecture” accessible to the broader mass.
The term “Craftsman” was originally reserved for homes that were built using one of Stickley’s plans. However, it has evolved and grown to define a certain architectural style today.
As of today, Craftsman homes are identified by certain common characteristics. Yet, each of these features includes a solely individual detail unlike any other that makes all layouts absolutely unique and exceedingly functional for their owners. And this is precisely what Stickley had envisioned it to be.
The Craftsman movement exalted, emphasized, and celebrated hard-worked goods and buildings. This was favored way more over mass-produced items. So, in a way, it could be said that the movement was actually formed as a direct retort and counter-response to the idealized, late 19th-century Victorian homes that exuded a strict air of orthodox manners and conventions.
The Increasing Popularity of Craftsman Homes
The popularity of the Craftsman houses could be accredited to Stickley himself. It is thought that he was inspired by the designs of the bungalows that he saw on his trips to Bengal in India. He also published an article on them when he returned, and several American architects decided to follow his lead on it.
What had inspired and struck a chord in him primarily was the utter simplicity of these bungalows. These were unlike anything the Victorian architecture had imposed previously on the masses and the architects of that time.
An essential aspect about all of these homes was that, unlike the elitist air that hung over the Victorian houses, the Craftsman houses were actually considered to be as functional as they could get for the masses; these were residences made for the working class.
Image via Coombs Design
While Victorian architecture emphasized and inclined heavily on aesthetics, ornamentation, and the overall grandeur of the structure, the architectural layout of the Craftsman homes, as was planned by Stickley, focused mainly on the functionality of the structure.
These homes were, to put it this way: small, sweet, and uncomplicated. These were very easy to maintain, which made for the most part of its appeal and attractiveness.
The Craftsman houses thus attracted hardworking individuals. The main reason behind the popularity of these homes amongst the working class was the sustainable angle which was taken into thorough consideration.
Unlike the elaborate Victorian style which took the overall cost of construction to a tremendously exorbitant level, Craftsman houses were considered affordable to build or even upgrade.
And this is why Craftsman houses are even more desired in the present day, given the economic situation of the majority of the population. However, the most attractive part about it is that in no way does it decrease the aesthetic appeal of these homes. It brings in a beautifully neat and clean design that presents a fresh new approach to modern architecture.
This very modern “break” from the severe vintage designs has enabled a beautiful and smooth transition to a contemporary and self-referential architectural layout.
Some of the Key Features of the Craftsman Homes
There are mainly four different types of Craftsman style homes, namely, Mission, Four-Square, Bungalow, and Prairie. Although every Craftsman house is unique in its own way, there are some defining aspects that tell them apart from other architectural styles.
These aesthetic details are what give these homes their cohesive foundation upon which the structure is constructed and accentuated.
These include the following:
Low-pitched Rooflines
The most apparent feature of Craftsman houses is the low-pitched rooflines that are generally designed in a triangular gable or hip pattern. These look and feel very comfortable, accentuating a cozy, compact overall residential structure without being too imposing and challenging to get to.
Wide Eaves
The overhanging, wide eaves of the Craftsman houses compliment the low-pitched tops of the structures. This balances out the overall dimensions of the upper part of the house without losing the proportion between the roof and the main structure. This also makes the house manageable during inclement weather.
Exposed Rafters Below the Eaves
This is a unique aspect, specific to Craftsman houses. The exposed rafters below the eaves look very “meta” in a cozy atmosphere where you would expect to find a few vintage elements or expressions still.
Covered Front-porch
The covered front porches of Craftsman homes not only look marvelous and serve as beautifully serene places to unwind, but they also protect the home from the direct heat of the sun as well as a torrential downpour. These are some of the most attractive features of Craftsman houses, which give you the dual benefit of beauty and functionality.
Symmetrical Pillar Alignment at the Entrance
The pillar-lined entrance to the Craftsman houses gives them a very neat and clean-edged approach. These are some of the distinctly modern and minimalist aspects of the houses. Functionality-wise, such a layout provides a well-balanced and proportionate overall structure that amply protects the house from any sort of violent climatic onslaught.
Double-hanging Windows
Breaking away from the high and ornate Victorian windows, Craftsman Homes bring forth a very straightforward design for their window designs. The double-hanging windows of the house give a straight-edged look, especially due to the separate panes that go on the upper and lower portions of these windows. These are easier to repair and open and close, unlike the heavier, vintage ones.
Singular, Jutting Dormers
The single, protruding dormers are a beautiful and very homely feature of these houses. What’s interesting is, these are also something that honors the traditional vintage layouts, in a way. These dormered roofs of the houses not only look aesthetically pleasing, but they also serve as a welcome addition for a viewing space up in the attic.
Conspicuous Fireplaces
The Craftsman homes come with prominent, integral fireplaces that take up a substantial space in the main living area. This gives off an immensely cozy and snug feeling, keeping you amply warm in harsh winters. These fireplaces with their beautiful mantles, also add a touch of the classic decorative element to a place that is but essentially modern in almost all aspects.
Window Seats and Nooks
These are rather pleasant little features of the Craftsman homes that make them all the more warm and inviting in spirit and structure. The nooks and window seats serve as special little personal spaces where you could have some time to yourselves.
It is fascinating how a very straightforward, compact design can still provide you with the benefit of a calm and quiet spot where you can enjoy some peaceful time away from the central portions of the house.
Integrated Storage Unit
The built-in storage units in Craftsman homes provide a spacious area for all of your wares and other objects. Although it’s not as big as a separate room or garages away from the main house, it still serves as a decent storeroom within the house.
Image via The Works
Ample Woodwork from the Floor to the Ceiling
There is absolutely no lack of natural elements such as wood or stone that go into the making of Craftsman homes. While you would find solid stone construction in some authentic and older Craftsman models, you could get all the woodwork you want in every kind of Craftsman home. Be it the lavish rafters or the polished wood trimmings for the interiors, some of the most beautiful designs found in these layouts are essentially natural, cost-effective, and easy to work with.
Sprawling Exterior with Beautiful, Manicured Lawns and Gardens
This is the single-most delightful aspect of the Craftsman style homes. Almost all of the houses come with stunning outdoor spaces that could be used for gardening or maintaining a simple lawn along with a small sparkling fountain.
The recent house models of this style come with provisions for you to maintain beautiful, raised flower beds, contemporary garden-pathway designs, or for planting medium-height trees and bushes.
Are Craftsman Homes and Bungalows the Same Thing?
Craftsman homes are often associated with the traditional bungalows, an architectural style for residential buildings that is specific to the Bengal region of India. Bungalows, similar to Craftsman-style houses, are simple and quite compact in layout.
These usually have a single story or one and a half stories at the most and a wide front porch. While Craftsman houses are often taken to be a similar structure to these bungalows owing to a few identical features, the two are not really the same in overall structure and design.
For instance, the Spanish Colonial Revival bungalows were quite famous during the 1920s and 30s, and so was the Craftsman architecture which was a separate line altogether.
The esteemed and globally-renowned architect brothers Henry and Charles Greene of Pasadena have contributed significantly to the success of Craftsman-style homes. According to Grant Marani, a partner at New York’s Robert A.M Stern Architects, the buildings designed by the Greene brothers reflect a brilliant influence of both local construction traditions and Japanese architecture, standing as some spectacular specimens of the Craftsman style.
A celebrated example of this is the Gamble House which flaunts a magnificent blend of traditional Craftsman style and some serious Japanese influence, designed captivatingly by the Greene brothers.
Grant remarks that although the Craftsman homes emerged and proliferated the most in California, the Craftsman influence spread rather quickly throughout the United States thanks to the popular press and pattern books around the beginning of the 20th century.
So, now we know that these homes were quite famous, even 100 years back, and remain to influence the most modern and present-day models that are mainly based on the traditional layouts of that time.
These are primarily witnessed in mountainous or forest regions that demand a greater degree of antiquated simplicity which the traditional Craftsman designs essentially stand for.
Conclusion
Thus, it could be inferred that the Craftsman House Style had been one of the earliest and most celebrated inventions of the modern period which heralded a new age in the architectural field. It was also a time period that had begun to form after a reign of utter unrest between the social classes.
So, the emergence of such a style that brings the most beautiful and marvelous aspects of both vintage and modern worlds together in a stunning balance is definitely one thing the world could never have had enough of.
And, on the same note, we could say that this game-changer of a style is yet to open up astonishing new designs as of yet for future generations to marvel at!
What is the best game engine? Why should you use a game engine in the first place?
Gaming has seen a total revolution – from independent (indie) games to Triple-A (AAA) games. But there has been an exponential rise in the popularity of indie games in the last couple of decades.
What is an indie game? It is an independently created and published game without the backing of a big publisher. If you are an individual or a team of game developers sans an extravagant budget, you will be developing indie games.
So how does a game engine come into the picture for an indie game developer? A game engine helps solve some problems that may arise in the development of any game. It is a software framework or environment that pre-designs physics, user input, rendering, lighting, and other aspects.
Given the budget constraint for indie game developers, we should only be concerned about free game engines.
There are many free game engines available today. And choosing the best free game engine can be challenging, especially for beginners who have limited game development experience.
So, here is a list of the best free game engines for professionals and beginners. Make sure you stick around till the end to get some valuable insight about how to select a game engine.
If you have been using or want to learn to use Blender, Armory is the best free game engine for you. Blender is one of the most renowned free, open-source 3D graphics applications. Blender had its game engine, which was recently removed.
Armory has been built in the Kha-multimedia framework using Haxe programming. It features full Blender integration so you can do all your game development work in one space. Who likes switching to and fro between multiple applications?
We especially liked Armory’s nodes orientation, which enhances performance without complicated setup. Armory’s render system includes pre-compiled materials and fully scriptable render paths.
The Armory game engine is a one-stop solution for 3D game development in Blender. It has the following features:
Physics
Audio
Rendering
Scripting
Networking
Navigation
A key highlight of this engine is that it prevents large package sizes through asset compression, efficient build tools, and binary data format. Armory employs a top-notch animation system that supports events, action blending, and GPU skinning.
Armory is compatible with various platforms, including:
Unity is one of the market leaders in game development, with many popular games like Rimworld, Pokemon Go, and Hearthstone under its belt. It boasts of an advanced rendering engine, a real-time platform, and pre-made assets. You can create a basic prototype easily and quickly using Unity.
Here is a list of some of the win-win features of Unity that explain why nearly half of all the games in the world are created using it.
Unity’s all-in-one editor supports 2D as well as 3D development.
It is compatible with Mac, Windows, and Linux.
It includes a comprehensive suite of developer tools as well as a wide range of artist-friendly tools.
Unity Prefabs are preconfigured objects that you can use in the game.
It supports over 25 platforms across desktop, mobile, VR, AR, Web, and TV.
You can use Unity to build light, small, and fast instant games.
With Unity, you can avail the benefits of game server hosting from Multiplay and game communications from Vivox.
Unity’s cloud diagnostics allow you to get real-time feedback.
You need to know that Unity is not 100% free. If your revenue or funding exceeds $100K per year, then you have to choose from Unity Plus at $25 per month or Unity Pro at $125 per month.
We recommend Godot engine for developing 2D games. It works well with 3D development too but has a considerable edge when it comes to 2D games. Godot’s fully dedicated 2D engine comes with these features:
Use pixel units to scale to any aspect ratio and screen size.
Choose from spite-based or cut-out animation.
A more realistic look with the help of normal maps and 2D lights.
Rotation, auto-tiling, multiple layers, and custom grid shapes.
You will also like the following overall features of Godot:
It has hundreds of in-built nodes and allows you to create customized nodes.
Godot Visual Editor has an efficient and context-sensitive interface.
It features physically-based rendering with complete MSAA support.
Its global illumination provides beautiful real-time graphics.
It supports various scripts and codes, including C++, GDScript, C# 7.0, and visual scripting.
Troubleshoot runtime errors and bottlenecks with its in-built debugger.
It is compatible with almost all desktop operating systems.
It can be used to deploy your developed games across many platforms.
If you want a dedicated game engine for 2D game development, try Defold. A couple of popular games that have reaped the benefits of using Defold are Pet Rescue Puzzle Saga and Blastlands. While it is possible to develop 3D games using Defold, it will require most of the heavy lifting to be done by you – the developer.
Defold can be used to publish your games to six platforms:
HTML5
Android
iOS
Linux
Windows
Mac
Defold uses the OpenGL ES 2.0 for rendering graphics. It uses lightweight and powerful Lua programming language. It is an effective one-stop solution for 2D game development. There are various in-built tutorials to help you get accustomed to the engine.
Defold allows you to add your native code and extend the engine, as well as setup local build environments – flexibility and customization at its best! You can even integrate your projects with external tools like Spine, Tiled, and Atom.
A list of the best game engines will be incomplete without Unreal Engine. It is our top pick for professional developers and experts who aim to develop AAA games. Beginners should not feel left out – you can use Blueprint, which lets you use Unreal Engine even if you do not have extensive coding knowledge.
Some of the popular games that have been created using this powerful engine include Abzu, Snake Pass, Street Fighter V, Batman: Return to Arkham Asylum, Fortnite, GTA V, and Kingdom Hearts III. If you want to create a high-end game with stunning graphics, this is the perfect game engine for you.
The only other free game engine in this list that can compete with Unreal’s graphics is CryEngine. But Unreal gains a competitive edge as it is more user-friendly. Unreal Engine has its asset marketplace, but it is not as good as Unity’s asset marketplace.
It is a dependable cross-platform engine that supports 2D as well as 3D game development.
CryEngine is one of the premium 3D game engines in our list of recommendations. If you are looking for the best graphics and breathtaking visuals, this game engine will not disappoint. Using CryEngine can seem challenging to beginners, but the learning curve gets more straightforward with the help of:
Clear and easy-to-follow tutorials.
Full source code.
Detailed documentation.
Great development community.
Ready-to-use assets in the marketplace.
One of the advantages of using CryEngine is that you get unparalleled VR support. It packs all the tools you need for creating AAA games. Some of the popular games that have been created using it are:
Aporia: Beyond the Valley
The Climb
Hunt: Showdown
Miscreated
SNOW
War of Rights
Lichdom: Battlemage
CryEngine has many win-win features that you are bound to love. Here is a list of some of its features that convinced us to include it in our list of recommendations:
Sandbox has a suite of efficient WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) tools that allow real-time creation, editing, and a preview of each feature and aspect of a game.
It has the Audio Controls Editor (ACE) and the Audio Translation Layer (ATL).
It supports multiple platforms like Windows PC, Oculus Rift, PlayStation 4, and Xbox One.
Although CryEngine is free to use, you have to pay 5% royalty when publishing a commercial game developed using it.
Phaser is one of the most straightforward game engines in this list. It is an open-source framework that allows you to build HTML5 games for mobile and desktop straight from your browser. It relies significantly on Flixel.
If you are a beginner who wants to learn 2D game development, Phaser is the perfect game engine for you. Phaser has many tutorials and examples to help you learn and master an array of game development skills.
If you have some experience in Flash and web development, using this engine will feel like a piece of cake! The only drawback is that Phaser is not 100% free and many of its features can be unlocked with purchase.
Pool Club, Magikmon, and Stranger Things: Monster Flash are some of the recent popular games created using Phaser.
Some of the top-notch features of Phaser are:
It supports legacy HTML Audio as well as Web Audio.
If you are an XNA developer on Windows or Xbox 360 who wants to port games to other platforms like Android, iOS, Mac, and so on, MonoGame is the ideal game engine for you. It is an open source framework with a community comprising of thousands of games.
If you have used C# or Microsoft’s .NET languages, developing games using MonoGame will feel like a walk in the park! If you are a beginner, you can benefit from the active community of MonoGame users. One of the most popular games that have been created using this game engine is Stardew Valley.
Despite its many features, MonoGame does not provide adequate features and tools for non-coders to use it. If you do not have coding knowledge, using this game engine can be a real hassle initially. You can use 2MGFX for compiling stand-alone effects and MGCB for building pipeline content.
Corona is an excellent cross-platform 2D framework for game development. Unlike some premium engines, there are no hidden royalties or charges – it is 100% free. When you opt for Corona, you get some excellent benefits like:
A dedicated, comprehensive community of developers and the Corona support team.
Open source code allows you to add features as per your requirements.
A robust marketplace that is full of graphical assets, sound effects, plugins, and project templates.
You get priority support from the Corona engineering team.
It is ideal for creating apps and games for desktop and mobile devices. It uses the easy-to-learn and powerful Lua language along with native extensions for C, C++, Java, and Obj-C. We especially liked the option to view and monitor projects instantly across multiple devices with the help of Live Builds.
You can use Corona to publish your developed games to a variety of significant platforms without having to rewrite the code. The Corona Simulator instantly responds to changes in the code.
Game Maker Studio supports both 3D and 2D game development. Some of the popular games created using this engine include:
Hotline Miami
Undertale
Hyper Light Drifter
Orphan
Whether you want to create simple 2D games or AAA 3D games, this game engine has the tools and features to get the job done. One of the most versatile engines on this list, it works perfectly for beginners as well as professional game studios.
Here is a list of the best features of GameMaker Studio:
It has a custom scripting language and a dynamic physics engine.
Its intuitive drag and drop feature allows you to create games without writing any code.
It has a Room Editor that gives you complete control of layers, inheritance, and tile brushes.
The Image Editor provides animation support and allows brush-based editing.
GameSalad is the perfect game engine for beginners. Even if you have zero knowledge of coding, you will not find it challenging to create and publish games using this engine. The drag-and-drop scripting feature allows you to develop behaviors effortlessly.
It is an efficient engine for creating 2D games. It does not have a lot of features or stunning graphics capabilities like some of the premium engines we have reviewed in this list. You can use it to create games that apply simple rules to objects. Some of the games created using this engine are Milo & Me, Steam Punks, Super Spin Tanks, and Help Volty.
GameSalad has been used for teaching programming skills. It can publish to multiple platforms including mobile, web, and PC. You can benefit from its extensive community and reliable support.
The only demerit we could identify with this engine is that it has limited features and a subscription system for its Pro version.
Construct 2
Construct 2 is an exceptional game engine for creating 2D games. It comes equipped with a highly intuitive drag-and-drop feature that makes the learning curve fast and straightforward. If you frequently use Microsoft products, you will appreciate the interface of this engine, which is very similar.
It does not have a Mac OS version. The games you develop using this engine can be exported as HTML5 only, so you may have to use a third-party service to convert to other platforms like Android and iOS.
Some of the games created with this engine are the Next Penelope, Airscape, Mortar Melon, Cosmochoria, and Super Ubie Island.
It is not 100% free. After using the free trial version, you can unlock all of its features for $80. It also has a robust marketplace consisting of several plugins.
Amazon has diversified into the game development industry with its Lumberyard Game Engine. It can integrate directly with Twitch. If you are looking to build games that are equally fun to watch and play, this is the game engine you should be using. Fabulous performance and top-notch visuals are guaranteed with this engine.
Its source code is written in C++ and is open to developers, adding a ton of flexibility and control over each aspect and feature of the game in development. We especially liked the thoughtful inclusion of a comprehensive suite of tools for artists, including:
Dynamic global illumination
Particle effects
Volumetric Fog
Physically-based shaders
Some of the features of Amazon Lumberyard that make it a noteworthy inclusion in this list are:
It supports cloud integration.
It has built-in multiplayer deployment.
It has mod-friendly support.
Guidelines for Game Developers
Choosing the right game engine is crucial to ensure that your game development endeavors do not go in vain. There are many factors to consider when selecting the optimal game engine. These guidelines will help you pick the perfect option.
Features of a Game Engine
You need to know what features you need for the game you wish to develop. The majority of game engines offer four types of functions:
Coding – You may come across a game engine that has its scripting language, making it extremely easy for beginners to learn to code. On the contrary, there are game engines that rely on established scripting languages that you can master to gain total control over the game.
Drag and drop – One of the features that require zero coding knowledge is drag and drop. You can choose properties or events from a comprehensive list and drag and drop them to create them.
Full game templates – A full game template is a significant blessing for beginners. You get a ready-made game where you may change minor details. You can import your artwork or move some sliders to alter essential elements.
Visual Scripting – It is the best feature for beginners who want to understand how the code works but do not know how to code. You won’t have to type codes; instead, you can choose various functions that replicate conventional code. It is more effective than drag and drop but can take a while to learn and master.
Other Factors
There are some other factors that you should consider before choosing a game engine.
Game Genre – If you are developing genre-specific games, you should choose an engine for that specific genre. You may use the Adventure Game Studio for creating adventure games or the RPG Maker for creating role-playing games.
Perspective – You can choose either a 2D or 3D perspective for your games. Most of the new game engines support both 2D and 3D. 3D game engines are relatively complicated and involve a steep learning curve.
Computer – Are you using a Mac or a PC? There are a few engines that do not support both systems. Your computer specifications have to be good enough to run more powerful game engines.
Art Skills – You get in-built visual editors with some game engines, enabling you to create art – terrain maps or pixel art. You can choose to import backgrounds and characters from other programs.
Target Platform – Every game engine is not equipped to develop games for all platforms. Where do you want your game to be available – web, Android, iOS, PC, Mac, or VR? Choose a game engine compatible with your target platform.
Game Genres
The selection of a game engine depends much on the genre of the game you wish to develop. There are four game genres:
Simple 2D Games – It is the most straightforward game genre, but you will still have to invest some time to get used to the game engine. You can use drag-and-drop engines to develop 2D arcade games, puzzles, text adventures, and racing games.
Simple 3D Games – Developing 3D games is more complicated than 2D. 3D game engines are sophisticated and require considerable time and effort on your part to learn and master. You can develop survival games, adventure games, and first-person shooting games.
Complex 2D Games – Complex 2D games rely on AI, physics, multiple features, or multiplayer. You can create adventure games, fighting games, tower defense, and role-playing games using sophisticated 2D engines.
Complex 3D Games – Complex 3D games are meant for professionals and experts. Beginners will likely find it next to impossible to develop one of these games. It includes vehicle simulation, real-time strategy, sports, MMO, MOBA, VR, life simulation, and war games.
Final Words
Beginners will face a steeper learning curve, irrespective of which game engine they use. We have shortlisted 13 of the most user-friendly and productive game engines, which will surely be capable of developing your dream game.
Picking one of the 13 recommended engines depends on your requirements, but we hope our guidelines and tips help you make that choice.
Till next time!
Aspiring to create your very own indie game? But having trouble picking the right game-designing platform to do it on?
Then let us help you out a bit with that today.
When it comes to game designing software, Godot is going to be one of the very best in the current market. From supporting a wide variety of tools to boasting user-friendly and versatile coding features, it offers way more than most of its competitors.
However, Godot can feel a bit complicated to the newer user. And so if you are having trouble grasping some of the basic concepts of this platform, then we have just the perfect article for you.
Today we bring you a list of some of the best video tutorials on Godot, which are bound to help you get comfortable with the platform in almost no time.
The Platform Game Tutorial on 2D and 3D game designing from HeartBeast is one of the more detailed YouTube videos out there on mastering the platform.
It runs for about 27 minutes, and in that time span, the video will try and teach you the very basics of Godot and also guide you through making a very basic platformer game from scratch.
Now, HeartBeast as a YouTube channel is a treasure chest of some of the most incredible and easy-to-follow game development guides this video about Godot for beginners takes the spotlight because of how effective it is at teaching the amateur about the platform.
The video is very conveniently divided into two sections so that it’s easier to grasp. One section deals with coding while the other lays great stress on the importance of design work and how to incorporate them into the game.
However, design work will need some custom game assets beforehand for it to work. If you already have a nice collection of them or know some amazing websites which house some excellent 2D and 3D game assets and sprites, then you’re all set.
But make sure that you have some basic scripting knowledge before diving headfirst into the tutorial.
When it comes to Godot tutorials for the Windows OS, there are not many videos that are as effective as this getting started guide.
This video will help you get a jump start right away and teach you about the entire Godot basics from start to finish.
Although the Godot setup and basic tool use is quite similar to that of Mac and Linux, there are still some minor features here and there which differ, and can get quite complicated for newer users.
This guide is just amazing when it comes to helping amateur developers have a better grasp of the various aspects of Godot 3 and even help them with making some demo projects and teaching them to learn as they experiment with the various tools.
The main webpage of the YouTuber has a lot of demos that are up for grabs. You can download them and see how the creator went about making this side-scroller game and how to incorporate the various game assets into the program.
Moreover, these demos will also allow you to have free access to some great coding samples, to study and learn from.
In Godot or in any other game designing software out there 3D model and environment making are significantly more difficult than their 2D counterparts. This fact is especially true for side scroller games, and there are a lot of things that one needs to keep in mind before venturing into making their first 3D project.
Needless to say, it can indeed be quite daunting for the newer users or even some more adept ones to get a complete and proper understanding of this aspect of the platform.
And that is precisely where this video tutorial comes in. It’s specially designed to get you started with a free guide on making a very easy game based on golf physics and very easy gameplay and design mechanics.
In the tutorial, you will learn to take a bunch of different objects and shapes and move them around in the virtual world.
Jeremy Bullock, the instructor, has an amazing tutoring style, which is quite easy to follow, and even if you have a minimal background in game design, you will still not find this tutorial to be all that complicated.
The GDquest youtube channel is a rockstar in the animation and game-designing world. From housing some of the most amazing tutorials on the use of FireAlpaca and Krita, it also has quite a number of incredible guides on video game design along with character creation.
The Introduction to Tileset video from them is a basic introduction for amateurs in the use of tilesets in Godot. Tilesets are one of the most important aspects of world creation in both ‘top-down’ as well as ‘side-scroller’ games.
Hence, having a complete grasp of them is essential, to say the least. And this video will help you to get acquainted with all the basics of tilesets use in Godot.
The video also provides links to the main webpage which houses a lot of the premade tilesets, so you will have some graphics ready to use for your project at a moment's notice.
For just an 8-minute long video, this one is amazingly detailed and covers more than just the basics, and goes into some of the more advanced 2D tileset features as well.
However, this is not the only Godot tutorial in the channel; you can check out some of the others as well.
Remember those childhood days (depending on when and where you were born) when the first generation of Pokémon games came out for the Nintendo and Game Boy?
That was a rather exciting time for the world of video gaming, wasn’t it?
Well, you can also create a similar game like FireRed and LeafGreen too, and Stein Codes in this video will tell you exactly how.
Games then were all pixel art, sprites, and basic game assets, and the video will teach you exactly how to replicate the various game elements from those early Pokémon games and incorporate them into your very own project.
You will learn how to precisely create the overworld sprites from Pokémon characters as well as how to create a fluid movement around the various objects in the game. The video will help you to try your own hand at making a game reminiscent of those initial Nintendo titles.
So if you’re aspiring to create something like Chrono Trigger, Final Fantasy, or just your very own bootleg Pokémon or Digimon game this video is a must-watch.
However, this one is just the first part of a longer series that is yet to be uploaded by the creator, so do follow the channel for his upcoming content.
This is again a very practical Godot tutorial guide from GDquest and deals mostly with the creation of base character models both in 2D and 3D rendering qualities.
One great thing about this tutorial is that though it comes from GDquest’s more premium library, it's free access, and download.
The tutorial dives right into the topic of character creation but doesn’t deal with the modeling aspect of it alone. It also teaches about character movement and how to navigate the game assets around to best fit the environment.
Additionally, with this video and the associated GDquest course, you will have a premade graphics and scene setup, which you can use to learn how character modeling and movement actually work.
However, in terms of the complete coding algorithm, GDquest doesn’t go into too much detail about it in the video. As it’s a free preview, GDquest has kept the coding tutorials for the premium library which you will have to pay for on their Gumroad website.
But for beginners, this video is more than enough to get them started, and then they can opt into their more premium content if they like their tutoring style.
Now, this amazingly detailed game design tutorial from Jeremy Bullock is suited more for adept Godot users who have a nice idea about coding and are intermediate coders themselves.
This tutorial is a multi-part video that covers some of the basic aspects of first-person control features. All of the code that goes behind making the game present on the tutorial is available for free on GitHub, so if you want to take a final look at the game yourself, then you can access it whenever you want.
The tutorial combines a great deal of 3D knowledge for setting up the scene, as well as the camera along with the controller and certain movements like climbing the stairs and walking forward.
However, even though we are recommending this tutorial for the more advanced Godot users, that doesn’t necessarily mean that the newer designers will not benefit from it.
The video is very easy to follow, and Jeremy Bullock does a great job in step-by-step showing all the various things that one can do with this amazing game-designing platform.
So even if you’re not all that good with Godot yet, give this video a watch.
This tutorial from Stein Codes is much more useful for intermediate Godot users than the newer beginners who are yet not completely familiar with the platform.
Godot contains some of the most versatile range of shader types, which, when used efficiently, can be the difference between a good game design and a great game design.
Now, in the video, Stein teaches how to create a complete side-scrolling game from scratch with the help of just shaders. He takes the existing shading options present in the software and spins them into something amazing.
Moreover, the Godot shading language that Stein uses in the tutorial is up for grabs for anyone who is trying to replicate what he exactly did, or even to study coding in itself. The code comes as a part of the tutorial, and beginner Godot users can take a look at the code and get an idea as to what is possible with this amazing platform and what isn’t.
Some parts of the tutorial might look rather complicated to even some adept Godot users, as Stein goes into a lot of detail, but it’s important to tackle this subject a bit at a time.
It seems like GDquest has done a tutorial on almost everything now, doesn’t it? Well, it’s not all that surprising when considering the fact that there is a vast community of professional game designers who’re behind the making and content of this channel.
However, unlike some of their other tutorial videos which deal with particular designing aspects in Godot 3, this one is created solely on Godot 2.
There are some interface changes between the two models and versions, but all in all, in terms of functionality and the things that you can do with them, they are quite similar. Hence, you’re not going to have too much problem implementing all those lessons in Godot 3 itself.
Coding horizontal movement for your characters and in-game sprites is one of the easiest things to do on Godot. But there are some beginners out there who are having some trouble grasping the basics of horizontal movement, and for them, this video tutorial is a must-watch.
However, even though achieving the whole movement is easy, there are certain aspects of this that are a bit lengthy and complicated. And this video does an excellent job of not just covering the basics but complex scripting issues as well.
Making 3D games, even just basic side-scrolling ones is so much harder than making their 2D counterpart.
Hence, this particular topic does tend to deserve more care and minute attention than some other parts and features of Godot.
Now, as this video from Mr. Jed doesn’t go too much into the scripting process of making 3D games, you can search online for a few free-to-download codes to work with this tutorial and help you out with the learning process.
This video teaches you how exactly cameras and angling work in a 3D platformer. In just 12 minutes the YouTuber talk about the camera rig in Godot 3D and how one can efficiently go about to set up a rig which apart from being fully expandable is easy to manage as well.
However, though the video can be very educational for beginners, we would still recommend it for those who are a bit comfortable with the basics of creating new files for a game in Godot.
Having a pre-existing idea of how to set up a 3D world helps as well. For only when you’re comfortable with the basics can you move on to camera work?
The Game Interface from Scratch is the final tutorial mentioned on our list; it’s also the longest one and comes yet again from GDquest.
Now, a game interface is the first thing that attracts the gamer and is one of the most integral parts of gameplay that allows it to be accessible to a wider audience.
Most games, follow a very similar gameplay interface trope, from having a health bar for indicating the total HP, to showing a separate bar just below for the available mana, SP, or even the number of lives that the player is left with.
So, this amazingly detailed 30-minute video will show you exactly how to design a custom game interface all within Godot.
However, the video will be using some preexisting graphics for the coding aspect, so if you have some already in your library, feel free to use them as you go along implementing the lesson.
But, if you don’t have any sort of graphics with you; the video provides a link from where you can download them for free and use them accordingly.
The guide touches upon some of the most basic aspects of interface design, which are incredibly important for those who are learning how to develop their very own indie game.
Final Thoughts
With so many versatile and user-friendly tools to work with, it’s honestly not surprising why Godot has been such a fan favorite for so long. So, we hope that our list today was able to help you out with using this amazing game-designing platform.
3D tiles have become a prevalent element in contemporary dream homes and designer studios. The intricate detailing offered by high-end tiles provides depth and texture in a simple form that discreetly animates the setting without interfering with additional design elements, ensuring a balance between visual appeal and functional features. One notable advantage of 3D tiles is their ability to improve soundproofing, thanks to their unique shapes that break down sound waves. This curated list showcases 25 of the most spectacular 3D wall tile designs, ranging from simple geometric rectangular patterns to elaborate honeycomb and kaleidoscope motifs.
Take a look and find inspiration for your next project, where the 3D effect can enhance both aesthetic appeal and acoustic performance.
3D Wall Tile Designs
1. Fap Ceramiche and The Lumina Tile
2. Hexagonal volumes - The Alexander Tile in ceramic designed by Giles Miller
3. The Diamond 3D Wall Tile envisioned by atlas concorde
4. The Tierras Wall Tile- intricate volumes by Patricia Urquiola for Mutina
5. Neutral - The Grid Tile - atlas concorde
6. Simply Beautiful - The Sensory by Victor Carrasco for Alea
7. Concrete and wood combo -The Dune Wall Tiles by urbanproduct
8. The Edgy Wall Tiles by Patrycja Domanska and Tanya Lightfoot for KAZA Concrete
9. Indigo Acoustic Tiles resembling rocks by Luffa Lab
10. The Creta wall tiles designed by Fap Ceramiche
11. Miranda textile wall installation envisioned by Giles Miller
12. Organic- The Craters Wall Tiles by Surface Collective
13. Geometric patterns The Versatile Collection by Kutahya
14. Intricate texture - The Wave Tiles designed by Scott Daniel
15. Elegant organic CAST concrete tiles from inhabit
16. Diamante 74300 ceramic tile featured at Academy Tiles
17. Piega Wall Tile by 3D Surface
18. Porcelanosa Presents The Dover Spiga Caliza Tile
19. The Optic Hex Elliptical Tiles designed by OGASSIAN
20. The organic Ripple Wall Tile designed by Mio Culture
21. Rombini collection of tiles designed by Ronan & Erwan Bouroullec
22. The Crush Wall Tile- origami-inspired 3d wall art by modularArts
23. Immersive 3d wall art - The Kaleidoscope Wall Tile by inhabit
24. Shade illusion - The Capitonne tile designed by 3D Surface
25. The Zelle Tile - parametric design by modularArts
How do you see this selection of 3D wall tile designs? We would love to hear your opinion on the subject in the comment section below.
Basements are mostly dark and compact spaces with very little natural lighting. So, deciding on designing or choosing thebest ceiling paintcan be more difficult than doing so in any other room.
One of the newest additions to interior decoration is exposed basement ceilings. While there are some excellent old-school and contemporary basement ceiling designs, going all bare-bones with the ceiling can give your basement an edgy look. Moreover, an exposed ceiling gives you easy access to the wiring and plumbing.
Whether you go for an exposed industrial vibe or a nicely painted but covered ceiling, the tucked-away basement space will give you a chance to be creative.
Need some pointers on how to get started and see the project through? Worry no more! We have compiled a comprehensive guide that will help with it.
So, without further ado, let’s jump right into it.
Best Ceiling Paint For Unfinished Basement Ceiling
There is no lack of appealing colors for your ceilings. But in most cases, white, gray, or black paint is used for unfinished basement ceilings. The following are some of the perks of this basic color palette for your exposed ceiling.
1. White
Basements are generally darker, but with a white ceiling, you can have a bright basement space where different bright colors will suit well for walls, decor, or furniture. One of the best colors for an exposed ceiling, the illuminating color of white enhances the lighting in the basement space.
White is versatile precisely because it reflects more light, making your basement look bright, colorful, and fresh. Hence, a basement with white ceilings is excellent as a playroom, craft room for kids, or vibrant living space.
However, if you intend to hide flaws in the ceilings, white is not your best choice. It has low coverage and usually needs several coatings. White also needs special primers to prevent it from gradually yellowing with time. As it involves several factors to be taken care of, painting your basement ceiling white will be time-consuming and more expensive than the alternatives.
2. Black
Many people will not find black the best choice for their exposed basement ceiling. It might seem like a confusing choice considering it’s too dull for a dingy basement space. But trust us when we say that a black basement ceiling offers a plethora of advantages.
The disguising black hide any flaw your unfinished basement ceiling may have and makes it look sleek and stylish. It generates a smooth synergy of colors between the exposed pipes and wires. A black ceiling also helps other colors of the basement walls and furniture to pop, giving you the liberty to choose either neutral or bright colors for the furniture or walls.
With its bold tones, black will add a certain charm to the exposed ceiling. It is a particularly fantastic choice for exposed basement ceilings of old houses. Darker colors also make a space feel warm and cozy.
However, the disadvantage of painting your basement ceiling black is that it may make the ceiling seem lower. Also, the basement ceiling acquires a lot of cobwebs, gunk, and dust. These will stand out even more with an exposed black ceiling. So, if your basement has absolutely no natural light source, black might not be ideal for you.
3. Gray
Don’t know which color to choose for your basement ceiling? Go for gray. It’s neither as dark as black nor as low coverage as white. Gray-painted basement ceilings look excellent if you have a comparatively darker basement. As it provides better coverage than white, fewer layers will do the job.
Gray might sound like a boring color, but it’s actually available in a number of shades. There are gray shades mixed with other colors as well. For instance, a gray shade with hints of red accents will provide ample lighting. So, if you plan to transform your basement into a hobby room, gray shades will be ideal.
4. Sky Blue
Painting your basement ceiling in a non-neutral color might be an unorthodox choice. But if executed correctly with the right shades, it will render fantastic results. And if you are going for a non-neutral color, why not paint your ceiling like a bright sky?
To make your basement feel more like an open space, pair up sky-blue ceilings with off-white basement walls. The contrast between the two colors will make the ceiling stand out. A sky-blue ceiling is playful and turns your basement into a welcoming and playful space.
Estimated Cost To Paint An Exposed Basement Ceiling
The average expense of paint for basement ceilings depends on the size of the basement and the materials you choose to use. However, the cost of painting an exposed basement ceiling is a little higher because of the ducts and beams. In the below table, we have detailed an estimated expenditure for you to expect if you are planning to paint an exposed basement ceiling.
Average Cost
$260
Average Range
$125 - $300
Minimum cost
$50
Maximum cost
$2,500
Benefits Of Painting Exposed Basement Ceilings
Aesthetics
Exposed ceilings have become quite fashionable in recent years. With the exposed pipes, beams, and wires, such ceilings bring an industrial vibe to the space. Painting this ductwork will add a shine and pop to your basement.
Better Lighting
Painting an exposed basement ceiling white will not only upgrade the whole look but also reflect more light in the otherwise dark space. That way, your basement will look much brighter and larger.
Budget-friendly
Paying a professional to drywall the exposed basement ceiling will be heavy on your pocket. On the other hand, painting the ceiling is a much cheaper option. And if you already have a paint sprayer, all you need is the paint, primer, and a weekend!
Saves Time
Putting up drywall on the exposed basement ceiling involves a lot of work and thus, takes up a significant amount of time. But if you spray paint your basement ceiling with a spray gun, putting one layer will take just a couple of hours. While you need only a few hours for each layer to dry, drywalling your ceiling may take days to complete.
Shopping List For Your Next Painting Project
To paint the basement ceiling, you will need the below-mentioned items.
Low VOC interior paint (as per your choice)
Primer
Protective gloves
Painter’s tape
Overalls
Respirators
Dust mask
Exhaust fan
Lead testing kit
Turpentine
Cleaner (preferably citrus-based)
Vacuum Cleaner
Broom and cleaning brush
How To Paint An Exposed Basement Ceiling?
If you are not a professional, being confused abouthow to paint a ceiling is evident. It is even more relevant if you are planning to paint an exposed basement.
You can follow the below steps to complete the task at hand.
Step 1 - Secure The Area
As the first step, cover the unfinished basement area you are working on. Instead of plastic coverings, using a drop cloth on the floor will prevent the floor from getting stained and will provide a better grip. If you are using spray paint, it might result in some overspray. To avoid this, hang plastic covers over your walls.
Step 2 - Check The Vents And Pipes
Painting an exposed basement ceiling can be a tricky business. If it’s an old house, the chances of vents and pipes becoming loose is high. So, make sure the exposed pipes, wires, and beams are secured and are not in need of any maintenance.
Adjust them according to your requirements. You can even use sturdy wires to secure the beams tightly.
Step 3 - Trim The Sticking-out Nails
Check whether your basement ceiling has any long nails protruding from the upper floor. You can use a rotary tool to trim them. It is important to trim the nails for leveling them with the ceiling as it makes the paint job much smoother and safer.
Step 4 - Set Up Ventilation
After securing the work area, you need to set up ventilation. This way, air from the work area will be pulled outside. Good ventilation will help you minimize overspray and keep the toxic fumes out of the basement.
Step 5 - Fill In The Gaps
Having gaps in the exposed ceiling will make the painting process inconsistent. Foam insulation is a great ingredient to fill in the gaps and create a smooth surface for you to paint on.
Step 6 - Securing The Equipment
Cover the exterior of the paint sprayer, handle, and hose with spray silicone for convenient cleaning up. It will stop the paint from sticking to the outside of the sprayer and make cleaning up afterward much easier.
Step 7 - Clean The Ceiling
Now that you have placed the necessary preparation, it is time to start cleaning the ceiling. Use a broom for initial cleaning. You can also use a vacuum to nicely clean up the built-up cobwebs. Then use a fine and thick brush to scrub down the remaining dust, cobweb particles, and gunk.
If your basement ceiling has stubborn dirt sticking to it, using an air compressor will be a good idea to clean up the debris.
Step 8 - Apply Primer
After cleaning up the ceiling, apply primer to the ducts, pipes, ductwork, rafters, and wires you plan to paint. Choose a primer that matches the color you intend to use. Primer will help the paint to stick on the surface properly. If you are using gray or black paint, choose a primer that has a gray tint for more coverage.
If you opt for a white ceiling, cover the wood with a sturdy primer to prevent the color from fading over time. Using a primer with shellac is the best way to go with white paint.
Start spraying the primer all over the ceiling surface and cover the ducts and pipes first. Every joist has to be covered with primer for the results. So, pay attention to the difficult corners of the ducts and beams. You need to maneuver the spray gun with quick moves for an even layer. Make sure you use your arm instead of just the wrist.
Avoid spraying on the same patch for too long, as that may cause the primer to drip. After you apply the first coat, wait for some time and let it dry before you apply another. Check if you have covered all the areas you intend to paint. Don’t paint over the primer unless it’s absolutely dry.
Spray Or Brush?
While many people use a traditional paintbrush or paint roller to paint their ceilings, using an airless sprayer to paint the exposed basement ceiling will produce the best results. Just ensure that the spray nozzle is lightweight.
If the basement ceiling is made of wood, you will require extra primer and paint. When it comes to exposed basement ceilings, keep in mind that with joists, pipes, or wires, the surface area will be two times more than the surface of a flat ceiling.
If you want full coverage, an exposed basement ceiling requires at least three coats of paint on average. Use a ladder to get access to every edge. But do remember that painting with a brush or a roller would be much more tricky and time-consuming.
In case you have decided to ditch the good old brush and go with the spray gun instead, your job will be much easier. Start spraying the paint evenly on the exposed basement ceiling. Then move your paint sprayer through all the edges of ducts and pipes. You don’t want to spray in one area for too long as that would cause drip.
Let the first coat dry completely. After that, check if you have missed any corners, and start applying the second coat. Also, ensure that you smoothen out any remaining drips before the paint dries off.
Tips For Painting Basement Ceilings
For a clean and efficient process, invest in an airless paint sprayer.
Buying a 5-gallon paint will be much more cost-effective than buying in small quantities.
It is always better to have a surplus of ingredients when you are not an expert on the task.
Do remember to cover yourself with overalls.
Finish painting the entire ceiling the same day with all the pipes, wires, and ductwork.
If you are painting the ceiling black, use less paint in each layer for better and smoother coverage.
Blue painter’s tape does not stick well to concrete walls
Taping the room is likely to take much longer than the whole painting process with a paint sprayer, and start the work with ample time on your hands.
What is the minimum height for a basement ceiling?
The allowed measurements for the height of the basement ceiling vary based on the locality you live in. However, the International Residential Code requires the ceiling of basement space to be at least 7 feet of clear floor-to-basement height. Exceptions to this code depend on the existing beams, ducts, and mechanical systems attached to the ceiling.
But those must have a space of at least 4 feet between them and must not extend beyond 6 inches below the basement ceiling.
Should I insulate the basement ceiling before painting it?
If your basement ceiling is not already insulated, we recommend promptly getting it done before you start painting the ceiling. The basement is one of the spaces of your house that is prone to losing heat.
So, if the basement ceiling is insulated, you will have a more comfortable and energy-efficient space. Another perk of having an insulated basement ceiling is that it considerably diminishes any noise between the basement and the upper floor.
To insulate the basement ceiling, people mostly use rolled fiberglass batting. It is essentially fiberglass placed between two paper sheets. You can also use spray foam insulation for the same.
Can I paint the wires of the basement ceiling?
Yes, you can paint wires in an unfinished basement ceiling. Painting them will only change their look and won’t interfere with their efficiency. If the wires do not match the color you are going with, painting the wires will be a good idea to make the ceiling look smooth and uniform. Also, spray painting the wires is the easiest way to get it done.
Note that painting over wires attached to your basement ceiling is safe. However, make sure the outlets and switches are covered with painter’s tape.
Can I paint the ducts and pipes attached to the exposed basement ceiling?
Yes, you can paint the exposed ducts and pipes on the basement ceiling. It is a good idea to keep their visibility to the minimum while still maintaining the industrial look.
Pipes and ducts can be made of various materials like PVC, metal, etc. So, ensure that you use a primer to make the paint stick to the duct’s surface better and last longer.
What kind of paint should I use on an exposed basement ceiling?
Choosing the right paint for your basement ceilings is important to yield the best result and make it last longer. If you are not a professional, then latex paint is the ideal option when it comes to painting a basement ceiling. They are easier to apply and easier to clean and dry much faster than the alternatives.
Such ceiling paint doesn’t result in too much fading or peeling, and the shine lasts longer. They are also non-flammable. Hence amateurs can use it to paint their basement ceilings safely.
What kind of paint should I use to paint the ducts and beams?
It would be best if you paint the ceiling ducts with latex paint. That way, you can easily maneuver within the nooks and crannies of the duct joints.
Latex paint also works very well with the wooden beams of the basement ceiling. Consider mixing paint and primer to save time and effort.
How to properly store excess paint after painting the basement ceiling?
If you are not a professional, estimating the exact amount of required paint is tough. So, you might have some leftover paint. Storing it properly is necessary to make use of it later.
Always store the leftover paint in a dry and cold place - the colder, the better. Place the lid tightly and store the container upside down. If there are children in the house, we suggest storing the paint inside a cabinet that you can lock properly.
Is the marble effect a good look for basement ceilings?
Yes. If done right, the marble effect on the ceiling, instead of a monochrome look, will make the otherwise dark space stand out. Instead of white or black paint, opting for multiple color layers on the basement ceiling to create a marble effect will give your basement an exuberant effect.
Such a ceiling will bring synergy with the other colors in the space and bring a unique warmth to your basement space.
However, painting the basement ceiling with multi-colored layers is on a more difficult spectrum. So, we suggest you hire a professional for the best results.
Are white basement ceilings out of fashion?
If there is something that would never go out of fashion, it’s the color =white. Painting your basement ceiling white is not just about tradition. Homeowners and interior designers alike, most people prefer white for their ceilings because it reflects light.
A white ceiling will reflect more light than the four walls. As basements are mostly dingy, compact spaces almost devoid of natural light, choosing white paint for the basement ceiling is actually a smart idea.
What is a textured ceiling?
Also known as popcorn ceilings, textured ceilings have bumpy surface made of polystyrene or vermiculite. Such coatings block sound from traveling through floors.
There are various advantages of having a textured ceiling in your basement. Some of these are
Textured coating mixtures are available in fine, coarse, and medium grades. The ideal paint for textured ceilings is white, but there is no harm in experimenting with DIY projects.
Despite its useful features, the popularity of textured ceilings has significantly reduced around North America. Textured ceilings are also more prone to acquire dust and different contaminants. Plus, they are more difficult to patch up if you want to have drywall installed. Besides, smooth ceilings reflect more light than popcorn ceilings.
For all the above reasons, people are now more inclined towards smooth or exposed ceilings to give their homes a more trendy interior.
Paint For Basement Ceilings Conclusion
As we wrap up today’s blog, here is a reminder to take all necessary safety measures before and after you are done decorating the basement ceiling. If the basement has a popcorn ceiling, check if you’re using the best ceiling paint for a textured surface. In case you have an unfinished basement ceiling, thoroughly consider the pros and cons of painting it without professional help.
The fun with DIY projects lies in the liberty of creating according to your own style. Whether you decide to opt for a traditional color or an abstract design for your basement ceiling, don’t forget to put some personal touch on it.
So, stay safe from the toxic paint fumes and have fun with some color this weekend!
As a homeowner, maintaining and improving your property is a significant responsibility. Each area of your home serves a unique purpose and has specific requirements for maintenance and repair. Accordingly, attending to your home's maintenance needs is essential in preventing future issues and ensuring the longevity of your investment.
While it's common for homeowners to focus on upgrading and enhancing living spaces like the living room, bedroom, kitchen, and bathroom, the basement often gets overlooked. However, the basement is an equally important area that deserves attention. To transform your basement into a valuable and functional space, you should address various necessary tasks, such as waterproofing, ventilation, and soundproofing. By evaluating the cost of basement waterproofing, and other important improvements, you can make informed decisions to create a comfortable and usable basement environment.
Basements hold great potential, and with proper care and attention to these vital aspects, you can unlock their true value and utility within your home.
Basement Waterproofing Cost
How Important Is My Basement?
During home planning and construction, opting for a basement is advantageous due to its features and purposes. There are different ways to use your basement and here are some excellent ideas:
Storage room for equipment rarely used objects, and other miscellaneous items
Recreational spaces like a home theater, library, bar, children's playroom, gym, and arcade room
Pantry and wine cellar
You can transform your basement into anything with proper planning and execution. Having a basement is beneficial for the household since it's not like any other part of your home. A basement is located below the ground level. Therefore, a basement can serve as private accommodation for your guests or a place where you can be alone. The basement can increase the value of your property since not all homes have a basement.
However, to protect your home's entire structure, your basement should have a strong foundation. While you're enjoying your basement amenities, you may not notice the structural, cosmetic, and systematic issues building up.
Your basement is the most vulnerable part of your home when it comes to flooding. When neglected, flooding can lead to worse problems that can cost you a fortune. Rather than spending on these repairs and remodeling, act immediately. Install basement waterproofing with the top-rated professionals in your locality.
What Is Basement Waterproofing?
Underground spaces naturally have high humidity levels. When groundwater surrounding your basement evaporates, humidity increases and starts crawling into your basement. Moreover, humidity can also be triggered by water seeping into your foundation walls. But most importantly, humidity rises in your basement due to leaks on your basement floors and walls and because of puddles of water. These can happen even when it's not raining.
The healthy and optimal humidity range that makes you comfortable inside your basement is 40% to 60%. Also, 80% is considered extreme humidity. To control moisture in your basement, you can try using a dehumidifier or installing a ventilation system. However, these are only temporary fixes and can’t help during flooding and rainy seasons. This is where basement waterproofing comes into the picture.
Basement waterproofing encompasses a plethora of methods to protect your basement from the penetration of mold, humidity, and floodwater. Since basement waterproofing is a significant alteration in your property's structure, you must plan this carefully. You must prepare a budget for the project.
Options for Waterproofing Your Basement
Before spending your money on basement waterproofing, you need to understand the available options. Take note that there are various basement waterproofing solutions, so your expenses can vary significantly.
Choosing the right basement waterproofing solution isn't based on your preference. It primarily depends on the type and severity of damage to the basement's structure. Also, the water source is a huge factor in identifying which approach to utilize.
Not all basements may require a complete waterproofing solution. This is when you can opt for damp proofing instead. Look at the differences between the two:
Dampproofing is ideal for homes located in high-humidity areas that have less rainfall and pooling of water. This method involves excavating the dirt surrounding the foundation to make way for a damp-proof coating. The cost ranges from USD$3 to USD$6 per square foot.
If you experience flooding and water pooling frequently, you shouldn't hesitate to have waterproofing in your basement. Compared to damp proofing, waterproofing stops moisture and flooding. Also, waterproofing is recommended for areas with a higher water table. Different waterproofing solutions, which will be elaborated later, range from USD$5 to USD$9 for every square foot.
There are two basic waterproofing methods that professionals install on a property's basement: waterproofing from the outside or inside.
Exterior Basement Waterproofing
As the name implies, exterior basement waterproofing installs waterproofing methods externally. Usually, exterior waterproofing is installed while the basement is under construction. This waterproofing method is extensive and requires more workforce and materials. Therefore, it’s costly.
Waterproofing from the outside utilizes coating materials such as membranes and polymers to cover the basement’s exterior walls and joints. In this way, your basement is protected from structural damage that may occur over time. This method can’t be used if your basement is already built because the polymer will only disrupt and clog external drains.
However, you can execute exterior basement waterproofing even after the basement has been built. There are five lines of defense for this.
An exterior moisture barrier and dimple board are installed on the basement wall for transporting water into the drainage system.
A moisture membrane is installed. It protects the structure from crawling water.
Instead of dirt, gravel is filled within the surrounding area to minimize hydrostatic pressure. This also helps in carrying water into the footer drain.
To safely discharge water away from your basement foundation, the footer drain is established outside your home
A sump pump installation may or may not be necessary.
The costs of exterior basement waterproofing differ extensively due to numerous factors. In the United States, the national average costs for an exterior basement waterproofing project ranges from USD$8,700 to USD$14,500. Depending on your location, accessibility, landscaping, digging requirements, and many other factors, it can reach up to USD$80,000.
Exterior Basement Sealing
Additionally, sealing your basement is advantageous for blocking seeping water and supporting your main waterproofing system. Since the basement walls and foundation sides have direct contact with the surrounding soil filled with water, you need to protect them from water and ensure that no structural damage occurs. While water can't seep through concrete, it can absorb moisture leading to a variety of problems like mold growth.
On average, sealing a basement with different materials (to be discussed further) varies from USD$1,500 to USD$4,250. If excavation is required, the costs can be higher.
Exterior basement sealing covers the following methods and materials. The methods can be used on masonry and concrete walls without any backfill or excavation:
Liquid membrane waterproofing
Think of this membrane as a paint that’ll be applied to the basement walls. It can either be an elastomeric or a crystalline membrane. Every coat costs USD$3 to USD$5 per square foot, and the optimal number of coats is two to three coats. You must set aside USD$9 to USD$15 for every square foot.
You can apply the liquid membranes yourself, but you won’t be able to apply uniform coats. Hire an application expert to ensure the best results.
Sheet membrane waterproofing
Another membrane waterproofing method utilizes sheet membranes: tied around the footing, attached to the perimeter drain system, applied to basement walls, or wrapped around the concrete foundation footing. They cost USD$3 to USD$6.5 per square foot.
Aside from their waterproofing abilities, sheet membranes are reliable due to the following reasons:
Withstands high water pressure, especially during flooding
Deals with unequal static forces
Endures groundwater with chemicals like chlorides and sulfates
Resists dynamic forces during an earthquake
Cementitious waterproofing
For only USD$5 per square foot, you can have cementitious waterproofing inclusive of the cement material and labor cost. Instead of a membrane, this method uses a cement solution that can be painted on surfaces that require sealing. They're thick and durable, easy to apply, and provide a smooth finish.
But the cementitious solution isn't flexible enough during extreme force involving joint movements. It can only withstand water exposure. If your area is prone to earthquakes or has frequent underground activity, you shouldn’t go for this method.
On a good note, a gallon of the cement solution only costs around $36. This volume is good for 150 square feet. You can opt for purchasing an acrylic additive for increased durability.
Bentonite clay waterproofing
Lastly, bentonite clay is also a popular material for waterproofing because it blocks crawling water and absorbs moisture. As it soaks up moisture, it expands and fills cracks and spaces between walls. Material and labor costs total only USD$3.5 for every square foot.
Nonetheless, bentonite clay isn't ideal as a long-lasting solution because it can clog your outdoor drains, especially when it reaches its maximum expansion. From time to time, you need to check if the seal has formed correctly.
Interior Water Drainage Installation
Being the most effective waterproofing approach, an interior water drainage system deals with hydrostatic pressure building up around the basement walls and floors. This pressure causes groundwater to force its way inside your basement. Installing a drainage system is an excellent idea to trap and dispose of water properly, either internally or externally. However, an exterior drainage system is more inconvenient because the drain lines installed on the outside can accumulate soil, silt, and roots resulting in clogging.
Thus, interior water drainage is a safer option. By installing the drainage system on the inside, water is trapped on its usual entry point, the joint between the floors and walls. Moreover, waterproofing from the inside is more convenient than that from the outside.
A complete interior water drainage job in your basement can cost as low as USD$2,000. This is four to seven times cheaper than installing an exterior drainage system starting at USD$8,000. Depending on your basement requirements and the entire property layout, waterproofing may require a combination of interior and exterior methods.
Here are some other ways of waterproofing your basement from the inside:
Basement Waterproofing Painting
To strengthen your basement waterproofing, you can apply waterproof paint on the inside walls after exterior waterproofing. It's a cheap and effective method but will only work if you have strong protection from the outside. It can be a DIY (do it yourself) project or done by a professional. Surprisingly, it costs only USD$0.6 to USD$0.8 per square foot. The waterproof paint, however, can cost USD$195 for five gallons. The amount of paint you'll need will primarily depend on the surface dimensions and porosity of the walls.
Epoxy Crack Injection Repair
If you have existing cracks in your basement after exterior waterproofing, you can choose the epoxy crack injection method. Injecting an epoxy material in the wall crevices can restore the concrete's pre-cracking condition without magnifying its strength. For every crack as wide as 3/4 inches, the epoxy injection may cost USD$200 to USD$500.
If your area often experiences freezing and thawing, you'll need additional support by reinforcements on the exterior wall foundation. Epoxy injection is beneficial in drier climates since colder climates produce more cracking on walls leading to more epoxy injection repairs.
Crawl Space Encapsulation
Most homes with basements have a crawl space, the hollow area under the first floor. Air can flow into these narrow spaces. So, you should always keep them dry and clean to avoid the growth of mold and bacteria. Crawl space encapsulation is your best solution to prevent indoor air moisture. This method installs a strong polyethylene vapor barrier to cover the crawl space completely.
However, encapsulating the crawl space is the most expensive option discussed so far. The cost ranges from USD$3,000 to USD$8,000. The vapor barrier installation has additional costs of USD$0.50 per foot. Despite its expensive costs, the encapsulation can last for 20 years if it's installed professionally.
Key Takeaways
Maintaining a clean and healthy basement isn't easy. The basement is more humid than other parts of your home and the humidity can lead to numerous problems. When poorly maintained, there can be moisture buildup, mold and bacteria growth, water pooling, flooding, and the like.
Through a combination of the basement waterproofing methods discussed above, you can ensure that your basement remains dry and strong. If you're going to work on your basement, the two most important takeaways to jot down are: set aside a lot of money for material and labor costs and hire the best waterproofing professional. This article will give you a concrete idea of how much to spend on your basement waterproofing.
The basement can serve a multitude of purposes, going far beyond simple storage solutions. By exploring various basement remodeling projects, you can transform this underutilized part of your home into a lively living area tailored to your interests and preferences. These projects will demonstrate how an unfinished basement can be made over into an enjoyable space for the entire family to cherish.
In this article, you'll discover engaging basement remodeling projects that will not only pique your interest but also inspire you to unlock your basement's hidden potential. These creative ideas showcase just how astounding your transformed basement can be.
One popular basement remodeling project to consider is creating a home bar situated away from the hustle and bustle of your house. This secluded space, perfect for entertaining friends and family, can be the ultimate addition to your home. Dive into these innovative basement remodeling projects and see for yourself how you can reinvent your basement into a flourishing and multifunctional space.
The space in the basement is really peaceful and quiet, so if you are looking for an escape where you can take a nap and rest from the long working day, we suggest you design a bedroom right in the basement!
Are you working from home and planning to design your own home office? The basement is ideal for that purpose. You will have lots of concentration here and no one will bother you with irrelevant things.
If you have kids, then you should definitely turn the basement into a play and learn area. This is the place where you should keep all of the toys and books if you want to save the rest of your home from clutter.
Have you ever considered moving your living room into the basement or adding an extra living room to the home? If you do this remodeling project you can watch movies all day and night long without having the other family members bothering you.
This remodeling project requires more money, so if you are good on the budget we suggest you build a swimming pool and a gym right in your basement.
Library in the home is everyone's dream, so if you are trying to figure out where to place it, let it be the basement. This quiet area is just perfect for a library, and you won't go wrong with this remodeling project for sure!
Here are some ideas that all boys will love! Adding a ping pong table or a billiard in your basement is totally awesome, so if you have the chance to redo your basement, this is the right design for you.
A home cinema in your basement sounds great, doesn't it? Incorporating it into your basement allows you to enjoy the newest movies or games on the big screen right at home. To create the ideal environment for a basement home theater or music room, there are several essential factors to consider apart from the standard requirements for a comfortable living space.
First and foremost, ensure your basement is dry, well-insulated, and properly ventilated. Once these fundamental aspects are addressed, focus on soundproofing the space, paying particular attention to the basement ceiling. Soundproofing the ceiling is crucial for containing the noise generated by your home theater or music room, preventing it from disturbing the rest of the house and allowing you and your guests to fully immerse yourselves in the audio-visual experience.
Some strategies for soundproofing your basement ceiling may include installing acoustic panels, using insulation materials like fiberglass or mineral wool between floor joists, or applying specialty ceiling tiles designed to absorb sound. By carefully planning and implementing these soundproofing measures, your basement can become the perfect space for a home theater or music room, enhancing your entertainment experience without disrupting the peace and quiet of your entire home.
What do you think about these Mind-Blowing Basement Remodeling Projects? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
Working in a home office is not as easy as it sounds, the distractions in your own home, or any home for that matter are endless therefore being very hard to focus on your work, ending up in a lot of breaks.
Besides the family members, television, game consoles, gardening, comfy beds, and sofas there are enough reasons for you to stop and yet hundreds of other reasons to work at home. A great method of escaping all these distractions and isolating yourself whilst keeping all the affinities and comfort of your home. Turning your basement into a home office is an extraordinary idea that will help you beat dozens of hassles, Tony Stark in Iron Man also has an extraordinary basement with his own workshop, office, garage, and hangar, what stops you?
Simple Contemporary Basement Home Office with a Brick Wall as Background
In basement home offices you can solve and accommodate huge advantages and most importantly you have the right amount of space to clearly define your office or workshop, sufficiently detached from the rest of the home. You can enhance your workplace by cutting down on noise levels and visual disturbance as well. Whether you are going to work for one or eight hours at home you should make sure that it`s comfy, ergonomic, and elegant it should fit your work routine as a glove.
Further on we will present a few smart tips that we find interesting and useful.
How To Transform an Old Basement
Start with a quick inspection
If you are serious about this project you should plan properly from the very beginning and not skip any steps. The first very important step is to check the stability of your basement. After this structure aspect, you should definitely waterproof the basement if it`s not already. Whether you are planning a basement bedroom, a wonderful game room, or a bawling alley these two steps are mandatory. The ceiling and floor should be checked for any possible chinks and leaks, you can also chalk your walls with the actual plan and imagine the spatiality of the future walls or furniture, maybe you`ll have more than one room in your little corner.
Elegant Stylish Basement Home Office with a Place to Rest and Relax
by Seattle Staged to Sell
The home office entrance and noise isolation
A basement entrance is typically connected to the access towards it, often through a flight of stairs. If you plan to welcome clients to your home office, it's crucial to consider the aesthetic value of the staircase. More and more people are moving their offices home to save time and money while being surrounded by elegance and comfort.
Creating separate entrances could offer an ideal solution - one serving clients and another for you and your family. A simple wooden ladder might not suffice for your professional clients.
Another crucial aspect that will significantly impact your work routine is your ability to stay focused and be away from household noise. There's no reason to move your work to a space where you can't be productive. Soundproofing your ceiling and implementing noise reduction measures, like adding acoustic panels or insulation, can greatly improve the acoustic environment in your workspace. Additionally, it's essential to avoid planning a home office in a basement that might be too noisy due to a cinema or game room. Always consider these factors, including soundproofing and noise reduction, before starting any home office project in your basement.
Transitional Basement Home Offices That is a Real Show-stopped
Using the space efficiently in your home office
Using your basement as a living and working space is an extraordinary reason to unclutter individual spaces that you can now decorate. You can move furniture around and use old rugs or some paper to see how much space you have saved and if is it worth moving down the stairs. This should be done before the construction begins, you should choose the decor and furnishings that you would like to use from the beginning, making sure that everything fits, and that the space will not be too crowded or unorganized. You can make the most out of small spaces with Murphy tables for example, desks that can be easily folded away onto the wall along with some efficient storage area. The spending limit can be influenced by thorough planning as well.
Small Basement Home Office with a Jaw-Dropping Built-in Desk and Smart Wall Shelves
by Wentworth
Warm and lovely ambiance doubled by functional lighting
The basement is one of the most unfavorable places to shelter any sort of living space or working space according to Feng Shui. You can however work around this aspect with proper lighting. Whether you consider Feng Shui when you design a home or not you should be well aware that lighting is a crucial component in the basement office, in any workplace for that matter. If you manage to combine smart functional lighting with adequate and right task lighting you will obtain a cozy and warm space that invites and enhances work and practicality. Try and make the maximum use of any upper windows in the basement and allow natural light to complement illumination, you can filter it in any way if it helps you.
Gorgeous Stylish Elegantly Decorated Home Office in a Basement
by KA Design
Some of the best options in a basement office can be sconces, pendants, or classic table lamps. In the basement, every inch of space is valuable so using a floor lamp would be rather inefficient. These combined with smart recessed lighting can work like a charm and define an exceptional home office.
Small Basement Home Office Decorating Idea
by Anthony Wilder Design/Build
The connection to the exterior
Unlike your bedroom or living room, a home office is far more demanding on connectivity and electrical management. You should be able to have a proper and permanent connection with the exterior through a telephone, a fax machine, a wireless or wired internet connection, and a couple of sockets, many sockets in which they will be plugged in. Besides these, a multitude of electronic gadgets are in need of electricity permanently. These as well have to be considered from the very beginning and be hidden from sight beautifully.
Lighting Your Home Office Properly
Use storage that will help you de-clutter
Besides the fact they can become highly aesthetics, the sturdy storage units can help you hide away the mess and keep your office organized and efficient. In small spaces storage units are gaining far bigger importance, mounting them on walls, under the stairs, or simply around your desk will save you a lot of space and offer you a highly aesthetic space. Bellow, the storage areas are hiding a humongous amount whilst maintaining an impeccable look.
Home Office That Disappears Into the Wall
Home Office Idea for the Basement in Which the Shelves and Desk Can be Tucked Away
by E/L Studio
Ample Storage Space Acts as a Room Divider as Well
by Mountainwood Homes
Let your imagination surpass the boundaries set by the office walls
If you really want a comfortable and relaxing home office we are sure that you are going to do everything properly, top-notch isolation may protect you from low temperatures during winter months easier. A dehumidifier is also a very important asset that will help you enjoy your home office as much as possible. A small kitchenette or a small cool bathroom right next to your office will make your life easier, especially if you are planning to spend a big amount of time there.
A proper color scheme is very important as well, it will help you accentuate the required working ambiance of the home office without shattering into pieces. Choose colors that will help you focus, stay calm and relaxed.
Simple and Elegant Home Office
Custom Made Floating Cabinets and Desks Aside Midcentury Modern Decor for Basement Home Office
by Studio Santalla
Are you ready to start working on your basement home office? What do you think about working at home in general? We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below on Facebook or Twitter.
With multiple ways to mount your TV on the wall, you can easily find one that suits your preference. For those on a budget, I recommend a minimalist TV setup. However, if you are in the mood to splurge, you can check out waterproof TV options for your bathroom wall!
Imagine planning a movie marathon with friends, only to have your necks aching after a while.
That’s when you need a suitable TV mount at the right height to enjoy your viewing experience and add some style to an otherwise boring wall. But choosing the right TV mount and installing it correctly can be challenging, especially if the room is already full of furniture and décor pieces.
Hence, I’ve compiled some of my go-to TV mounting ideas to help you pick a suitable one for your abode!
Top 27 TV Mounting Ideas
Are you looking for a creative way to mount your TV? Here is the list of the 27 coolest TV mounting ideas to help you find the perfect solution for your home. Whether you want to go for a modern, minimalistic look or a more traditional one, there’s something for everyone. Here is the list of the 27 coolest TV mounting ideas:
1. Wood Accent Wall
If you’ve got a wooden or faux wood wall, a wall-mounted TV right at the center will add a sophisticated, modern touch to the room. No matter what color of wood you have, a shiny black TV will complement it well. In fact, the warmth of the wooden wall will enhance the TV screen even when turned off.
2. Floating Shelves Around The TV
Got a plain wall with a TV wall mount? Consider adding floating shelves around it. You can add wooden shelves to recreate the previously mentioned minimal effect or choose different materials like metal. Either way, the shelves will help create a cohesive look on your TV wall while presenting your TV as the focal point.
3. TV Gallery Wall
An affordable way to amp up your TV wall is by adding art pieces around the mount. You can hang bold paintings or posters of your favorite movies. Or, if you have simple shelves around, add a statement décor piece, like a lamp, a crystal, or a flower vase.
4. Ceiling Mounted TV To Create A Stunning Statement
Although getting a ceiling-mounted TV may cost you more than the rest of the styles, it will instantly create a stylish impact in your space. In fact, a majority of homeowners opt for this TV mounting idea during home renovations, thanks to its ability to free up wall space.
However, you will require a lot of planning to build a ceiling mount for your TV. Right from the ergonomics to the weight capacity of the lift mechanism - ensure you are certain about everything before opting for a ceiling-mounted TV.
5. Vibrant TV Room
Sleek flat-screen TVs look great next to colorful furniture and décor. So, even if you have a room full of different colors, you need not worry about the wall-mounted TV sticking out like a sore thumb!
6. Corner Mounted TV
If you do not have much space to spare on the wall, consider a corner-mounted TV. But do make sure that it offers a comfortable viewing angle.
Tip
I highly recommend a corner-mounted TV if you do not have a separate TV room or living room. As such, you can create a cozy corner in any one of your rooms with the TV securely mounted on a corner.
7. Built-In Media Cabinet
Despite the popularity of Smart TVs, one cannot deny the vintage charm of older TV sets. However, they often come with tons of wires and accessories, which you may need to store securely, away from plain sight. That’s when a built-in media cabinet can add more functionality and style to your room with the spotlight on your TV.
8. TV In Open Concept Room
If you have implemented open-concept floor plans in your house, it is bound to have fewer walls. In such cases, you must be extra careful about the placement of your TV mounting bracket. It should be placed strategically to offer a comfortable viewing angle from every corner of the room. You could even invest in a movable mounting bracket.
However, in such room schemes, one thing is for sure - your TV wall is bound to make a statement!
9. Mid-Century Modern TV Room
The mid-century décor is known for its minimalism, timeless aesthetics, and functionality. And what’s better than a chic TV mounted on a muted shade wall, complementing the mid-century style furniture?
I always recommend my friends and family to stick to this style of home décor since it is easy to pull off and maintain. Plus, the clean-cut décor looks great in small apartments.
10. Wallpapered TV Wall
If you’ve got a patterned wallpaper on your walls, I recommend keeping it simple with just a mount to watch TV and no other shelves and decor pieces. Maybe you can add a dainty lamp next to the TV to create balance.
However, if your wallpaper features a single color scheme, you can experiment with more accessories around the TV on the wall.
11. Neutral TV Room
Prefer following a single color palette throughout your room? Try bringing in some contrast with a wall-mounted flat-panel display. Even if you have a grayscale theme, you can add interesting layers to the décor, like a huge statement sofa or hanging potted plants. As long as you add furniture of the same or complementing color palette, your neutral TV room will look as stylish as ever!
12. Mounted TV With Floating Entertainment Center
Lucky enough to get a dedicated room for watching movies, playing games, and listening to music? Then this is the best solution for you. After all, floating entertainment centers can offer a sleek overall aesthetic while adding more storage for your equipment.
13. Waterproof TV Mounted On The Bathroom Wall
Gone are the days when TVs were installed in living rooms and bedrooms only. Nowadays, besides having a separate “entertainment” room, some people cannot do without a TV in the bathroom, too! While it may sound bizarre, nothing feels quite as luxe as sipping some wine in the tub while watching your favorite Netflix series.
14. Modern Traditional TV Room
If you’re unable to choose between minimal modern aesthetic and the old-world charm of vintage pieces - why not try a fusion? Stick to a complementary color palette, and mix and match, say, a sleek lamp and an antique wooden trunk with gold carvings. Accordingly, you can install a wall-mounted TV over a rustic table adorned with vintage pieces, like a gramophone or a rotary telephone.
15. Tile TV Wall
Who says tiles are only meant for bathrooms and kitchens? With the right size and color of tiles, you can create a contemporary TV wall. Adding tiles to the TV wall can even be an affordable option for some, as it may not require the use of additional décor pieces, shelves, etc.
Consider adding tiles to just one wall in the room or limit its usage to only a part of the wall. This will not only help save money but also prevent your room from looking too busy and congested.
16. Mounted TV With On-wall Shelf
If you have a small TV room or living room, I recommend investing in an on-wall shelf located right below the TV wall mount. This will negate the requirement for a separate shelf or storage unit for hiding all the components that come with a TV, like a cable box, CD players, etc.
You can even mount smaller components and streaming devices behind your TV by placing it at an angle. But you will have to be careful about the overall height and viewing angle of the TV, as these factors can greatly influence its picture quality.
17. Dark TV Wall
Are you a dark academia enthusiast, or simply prefer a moody vibe? Then go for a dark TV wall.
And when I say “dark,” I don’t just mean black and brown. Try playing around with jewel tones like emerald green, ruby red, plum, teal blue, etc. These colors will create a dramatic dark vibe in your room while maintaining a striking contrast with your TV.
18. TV Around The Fireplace
A TV mount over a fireplace mantel is the safest bet for any household. In fact, it’s what homeowners have been doing for ages, and rightly so. Installing the TV on top of a fireplace gives it the right height and viewing distance.
That said, you can even place the TV beside the fireplace if you want a lower height. This works well if you have lower seating arrangements, like a low sofa, bean bags, etc.
19. TV On A Shiplap Accent Or Reclaimed Barn Wood Wall
A shiplap accent wall adds more texture and dimension, much like a wood accent wall, albeit a bit more subtle. As such, it makes the perfect frame for flat-screen TVs. I personally prefer the shiplap trend with farmhouse design décor.
Basically, the farmhouse look is all about simplicity, functionality, and comfort. Think oversized potted plants, rattan or straw furniture, matte over metallic finishes, and cozy color palettes.
20. TV Over Media Furniture
Another great idea for those who require more storage space is to slip in a stylish cabinet underneath the TV on the wall. You can sneakily store CD players, gaming consoles, Wi-Fi modems, and more while creating a chic look in your living room or bedroom.
Tip
To add some oomph to your space, I recommend investing in a high-quality cabinet or chest of drawers in a striking color. It will act as a statement piece and create balance with an all-black TV screen.
21. Minimalist TV Setup
If you do not have much space or money to spare, installing a TV mounted on a blank wall with simple furniture around it is another effective idea. You can just have a small sofa, coffee table, and a flower pot next to the TV mount, and the room will look impeccable.
However, you will have to choose your colors and textures (rugs, carpets, throws, etc.) wisely to ensure the living room does not look dull and boring.
22. Mounted TV With Soundbar
Despite the advancement in technology, newer, thinner TVs are often devoid of crisp audio quality. So, if you enjoy watching action movies or playing adrenaline-pumping games, you might want to invest in a high-quality sound system.
The flexibility of a wall-mounted soundbar can greatly support additional acoustics and soundproofing efforts, such as the use of acoustic panels or bass traps, which can increase the acoustic quality level in your household. Properly integrating your soundbar with your TV can contribute to a more immersive audio experience by evenly distributing sound across the room and mitigating distortions.
23. TV Mount With Industrial Décor
For those who like rustic industrial-style décor (shades of brown, leather texture, metallic finish, etc.), a wall-mounted TV can fit right into your industrial space. The combo looks clean, classy, fashionable, and functional.
24. Southwestern Bohemian TV Wall
If you want to create a carefree, boho vibe in your house, a TV wall decorated with earthy color artwork and macrame wall hangings will do the trick. I further recommend using woven rugs, lots of pillows (if they have fringes - even better!), and utilitarian, wooden furniture to complete the Southwestern look.
25. Framed TV
Framing the TV screen will ensure the device is the statement piece in the room while blending it into the background. If you have the budget to spare, you can hire the services of a professional. However, with the right material, you can make your own frame TV. For more details, you can check out my guide on “How to prop up a TV without a stand?”
26. Kid-friendly TV Room
Adding a TV in the kid’s room makes sense if both you and your kid are tired of fighting for the remote! I suggest adding colorful paintings or toys on the shelves around the mounted TV. And if you’re worried about your child’s screen time, you can always add a child lock to the TV.
27. TV Mounted Behind A Bookcase
A smart space-optimizing idea is tohide the TV inside or behind a faux bookcase. However, implementing it might get complicated, as you will have to get the right mounting bracket and invest in bespoke cabinetry. Moreover, the movement of the bookcase can be automated or manual, depending on your preference.
Another sneaky way to keep your super large TV hidden inside is to experiment with bespoke joinery that can slide open and close whenever required. This not only makes your space look stylish but also saves space.
TV Mounting Ideas Conclusion
Finally, I come to the end of this extensive guide. I hope my TV mounting ideas will help you install your television in a stylish yet functional manner. Whether you want your TV to be visible in its full glory or want it hidden, just make sure you choose the right mounting bracket.
That said, I suggest checking out my latest guide on “Best Pull-Down TV Mount” for more information.
![8 Best Window Insulation Kits [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/07/Best-Window-Insulation-Kit-001.jpg "8 Best Window Insulation Kits [Reviewed & Buyer's Guide]")
![10 Best Vacuums for Tile Floors of 2023 [Review & Buying Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Best-Vacuums-for-Tile-Floors-of-2021-013.jpg "10 Best Vacuums for Tile Floors of 2023 [Review & Buying Guide]")
![15 Best Torpedo Levels [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/Best-Torpedo-Levels-03.jpg "15 Best Torpedo Levels [Reviewed & Buyer's Guide]")
